Banner Student Self-Service

User Guide
Release 8.7 (Revised)
November 2014
Without limitation: Ellucian®, Banner®, Colleague®, and Luminis® are trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies that are registered in the
U.S. and certain other countries; and Ellucian Advance™, Ellucian Course Signals™, Ellucian Degree Works™, Ellucian PowerCampus™,
Ellucian Recruiter™, Ellucian SmartCall™, are also trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies. Other names may be trademarks of their
respective owners.

© 1997, 2015 Ellucian.

Contains confidential and proprietary information of Ellucian and its subsidiaries. Use of these materials is limited to Ellucian licensees, and is
subject to the terms and conditions of one or more written license agreements between Ellucian and the licensee in question.

In preparing and providing this publication, Ellucian is not rendering legal, accounting, or other similar professional services. Ellucian makes no
claims that an institution's use of this publication or the software for which it is provided will guarantee compliance with applicable federal or state
laws, rules, or regulations. Each organization should seek legal, accounting, and other similar professional services from competent providers of
the organization's own choosing.

Prepared by: Ellucian

4375 Fair Lakes Court
Fairfax, Virginia 22033
United States of America

Revision History
Publication Date Summary
November 2014 New version that supports Banner Student Self-Service 8.7 software.
August 2015 Field names updated on pages 407, 489, 490.
 Contents

Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Web Page Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Compatibility with Accessibility Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Cascading Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSS Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Baseline and Local Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Information Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Help Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Public Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Prospective Students. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Apply for Admission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Campus Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Secure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Student Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Student Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Access the Secure Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Forgotten PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Audit User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Static Display of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 3

 Long Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Course Catalog Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Class Schedule and Registration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Long Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Course Catalog Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Class Schedule and Registration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Course Catalog Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Catalog Term (bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Search for Courses (bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Catalog Entries (bwckctlg.p_display_courses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Detailed Course Information (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Syllabus Information (bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 4

 Bookstore Information (bwckbook.site) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Set Up the Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Implement the Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Customize the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Change Data Element Names for the Catalog Entries Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Suppress Data Elements from the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Display Data Elements on the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Change Sections Link Text on the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Suppress Sections Link from the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Display Sections Link on the Catalog Entries Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Customize the Course Catalog Search Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Implement Bookstore Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Turn on GTVSDAX Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Modify Web Tailor Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setup and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Use the Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Search for Courses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Set up syllabus information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Access syllabus information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Class Schedule Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Class Schedule Search Selection (bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Class Schedule Search (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 5

 Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Class Schedule Listing (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec) . . 77
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Buttons/icons on This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Detailed Class Information (bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Buttons/icons on This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Syllabus Information (bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Buttons/icons on This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Set Up the Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Implement the Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Customize the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Change Data Element Names for the Class Schedule Listing Page. . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Suppress Data Elements from the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Display Data Elements on the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Change Catalog Link Text on the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Suppress Catalog Link from the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Display Catalog Link on the Class Schedule Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Customize the Class Schedule Search Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Use the Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Search for Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Prospect Self-Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Prospect Self-Service Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Prospective Students (bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 6

 Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Prospect Data Entry (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Set Up Prospect Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Setup Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Migrate Prospect Self-Service Data to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Admissions Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Admissions Self-Service Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Admissions Login (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Admissions Login - New User (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNew) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Select an Application Type (bwskalog.P_DispChoice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 7

 Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Apply for Admissions (bwskalog.P_DispNewApp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Application Checklist (bwskalog.P_DispIndex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Name (bwskanam.P_DispAppName) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
First Address and Phone (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1) and Second Address and
Phone (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Personal Information (bwskaper.P_DispAppPersonal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Planned Course of Study (bwskapln.P_DispAppPlan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 8

 Parental Information (bwskapar.P_DispAppParents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Previous College (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
High School (bwskahsc.P_DispAppHighSch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
College Lookup or High School Lookup (bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code) . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Test Scores (bwskatst.P_DispAppTests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
International Information (bwskaint.P_DispAppInternational). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Activities (bwskaact.P_DispAppActivities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 9

 Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Additional Information (bwskaudf.P_DispAppUserDef) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Requested Materials (bwskamat.P_DispAppMaterials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Essays (bwskaess.P_DispAppEssay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Application Preference (bwskaprf.p_disp_pref) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Application Fee Payment (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Admissions Agreement (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 10

 Signature (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Web Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatusSaradap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Applicant Withdrawal Information (bwskadec.P_ApplicationWDInfo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Set Up Admissions Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Procedures Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Routines Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Delivered Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cross-Reference Labels Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Address Hierarchy Rules for Credit Card Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Identify Payment Profile for Credit Card Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 11

 Process Self-Service Admission Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Receive Web Applications - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Receive Web Applications - Detail Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Update Null SSN during Admissions Push Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Manually Match, Verify, and Push Web Admission Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Change PINs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Review Applicant Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Push Test Score Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Addresses in Banner and Entered on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Set Up Quick Start for Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Processing Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Behind the Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Application Status Errors and Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Set Up Curriculum Processing for Admissions Self-Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Set Up Web Acceptance of Admissions Offer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Use Payment and Deposit Processing with Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Non-secure Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Secure Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Drop/Withdrawal Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Status Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Automatic Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Connected Drops Allowed with User Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Connected Drops Processed Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Connected Drops Not Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Drop Last Class Not Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Administrative Drops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Administrative Drop if an Approval is Added to a CRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Administrative Drop if a Corequisite is Added to a CRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Administrative Drops if Active Drop Codes are Not Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Administrative Drops if Other Errors are Found during Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Rules on GTVSDAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
AUTODROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
ADMINDROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 12

 Registration Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Registration Term (bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Add or Drop Classes (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Error Message Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Current Schedule Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Registration Add Errors Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Registration Update Errors Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Add Classes Worksheet Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Registration Fee Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Web Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Drop Last Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Connected Course Drop Confirmation (bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drops) . . . . . . . . . . 267
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Registration Start Date (bwckcoms.p_disp_start_confirm_date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Alternate PIN Verification (bwskfreg.P_AltPin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Buttons/icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Select Term or Date Range (bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 13

 Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Buttons/icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Select Study Paths (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) and
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Look Up Classes (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Look Up Classes - Courses Found (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Look Up Classes Results (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using Study Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Look up classes and search by date range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Advanced Search (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Info Text and Help Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Change Class Options (bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Registration Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 14

 Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Buttons/icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Week at a Glance (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Determining the Week for which a Registration Record should be Slotted . . . . . . . 295
Courses without Assigned Meeting Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Courses with Time Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Student Detail Schedule (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Registration Fee Assessment (bwskffee.P_FeeAsses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tuition and Fees Payment (bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Buttons/icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Withdrawal Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Title IV Fund Detail (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 15

 Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Registration Status (bwskrsta.P_RegsStatusDisp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Active Registrations (bwsksreg.p_active_regs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Registration History (bwskhreg.p_reg_hist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Office Hours (bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Concise Student Schedule (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdDetl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Concise Student Schedule by Centric Period (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdScp) . . . . . . . . . 325
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Registration Processing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Registration Temporary Table (SFTREGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 16

 Additional Registration Information Table (SFRAREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Set Up Basic Registration on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Supporting Validation Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setup Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Display Term Date Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Set Up and Use Study Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Set Up Study Paths in Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Set Up Study Paths in Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Set Up Immediate Registration Fee Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Implementing Detail Code Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Set Up Registration Time-Ticketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Registration Priority Time-Ticketing Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Registration Priority Time-Ticketing Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Model Script for Populating Registration Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Scenarios for Using the GTVSDAX Rules for Restricted Time Tickets and Time
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Set Up Third-Party Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Set Up Alternate PIN Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Set Up Registration Permit-Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Permit-Overrides Set-Up Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Student Registration Permit-Override Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Allow Major, Educational Goal, and Employment Expectation Updates . . . . . . . . 355

Use Registration on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Search for Classes and Registering via the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Register for a Known CRN via the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
View Active Registrations via the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Technical Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Add or Drop Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Change Class Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 17

 Look Up Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Student Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Student Records Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

View Holds (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Midterm Grades Term (bwskmgrd.P_Write_Term_Selection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Midterm Grades (bwskmgrd.P_Write_Midterm_Grades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Grade Display Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Final Grades Selection (bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Final Grades (bwskogrd.P_ViewGrde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Grade Display Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Grade Detail Term (bwsksmrk.P_Write_Term_Selection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 18

 Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Section Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Subcomponent Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Academic Transcript Options (bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Academic Transcript (bwskotrn.P_ViewTran). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Transcripts with Student Centric Periods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Study Path Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Source Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Transcript Request Address (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 19

 Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Select Transcript Type (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Transcript Request Options (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_data) . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Payment Options (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Trans_Request_Charges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Transcript Request Summary (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Signature Page (bwskwtrr.P_DispSigPage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Transcript Order Date (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Order_Requests). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Transcript Order Status (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Status_of_Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 20

 Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Degree Evaluation Record (bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Previous Evaluations (bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Degree Evaluation Results Report (bwcksxml.report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Generate New Evaluation (bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
What-If Analysis (Step One) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
What-If Analysis (Step Two) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 21

 What-If Analysis (Step Three) (bwcksmds.P_whatif_step_three). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
What-If Analysis (Add More) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
What-If Analysis (Evaluation Term) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
General Student Information (bwskgstu.P_StuInfo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Enrollment Verification Request (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Enrollment Verification Delivery (bwskrqst.p_proc_term_type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Enrollment Verification Address (bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 22

 Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Enrollment Verification Payment (bwskrqst.p_proc_payment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Enrollment Verification Request Summary (bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Enrollment Verification Signature (bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Enrollment Verification Request Date (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates) . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Enrollment Verification Request Status (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_status) . . . . . . . . . 451
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Test Scores (bwsktesc.p_view_tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Curriculum Term Selection (bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Restrict Term Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 23

 Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Curriculum Selection (bwskgrad.p_disp_gradapp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Graduation Date Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_grad_date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Graduation Ceremony Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_ceremony) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Diploma Name Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Diploma Name Selection - Name Change (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name) . . . . . . 467
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Name Change Information (bwgkoinf.P_DispUpdName) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 24

 Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Diploma Mailing Address Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr) . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Diploma Mailing Address Selection - Address Change
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Graduation Application Payment (bwskgrad.p_proc_payment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Graduation Application Summary (bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Graduation Application Signature (bwskgrad.p_disp_sigpage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Graduation Application (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 25

 Set Up Student Records on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Set Up Holds on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Set Up Grade Display on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Set Up Academic Transcripts on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Set Up the Web Transcript Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Set Up Enrollment Verification Requests on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Set Up Degree Evaluation on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Use Pipes Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
SFKCOMM Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Initialize Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
GTVSDAX Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Pipe Initialization Process (SFRPINI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Compliance Pipe Process (SFRPIPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Use Advanced Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
GTVSDAX Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
SFKCOMM Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
SOKADVQ Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
SFKPREQ Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
soo_sfkcmpl_payload Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Queue Initialization Process (SFRQINI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Compliance Advanced Queue Process (SFRADVQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Set Up Graduation Application on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Set Up Overall Graduation Application Display Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Set Up Graduation Date Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Set Up Graduation Applications on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Set Up Diploma Name Selection and Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Set Up Diploma Mailing Address Selection and Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Use Student Records on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Request Transcripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Perform What-if Analyses for Degree Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Set up test scores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Access test scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Student Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Student Account Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Account Summary (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 26

 Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Account Summary By Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Account Detail for Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Account Summary by Period (bwskeacc.P_AcctSummary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Account Summary for Period Terms (bwskeacc.P_PeriodAcctSummary) . . . . . . . . . . 525
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Statement and Payment History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Select a Tax Year (bwtktxys.p_get_tax_year). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 27

 Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Tax Notification for Tax Year (bwtktxns.p_disp_tax_notification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Payment Processing (bwskpayg.P_DispList) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Links to Other Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Buttons/Icons on This Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Payment Processing Transaction
(bwskpayg.P_ProcList, bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
First View of the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Second View of the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Third View of the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Payment Processing Summary (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Payment Processing Successful Payment (bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess) . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 28

 Account Information (bwskoacc.P_DisplayTabs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Web Page Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Updates to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Links to other Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Buttons/Icons on this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Web Menus With Links to This Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Set Up Student Account on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Set Up Account Summary Pages on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Set Up the Account Detail for Term Page on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Set Up the Statement and Payment History Page on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Set Up the Tax Notification Page on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Set up and Use Payment and Deposit Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Student Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Application Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Account Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Setup Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Contents 29

 Application Overview

Welcome to the Banner Student Self-Service User Guide. This manual provides
information needed by the staff members who support your Student Self-Service product,
including operations personnel, DBAs, programmer analysts, systems analysts, and other
technical specialists. Staff members should be familiar with the hardware system in use at
your site and all should have a basic understanding of Oracle products.

This chapter covers the following topics:

• “How to Use This Manual” on page 30

• “Accessibility” on page 32
• “Cascading Style Sheets” on page 33
• “Baseline and Local Records” on page 34
• “Information Text” on page 34
• “Functionality” on page 35
• “Access the Secure Area” on page 37
• “Static Display of Information” on page 39
• “Long Titles” on page 40
• “Long Descriptions” on page 41

How to Use This Manual

This manual is organized into the following chapters.

• This chapter provides a summary of the functions of the Banner Student Self-Service
application, procedures for accessing the application, and a procedure that must be
followed before you begin to implement and use the application at your institution.

• “Course Catalog” on page 44, covers setting up and using your course catalog on the
Web.

• “Class Schedule” on page 71, covers setting up and using your class schedule on the
Web.

• “Prospect Self-Service” on page 92, explains how prospective students can submit
information to your institution.

• “Admissions Self-Service” on page 106, covers setting up and using the Admissions
Self-Service module within Student Self-Service.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 30

 • “Registration” on page 240, covers setting up and using Web registration functions,
including how students can add and drop classes, look up classes to add, change class
options, view their schedules, and more via the Web.

• “Student Records” on page 366, covers setting up and using Web student records
functions, including how students can view their:
• academic and other student records
• holds that may exist on their records
• grades
• unofficial academic transcripts
They can also run new or view existing degree evaluations (compliances).

• “Student Account” on page 512, covers student account records.

Note: Effective with the 8.0 release of Banner Student Self-Service,

Banner Financial Aid Self-Service is a stand-alone product. The chapter
covering the Financial Aid Self-Service pages has been removed from
this manual. Refer to the Banner Financial Aid Self-Service User Guide
for information about that product.

Web Page Descriptions

Each Web page that is part of Banner Student Self-Service is described in this manual.
The description includes:

• Text explaining the page’s use

• List of field descriptions, including, when applicable, where in Banner the information
comes from

• Setup requirements for the page, which can be helpful in troubleshooting

• List of which items, if any, update Banner and what in Banner is updated
• List of links to other Web pages, which explains how each hypertext link on the page
works

• List of buttons on the page, which explains how each button on the page works
• List of menus in the application that have links to the page
• List of other pages in the application that have links to the page
This information is provided to help you decide how to use the Web pages at your
institution.

Note: Package.procedure names (the HTML name associated with the

page) are included, because they are unique names that do not change
regardless of what modifications your institution makes to the product.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 31

 The package.procedure name can be used as a common reference name
or a way to double check that you are working with the correct page.

Related Documentation
In addition to the Banner Student Self-Service User Guide, the following documentation
supports your work with Banner Student Self-Service:

• Banner Student User Guide

• Banner Web General User Guide
• Banner Web Tailor User Guide
• Payment Processor Connection Handbook

Accessibility
Banner Web pages have been designed to be accessible for all of our users. The goal is
to make Banner Web content understandable and navigable for any individual who uses
adaptive technology such as screen readers and screen enlargers. This includes not only
making the language clear and simple, but also providing easy steps to complete a user
task and designing mechanisms for navigating within and between pages. Providing
navigation features and orientation information in pages maximizes accessibility and
usability.

As a part of the Web UI and accessibility functionality, the look and feel settings previously
found in Web Tailor are in Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). By providing more CSS in Web
Tailor, institutions can customize and manage self-service products at their institution.

The benefits of this are:

• Improved usability for all constituents, including the disabled

• A more flexible user interface with greater ability to customize the “look and feel” to meet
institutional needs

• Greater extensibility for local modifications due to increased use of industry standards,
including W3C guidelines

• An improved foundation for future changes in Web technology

Note: For a detailed listing of the features used with User Interface and
Accessibility, refer to the Banner Web General User Guide.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 32

 Compatibility with Accessibility Aids
Self-service products are compatible with the following screen reader:
Freedom Scientific JAWS 11 and higher for Windows
http://www.freedomscientific.com/index.html

Screen readers provide information to users via a recorded voice that speaks the words
that appear on the screen.

Note: For more information about accessibility aids for self-service

Internet applications, see the “Technical Basics” chapter in the Banner
Web Tailor User Guide.

Cascading Style Sheets

To increase the control your institution has over its Web pages, Banner Student Self-
Service uses Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). Style sheets describe how documents are
presented on screens and in print, and can even specify how abbreviations are
pronounced by screen readers. Also, they tend to result in highly-structured Web pages,
which lend themselves to speech synthesizers.

Note: All page display settings are controlled using Cascading Style
Sheets.

CSS Basics
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) were created by the World Wide Web Consortium to
introduce more consistency and structure into Web pages. Using CSSs allows Web
developers to create a set of styles then apply them to all of their Web pages uniformly. If
a developer changes a style on the style sheet, all the Web pages that use that style are
updated.

Styles can affect all parts of a Web page including:

• Headers
• Tables
• Fonts
• Font size
• Font color
• Graphics (that is, bullets, images used with error messages, etc.)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 33

 Note: Style sheets can only be used with HTML 4.0. Earlier versions of
HTML do not support them.

Using CSS technology lets you separate the content of your Web pages from their
structure and their presentation.

Note: For more information about CSS, Style Sheets and Banner Web
products, and support for CSS technology, see the Banner Web General
User Guide.

Baseline and Local Records

The delivered menus, roles, menu items, and Information Text are separated into two
categories: baseline and local. Baseline records are shipped and should not be modified
in any way. Local records can be created and modified by clients and will never be
overwritten by release updates. This allows clients to customize Information Text and
menus as desired without losing anything during upgrades, and still allows new items to
be shipped.

When the system attempts to display an item, it first looks for a local record and, if found,
uses that record. If a local record is not found, it displays the baseline record.

In order to accomplish this, a Source Indicator field is used on the TWGBWMNU,

TWGRWMRL, TWGRMENU, and TWGRINFO tables. Baseline rows contain a B, and
local rows contain an L. During the upgrade, all existing rows had the SOURCE_IND
column populated with a B.

Note: For more information about Web menus and procedures and their
associated roles, including viewing, updating, and deleting them, see the
Banner Web General User Guide.

Information Text
To make the user interface (UI) easier to use, the delivered Information Text (Info Text) has
been modified to improve its clarity and readability. Info Text is the text that appears on
each form to describe it and explain how it works.

The Info Text that has been provided is the default text. You can customize it for your
institution.

Note: For more information about Information Text, including viewing,

adding, and deleting it, see the Banner Web General User Guide.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 34

 Help Messages
A system of help messages is now stored as Info Text with the label HELP. It was originally
stored in the Banner Web products in static HTML files. By changing it into Info Text, it is
much more easy for non-technical users to customize and maintain.

Note: The static HTML help system will continue to be supported. It was
modified to conform to the same accessibility standards as Info Text.

As with all other delivered rows, Info Text Help records are stored in Web Tailor as
baseline. Info Text rows created by your institution using Web Tailor are stored as local.
You cannot modify baseline rows. Info Text that is stored as local is displayed first. If there
are no rows stored as local, the baseline rows are displayed. This ensures that your
institution’s custom help is not overwritten with each Banner upgrade.

This help is displayed when the user selects the Help link in the upper right-hand corner of
the Web page. The help text appears in a new window, and includes an Exit link at the
bottom of each window.

A CSS is provided for global-level help, web_defaulthelp.css, which is used in

addition to the CSS defined for that page.

This style sheet is present at all times in addition to the CSS defined for the application
pages. It defines any additional styles necessary to present help text to the user.

Note: For additional technical information about Help messages,

including creating and modifying help and setting up a CSS for help, see
the Banner Web General User Guide.

Functionality
Banner Student Self-Service allows students to view, update, and print records from the
Banner Student database using Web technology. It also provides a Web interface for
prospective students to use in order to apply for admission and to review the course
catalog and class schedule. Hypertext capabilities provide easy navigation through the
Web pages, including complex transactions such as submitting admissions applications
and registering for classes.

Banner Student Self-Service is flexible, allowing an institution to use all or a customized

selection of the delivered functions. Banner Student Self-Service is delivered with the
following functions.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 35

 Public Access
The following functions are available from the public access area of the Home Page.

Prospective Students
Prospective students can use Prospect Self-Service to complete a customized form for
their specified prospect type (undergraduate, graduate, etc.).

For more information, see “Prospect Self-Service” on page 92.

Apply for Admission

Students and prospects can use Admissions Self-Service to complete an electronic
application for admission and check the status of submitted applications. The
administrative staff controls the transfer of Web-received application information to the
regular Banner application tables. After the data is transferred, standard application
processing takes place.

For more information, see “Admissions Self-Service” on page 106.

Campus Directory
The Campus Directory provides contact information for campus employees.

Course Catalog
The Course Catalog provides a listing of all of your courses for a selected term. Students
and prospects can learn what courses are offered and can access course descriptions
and prerequisites.

For more information, see “Course Catalog” on page 44.

Class Schedule
The Class Schedule provides a listing of classes scheduled for the selected term.
Students and prospects can access information about scheduled classes, including
course descriptions, prerequisites and other requirements, instructors, and locations.

For more information, see “Class Schedule” on page 71.

Secure Area
Students can use the Web for many administrative functions that traditionally required
your institution’s full-time staff during scheduled office hours. Because these options put
the student in direct touch with information on record in the Banner Student database, the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 36

 student must enter a valid Banner ID and personal identification number (PIN) to access
these functions.

The following functions are available in the secure area of Student Self-Service.

Admissions
Students can complete an application for admission and check the status of existing
applications.

For more information, see “Admissions Self-Service” on page 106.

Registration
Students can use the Web for registration, including adding/dropping classes, looking up
classes to add, changing class options, viewing student schedule in detail or by day and
time, viewing fee assessment, and viewing withdrawal information.

For more information, see “Registration” on page 240.

Student Records
Students can use the Web to access their records, including holds, grades, academic
transcripts, and accounts. Students can also access CAPP (Curriculum, Advising and
Program Planning) through the Web, where they can request, review and print degree
evaluations (compliances) for their existing curricula or perform a what-if analyses.

For more information, see “Student Records” on page 366.

Student Account
Students can use the Web to access their accounts.

For more information, see “Student Account” on page 512.

Access the Secure Area

This section includes the following procedures for accessing the secure area of Student
Self-Service:

• “Log In” on page 38

• “Forgotten PIN” on page 38
• “Audit User ID” on page 39

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 37

 Log In
1. The student selects the Enter Secure Area link on the home page.
The system displays the login page.
2. The student enters his or her Banner ID in the User ID field and PIN in the PIN field.

Note: IDs and passwords are maintained on the Third Party Access Audit
Form (GOATPAD) and the Third Party Access Form (GOATPAC).

3. The student selects the Login button.

The system displays the Main Menu.
4. To access Student Self-Service, the student selects the Student & Financial Aid link.
The system displays the Student & Financial Aid menu.

Forgotten PIN
If a student has forgotten his or her PIN, the system provides a means by which the
student can log in.

When a student logs in to Banner Student Self-Service for the first time, the system
prompts him or her to supply a security question and answer. This information is then used
if the student later forgets his or her PIN. To change the security question and answer, the
student can select the Change Security Question link on the Personal Information menu.
1. The student selects the Enter Secure Area link on the home page.
The system displays the login page.
2. The student enters his or her Banner ID in the User ID field, then selects the Forgot
PIN button.
The system displays the Security Answer page with the student’s user ID and security
question displayed.
3. The student enters the answer to the security question in the Answer field, then
selects the Submit Answer button.
The system displays a page for the student to reset his or her PIN.
4. The student enters the new PIN in the New PIN field, then reenters the same PIN in
the Re-enter New PIN field.
5. The student selects the Reset PIN button.
The system displays the Main Menu.
6. To access Student Self-Service, the student selects the Student link.
The system displays the Student and Financial Aid menu.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 38

 Audit User ID
You can use Banner Web Tailor to capture and store the Banner user ID of the user
making changes to records in Banner Self-Service pages. This allows objects that are
used by Self-Service but that do not call Self-Service packages to access the Banner user
ID. You can also audit the data and find out which Banner user made a specific change to
the record.

Use the AUDITUSERID Web Tailor parameter to capture and record the user’s Banner
ID. When the AUDITUSERID parameter is set to BANNERID, the user’s Banner ID will
be captured by the gokesls.f_get_ssb_id_context function according to the
rules below.
1. If the user is logged in with an Oracle ID that is not the WEBUSER-specified ID, then
that ID is captured and preceded by W:—for example, W:SAISUSR.

2. If the user is logged in as the WEBUSER-specified ID, and the user has a GOBEACC
record, then the user’s logon Oracle ID is captured (again preceded by W:).
3. If there is no GOBEACC record, the user’s SPRIDEN ID is captured (again preceded
by W:).

4. If no SPRIDEN ID exists, then the WEBUSER-specified ID is captured (again preceded

by W:).

In any case, the W: indicates that the record was updated by a Self-Service user. A
WS: prefix indicates that the user was a non-secured Student user.

Static Display of Information

The following information is displayed on all pages:

• ID and name
• Term description or date range/range of terms
• System date and time
For example:
123456789 Oliver Skar
Spring 2003 (200333)
March 21, 2003 08:01 pm

This is controlled by the style sheet and creates a place where the user can easily see the
period of time to which the information being accessed is referring, the system date and
time, and the ID and name to ensure he or she is correctly logged in.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 39

 Long Titles
Your institution can enter long course and section titles (up to 100 characters) in Banner
and choose to have them displayed on the Web. Titles can entered on the following forms:

• Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE) (base course title, required)

• Course Syllabus Form (SCASYLB) (long course title, optional)
• Schedule Form (SSASECT) (modified section title, optional)
• Section Syllabus Form (SSASYLB) (long section title, optional)
If you want to display long titles on the Web, you must take the following actions in the
Web Display Controls window of the Term Control Form (SOATERM).

• To display long course titles, select the Display Long Course Title checkbox.
• To display long section titles, select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.
To determine which title to display on the Web, the system follows a complex hierarchy.
The following steps describe the hierarchy for titles in detail.

Course Catalog Pages

1. If the Display Long Course Title checkbox on SOATERM is cleared, the base course
title in the Course Title field of SCACRSE is displayed.
2. If the Display Long Course Title checkbox on SOATERM is selected, the system
checks SCASYLB.
• If a title is entered in the Long Course Title block on SCASYLB, the long course title
is displayed.
• If a title is not entered in the Long Course Title block on SCASYLB, the base course
title from SCACRSE is displayed.

Class Schedule and Registration Pages

1. The system determines whether the Display Long Section Title checkbox on
SOATERM is selected.
• If it is selected, processing continues with step 2.
• If it is cleared, processing continues with step 3.
2. If the Display Long Section Title checkbox on SOATERM is selected, the system
checks SSASYLB.
• If a long title exists in the Section Long Title block of SSASYLB, the long section title
is displayed.
• If a long title does not exist in the Section Long Title block of SSASYLB, processing
continues with step 3.
3. The system checks SSASECT.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 40

 • If the title in the field to the right of the Crse Number field on SSASECT has been
modified from the base course title (on SCACRSE), the modified section title is
displayed.
• If the title on SSASECT has not been modified, the system proceeds to step 4.
4. The system checks SOATERM.
• If the Display Long Course Title checkbox is cleared, the base course title from
SCACRSE is displayed.
• If the Display Long Course Title checkbox is selected, the system proceeds to
step 5.
5. The system checks SCASYLB.
• If a long title exists in the Long Course Title block of SCASYLB, the long course title
is displayed.
• If a title is not entered in the Long Course Title block on SCASYLB, the base course
title from SCACRSE is displayed.

Long Descriptions
Your institution can enter long course and section descriptions in Banner and choose to
have them displayed on the Web. Descriptions can entered on the following forms:

• Course Detail Information Form (SCADETL) (long course description, optional)

• Schedule Form (SSASECT) (modified section description, optional)
• Section Comment Form (SSATEXT) (long section description, optional)
If you want to display long course or section descriptions on the Web, you must take the
following actions in the Web Display Controls window of the Term Control Form
(SOATERM).

• To display long course descriptions, select the Display Long Course Description
checkbox.

• To display long section descriptions, select the Display Long Section Description
checkbox.

To determine which description to display on the Web, the system follows a complex
hierarchy. The following steps describe the hierarchy for descriptions in detail.

Course Catalog Pages

1. If the Display Long Course Description checkbox on SOATERM is cleared, the
course description from SCADETL is displayed.
2. If the Display Long Course Description checkbox on SOATERM is selected, the
system checks SCADETL.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 41

 • If a description is entered in the Course Description block on SCADETL, the long
course description is displayed.
• If a description is not entered in the Course Description block on SCADETL, the
system checks for a course description in Course Text block.
• If a description is entered in the Course Text block on SCADETL, the description is
displayed.
• If description is not entered in the Course Text block on SCADETL, none is
displayed.

Class Schedule and Registration Pages

1. The system determines whether the Display Long Section Description checkbox on
SOATERM is selected.
• If it is selected, processing continues with step 2.
• If it is cleared, processing continues with step 3.
2. If the Display Long Section Description checkbox on SOATERM is selected, the
system checks SSATEXT.
• If a long description exists in the Section Long Text block of SSATEXT, the long
section description is displayed.
• If a long description does not exist in the Section Long Text block of SSATEXT, the
system checks for a description in the Section Text block.
• If a description is entered in the Section Text block on SSATEXT, the description is
displayed.
• If description is not entered in the Section Text block on SSATEXT, the system
checks SSASECT.
3. When the system checks SSASECT, the following occurs.
• If the description on SSASECT has been modified from the base course description
(on SCACRSE), the modified section description is displayed.
• If the description on SSASECT has not been modified, the system proceeds to step
4.
4. The system checks SOATERM.
• If the Display Long Course Description checkbox is cleared, the course
description from SCADETL is displayed.
• If the Display Long Course Description checkbox is selected, the system
proceeds to step 5.
5. The system checks SCADETL.
• If a long description exists in the Course Description block of SCADETL, the long
course description is displayed.
• If a description is not entered in the Course Description block on SCADETL, the
system checks for a course description in Course Text block.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 42

 • If a description is entered in the Course Text block on SCADETL, the description is
displayed.
• If description is not entered in the Course Text block on SCADETL, none is
displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Application Overview 43

 Course Catalog

The Course Catalog provides access to your institution’s course catalog via the Internet.
You can specify one or multiple terms to be available for viewing on the Web.

The course catalog can display basic course information, such as credits, course
description, prerequisites, and corequisites.

You can do the following in the Course Catalog module:

• Create a rudimentary syllabus (made up of student learning objectives, required

materials for the course, and technical requirements) in baseline and view the details in
Self-Service.

• Use an expanded course title (up to 100 characters)

• Use long course descriptions
• Store the URL for course content (baseline only)
• Search for courses based on criteria other than term
• Define instructional methods for courses (baseline only)
• Specify the duration of the course (the amount of time to be given to the student to
complete the course) for the course and section levels to determine the expected course
completion date for the student (baseline only)

• Create a single course for both traditional and open learning class offerings. The
delivery method of the course is established when the individual section records are
created

These features support both traditional and open learning courses.

Note: The primary way that the system recognizes an open learning
course is that no part of term is associated with it.

The information in the Course Catalog Web pages is dynamic, which means that the data
is extracted directly from the database.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Course Catalog Web Pages” on page 45, which provides details about each Web page
in the course catalog

• “Set Up the Course Catalog” on page 61, which provides detailed steps for setting up
your course catalog for display on the Web

• “Use the Course Catalog” on page 68, which provides step-by-step procedures

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 44

 Course Catalog Web Pages
The following Web pages compose the Banner Student Self-Service Course Catalog:

• “Catalog Term (bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg)” on page 45

• “Search for Courses (bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date)” on page 46
• “Catalog Entries (bwckctlg.p_display_courses)” on page 50
• “Detailed Course Information (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail)” on page 53
• “Syllabus Information (bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus)” on page 55
• “Bookstore Information (bwckbook.site)” on page 56

Catalog Term (bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg)

This page allows the user to choose which term’s catalog to be viewed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Term Terms from which the user can choose for display on the Web.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form In the Web Processing Controls window, select the Web
(SOATERM) Catalog Term checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 45

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Search for Courses page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Home page N/A

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Search for Courses (bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date)

On the Search for Courses page, the user chooses from a variety of options to narrow his
or her search for courses.

At a minimum, the user must select a subject. The search results are displayed on the
Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

Users can search the unsecured Class Schedule by part-of-term, which is not restricted by
having an active registration status code.

The following are the criteria for which part-of-term codes are displayed:

• Sections in SSBSECT for the part-of-term and term/term range

• Part-of-term defined for validation table STVPTRM on the Web Display List
Customization Form (SOAWDSP)

• Web Indicator checkbox selected on STVRSTS for registration status code RW

• Current date is within the range specified for registration status code RW on SFARSTS

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 46

 If a user performs a search for open learning classes, no part-of-term codes are selected.

Your institution can restrict the searchable fields displayed on this page using the Web
Processing Controls and Web Display Controls windows of the Term Control Form
(SOATERM).

Your institution can also restrict the values that are populated in the pulldown lists using
the Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Subject Course subjects from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Course Number Range First and last course numbers of a range for which the user wants
to view classes. The user can enter up to five digits or use the
wildcard character (%) (that is, a search for 2% retrieves all
course numbers beginning with 2).

Title Short course name. The user can enter up to 30 characters or use
the wildcard character (%) (that is, a search for %introduction%
retrieves all courses with the word “introduction” in the title).

Level Level of courses from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Schedule Type Schedule types from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

College Colleges from which the user can choose for display on the Web.
The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to select
consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive
values).

Division Divisions from which the user can choose for display on the Web.
The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to select
consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive
values).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 47

 Item Description/Source Information

Department Departments from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Credit Range Range of credit hours for which the user wants to view classes.
(For example, this could be used if a student cannot take more
than a particular amount of credits.)

Course Attribute Course attributes from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

This pulldown list is displayed only if the Search by Course

Attribute checkbox on the Web Display Control window of
SOATERM is selected.

The values in the pulldown list come from SOAWDSP. Only the
validation code descriptions are displayed. The first entry in the
selection list is All, which is used to search for all values.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Subject Code Validation Select the Web Ind checkbox for each subject you want
Form (STVSUBJ) displayed on the Web.

Web Display List Specify which validation codes are to be displayed on the Web for
Customization Form the following validation tables:
(SOAWDSP) • Level Code Validation (STVLEVL)
• Schedule Type Code Validation (STVSCHD)
• College Code Validation (STVCOLL)
• Division Code Validation (STVDIVS)
• Department Code Validation (STVDEPT)
• Attribute Validation (STVATTR)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 48

 Item Description

Term Control Form Catalog Search Controls section of the Web Display Controls
(SOATERM) window:
• To include levels, select the Search by Level checkbox.
• To include schedule type, select the Search by Schedule Type
checkbox.
• To include colleges, select the Search by College checkbox.
• To include divisions, select the Search by Division checkbox.
• To include departments, select the Search by Department
checkbox.
• To include courses, select the Search by Course Attribute
checkbox.

Course attributes are displayed with the search results

regardless of whether the user can search on course attributes.
• If you want to allow the search and display of long course titles
(which are defined on the Course Syllabus Form [SCASYLB]),
select the Display Long Course Title checkbox.
• If you want to allow the search and display of long course
descriptions (which are defined on the Course Detail
Information Form [SCADETL]), select the Display Long
Course Description checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Get Courses Goes to the Catalog Entries page

(bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the default
settings.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 49

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Catalog Entries (bwckctlg.p_display_courses)

The Catalog Entries page displays the courses and related information found using the
search criteria specified by the users on the Search for Courses page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date). This information is in summary format and
do not include registration requirements (that is, prerequisites and corequisites) and
restrictions. The page can display the long course title as well as the long course
description.

The system uses the effective term in the Schedule Type block of the Basic Course
Information Form (SCACRSE) to determine the schedule type(s) to be displayed based on
the term selected to access the Web course catalog.

If the user selected more than 333 subjects, the system displays the following message
(where AAA represents the first subject selected, and MMM represents the 333rd subject):
You have selected too many subjects. Results for this search include only subjects AAA
through MMM.

If no courses meet the user’s search criteria, the message No courses were found that
meet your search criteria is displayed.

You can select the link for the course title and number to display the Detailed Course
Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail).

You can use the Bookstore(change me) link to access the Bookstore Information page
(bwckbook.site). This page displays links to internal and/or external bookstores
where you can look up materials for the course/section.

You can use the Syllabus Available link to access the Syllabus Information page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus) and view course details such as the
long course title, course description, term, URL, learning objectives, technical
requirements, and required materials.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated and
displayed as a hyperlink to the Detailed Course Information page.

If the course status is Cancelled, Inactive, or Pending,

the title is not displayed as a hyperlink.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 50

 Item Description/Source Information

Course description Description associated with the course.

Credit Hours or Continuing Number of credit hours or continuing education units (as
Education Units applicable) for the course.

Levels Levels associated with the course.

Schedule Types Schedule types associated with the course. The schedule type is
displayed as a hyperlink to the Class Schedule Listing page for
the class, if available.

College College associated with the course.

Division Division associated with the course.

Department Department associated with the course.

Course Attributes Degree attributes associated with the course.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want to have the long course title displayed on the Web,
(SOATERM) select the Display Long Course Title checkbox for the
associated term.

If you want to have the long course description displayed on the

Web, select the Display Long Course Description checkbox for
the associated term.

Web Tailor Information Use the Web Tailor internal routine,

Text bwckctlg.catalog_label_text, to make any of the
following changes to the data elements on this page.
• If you want to change the prefix or suffix (field labels), modify the
desired value.
• If you want a data element to be suppressed (that is, not
displayed), delete the values for both the prefix and the suffix
values for the relevant data element.
• If you want to change the text of the link to the sections, modify
the SECTIONS label.
Refer to “Set Up the Course Catalog” on page 61 for procedures
for performing these tasks.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 51

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Course title and number Goes to the Detailed Course Information page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail).

Syllabus Available Goes to the Syllabus Information page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus) where you can
view course syllabus details.

Bookstore(change me) Goes to Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) where

you can link to a bookstore to query materials for the course/
section.

Schedule type If displayed as a hyperlink, goes to the Class Schedule Listing

page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse).

All Sections for this Course Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse)

This link is displayed only if more than one section has been
defined for the course for the selected term.

Return to Previous Goes to the Search for Courses page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date).

New Search Goes to the Catalog Term page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg).

XML Extract Redisplays the page in XML format. The XML data can then be
saved to the user’s desktop for a variety of purposes.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 52

 Detailed Course Information
(bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail)
The Detailed Course Information page displays information about the course selected by
the user on the Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses). The
information includes registration restrictions, prerequisite and corequisite courses, and the
basic information that appears on the Catalog Entries page.

You can select the schedule type to find available classes for the course if a section has
been set up.

You can use the Bookstore(change me) link to access the Bookstore Information page
(bwckbook.site). This page displays links to internal and/or external bookstores
where you can look up materials for the course/section.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated.

Course description Description associated with the course.

Credit Hours or Continuing Number of credit hours or continuing education units (as
Education Units applicable) for the course.

Levels Levels associated with the course.

Schedule Types Schedule types associated with the course. The schedule type is
displayed as a hyperlink to the Class Schedule Listing page for
the class, if available.

College College associated with the course.

Division Division associated with the course.

Department Department associated with the course.

Course Attributes Degree attributes associated with the course.

Restrictions Registration restrictions for the course.

Corequisites Course(s) in which the student must register concurrent with this
one. The course number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries
page for the corequisite course.

Prerequisites Prerequisites that the student must have successfully completed

to register in this one. If the prerequisite is a course, the course
number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries page for the
prerequisite course.

CAPP CAPP prerequisites that the student must have successfully

Prerequisites completed to register in this one. If the prerequisite is a course,
the course number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries page for
the prerequisite course.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 53

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want to have the long course title displayed on the Web,
(SOATERM) select the Display Long Course Title checkbox.

If you want to have the long course description displayed on the

Web, select the Display Long Course Description checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Bookstore(change me) Goes to Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) where

you can link to a bookstore to query materials for the course/
section.

Schedule type Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

Return to Previous Goes to the Catalog Entries page

(bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

New Search Goes to the Catalog Term page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 54

 Syllabus Information
(bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus)
This page is used to display syllabus information for a course selected from the Catalog
Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses) after a course search has been
performed. The information displayed comes from the Course Syllabus Form (SCASYLB).

This page is displayed using the Syllabus Available link on the Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses). The link is displayed in the course information
when syllabus information exists for a course.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course Subject, course number, and title.

Associated Term Term description and code.

Learning Objectives Learning objectives for the course.

Required Materials Required materials for the course.

Technical Requirements Technical requirements for the course.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want to have the long course title displayed on the Web,
(SOATERM) select the Display Long Course Title checkbox for the
associated term.

If you want to have the long course description displayed on the

Web, select the Display Long Course Description checkbox for
the associated term.

Course Syllabus Form Enter course syllabus information (long course title, URL, learning
(SCASYLB) objectives, technical requirements and/or required materials)
associated with a subject and term for display on the Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 55

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Previous Goes to the Catalog Entries page

(bwckctlg.p_display_courses)

New Search Goes to the Catalog Term page

(bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg)

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Bookstore Information (bwckbook.site)

The Bookstore Information page is used to query and display bookstore materials for
selected courses in the Catalog and Schedule modules in Self-Service. It displays links to
bookstores chosen by your institution.

This page can be accessed using the Bookstore(change me) link from the following
pages:

• Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses)

• Detailed Course Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail)
• Class Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec)
• Detailed Class Information page (bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched)
This page is a shell Web page. It is a partial solution for accessing bookstore information
and that must be completed by your institution to access the bookstore providers of your
choice. The page contains coded examples of how to link your institution to a bookstore
provider. Links on this page that you create will indicate that students should proceed to

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 56

 one or more specific Websites to access the bookstore information. The sample code is
show below.

Sample links are provided, such as:

Proceed to the Follett WebSite for Books (example; change me).

Here is the sample code you can use to finish the Web page at your institution.

• Example 1 is a URL example.

• Example 2 is a Form Submit example.
• Example 3 is for multi-campus institutions.

Note: No further changes will be made to these examples. If Follett’s

requirements change in the future, it will be the institution’s responsibility
to modify the code.

Note: The lv_ext_url_txt code appears twice in the code below to

show two sample links. Your developer can remove the link that is not
needed.

Example 1 - URL
--
-- START BOOKSTORE. Your code goes here.
--
-- EXAMPLE 1 : URL Example.
--
-- The example uses Follett example; if using them for bookstore, they
should provide you with a bookstore ID number.
--
lv_id := '123456';
--
-- The URL for the bookstore is customizable via WebTailor; Allows
end user to change link text without recompiling.
--
IF BOOKSTORE_URL_TXT IS NOT NULL THEN
lv_ext_url_txt := BOOKSTORE_URL_TXT;
END IF;

twbkfrmt.P_PrintText (
twbkfrmt.f_printanchor (
curl => twbkfrmt.f_encodeurl (
'http://www.bkstr.com/webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/
booklookServlet' ||
'?bookstore_id-1=' ||
twbkfrmt.f_encode (lv_id) ||

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 57

 '&term_id-1=' ||
twbkfrmt.f_encode (p_term_in) ||
'&div-1=&dept-1=' ||
twbkfrmt.f_encode (p_subj_in) ||
'&course-1=' ||
twbkfrmt.f_encode(p_crse_numb_in) ||
'&section-1=' ||
twbkfrmt.f_encode (p_seq_in)
),
ctext =>G$_NLS.FormatMsg('x',
'SQL',
lv_ext_url_txt
),
ctarget => '_blank'
)
);
--
-- END EXAMPLE1
--
HTP.br;
HTP.br;

Example 2 - Form Submit

--
-- EXAMPLE 2 : Form Submit Example.
--
HTP.formopen('http://www.bkstr.com/webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/
booklookServlet', 'POST', cattributes=>'NAME="BOOK"');
twbkfrmt.P_FormHidden ('bookstore_id-1','123456');
twbkfrmt.p_FormHidden ('term_id-1',p_term_in);
twbkfrmt.P_FormHidden ('crn-1',p_crse_numb_in);

twbkfrmt.p_tabledataopen;
twbkfrmt.p_tabledata(
twbkfrmt.f_printtext(

twbkfrmt.f_PrintAnchor(twbkfrmt.f_encodeurl('http://www.bkstr.com/
webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/booklookServlet'),
ctext =>G$_NLS.FormatMsg('x', 'SQL',
lv_ext_url_txt),
cattributes => 'OnClick="javascript:
BOOK.submit();return false"')
)
);
twbkfrmt.p_tabledataclose;
--

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 58

 -- END EXAMPLE 2
--
--
-- END BOOKSTORE.

The following sample code is for multi-campus institutions that have different Follett
bookstore numbers for each campus. Multi-campus institutions can uncomment this code
and then modify it as needed. Note that if the course search is done at the Course Catalog
level, rather than the Class Schedule level, no section number (i.e.,
SSBSECT_SEQ_NUMB) will be available to select the campus code, so it will default to
your main campus.

Example 3 - Multi-Campus
OPEN ssbsect_camp_c (p_term_in,p_subj_in,p_crse_numb_in,p_seq_in);
FETCH ssbsect_camp_c INTO lv_camp;
IF ssbsect_camp_c%NOTFOUND then
lv_camp := 'M'; -- Default to your main campus
END IF;
CLOSE ssbsect_camp_c;

CASE lv_camp
WHEN 'A' THEN -- Substitute your campus codes.
lv_id := '111111'; -- Substitute the Follett number.
WHEN 'B' THEN
lv_id := '222222';
WHEN 'M' THEN -- Make sure to include the main campus
lv_id := '333333'; -- code that was used above as
default.
ELSE
lv_id := '333333'; -- Use main campus bookstore number here.

END CASE;

Web Page Fields

This page does not have fields.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 59

 Item Description

Web page bookstore links Use the coded examples contained in the page to see how to link
your institution to a bookstore provider. Links on this page that
you create will indicate that students should proceed to one or
more specific internal or external Websites to access the
bookstore information.

GTVSDAX rules Set the HEOACTLG rule to Y to activate the HEOA bookstore
Catalog link.

Set the HEOASCHD rule to Y to activate the HEOA bookstore

Schedule link.

Web Tailor Customize information text and links in Web Tailor.

• Update the DEFAULT label text. The DEFAULT label is
delivered as This is the default text.
• Update the OPT1 label text. The OPT1 label is delivered as
This is option #1 text. The bookstore
website is external to Banner Web.
• Update the INTERNAL_URL_TEXT label to describe access to
selected internal (campus) bookstore providers. The
INTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is delivered as
Bookstore(changeme).
• Update the EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT label to describe access to
selected external bookstore providers. The
EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is delivered as Proceed to
Follett Website for Books (example; change
me).

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 60

 Set Up the Course Catalog
This section provides step-by-step procedures for the following tasks for setting up the
course catalog:

• “Implement the Course Catalog” on page 61

• “Customize the Catalog Entries Page” on page 62
• “Customize the Course Catalog Search Page” on page 64
• “Implement Bookstore Access” on page 64

Implement the Course Catalog

This procedure explains how to implement your course catalog on the Web. Refer to the
Banner Student User Guide for more information about Banner forms.
1. For each subject that you want displayed on the Web, select the Web Ind checkbox
on the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ).
2. For each term that you want included in the Web course catalog, select the Web
Catalog Term checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window of the Term Control
Form (SOATERM).
3. In the Web Display Controls window of SOATERM, take the following actions as
appropriate.
3.1. To include levels in the Level pulldown list, select the Search by Level
checkbox.
3.2. To include schedule types in the Schedule Type pulldown list, select the
Search by Schedule Type checkbox.
3.3. To include colleges in the College pulldown list, select the Search by College
checkbox.
3.4. To include divisions in the Division pulldown list, select the Search by Division
checkbox.
3.5. To include departments in the Department pulldown list, select the Search by
Department checkbox.
3.6. To include courses in the Course Attributes pulldown list, select the Search by
Course Attribute checkbox.
3.7. To allow the search and display of long course titles (which are defined on the
Course Syllabus Form [SCASYLB]), select the Display Long Course Title
checkbox.
3.8. To allow the search and display of long course descriptions (which are defined
on the Course Detail Information Form [SCADETL]), select the Display Long
Course Description checkbox.
4. On the Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP), specify which validation
codes are to be displayed on the Web for the following validation tables:

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 61

 • Level Code Validation (STVLEVL)
• Schedule Type Code Validation (STVSCHD)
• College Code Validation (STVCOLL)
• Division Code Validation (STVDIVS)
• Department Code Validation (STVDEPT)
• Attribute Validation (STVATTR)

Customize the Catalog Entries Page

This section provides the following procedures for customizing your Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses):

• “Change Data Element Names for the Catalog Entries Page” on page 62
• “Suppress Data Elements from the Catalog Entries Page” on page 62
• “Display Data Elements on the Catalog Entries Page” on page 63
• “Change Sections Link Text on the Catalog Entries Page” on page 63
• “Suppress Sections Link from the Catalog Entries Page” on page 63
• “Display Sections Link on the Catalog Entries Page” on page 64

Change Data Element Names for the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to change the name (field label) of a data element on the
Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.
4. Select the PREFIX or SUFFIX item, as desired, for the data element to be changed.
5. Enter the desired value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Suppress Data Elements from the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to suppress a data element from appearing on the Catalog
Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 62

 4. Select the PREFIX item for the data element to be suppressed.
5. Delete the value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.
7. Select the SUFFIX item for the data element to be suppressed.
8. Delete the value in the Information Text field.
9. Click Submit Changes.

Display Data Elements on the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to display a data element on the Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses) that has previously been suppressed.
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.
4. Select the PREFIX or SUFFIX item, as desired, for the data element to be displayed.
5. Enter the desired value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Note: If desired, you can specify values for both prefix and suffix.

Change Sections Link Text on the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to change the text of the Sections link on the Catalog
Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

Note: All Sections for this Course is the delivered value for
this link, but you can change it.

1. Access Web Tailor.

2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.
4. Select SECTIONS.
5. Enter the desired text in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Suppress Sections Link from the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to suppress the Sections link from appearing on the Catalog
Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 63

 1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.
4. Select SECTIONS.
5. Delete the value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Display Sections Link on the Catalog Entries Page

This procedure explains how to display the Sections link on the Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses) if it has previously been suppressed.
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_label_text.
4. Select SECTIONS.
5. Enter All Sections for this Course (or any other desired text) in the
Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Customize the Course Catalog Search Page

This procedure explains how to customize the labels on the Course Catalog Search page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckctlg.catalog_search_label_text.
4. Select the link of the label to be changed.
5. Enter the desired text in the Information Text field.
6. If desired, select an image from the pulldown list in the Image field.
7. If desired, add additional text in the Comment field.
8. Click Submit Changes.

Implement Bookstore Access

The Higher Education Opportunity Act (HEOA) requires institutions to publish ISBN
numbers for class materials, so students can see what is needed and how much it will cost
as they are selecting their courses for registration. Links the Catalog and Schedule

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 64

 modules in Banner Student Self-Service and Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-Service are
to access the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site). Students and faculty can
use this page to access selected bookstore providers and query the required materials.
You can add internal links to the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) to point
to your institution’s bookstore or external links to point to a national chain and/or an online
provider. GTVSDAX rules are used to turn the processing on and off. Web Tailor can be
used to customize link text information as needed.

Warning! This functionality supports the HEOA requirements. However, it

is not a final code solution. You must implement your institution’s code
solution for the bookstore connection to attain final HEOA compliance.
The Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) is a shell page that
contains built-in examples your site developers can use to complete the
link to the bookstore Website of your choice.

Turn on GTVSDAX Rules

Two rules are used to activate bookstore processing from the Catalog and/or Schedule
modules in Self-Service. You must turn on either the Catalog rule (HEOACTLG) or the
Schedule rule (HEOACTLG) to use the bookstore processing. You can also turn on both
rules if you choose.

Internal
Code
External Sequence Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y HEOACTLG 1 HEOACTLG HEOA bookstore Sysdate

catalog link

Y HEOASCHD 1 HEOASCHD HEOA bookstore Sysdate

schedule link

Modify Web Tailor Records

Web Tailors records in the bwckbook.sql package are used to update the
Bookstore(change me) link in the Catalog and Schedule modules in Self-Service and the
information text for the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site).

Seq # Label Source Information Text

1 DEFAULT Local This is the default text

1 OPT1 Local This is option #1 text. The bookstore website

is external to Banner Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 65

 Seq # Label Source Information Text

1 INTERNAL_URL_TEXT Local Bookstore(change me)

1 EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT Local Proceed to Follett Website for Books

(example; change me).

Use the Reorder or Customize Information Text page

(twbkwinf.P_ReorderPgInfoText) in Web Tailor to modify the Bookstore
Information page (bwckbook.site).

• The DEFAULT label is delivered as This is the default text. It will only be
displayed on the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) when the OPT1
label is null, and no internal or external links are found.

• The OPT1 label is delivered as This is option #1 text. The bookstore

website is external to Banner Web. It will be displayed on the Bookstore
Information page (bwckbook.site).

You can use this label to toggle between a default label and other options as you
choose. The Web Tailor text can be used to update or modify the verbiage on the Web
page without the need to maintain the text in the coded package.

• The INTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is delivered as Bookstore(changeme). It will

be displayed on these pages:
• Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses)

• Detailed Course Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail)

• Class Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or

bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec)
• Detailed Class Information page (bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched)
This is used for an internal site such as your institution’s campus bookstore on your
intranet.

• The EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is delivered as Proceed to Follett

Website for Books (example; change me). It will be displayed on the
Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site). This is used for an external site such
as a national chain and/or an online provider.

Note: You can use both internal and external links on the Bookstore
Information page (bwckbook.site). You can also add extra Web Tailor
records to point to as many providers as you choose.

Setup and Processing

To use the bookstore processing, perform the following steps.
1. Add code to the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) to complete the link
to the selected bookstore provider.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 66

 Examples of code are contained in the Web page. You can add links to as many
providers as you wish, such as your institution’s campus bookstore, a national chain,
and/or an online provider.
2. Turn on either or both of the two GTVSDAX rules in Banner General.
• The HEOACTLG rule is used to activate the HEOA bookstore Catalog link.

• The HEOACTLG rule is used to activate the HEOA bookstore Schedule link.
3. Customize the information text and links on the Bookstore Information page
(bwckbook.site) using Web Tailor.

3.1. Update the DEFAULT label text. The DEFAULT label is delivered as This is
the default text.
It will only be displayed on the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site)
when the OPT1 label is null, and no internal or external links are found.

3.2. Update the OPT1 label text. The OPT1 label is delivered as This is
option #1 text. The bookstore website is external to
Banner Web.
Use this label to toggle between a default label and other options as you
choose. The Web Tailor text can be used to update or modify the verbiage on
the Web page without the need to maintain the text in the coded package.
3.3. Update the INTERNAL_URL_TEXT label to describe access to selected
internal (campus) bookstore providers. The INTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is
delivered as Bookstore(changeme).
For example, you could change the information text item for the link to read
Link to Campus Bookstore.

Note: If you omit or delete the name of the link, the default text
“Bookstore” will be used as the URL text.

3.4. Update the EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT label to describe access to selected

external bookstore providers. The EXTERNAL_URL_TEXT label is delivered
as Proceed to Follett Website for Books (example;
change me).
For example, you could change the information text item for the link to read
Proceed to the ABC Website for books.
4. Use the Bookstore(change me) link from the Catalog and Schedule Self-Service
pages to display the Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) and access
your selected bookstore providers you have.
The Bookstore(change me) link is displayed on the following pages in Self-Service:
• Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses)

• Detailed Course Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail)

• Class Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or

bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 67

 • Detailed Class Information page (bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched)
5. The Catalog and Schedule page links send the following parameters to the Bookstore
Information page (bwckbook.site): Term, Subject Code, Course Reference
Number, and Sequence Number (section number).

Use the Course Catalog

This section provides step-by-step procedures for the following tasks for using the course
catalog:

• “Search for Courses” on page 68

• “Set up syllabus information” on page 69
• “Access syllabus information” on page 70

Search for Courses

The following procedure explains how a user searches for courses in your course catalog.
1. From your institution’s Web site, the student selects the Course Catalog link from the
menu.
2. The Catalog Term page (bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg) is displayed. The user
chooses a term from the Search by Term pulldown list, and then selects the Submit
button.
3. The Search for Courses page (bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term) is displayed. On
this page the student can choose from a variety of course characteristics to narrow the
search. At a minimum, at least one selection must be made from the Subject
pulldown list.

Note: Your institution can control what is displayed in the pulldown lists
(with the exception of Subject) on the Web Display List Customization
Form (SOAWDSP).

Multiple selections can be made using the Shift key (for consecutive values) and/or
the Ctrl key (for non-consecutive values).
For fields in which the user enters values, the wildcard character (%) can be used.
The student then selects one of the buttons.
• Get Courses causes the Catalog Entries page to display.
• Reset clears the choices the user made so the user can begin again.
4. The Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses) is displayed with
the courses and related information found using the search criteria specified on the
Search for Courses page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 68

 If the user selects the link composed of the subject, course number, and title, the
Detailed Course Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_course_detail) is
displayed.
If the user selects a schedule-type link, the Class Schedule Listing page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse) for the course is displayed.
The student can also select Return to Previous or New Search.
• Return to Previous causes the Search for Courses page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Catalog Term page to be displayed.
5. The Detailed Course Information page displays further information about the course
selected on the Catalog Entries page.
If available, the following links can be selected:
• Schedule type to go to the Class Schedule Listing
• Prerequisites to go to the Catalog Entries page
• Corequisites to go to the Catalog Entries page
The student can also select Return to Previous or New Search.
• Return to Previous causes the Catalog Entries page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Catalog Term page to be displayed.
6. The Class Schedule Listing page displays the specific section that is available for that
term and related information for the schedule type the student selected on the
Detailed Course Information page.
The student can also select Return to Previous or New Search.
• Return to Previous causes the Detailed Course Information page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Catalog Term page to be displayed.

Set up syllabus information

Use the following steps to set up syllabus information in Banner baseline. You can then
view the syllabus information for a course in Self-Service.
1. Access the Course Syllabus Form (SCASYLB).
1.1. Enter the subject, course, and term in the Key Block.
1.2. Use Next Block.
1.3. Enter the long course title and URL in the Long Course Title block.
1.4. Use Next Block.
1.5. Enter the learning objectives in the Learning Objectives block.
1.6. Use Next Block.
1.7. Enter the required materials in the Required Materials block.
1.8. Use Next Block.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 69

 1.9. Enter the technical requirements in the Technical Requirements block.
1.10. Save the changes.
2. Access the Term Control Form (SOATERM).
2.1. Select the Display Long Course Title checkbox for the associated term to
display the long course title on the Web.
2.2. Select the Display Long Course Description checkbox for the associated
term to display the long course description on the Web.

Access syllabus information

Syllabus information can be reviewed for a course from the unsecured side of Banner
Self-Service.

Use the following steps to access syllabus information in Self-Service.

1. Access Banner Self-Service.
2. Select the Course Catalog menu option.
3. On the Catalog Term page (bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg), select a term, and
click Submit.
4. On the Search for Courses page (bwckctlg.p_disp_cat_term_date), select
a subject.
5. Enter or select other information as appropriate (such as course number range, title,
level, schedule type, college, division, department, credit range, or course attribute),
and click Get Courses.
6. On the Catalog Entries page (bwckctlg.p_display_courses), review the
search results.
7. Click on the Syllabus Available link to view syllabus information for a course.
8. Review the information on the Syllabus Information page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_catalog_syllabus).
• Use Return to Previous link to go back to the Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses).
• Use the New Search link to go back to the Catalog Term page
(bwckctlg.p_disp_dyn_ctlg).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Course Catalog 70

 Class Schedule

The Class Schedule provides access to your institution’s class schedule via the Internet.
You can specify one or multiple terms to be available for viewing on the Web.

You can do the following in the Class Schedule module:

• Use expanded section titles (up to 100 characters)

• Use long course descriptions
• Create rudimentary syllabi (made up of student learning objectives, required materials
for the course, and technical requirements) so students can make informed decisions
when selecting the class that best suits their needs

• Specify section-specific dates when registration is accepted outside of the current parts-
of-term defined on SOATERM

• Define instructional methods for courses

• Specify the duration of the course for the course and section levels to determine the
expected registration completion date for the student

These features support both traditional and open learning courses.

Note: The primary way that the system recognizes an open learning
course is that no part of term is associated with it.

The information in the Class Schedule Web pages is dynamic, which means that the data
is extracted directly from the database.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Class Schedule Web Pages” on page 71, which provides details about each Web page
in the class schedule

• “Set Up the Class Schedule” on page 85, which provides detailed steps for setting up
your class schedule on the Web

• “Use the Class Schedule” on page 89, which provides step-by-step procedures

Class Schedule Web Pages

The following Web pages compose the Banner Student Self-Service Class Schedule:

• “Class Schedule Search Selection (bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched)” on page 72

• “Class Schedule Search (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date)” on page 74

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 71

 • “Class Schedule Listing (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec)” on
page 77

• “Detailed Class Information (bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched)” on page 80

• “Syllabus Information (bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus)” on page 83

Class Schedule Search Selection

(bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched)
On this page users begin their search of the class schedule by choosing a term from the
pulldown list or entering a date range.

Note: If your institution does not want to permit searching by date range,
the fields can be omitted from the page by setting the value in the
External Code field on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) to N
for the SCHBYDATE internal code. This row must be entered manually.

For term class schedule information to be displayed on the Web, the Master Web Term
Control checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) must be selected.

Messages
If the dates entered are invalid, the following message is displayed:
You have entered an invalid date.

If the From Date is greater than the To Date, the following message is displayed:
From Date must be less than or equal to the To Date

If neither a term nor a date range are entered, the following message is displayed:
You must enter either a term or date range.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Search by Term Terms available for display on the Web.

Search by Date Range The user enters the first and last dates of the range he or she
From and To wants to view on the Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 72

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form To include the term in the Search by Term pulldown list, select
(SOATERM) the Master Web Term Control checkbox.

Crosswalk Validation Form To display the Search by Date Range fields, enter Y in the
(GTVSDAX) External Code field for the SCHBYDATE internal code. This row
must be entered manually. Refer to the “Set Up the Class
Schedule” on page 85 for more information.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not contain links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Class Schedule Search page

(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date)

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the default
settings.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 73

 Class Schedule Search (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date)
On the Class Schedule Search page a user can choose from a variety of selection options
to narrow the search for classes. At a minimum, the user must select a subject. The
search results are displayed on the Class Schedule Listing page
(bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

Your institution can restrict the searchable fields displayed on this page using the Web
Processing Controls and Web Display Controls windows of the Term Control Form
(SOATERM).

Your institution can also restrict the values that are populated in the pulldown lists using
the Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Subject Course subjects from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Course Number Course number for which the user wants to view classes. The
user can enter up to five digits or use the wildcard character (%)
(that is, a search for 2% retrieves all course numbers beginning
with 2).

Title Course name. The user can enter up to 30 characters or use the
wildcard character (%) (that is, a search for %introduction%
retrieves all courses with the word “introduction” in the title).

Schedule Type Schedule types from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Instructional Method Instructional methods (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Credit Range Range of credit hours for which the user wants to view classes.
(For example, this could be used if a student cannot take more
than a particular amount of credits.)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 74

 Item Description/Source Information

Campus Campuses from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Course Level Level of courses from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Part of Term Parts of term (for traditional courses) from which the user can
choose for display on the Web. The user can select multiple
values using the Shift key (to select consecutive values) and/or
Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive values).

Duration Duration periods for open learning courses from which the user
can choose for display on the Web. The user can select multiple
values using the Shift key (to select consecutive values) and/or
Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive values).

Instructor Instructors from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

The last name prefix is displayed, if applicable.

Session Sessions from which the user can choose for display on the Web.
The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to select
consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive
values).

Attribute Type Course attributes from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Start Time Class start time the user wants to display on the Web. To display
all start times, the Hours and Minutes fields must be set to 00.

End Time Class end time the user wants to display on the Web. To display
all end times, the Hours and Minutes fields must be set to 00.

Days Class days the user wants to display on the Web. To display all
days, the checkboxes must all be cleared.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 75

 Item Description

Term Control Form Schedule Search Controls section of the Web Display Controls
(SOATERM) window:
• To include schedule types, select the Search by Schedule
Type checkbox.
• To include instructional methods, select the Search by
Instructional Method checkbox.
• To include campuses, select the Search by Campus checkbox.
• To include course levels, select the Search by Level checkbox.
• To include durations, select the Search by Duration checkbox.
• To include instructors, select the Search by Instructor
checkbox.
• To include sessions, select the Search by Session checkbox.
• To include course attributes, select the Search by Course
Attribute checkbox.

Course attributes are displayed with the search results

regardless of whether the user can search on course attributes.
• If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.
• If you want to allow the search and display of long section
descriptions, select the Display Long Section Description
checkbox.

Web Display List Specify which validation codes are to be displayed on the Web for
Customization Form the following validation tables:
(SOAWDSP) • Schedule Type Code Validation (STVSCHD)
• Instruction Method Validation (GTVINSM)
• Campus Code Validation (STVCAMP)
• Level Code Validation (STVLEVL)
• Part of Term Code Validation (STVPTRM)
• Session Code Validation (STVSESS)
• Attribute Validation (STVATTR)

Schedule Form Select the Voice Response and Self-Service Available

(SSASECT) checkbox for each section that you want to be available on the
Web.

Subject Code Validation Select the Web Ind checkbox for each subject that you want to be
Form (STVSUBJ) available on the Web.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 76

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Class Search Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the default
settings.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Class Schedule Listing (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or

bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec)
The Class Schedule Listing page displays the courses and related information found using
the search criteria specified on the Class Schedule Search page
(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date). This information is in summary format and does not
include registration requirements (that is, prerequisites or corequisites) and restrictions.
The page can display the long section title and description. A link is included for each
class to go to the course catalog listing for the class.

If the user selected more than 333 subjects, the system displays the following message
(where AAA represents the first subject selected, and MMM represents the 333rd subject):
You have selected too many subjects. Results for this search include only subjects AAA
through MMM.

Note: If accessed from the unsecure section of your site, the URL for this
page is bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec; if accessed from the
secure section of your site, the URL for this page is
bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse.

You can use the Bookstore(change me) link to access the Bookstore Information page
(bwckbook.site). This page displays links to internal and/or external bookstores
where you can look up materials for the course/section.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 77

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated and
displayed as a hyperlink to the Detailed Class Information page.

Course description Description associated with the course.

Associated Term Term associated with the class.

Registration Dates Range of dates in which the student can register for the class.

Must start between Dates between which the student must elect to start the class
(open learning classes only).

Levels Levels at which the class can be taken.

Attributes Degree attributes associated with the class.

Instructors Instructor(s) assigned to teach the class. The last name prefix is
displayed, if applicable.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Instructional Method Instructional method (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) associated with the class.
Duration Duration of the class, for open learning classes only.

Credits or Continuing Number of credit hours or continuing education units (as

Education Units applicable) for which the class can be taken.

Type Meeting types associated with the class.

Time Beginning and ending times of the class.

Days Days of the week on which the class meets.

Where Place where the class meets.

Date Range Beginning and ending dates of the class.

Schedule Type Schedule types associated with the class.

Instructors Instructors associated with the class.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 78

 Item Description

Term Control Form Web Display Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.

If you want to allow the search and display of long course

descriptions, select the Display Long Section Description
checkbox.

Schedule Form Select the Voice Response and Self-Service Available

(SSASECT) checkbox.

Web Tailor Information Use the Web Tailor internal routine,

Text bwckschd.schedule_label_text, to make any of the
following changes to the data elements on this page.
• If you want to change the prefix or suffix (field labels), modify the
desired value.
• If you want a data element to be suppressed (that is, not
displayed), delete the values for both the prefix and the suffix
values for the relevant data element.
• If you want to change the text of the link to the sections, modify
the CATALOG label.
Refer to “Set Up the Class Schedule” on page 85 for procedures
for performing these tasks.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Syllabus Available Goes to the Syllabus Information page

(bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 79

 Link Action

View Catalog Entry Goes to the Catalog Entries page

(bwckctlg.p_display_courses).

The text of this link can be modified. See “Change Catalog Link
Text on the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 88 for more
information.

You can suppress this link from being displayed, and you can
later choose to display it after it has been suppressed. See
“Suppress Catalog Link from the Class Schedule Listing Page” on
page 88 and “Display Catalog Link on the Class Schedule Listing
Page” on page 89 for more information.

Bookstore(change me) Goes to Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) where

you can link to a bookstore to query materials for the course/
section.

Return to Previous Goes to the Class Schedule Search page

(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date).

New Search Goes to the Class Schedule Search selection

(bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched).

Buttons/icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Detailed Class Information

(bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched)
The Detailed Class Information page displays information about a course selected on the
Class Schedule Listing page (bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec). The information
includes registration restrictions, base fees, prerequisite and corequisite courses, and the
basic information that appears on the Catalog Entries page. A link is included for each
class to go to the course catalog listing for the class.

Actual, waitlist, and crosslisted enrollments can be displayed on this page. Use the
following internal codes for the WEBREG internal group on the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX) to specify which counts, if any, are to be displayed:

• DISPENROLL (Display Enrollment Counts)

• DISPWL (Display Wait List Counts)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 80

 • DISPXL (Display Cross List Counts)
You can use the Bookstore(change me) link to access the Bookstore Information page
(bwckbook.site). This page displays links to internal and/or external bookstores
where you can look up materials for the course/section.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated.

Course description Description associated with the course.

Associated Term Term associated with the class.

Registration Dates Range of dates in which the student can register for the class.

Must start between Dates between which the student must elect to start the class
(open learning classes only).

Levels Levels at which the class can be taken.

Attributes Degree attributes associated with the class.

Instructors Instructor(s) assigned to teach the class. The last name prefix is
displayed, if applicable.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Instructional Method Instructional method (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) associated with the class.
Duration Duration of the class, for open learning classes only.

Credits or Continuing Number of credit hours or continuing education units (as

Education Units applicable) for which the class can be taken.

Seats Capacity Maximum number of seats assigned for the class.

Seats Actual Number of seats already taken for the class.

Seats Remaining Number of seats still available for the class.

Waitlist Seats Capacity Maximum number of waitlist places assigned for the class.

Waitlist Seats Actual Number of waitlist places already taken for the class.

Waitlist Seats Remaining Number of waitlist places still available for the class.

Fees Level Level associated with the fee.

Fees Description Description of the fee.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 81

 Item Description/Source Information

Fees Amount Monetary amount of the fee.

Restrictions Registration restrictions for the class.

Corequisites Course(s) in which the student must register concurrent with this
one. The course number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries
page for the corequisite course.

Prerequisites Prerequisites that the student must have successfully completed

to register in this one. If the prerequisite is a course, the course
number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries page for the
prerequisite course.

CAPP Prerequisites that the student must have successfully completed

Pre-requisites to register in this one. If the prerequisite is a course, the course
(General Requirements) number is a hyperlink to the Catalog Entries page for the
prerequisite course.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Web Display Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.

If you want to allow the search and display of long section

descriptions, select the Display Long Section Description
checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 82

 Link Action

Syllabus Available Goes to the Syllabus Information page

(bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus).

Bookstore(change me) Goes to Bookstore Information page (bwckbook.site) where

you can link to a bookstore to query materials for the course/
section.

Return to Previous Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

New Search Goes to the Class Schedule Search selection

(bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched).

Buttons/icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Syllabus Information (bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus)

This page is displayed when a user selects the Syllabus Available link on the Class
Schedule Listing (bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec) or Detailed Class Information
(bwckschd.p_disp_detail_sched) page. It displays additional information that
allows the user to decide whether or not the class meets his or her needs. This page is
available only if syllabus information has been defined in the system.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated.

Associated Term Term associated with the class.

Levels Levels at which the class can be taken.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 83

 Item Description/Source Information

Schedule Type Schedule types associated with the class.

Instructional Method Instructional method (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) associated with the class.
Duration Duration of the class, for open learning classes only.

Learning Objectives Instructor’s learning objectives for the class.

Required Materials Materials required for the class.

Technical Requirements Technical requirements for the class.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Web Display Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.

If you want to allow the search and display of long section

descriptions, select the Display Long Section Description
checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Previous Goes to the previous page being viewed by the user.

New Search Class Schedule Search selection

(bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 84

 Buttons/icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Set Up the Class Schedule

This section provides step-by-step procedures for the following tasks for setting up the
course catalog:

• “Implement the Class Schedule” on page 85

• “Customize the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 87
• “Customize the Class Schedule Search Page” on page 89

Implement the Class Schedule

This procedure explains how to implement your class schedule on the Web. Refer to the
Banner Student User Guide for more information about Banner forms.
1. Specify which fields you want to have included on the Class Schedule Search
selection page (bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched). You can include either or both
of the following.
• To include the term in the Search by Term pulldown list, select the Master Web
Term Control checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM).
• To display the Search by Date Range fields, enter Y in the External Code field for
the SCHBYDATE internal code on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX).

Internal
External Code Seq Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y SCHBYDATE 1 WEBREG Dynamic Schedule Sysdate

by Date Range

2. In the Web Display Controls window of the Term Control Form (SOATERM), specify
which fields you want to have included on the Class Schedule Search page
(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date). You can include as many or as few of the
following as you want.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 85

 2.1. To include schedule types in the Schedule Type pulldown list, select the
Search by Schedule Type checkbox.
2.2. To include instructional methods in the Instructional Method pulldown list,
select the Search by Instructional Method checkbox.
2.3. To include campuses in the Campus pulldown list, select the Search by
Campus checkbox.
2.4. To include levels in the Course Level pulldown list, select the Search by Level
checkbox.
2.5. To include durations in the Duration pulldown list, select the Search by
Duration checkbox.
2.6. To include instructors in the Instructor pulldown list, select the Search by
Instructor checkbox.
2.7. To include sessions in the Session pulldown list, select the Search by Session
checkbox.
2.8. To include course attributes in the Attribute Type pulldown list, select the
Search by Course Attribute checkbox.
2.9. If you want to allow the search and display of long course titles, select the
Display Long Course Title checkbox.
2.10. If you want to allow the search and display of long course descriptions, select
the Display Long Course Description checkbox.
3. On the Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP), specify which validation
codes are to be displayed on the Web for the following validation tables:
• Schedule Type Code Validation (STVSCHD)
• Instruction Method Validation (GTVINSM)
• Campus Code Validation (STVCAMP)
• Level Code Validation (STVLEVL)
• Part of Term Code Validation (STVPTRM)
• Session Code Validation (STVSESS)
• Attribute Validation (STVATTR)
4. For each subject that you want to be available on the Web, select the Web Ind
checkbox on the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ).
5. For each section that you want to be available on the Web, select the Voice
Response and Self-Service Available checkbox on the Schedule Form (SSASECT).

Note: Leaving the Voice Response and Self-Service Available

checkbox cleared will not prevent a student from registering on the Web if
he or she enters the CRN in the Add Classes Worksheet on the Add or
Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

6. If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles, select the Display
Long Section Title checkbox on SOATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 86

 7. If you want to allow the search and display of long section descriptions, select the
Display Long Section Description checkbox on SOATERM.

Customize the Class Schedule Listing Page

This section provides the following procedures for customizing your Class Schedule
Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec):
• “Change Data Element Names for the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 87
• “Suppress Data Elements from the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 87
• “Display Data Elements on the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 88
• “Change Catalog Link Text on the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 88
• “Suppress Catalog Link from the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 88
• “Display Catalog Link on the Class Schedule Listing Page” on page 89

Change Data Element Names for the Class Schedule Listing Page
This procedure explains how to change the name (field label) of a data element on the
Class Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select the PREFIX or SUFFIX item, as desired, for the data element to be changed.
5. Enter the desired value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Suppress Data Elements from the Class Schedule Listing Page

This procedure explains how to suppress a data element from appearing on the Class
Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select the PREFIX item for the data element to be suppressed.
5. Delete the value in the Information Text field.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 87

 6. Click Submit Changes.
7. Select the SUFFIX item for the data element to be suppressed.
8. Delete the value in the Information Text field.
9. Click Submit Changes.

Display Data Elements on the Class Schedule Listing Page

This procedure explains how to display a data element on the Class Schedule Listing
page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec) that
has previously been suppressed.
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select the PREFIX or SUFFIX item, as desired, for the data element to be displayed.
5. Enter the desired value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Note: If desired, you can specify values for both prefix and suffix.

Change Catalog Link Text on the Class Schedule Listing Page

This procedure explains how to change the text of the Catalog link on the Class Schedule
Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

Note: View Catalog Entries is the delivered value for this link, but
you can change it.

1. Access Web Tailor.

2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select CATALOG.
5. Enter the desired text in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Suppress Catalog Link from the Class Schedule Listing Page

This procedure explains how to suppress the Catalog link from appearing on the Class
Schedule Listing page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or
bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 88

 1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select CATALOG.
5. Delete the value in the Information Text field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Display Catalog Link on the Class Schedule Listing Page

This procedure explains how to display the Catalog link on the Class Schedule Listing
page (bwckctlg.p_disp_listcrse or bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec) if it
has previously been suppressed.
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_label_text.
4. Select CATALOG.
5. Enter View Catalog Entry (or any other desired text) in the Information Text
field.
6. Click Submit Changes.

Customize the Class Schedule Search Page

This procedure explains how to customize the labels on the Class Schedule Search page
(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date).
1. Access Web Tailor.
2. Select Information Text from the Web Tailor Menu.
3. Select bwckschd.schedule_search_label_text.
4. Select the link of the label to be changed.
5. Enter the desired text in the Information Text field.
6. If desired, select an image from the pulldown list in the Image field.
7. If desired, add additional text in the Comment field.
8. Click Submit Changes.

Use the Class Schedule

This section contains information on searching for classes.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 89

 Search for Classes
This procedure explains how a user searches for classes in your class schedule.
1. From your institution’s Web site, the student selects the Class Schedule link from the
menu.
2. The Class Schedule Search page (bwckschd.p_disp_dyn_sched) is
displayed. The student can choose a term from the Search by Term pulldown list or
enter a date range in the From and To fields. The user then selects the Submit
button.
3. The Class Schedule Search page (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date) is displayed.
On this page the student can choose from a variety of course characteristics to narrow
the search. At a minimum, at least one selection must be made from the Subject
pulldown list. The user then selects the Class Search button.

Note: Your institution can control what is displayed in the pulldown lists
(with the exception of Subject) on the Web Display List Customization
Form (SOAWDSP).

4. The Class Schedule Listing page (bwckschd.p_get_crse_unsec) displays the

courses and related information found using the search criteria specified on the Class
Schedule Search page.
If the user selects the link composed of the subject, course number, and title, the
Detailed Class Information page (bwckctlg.p_disp_detail_sched) is
displayed.
If the user selects a View Catalog Entry link, the Catalog Entries page
(bwckctlg.p_display_courses) is displayed.
If the user selects a Syllabus Available link, the Syllabus Information page
(bwckschd.p_disp_syllabus) is displayed.
The student can also select either the Return to Previous link or the New Search
link.
• Return to Previous causes the Class Schedule Search page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Class Schedule Search page to be displayed.
5. The Detailed Class Information page displays further information about the course
selected on the Class Schedule Listing page.
If available, the following links can be selected to go to the Catalog Entries page for
the selected section:
• Prerequisites
• Corequisites
The student can also select either the Return to Previous link or the New Search
link.
• Return to Previous causes the Class Schedule Listing page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Class Schedule Search page to be displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 90

 6. If the student chooses the Syllabus Available link on the Detailed Class Information
page, the Syllabus Information page is displayed. This page displays additional
information that allows the user to decide whether or not the class meets his or her
needs.
The student can also select either the Return to Previous link or the New Search
link.
• Return to Previous causes the Detailed Class Information page to be displayed.
• New Search causes the Class Schedule Search page to be displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Class Schedule 91

 Prospect Self-Service

Prospect Self-Service functionality enables prospective students to submit information to

your institution. Any prospective student interested in your institution can access Prospect
Self-Service from the Banner Web home page (or wherever your institution places an
appropriate link). The system displays the Prospective Students page
(bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType), which the user uses to select a prospect
type (graduate, undergraduate, etc.).

After the user selects the prospect type, the system displays the Prospect Information
Form page (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain) for the specified prospect type. The
content and order of the data entry fields is determined by your institution when you set up
Prospect Self-Service.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Prospect Self-Service Web Pages” on page 92, which provides details about each Web
page in Prospect Self-Service

• “Set Up Prospect Self-Service” on page 99, which provides detailed steps for setting up
Prospect Self-Service

• “Migrate Prospect Self-Service Data to Banner” on page 104, which provides

information about migrating information for Prospect Self-Service to Banner

Prospect Self-Service Web Pages

The following Web pages compose Prospect Self-Service:

• “Prospective Students (bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType)” on page 92

• “Prospect Data Entry (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain)” on page 93

Prospective Students
(bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType)
The Prospective Students page allows the user to select a prospect type (graduate,
undergraduate, etc.).

If desired, you can create one or more links to a version of this page that displays only a
subset of prospect types. For example, you can create two links on your home page, one
for undergraduate prospects and one for graduate prospects. For more information about
how to do this, refer to “Setup Steps” on page 99.

This page is delivered with a link to the Prospective Students page. A link to Prospect Self-
Service can be placed anywhere within your institution’s Web site.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 92

 Web Page Fields
This page does not have fields.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Electronic Prospect Select the Enter on WEB checkbox for each prospect type that
Validation Form you want to be available on the Web.
(STVPREL)
If you want to display subsets of prospects types on different
pages, enter the corresponding Web page ID in the WEB Page ID
field for each prospect type that you want to be available on the
Web.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Prospect Data Entry (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain)

The Prospect Data Entry page captures information from prospective students. Different
sections can appear on this page depending on the prospect type selected on the
Prospective Students page (bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType). The data entry
page includes all or a subset of the data entry sections, depending on what you specified
on the Web Prospect Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 93

 This page is delivered with a link to the Prospective Students page. A link to Prospect
Self-Service can be placed anywhere within your institution’s Web site.

You can add Information Text to any section that is to be displayed. Add or modify
Information Text by choosing the Information Text link on the Web Tailor Menu, and then
selecting the bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain procedure. The Information Text
labels that can be used to add Information Text for that section are the following:

• ADDRESS1 • INTERNATNL

• ADDRESS2 • MAJOR

• BIRTHDATE • MATERIAL

• CITIZENSHIP • NAME

• EMAIL • NTYPE

• ENTRYTERM • PRIORCOLL

• ETHNICITY • SSNTINTFN

• GENDER • STUDENTTYP

• HIGHSCHOOL • TELE3

• HOWILEARNED • TESTSCORES

• INTERESTS • VISA

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

State or Province The values in the pulldown list come from the State/Province
Code Validation Form (STVSTAT).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 94

 Item Description/Source Information

County The values in the pulldown list come from the County Code
Validation Form (STVCNTY).

Nation The values in the pulldown list come from the Nation Code
Validation Form (STVNATN).

Phone Country Code Code that designates the region and country of the telephone
number (no validation).

Citizenship The values in the pulldown list come from the Citizen Type Code
Validation Form (STVCITZ).

Term of Entry The values in the pulldown list come from the Term Code
Validation Form (STVTERM).

Ethnicity The values in the pulldown list come from the Ethnic Code
Validation Form (STVETHN).

Ethnic Category User’s ethnic category. The values available for selection
(Hispanic or Latino and Not Hispanic or Latino)
are now displayed as checkboxes.

The label Ethnic Category is displayed only when this field is

required. Otherwise, Information Text is used instead of a field
label.

Race User’s race(s). The values available for selection are now
displayed as checkboxes.

The column labels are the category descriptions associated with

regulatory codes that are marked as system required on the
Regulatory Race Validation Form (GTVRRAC), which are
delivered. Each column displays the races associated with the
race code on the Race Rules Form (GORRACE).

The label Race is displayed only when this field is required.

Otherwise, Information Text is used instead of a field label.

Interests Values in the pulldown list come from the Outside Interest Code
Validation Form (STVINTS).

Nation of Citizenship The values in the pulldown list come from STVNATN.

Nation of Birth The values in the pulldown list come from STVNATN.

Native Language The values in the pulldown list come from the Language Code
Validation Form (STVLANG).

Major The values in the pulldown list come from the Major, Minor,
Concentration Code Validation Form (STVMAJR).

Name Type The values in the pulldown list come from the Name Type
Validation Form (GTVNTYP).

Degree The values in the pulldown list come from the Degree Code
Validation Form (STVDEGC).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 95

 Item Description/Source Information

Student Type The values in the pulldown list come from the Student Type Code
Validation Form (STVSTYP).

Telephone Type The values in the pulldown list come from the Telephone Type
Validation Form (STVTELE).

Test Type The values in the pulldown list come from the Test Code
Validation Form (STVTESC).

Request Materials The values in the pulldown list come from the Material Code
Validation Form (STVMATL).

Visa Type The values in the pulldown list come from the Visa Type Code
Validation Form (STVVTYP).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web for Prospects Specify the selection codes that will be displayed for each
Selection Rules Form prospect type.
(SRAWPRO)
Specify the order in which these sections will be displayed by
entering sequence numbers in the Display Order on Web fields.

If you want a response to be required to be completed by the

prospect, select the Response Required on Web checkbox for
the selection code.

Warning! Do not check the Response

Required on Web checkbox for the
ETHNICITY selection code if requiring
users to provide ethnicity and race
information is prohibited.

If you do not want a section to be displayed, remove the selection

code record from the Selection Code Validation Table
(STVWPIC).

Web for Prospects Display Limit the Banner validation items that are to appear in the Web
Rules Form (SRAWPDS) pulldown lists.

If you do not limit validation items on this form, all values in the
validation table will appear in the Web pulldown list.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 96

 Item Description

Electronic Prospect Define default recruit values if you want to default values into the
Default Options Form Prospect Record (SRBRECR) based on the prospect type.
(SRAPRED)

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items in the associated tables.

Electronic Prospect
Data Section Temporary Table Permanent Table

ADDRESS1 SRTADDR SPRADDR

ADDRESS2 SRTADDR SPRADDR

BIRTHDATE SRTPERS SPBPERS

CITIZENSHIP SRTPERS SPBPERS

EMAIL SRTEMAL GOREMAL

ENTRYTERM SRTPREL SRBRECR

ETHNICITY SRTPERS SPBPERS

GENDER SRTPERS SPBPERS

HIGHSCHOOL SRTHSCH SORHSCH

HOWILEARN SRTLEND SRRLEND

INTERESTS SRTINTS SORINTS

INTERNATIONAL SRTINTL SPRINTL

MAJOR SRTPREL SRBRECR

NTYPE SRTIDEN SPRIDEN

NAME SRTIDEN SPRIDEN

PRIORCOLL SRTPCOL SORPCOL

RACE SARPRAC GORPRAC

SSNTINTFN SRTPERS SRBPERS

STUDENTTYP SRTPREL SRBRECR

TELE3 SRTTELE SPRTELE

TESTSCORES SRTTEST SORTEST

MATERIAL SRTMATL GURMAIL

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 97

 Electronic Prospect
Data Section Temporary Table Permanent Table

VISA SRTINTL GORVISA

This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Ethnicity and ethnic category Stored in the Temporary Personal table (SRTPERS), loaded to
the permanent Basic Person table (SPBPERS), and can be
viewed on the General Person Form (SPAPERS) or in the
Biographical Information window of the Quick Recruit Form
(SRAQUIK), the Quick Entry Form (SAAQUIK), or the General
Person Identification Form (SPAIDEN).

Race Stored in the Electronic Admissions Electronic Temporary Race

table (SRTPRAC), loaded to the permanent Race table
(GORPRAC), and can be viewed on SPAPERS or in the
Biographical Information window of SRAQUIK, SAAQUIK or
SPAIDEN.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Look Up High School These two buttons enable the user to search for the high school or
Code college code. This search limits the display by state or province
and then by city. For a user to be able to locate a school using this
Look Up College Code search capability, a school’s address must be defined in the
Source/Background Validation Form (SOASBGI). In addition, the
address must have both a city and either a state/province or
nation code in order to be displayed in the search results.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 98

 Set Up Prospect Self-Service
This section explains how to implement Prospect Self-Service.

Setup Summary
The following steps summarize the actions you need to take to set up Prospect Self-
Service at your institution. These steps are described in detail in the next section.

Warning! Because of data relationships and dependencies, you must

perform these steps in the order specified.

1. Define the prospect codes for display on the Web on the Electronic Prospect
Validation Form (STVPREL).
2. Define the codes for how prospects learned about your institution on the Web
Prospect How I Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND).
3. Review the codes for placing electronic elements in the Web acknowledgment letter
on the Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes Form (STVWACK). These are
predefined and delivered. You can define additional codes, if desired.
4. Review the Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form (STVWPIC) to
identify which selection codes or sections you want to choose to appear on the Web.
5. Use the Web for Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO) to specify the
selection codes that will be displayed for each prospect type, and also to specify the
order in which these sections will be displayed.
6. On the Electronic Prospect Default Options Form (SRAPRED), enter any default
recruit values for Web-entered data (optional).
7. Define the Banner validation items on the Web for Prospects Display Rules Form
(SRAWPDS) that are to appear in the Web pulldown lists.
8. Update the source/background addresses on the Source/Background Institution Base
Form (SOASBGI) for unknown schools or home schooling.
9. Write your acknowledgment letter on the Web Acknowledgment Message Form
(SRAWACK) (optional).
10. Enter values for PREL group rules on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules
Form (SAAERUL).

Setup Steps
The following steps provide detailed information to set up Prospect Self-Service. The
steps include only the information you need for implementing Prospect Self-Service. Refer
to the Banner Student Online Help for complete information about each Banner form.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 99

 Warning! Because of data relationships and dependencies, you must
perform these steps in the order specified.

1. Take the following actions on the Electronic Prospect Validation Form (STVPREL).
1.1. Define each prospect code you want displayed on the Web.
1.2. Select the Enter on WEB checkbox for each prospect code you want displayed
on the Web.

Note: You can define new codes for the Web and/or specify that existing
codes be available on the Web.

The Interface Code field is used to specify the matching rules that will be applied
when the Electronic Prospect Matching Process (SRRSRIN) is used to match
electronic prospects to Banner data. Different matching rules can be used for different
prospect types, if desired.
The WEB Page ID field can be used to group related prospect codes. When the same
web page ID is used for different prospect codes, the Prospective Student page
(bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType) can be displayed with only the set of
grouped values. Using this feature (and different URLs, which is discussed later), you
can define different pages in Prospect Self-Service to display different categories of
students. For example, you can create a page titled Undergraduate Prospective
Students, give it the Web page ID UG, and assign the UG Web page ID to the group of
prospect codes for prospective undergraduates. Likewise you can create a page titled
Graduate Prospective Students, give it the Web page ID GR, and assign the GR Web
page ID to the group of prospect codes for prospective graduates. You would then use
the appropriate values as parameters in the links, as shown in the following examples:
– bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType?prel_type=UGPR

– bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType?prel_type=GRPR
Link directly to the Prospect Data Entry page and specify the Prospect Type.
You can also choose to bypass the Prospective Students page
(bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType) and have the user go directly to the
Prospect Information Form page (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain). To do this,
you must specify the prospect type in the link, as shown in the following example:
bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain?prel_code_in=WWWU&button_t
ext_in=Continue
In this example, WWWU is the prospect type, and the Prospect Information Form page
will display the sections defined for the WWWU prospect type. (This is a simplified
example of a URL. When you place a link to Prospect Self-Service in your Web site,
you must also include the path to the object.)
2. Define the codes for how prospects learned about your institution on the Web
Prospect How I Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND).
3. Review the codes for placing electronic elements in the Web acknowledgment letter
on the Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes Form (STVWACK).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 100

 4. Review the Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form (STVWPIC) to
identify which selection codes or sections you want to choose to appear on the Web.
The following selection codes are delivered with Prospect Self-Service:

ADDRESS1 INTERNATNL

ADDRESS2 MAJOR

BIRTHDATE MATERIAL

CITIZENSHIP NAME

EMAIL NTYPE

ENTRYTERM PRIORCOLL

ETHNICITY SSNTINTFN

GENDER STUDENTTYP

HIGHSCHOOL TELE3

HOWILEARNED TESTSCORES

INTERESTS VISA

These codes are used on the Web Prospect Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO) to
specify which fields are displayed on the Prospect Information Form page
(bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain). Prospect Self-Service is delivered with a
script that inserts default Web Tailor values for these selection codes.
5. Use the Web for Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO) to specify the
selection codes that will be displayed for each prospect type, and also to specify the
order in which these sections will be displayed.
5.1. In the Selection Code field, enter each selection code you want displayed on
the Web for the prospect code entered in the Key Block. (Selection codes are
defined in the Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form
[STVWPIC].)
The selection codes represent actual questions that prospective students will be
asked to answer on the Prospect Information Form page
(bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain).
When you first define a new prospect code in SRAWPRO, the selection codes
Name and Address1 are automatically displayed with the Response Required
on Web checkboxes selected. If you do not enter any selection codes for a
prospect code, the prospect code will not be included in the list of available
prospect types on the Prospective Students page
(bwskwpro.P_ChooseProspectType).
5.2. In the Display Order on Web column, specify the order in which each selection
code is to appear on the Prospect Information Form page.
5.3. Select the Response Required on Web checkbox for each selection code that
you want to be required for the user to complete.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 101

 Important information about the Visa and International selection codes
Visa and International selection codes are included on STVWPIC. The Prospect
Information Form page (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain) can be set up using
the Visa selection code, the International selection code, or both.
If the Visa selection code is attached to a prospect code on SRAWPRO, the following
fields are displayed on the Prospect Information Form page:
• Visa Type
• Visa Number (up to 18 digits in length)
• Issue Date
• Expiration Date
For the Visa information to be loaded to the Visa Information table (GORVISA), all four
Visa fields must be entered. Therefore, to ensure that prospective students enter all of
the information, select the Response Required on Web checkbox for the Visa
selection code.
If the International selection code is attached to a prospect code on SRAWPRO, the
following fields are displayed on the Prospect Information Form page:
• Nation of Citizenship
• Nation of Birth
• Native Language
• Foreign SSN
Any data entered in the International area is loaded to the International Information
Table (GOBINTL) when the prospect record is loaded. No Visa information is required
for the International data to be loaded.
If a Visa data is entered in the Visa section, but the Nation of Citizenship field is left
blank in the International section, then the process which loads prospect data into
Banner uses the default value set up on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX)
for internal code VISANTNDEF as the Nation of Issue value on GORVISA. It also
uses the value stored on GTVSDAX for internal code VISAISSDEF as the Issuing
Authority value on GORVISA.
6. On the Electronic Prospect Default Options Form (SRAPRED), enter default recruit
values for Web-entered data (optional).
The following fields are required in the Recruiting module:
• Level
• Catalog Term
• Degree
• Major
If you do not enter values on SRAPRED and this data is not entered on the Web,
Banner defaults are used for the Recruit record. If you enter any data on this form, you
must enter a value in the Level field.
7. On the Web for Prospects Display Rules Form (SRAWPDS), specify the items that
you want to be displayed in the pulldown lists in Prospect Self-Service.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 102

 The values in the pulldown lists displayed in Prospect Self-Service come from Banner
validation tables. This form allows you to reduce the number of choices from which the
user can select or to change the descriptions that are displayed on the Web. If you do
not enter data on this form, all entries in the pertinent validation tables are listed in the
associated pulldown lists.
To limit values or modify a description, enter the following information.
• In the Table Name field, enter the last four characters of the validation table (TERM
for STVTERM, CITZ for STVCITZ, RESD for STVRESD, and so on).
• In the Code Value field, enter code value that you want to be displayed on the Web.
• If you want to modify the code’s description, modify the value in the Description
field.
8. Update the source/background addresses on the Source/Background Institution Base
Form (SOASBGI) for unknown schools or home schooling.
The Prospect Information Form page (bwskwpro.P_WebProspectMain)
includes functionality for users to search for high schools and colleges. For the name
of a school to be included, the address data for the school must be defined on
SOASBGI.
If the user enters a school name that is not already defined on SOASGBI, the system
adds the school name with the value from the rule on the Electronic Admissions
Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) for UNKNOWNHSCH. If the prospect enters a
school code that is not included on the Source/Background Institution Code Validation
Form (STVSBGI), the system stores the value in the SRTHSCH or SRTPCOL table in
the SBGI_CODE_INVALID column.
The high school entry section has an alternative checkbox where the prospect can
indicate that he or she has been home schooled. The STVSBGI value for home
schooling must be stored on the SAAERUL rule for the PREL group and
HOMESCHOOL label.
9. Write your acknowledgment letter on the Web for Prospects Acknowledgment
Message Form (SRAWACK) (optional).
10. On the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL), define group rules
for the PREL group.
The “How I Learned” area captures how the prospect learned about your institution.
The data is initially stored in the electronic prospect tables and is viewable using the
Electronic Prospect Detail Form (SRAPREL). After the prospect has been migrated to
Banner, the data is available on the Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR).
The How I Learned data is migrated to the recruit record based on the new rule value
CREATLEARNED, which is stored on SAAERUL under the group PREL. If the
CREATELEARNED rule is Y, the prospect’s How I Learned data is migrated to the
recruit How I Learned data. The How I Learned code is validated on the Web Prospect
How I Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND).
The following rules are used for entering the new Web data and for controlling the
migration of the new How I Learned data. (Refer to the Banner Student User Guide for
the rules for migrating information from the Prospect temporary tables to the Banner
tables.)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 103

 • HOMESCHOOL — The SBGI code to be used if the prospect selects the Home
Schooled checkbox. This applies only to the Web. The value entered on SAAERUL
for HOMESCHOOL must be a valid high school on STVSBGI.
• UNKNOWNHSCH — The SBGI code to be used if the prospect enters an invalid code
in the High School Code field. The code you specify for UNKNOWNHSCH is entered
into SRTHSCH_SBGI_CODE; the code entered by the student is entered into
SRTHSCH_SBGI_CODE_INVALID. The code you specify for UNKNOWNHSCH is
also used if the prospect leaves the High School Code field blank and enters the
name of the institution or any of the self-reported data. This applies only to the Web.
The value entered on SAAERUL for UNKNOWNHSCH must be a valid high school on
STVSBGI.
• UNKNOWNPCOL — The SBGI code to be used if the prospect enters an invalid code
in the College Code field. The code you specify for UNKNOWNPCOL is entered into
SRTPCOL_SBGI_CODE; the code entered by the student is entered into
SRTPCOL_SBGI_CODE_INVALID. The code you specify for UNKNOWNPCOL is
also used if the prospect leaves the College Code field blank and enters the name
of the institution or any of the self-reported data. This applies only to the Web. The
value entered on SAAERUL for UNKNOWNPCOL must be a valid institution on
STVSBGI.
• CREATELEARNED — This code tells the system to create How I Learned
information if data is entered by a prospect who is new to Banner, or if the prospect
is matched to a recruit and the recruit term, level, and campus are different. The
How I Learned information is always created if the prospect is matched to an
applicant and the UPDATEIIFAPP is Y, or if the prospect is matched to a recruit
with the same term, level, and campus. The How I Learned data is entered only on
the Web.
• CREATEMATERIALS — This code tells the system to create requested materials
information if data is entered by a prospect who is new to Banner, or if the prospect
is matched to a recruit and the recruit term, level, and campus are different. The
materials are always created if the prospect is matched to an applicant and the
UPDATEIIFAPP is Y, or if the prospect is matched to a recruit with the same term,
level, and campus.
• WEBGENID — This code tells the system to use the generated ID or use the Social
Security number entered by the prospect. Enter G to always use the generated ID,
which uses SOBSEQN functions. Enter S to use the SSN entered on the Web page.
If none is entered, use a generated ID. This applies only to the Web.

Prospect Self-Service is now ready for you to accept information from prospective
students via the World Wide Web using Banner Prospect Self-Service processing.

Migrate Prospect Self-Service Data to Banner

Prospect Self-Service data follows the same procedures for viewing, matching, and
loading into Banner as the Search and Test Score File Electronic Prospect Types. (For
more information, refer to the "Search and Test Score Data Load" section in the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 104

 “Recruiting” chapter of the Banner Student User Guide.) All the Prospect Self-Service
data, however, is entered and validated on the Web.

The following is a summary of the forms and processes that are available to view
electronic prospects and to migrate the data from the Electronic Prospect tables to the
Banner tables. Refer to the Student documentation for more information.

• Electronic Prospect Inquiry Form (SRIPREL) — This form is used to list and search for
electronic prospects. From this form, you can view detail about a prospect, access the
Prospect Matching Form (SRQMTCH), and migrate a prospect to the Banner tables.

• Electronic Prospect Detail Form (SRAPREL) — This form is used to view detail about a
prospect. The main window displays the name, address, recruit, high school, and prior
college data. The sub window displays the test scores, interests, and How I Learned
data.

• Prospect Matching Form (SRQMTCH) — This form is used to match an electronic

prospect and to generate a new prospect ID, if necessary. This form is accessible only
through SRIPREL.

• Electronic Prospect View (SRVPREL) — This view includes a composite of electronic

prospect data.

• Electronic Prospect Match Process (SRRSRIN) — This batch process is used to match
electronic prospects to Production Banner. This process requires that match rules be
entered for the prospect interface code on GORCMRL.

• Migrate Electronic Prospects Process (SRRPREL) — This batch process is used to

migrate new or matched electronic prospects to Production Banner. The electronic
prospects must have a status of N or M for this process.

• Electronic Prospect Purge Process (SRTPURG) — This batch process is used to purge
electronic prospect data.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Prospect Self-Service 105

 Admissions Self-Service

Admissions Self-Service allows prospective students to complete and submit applications

for admission online. The system can create a recruit, applicant and/or student record
automatically. Students can use Admissions Self-Service to view the status of required
supporting materials (transcripts, test scores, letters of recommendation, essays, etc.),
overall application status, and the current decision assigned to applications.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Overview” on page 106, which provides a high-level overview of Admissions Self-

Service

• “Admissions Self-Service Web Pages” on page 109, which provides details about each
Web page in Admissions Self-Service

• “Set Up Admissions Self-Service” on page 175, which provides detailed steps for setting
up Admissions Self-Service

• “Process Self-Service Admission Applications” on page 215, which provides detailed

steps for processing admission applications received via self-service

• “Set Up Quick Start for Student Self-Service” on page 226, which provides information
about Quick Start processing for automatically processing Web applications

• “Set Up Curriculum Processing for Admissions Self-Service” on page 232, which

provides information about and instructions for setting up curriculum processing for Web
applications

• “Set Up Web Acceptance of Admissions Offer” on page 235, which provides a step-by-
step procedure for allowing applicants to use the Web for notifying your institution of
acceptance decisions

• “Use Payment and Deposit Processing with Applications” on page 237, which provides
a step-by-step procedure for allowing applicants to use the Web for application payment
and deposit processing

Overview
As delivered, Admissions Self-Service can be accessed in the following ways.

• An existing or prior student (such as an undergraduate at an institution who wishes to

apply for graduate studies) can select the Admissions link from the Student & Financial
Aid menu in the secure area. To access the secure area, the student must login using a
valid Banner ID and personal identification number (PIN).

• The second method of accessing Admissions is available to any prospective student

wishing to apply. The applicant can select the Apply for Admissions link from the
homepage. From there, the user has two options:

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 106

 New User
A new user selects the First time user account creation link and is asked to enter a
login ID (which may be any value of 9 characters or less) and a 6-digit (numbers only)
PIN. If the applicant does not specify a login ID, one is generated for him or her. From
there, the user is asked to select the type of application to be filled out, and then is
asked for some basic name information. Lastly, the Application Checklist page is
displayed, and the user completes the sections displayed.

Returning User
If the user is a returning user, once the login ID and PIN are entered, the Application
Menu is displayed. The applicant chooses to create a new application, update an
incomplete application, or view summary information for applications that have been
completed and/or pushed into Banner. The user can also view applications that were
not entered via the Web if a Third Party Access Audit Form (GOATPAD) PIN record
has been created for him or her.

To apply online, the applicant must select the application type and the term for which they
are applying. The system then guides him or her through the admission application pages.
The Application Checklist page (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) allows the applicant to
track his or her progress in completing the application.

The online application is presented on a number of separate Web pages, which your
institution chooses and can customize. The sections that can be selected for display
include:

• Name
• First Address and Phone
• Second Address and Phone
• Personal Information
• Planned Course of Study
• Parental Information
• Previous College
• High School
• Test Scores
• International Information
• Activities
• Additional Information
• Requested Materials
• Essay Questions
The following application types are delivered as sample data in Student Self-Service:

• Default Example - all sections (00)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 107

 • Undergraduate Freshman (W1)
• Undergraduate Transfer (W2)
• International Undergraduate Freshman (W3)
• International Undergraduate Transfer (W4)
• Graduate Studies (W5)
• International Graduate Studies (W6)
• Continuing Education, Non Degree (W7)
Before an applicant can complete the application, a minimum amount of required
information must be provided. Required information is collected in a limited number of
application sections. Each application type must include the required sections or else
applicants will not be able to mark their applications complete. Required data and their
associated application sections are:

• Application type and application term, which are collected on the initial data page
(bwskalog.P_DispNewApp). These values are then displayed in all Web
application status summary lists. The application type controls which sections are
displayed on the Application Checklist page (bwskalog.P_DispIndex). It also
indicates if Quick Start processing is enabled for the application.

• First and last name, which are collected on the Apply for Admissions page
(bwskalog.P_DispNewApp).

• Address, which is collected on either the First Address and Phone page
(bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1)or the Second Address and Phone page
(bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr2).

• Field of study, which is selected on the Planned Course of Study page

(bwskapln.P_DispAppPlan). At least one field of study must be selected.

The applicant can complete the entire application all at one time or can complete portions
and return later.

Institutions have the option of creating a set of customized “Signature” pages, one of
which is displayed after a student indicates that the application is complete and ready for
submission. This page can be used to display instructions, indicate a Banner ID/request a
signature, and/or indicate the address to which the signature and application fee should
be sent. The student’s admission Web ID and application number appear in small print at
the lower left of the page. Details on customizing your Signature page and instructing the
Web to display it are included in “Set Up Admissions Self-Service” on page 175.

Applicants can pay their application fee online using the credit card functionality, which is
optional. Details on setting up credit card payment of application fees are included in “Set
Up Admissions Self-Service” on page 175.

Web application data is stored in a number of holding tables in the Banner database.
These tables allow applications to be submitted and stored in a location different from the
regular application tables. Applications can be pushed from these tables to Banner tables
manually, via a batch process, or automatically, using Quick Start processing. For more
information on the various push processes, consult the Banner Student documentation.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 108

 Admissions Self-Service Web Pages
The following Web pages compose Banner Student Self-Service Admissions:

• “Admissions Login (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNon)” on page 110

• “Admissions Login - New User (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNew)” on page 112
• “Select an Application Type (bwskalog.P_DispChoice)” on page 114
• “Apply for Admissions (bwskalog.P_DispNewApp)” on page 116
• “Application Checklist (bwskalog.P_DispIndex)” on page 118
• “Name (bwskanam.P_DispAppName)” on page 121
• “First Address and Phone (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1) and Second Address and
Phone (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr2)” on page 123

• “Personal Information (bwskaper.P_DispAppPersonal)” on page 126

• “Planned Course of Study (bwskapln.P_DispAppPlan)” on page 131
• “Parental Information (bwskapar.P_DispAppParents)” on page 135
• “Previous College (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege)” on page 137
• “High School (bwskahsc.P_DispAppHighSch)” on page 141
• “College Lookup or High School Lookup (bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code)” on page 144
• “Test Scores (bwskatst.P_DispAppTests)” on page 147
• “International Information (bwskaint.P_DispAppInternational)” on page 149
• “Activities (bwskaact.P_DispAppActivities)” on page 151
• “Additional Information (bwskaudf.P_DispAppUserDef)” on page 153
• “Requested Materials (bwskamat.P_DispAppMaterials)” on page 155
• “Essays (bwskaess.P_DispAppEssay)” on page 157
• “Application Preference (bwskaprf.p_disp_pref)” on page 159
• “Application Fee Payment (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex)” on page 161
• “Admissions Agreement (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex)” on page 162
• “Signature (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2)” on page 164
• “Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices)” on page 165
• “Web Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatus)” on page 168
• “Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatusSaradap)” on page 169
• “Applicant Withdrawal Information (bwskadec.P_ApplicationWDInfo)” on page 172

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 109

 Admissions Login (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNon)
The Admissions Login page is used to login to the Public Access Apply for Admissions
area.

Any person can file an application for admission from the Public Access area by supplying
a self-determined login ID and PIN. If the user does not yet have a login ID and PIN, he or
she can select the First time user account creation link to go to the Admissions Login -
New User page to create one.

If a user has cookies disabled in his or her browser, the system displays the message:

This system requires the use of HTTP cookies to verify authorization information. Our
system has detected that your browser has disabled HTTP cookies, or does not support
them. Please refer to the Help page for more information on how to correctly configure
your browser for use with this system.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Login ID The Login ID can be entered by the person or generated by the

system if one is not supplied during the original login. The entered
value is stored in the Electronic Admissions Non-Student Table
(SABNSTU) and is used to access the applicant’s data on the
Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS) and the
Electronic Application Submitted Data Form (SAAETBL).

PIN The PIN must be six digits in length and contain only numbers. It
is stored in the Electronic Admissions Non-Student Table
(SABNSTU) and can be displayed on the Electronic Application
Process Form (SAAEAPS).

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 110

 Item Description

Login ID Stored in the Electronic Admissions Non-Student table

(SABNSTU).

PIN Stored in the SABNSTU table.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

First time user account Goes to the Admissions Login - New User page
creation (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNew).

Return to Homepage Returns to the homepage.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Login Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Invalid PIN. Try again.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNon

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 111

 Action: Re-enter the PIN correctly. PINs must be 6 digits and contain only
numbers. For an existing ID, the PIN must match the one stored in the
database.

Message: An error occurred. Please try again. PIN must be 6 digits long.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNon
Action: Re-enter the new PIN using 6 numeric digits.

Message: ID record locked due to excessive invalid login attempts.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNon
Action: The PIN has been locked because of excessive login attempts using a
valid non-student ID but a PIN that does not match the PIN for the ID.
Re-enable access by clearing the Web Access Locked checkbox in the
Non-Student PIN Change block (accessed via the PIN Change option)
on the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS).

Message: Login ID already in use. Please try a different Login ID or log in as a

Returning User.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNo
Action: Enter a different Login ID as the first one entered was already being
used.

Admissions Login - New User

(bwskalog.P_DispLoginNew)
The Admissions Login - New User page allows new users to create a login ID and PIN,
and to verify the PIN.

Neither value is validated against Banner IDs or PINs; however, if a login ID has
previously been created by another user, it cannot be re-used. The applicant will need to
remember the ID and PIN used in order to return to the application at a later time.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 112

 Item Description/Source Information

Create a Login ID The login ID can be entered by the person or generated by the
system if one is not supplied during the original login. The entered
value is stored in the Electronic Admissions Non-Student table
(SABNSTU) and is used to access the applicant’s data on the
Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS) and the
Electronic Application Submitted Data Form (SAAETBL).

Create a PIN The PIN must be six digits in length and contain only numbers. It
is stored in the SABNSTU table and can be displayed on
SAAEAPS.

Verify PIN The new user must reenter the PIN.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Login ID Stored in the Electronic Admissions Non-Student table

(SABNSTU).

PIN Stored in the SABNSTU table.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Homepage Returns to the homepage.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 113

 Button/Icon Action

Login Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Login ID already in use. Please try a different Login ID or log in as a

Returning User.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNon
Action: Enter a different Login ID as the first one entered was already being
used.

Message: PIN values entered do not match. Please try again.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcLoginNon
Action: The PIN and Verify PIN must match. Enter each again, making sure
that they match.

Select an Application Type (bwskalog.P_DispChoice)

The Select an Application Type page is used to specify what type of application is to be
filled out. All Web admissions processing is based on the application type.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 114

 Item Description/Source Information

Application Type The application type pulldown list includes all Web-enabled
application types defined on the Application Type Code Validation
Form (STVWAPP).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Application Type Code Define all valid application types that you want to be available
Validation Form (STVWAPP) on the Web. Be sure to select the Web Indicator checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Homepage This link is displayed if the user is a new user and returns to the
homepage.

Return to Application This link is displayed if the user is a returning user and goes to the
Menu Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 115

 Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Apply for Admissions page

(bwskalog.P_DispNewApp).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Apply for Admissions (bwskalog.P_DispNewApp)

The Apply for Admissions page captures basic information needed to begin the process of
completing an application for admission. Applicants use this page to enter basic name
information and to specify the intended entry term for the application.

Note: The application type has already been entered on the Select an
Application Type page (bwskalog.P_DispChoices) and is
redisplayed on this page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Application Type Application Type selected on the Select an Application Type page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Admission Term The pulldown list includes all terms for which Web admissions
application processing is allowed on the current date, as defined
on the Electronic Applicant Web Calendar Rules Form
(SAAWATR). If no terms are defined here for the given application
type, the pulldown list contains valid terms as defined on the Web
Application Term Display Control Form (SOAATRM). The
applicant must select the term for which the application is being
made.

First Name Applicant’s first name.

Middle Name Applicant’s middle name.

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 116

 Item Description/Source Information

Last Name Applicant’s last name.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Electronic Applicant Web Set up the valid dates for Web admissions application
Calendar Rules Form processing for each application type and term.
(SAAWATR)

or

Web Application Term

Display Control Form
(SOAATRM)

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Application Term Stored in the Electronic Admissions Application Header table

(SARHEAD).

First, Last and Middle Stored in the Electronic Admissions Person table (SARPERS).
Names

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Application Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Menu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 117

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Fill Out Application Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Application Checklist (bwskalog.P_DispIndex)

The Application Checklist page is used to display the sections of the application that the
applicant should complete. Application section choices are assigned to each application
type using the Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP). The sections used can
be different for each application type. After an applicant has provided information in an
application section, a checkmark is displayed next to the link for the section.

The applicant also uses the buttons on this page to indicate that the application
information is complete and ready for the institution to process, or that it is not yet
complete and will be finished later. Institutional application processing cannot begin until
the applicant has marked the application complete.

You can also set up an e-mail link on this form to allow applicants to send e-mail to a
specific e-mail address that has been set up to handle questions.

If your institution has decided to display a Signature page, and no credit card processing is
enabled for the application type, the Signature page is displayed when the Application is
Complete button is selected. If credit card processing has been enabled, the Application
Fee Payment page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) is displayed when the Application is
Complete button is selected. The Signature page is displayed if the user selects the Pay
Later button on the Application Fee Payment page. See “Signature
(bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2)” on page 164 for more information.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 118

 Item Description/Source Information

Application Sections Sections of the application to be filled out, as specified on the

Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Application Fee Waiver If you want to have possible waivers for application fees
Reason Validation Form displayed on the Web, make sure that the waiver reasons have
(STVWAIV) been created.

Web Application Section For each application type that you want to be displayed on the
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) Web, specify the section codes that you want included on the
application.

Specify the display order for the sections.

Select the Required checkbox for each section that you want
applicants to be required to complete.

Electronic Applicant Web If you want an e-mail link to be displayed on this Web page,
Default Rules Form complete the Checklist Email Link window.
(SAAWADF)
If you want a link to the Signature page to be displayed when
the Application is Complete button is selected, complete the
Web Signature Letters window.

If you want to allow applicants to pay application fees by credit

card, complete the Credit Card Rules window. If you want to
have possible waivers for application fees displayed on the
Web, select the Allow Waiver checkbox.

Electronic Admissions If you want a link to the Signature page to be displayed when
Application Rules Form the Application is Complete button is selected, then for the
(SAAERUL) DISP EDI rules group, enter TRUE in the Value field for the
SIGPAGEDISP label.
Application Fee Waiver If you want to have possible waivers for application fees
Reason Validation Form displayed on the Web, make sure that the waiver reasons have
(STVWAIV) been created.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 119

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

E-mail Opens the applicant’s e-mail program with the To and Subject
lines filled in. The text of the link is defined on the Checklist Email
Link window of the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form
(SAAWADF).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Application is Complete When credit card processing has been enabled, then the
Application Fee Payment page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) is
displayed when the Application is Complete button is selected.

When no credit card processing is enabled for the application

type, and if you have specified that the Signature page is to be
displayed, the Signature page is displayed when the Application
is Complete button is selected.

When agreement to terms of admission is enabled, then the

Admissions Agreement page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) is
displayed.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Application Menu bwskalog.P_DispChoices

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 120

 Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Application is missing required information. Please supply missing

values in the following sections: Primary Address, Major.

Source: bwskalog.P_ProcIndex
Action: Provide required information (indicated by a *) in all sections identified
in the error message.

Name (bwskanam.P_DispAppName)
The Name page captures names, prefix, and suffix from the applicant. First and last name
are required.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Last Name The default value comes from the Electronic Admissions Person
table (SARPERS), which was updated when the applicant
completed the Apply for Admissions page
(bwskalog.P_DispNewApp), but the applicant can change it.

First Name The default value comes from the SARPERS table, which was
updated when the applicant completed the Apply for Admissions
page, but the applicant can change it.

Middle Name The default value comes from the SARPERS table, which was
updated when the applicant completed the Apply for Admissions
page, but the applicant can change it.

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

Suffix Suffix associated with the name.

Previous Last Name Previous last name, such a maiden name or former married
name.

Nickname Nickname the applicant prefers to use, such as Bill for William or
Liz for Elizabeth.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 121

 Item Description/Source Information

Previously Attended Radio button group used to specify whether the applicant has
previously attended your institution. Choices are Yes, No, and
Not Reported.
Previous Application Radio button group used to specify whether the applicant has
previously submitted an application for attendance to your
institution. Choices are Yes, No, and Not Reported.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the NAME Web section.
Rules Form (SAAWAPP)
In the Data Element Rules window for the NAME Web section,
specify the elements you want to be displayed on this Web
page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the NAME Web
section.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

All items (except answers to Stored in the Electronic Admissions Person Table (SARPERS)
questions) and can be viewed on the Electronic Application Process Form
(SAAEAPS) or the Electronic Admission Submitted Form
(SAAETBL).

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 122

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

First Address and Phone (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1)

and Second Address and Phone
(bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr2)
The First Address and Phone and Second Address and Phone pages capture address
and telephone number information from the applicant.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 123

 Item Description/Source Information

Address type Address type displayed as the area header comes from the
Address Type field of the Web Application Section Rules Form
(SAAWAPP).

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an area

and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

State/Province The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the State/Province
Code Validation Form (STVSTAT) are displayed.

County The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the County Code
Validation Form (STVCNTY) are displayed.

Nation The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
Nation Code Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

Phone Country Code Code that designates the region and country of the telephone
number (no validation).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 124

 Item Description

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the ADDR1 and/or
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) ADDR2 Web section. Enter the address type in the Address
Type field.

In the Data Element Rules window for the ADDR1 and/or

ADDR2 Web section, specify the elements you want to be
displayed on this Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the ADDR1
and/or ADDR2 Web section.

EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:

Form (SOAXREF) • State/province codes
• County codes
• Nation codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Address data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Address table (SARADDR)

and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission Submitted
Form (SAAETBL).

Phone number data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Phone table (SARPHON)
and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 125

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Configuration Error -- Cannot get address and phone types. Unable to
display page.

Source: bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1
Action: Some portion of address set-up has not been completed. Review the
following:
• On SAAWAPP, an address type must be entered for Web section
ADDR1 for the application type.
• On STVATYP, there must be a phone type for the address type
assigned to the application section.
• On SOAXREF in label STVATYP, the address type specified on
SAAWAPP must be a valid value that is cross-referenced to an EDI
value and is Web-enabled.
• On SOAXREF in label STVTELE, the telephone type from STVATYP
must be a valid value that is cross-referenced to an EDI value and is
Web-enabled.

Personal Information (bwskaper.P_DispAppPersonal)

The Personal Information page captures basic biographic and demographic personal
information from the applicant. Field order is determined by setup in Banner Admissions.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 126

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Confidentiality Radio group used to indicate if the applicant’s information is

confidential. Values are Yes, No, Not Reported.

Citizenship Status Citizenship status of the applicant, such as Alien, Non-

Resident Alien, U.S. Citizen.
The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the Citizen Type
Code Validation Form (STVCITZ) are displayed.

Gender Radio group used to indicate the applicant’s gender. Values are
Male, Female, No Response.
Ethnic Group Status Ethnic group status of the applicant.

The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Ethnic Code
Validation Form (STVETHN) are displayed.

Ethnic Category Checkbox used to indicate the applicant’s ethnic category. Values
are Hispanic or Latino and Not Hispanic or
Latino.
The label Ethnic Category is displayed only when this field is
required. Otherwise, Information Text is used instead of a field
label.

Race Applicant’s race or race combination. The values available for

selection are displayed as checkboxes.

The column labels (such as White, Asian, Black or African

American) are the category descriptions associated with
regulatory codes that are marked as system required on the
Regulatory Race Validation Form (GTVRRAC), which are
delivered.

Each column displays a set of checkboxes for the races

associated with the race code on the Race Rules Form
(GORRACE).

The label Race is displayed only when this field is required.

Otherwise, Information Text is used instead of a field label.

Birth Date Applicant’s birthdate information by Month, Day, and Year

(YYYY). Use the pulldown lists for Month and Day, and enter the
four digit year.

Email Applicant’s email address.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 127

 Item Description/Source Information

Verify e-mail address Re-enter the email address for verification.

SSN Applicant’s social security number or tax ID number. Up to fifteen

(XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX) digits can be entered.

Religion Preference Applicant’s religious preference, such as Catholic,

Protestant, Other.
The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Religion Code
Validation Form (STVRELG) are displayed.

Marital Status Applicant’s marital status, such as Married, Divorced,

Single.
The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Marital Status Code
Validation Form (STVMRTL) are displayed.

Residency Radio group used to indicate the applicant’s residency. Values are
Yes, No, Not Reported.
Medical Information Applicant’s medical needs, such as Hearing Impaired,
Visually Impaired, Paraplegic.
The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Medical Code
Validation Form (STVMEDI) are displayed.

Veteran ID Veteran ID number of the applicant.

Veteran Classification Veteran category for the applicant. Values are:

• Not a Veteran
• Protected veteran (choosing not to self-identify the
classification)
• Not a Protected Veteran
• Active Wartime or Campaign Badge Veteran

Legacy Status Applicant’s legacy status, such as Father, Sister,

Grandparent, etc.
The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Legacy Code
Validation Form (STVLGCY) are displayed.

Cellular Phone Number Applicant’s mobile phone number.

Cellular Phone Extension Extension for applicant’s mobile phone number.

Cellular Phone Intl Access International access code for applicant’s mobile phone number.
Code

Cellular Phone Country Country code for applicant’s mobile phone number.
Code

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 128

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the PERSONAL Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

Warning! Do not check the Required

checkbox if requiring users to provide
ethnicity and race information is
prohibited.

In the Data Element Rules window for the PERSONAL Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the
PERSONAL Web section.
For each Web application type, specify which races you want to
be displayed in the Race pulldown list. (Race codes are defined
on the Race Rules Form [GORRACE].) If no race codes are
added to SAAWADP, all race codes will be visible and
available on the Web.

Web Application Customized For each Web application type, specify which races you want to
List Form (SAAWADP) be displayed in the Race pulldown list. (Race codes are defined
on the Race Rules Form [GORRACE].) If no race codes are
added to SAAWADP, all race codes will be visible and
available on the Web.

EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:

Form (SOAXREF) • Citizenship codes
• Marital status codes
• Religion preference codes
• Ethnicity group codes
• Legacy codes
• Medical codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 129

 Item Description

Confidentiality, Legacy, and Stored in the Electronic Admissions Electronic Admissions

Resident data Request for Information table (SAARQST) and can be viewed
on the Electronic Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

SSN/Tax ID Stored in the Electronic Admissions Person’s Reference

Numbers table (SARPRFN) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

E-mail address Stored in the Electronic Admissions Phone table (SARPHON)

and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Ethnicity and ethnic category Stored in the Temporary Personal table (SARPERS), loaded to
the permanent Basic Person table (SPBPERS), and can be
viewed on the General Person Form (SPAPERS) or in the
Biographical Information window of the Quick Recruit Form
(SRAQUIK), the Quick Entry Form (SAAQUIK), or the General
Person Identification Form (SPAIDEN).

Race Stored in the Electronic Admissions Electronic Temporary Race

table (SARPRAC), loaded to the permanent Race table
(GORPRAC), and can be viewed on SPAPERS or in the
Biographical Information window of SRAQUIK, SAAQUIK or
SPAIDEN.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 130

 Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Planned Course of Study (bwskapln.P_DispAppPlan)

The Planned Course of Study page allows an applicant to enter multiple planned course of
study (programs) along with majors, minors, and concentrations. You must set up your
planned courses of study (programs), majors, minors, and concentrations for each Web
application type on the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). The
following must be defined for each web application type:

• Maximum Number of Majors

• Maximum Number of Minors
• Maximum Number of Concentrations
• Maximum Number of Additional Majors.
Depending on the number assigned for each category, the Planned Course of Study page
will reflect this setup. The applicant will be allowed to enter multiple planned courses of
study (programs), majors, minors, and concentration up to the maximum number defined
for each category.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 131

 Item Description/Source Information

Planned Course of Study The values in the pulldown list come from the following tables:
• SOBCURR
• SORCMJR
• SORCMNR
• SORCCON
Once an applicant has saved a course of study, the field displays
the selected major.

Priority Relative preference of the planned course of study.

Secondary Major The values in the pulldown list come from SORCMJR.

The number of times this field is repeated for each course of study
is specified on the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form
(SAAWADF).

Minor The values in the pulldown list are those for which the Display on
Self-Service checkbox has been checked on the Curriculum
Rules Form (SOACURR) and are associated with the major
selected in the Planned Course of Study field.

The number of times this field is repeated for each course of study
is specified on SAAWADF.

Concentration The values in the pulldown list are those for which the Display on
Self-Service checkbox has been checked on SOACURR and
have been specified as base concentrations or attached
concentrations for the major selected in the Planned Course of
Study field.

The number of times this field is repeated for each course of study
is specified on SAAWADF.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 132

 Item Description

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the PLAN Web section.
Rules Form (SAAWAPP)
In the Data Element Rules window for the PLAN Web section,
specify the elements you want to be displayed on this Web
page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the PLAN Web
section.

Curriculum Rules Form Define cross-reference and Web-enable curriculum rules.

(SOACURR) (These were previously defined on the EDI Cross-Reference
Curriculum Rules Form [SOAXCUR].)

Web Application Customized If desired, restrict curriculum rules by application type by

Curriculum Form selecting the Restrict to Type checkbox.
(SAAWCUR)

Electronic Applicant Web On the Matching and Processing Rules tab, take the following
Default Rules Form actions.
(SAAWADF)
Enter the number of times you want the following displayed on
this Web page:
• Majors (using the Maximum Number of Majors field)
• Minors (using the Maximum Number of Minors field)
• Concentrations (using the Maximum Number of
Concentrations field)
• Secondary majors (using the Maximum Number of
Additional Majors field)
Use the Create One Application checkbox to specify whether
you want the system to create a single application or separate
ones.

checked - one application will be created for all planned

courses of study entered by applicant

unchecked - a separate application will be created for each

Planned Course of Study entered by applicant

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 133

 Item Description

Choices of study Stored in the Electronic Admissions Entry-Exit Dates Table

(SARETRY) and the Electronic Admissions Date - Field of
Study Table (SAREFOS) and can be viewed on the Electronic
Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

When the application is pushed to Banner, the SORLCUR and

SORLFOS tables are also updated.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 134

 Parental Information (bwskapar.P_DispAppParents)
The Parental Information page captures information about the applicant’s relatives.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Relationship The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the Relation Code Validation
Form (STVRELT) are displayed.

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an area

and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

State/Province The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the State/Province
Code Validation Form (STVSTAT) are displayed.

County The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the County Code
Validation Form (STVCNTY) are displayed.

Nation The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
Nation Code Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

Phone Country Code Code that designates the region and country of the telephone
number (no validation).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 135

 Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the PARENTS Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section. Enter the address type in the Address Type field.

In the Data Element Rules window for the PARENTS Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the PARENTS
Web section.

EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:

Form (SOAXREF) • Relationship type codes
• State/province codes
• County codes
• Nation codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Relationship types and Stored in the Electronic Admissions Person table (SARPERS)
names and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission Submitted
Form (SAAETBL).

Address data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Address Table

(SARADDR) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Phone data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Phone table (SARPHON)

and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Employer Stored in the Electronic Admissions Employment table

(SAREMPL) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 136

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Enter or View another Displays a blank Parental Information page so the applicant can
Relative enter information about another relative.

Selecting this button allows the user to enter an unlimited number

of relationships, along with their associated data.

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Previous College (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege)

The Previous College page captures previous college attendance information from an
applicant.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 137

 Item Description/Source Information

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an area

and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

College County The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the County Code Validation Form
(STVCNTY) are displayed.

College State/Province The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
State/Province Code Validation Form (STVSTAT) are displayed.

College Nation The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
Nation Code Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

College Degree The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
Degree Code Validation Form (STVDEGC) are displayed.

College Major The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF.

(The same cross-reference values are used for both majors and
minors.)

College Minor The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF.

(The same cross-reference values are used for both majors and
minors.)

Phone Country Code Code that designates the region and country of the telephone
number (no validation).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 138

 Item Description

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the PRVCOLLEGE Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the PRVCOLLEGE Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the
PRVCOLLEGE Web section.
EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:
Form (SOAXREF) • County codes
• State/province codes
• Nation codes
• Degree codes
• Major codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

College name and address Stored in the Electronic Admissions Previous College
Information table (SARPCOL) and can be viewed on the
Electronic Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Attendance dates Stored in the Electronic Admissions Prior College Sessions

table (SARPSES) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Degree data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Prior College Degree table
(SARPDEG) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Majors and minors Stored in the Electronic Admissions Date - Field of Study table
(SARDFOS) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 139

 Link Action

Lookup College Code Goes to the College Lookup page

(bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code).

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Enter or View another Displays a blank Previous College page so the applicant can
College enter information about another institution.

Selecting this button allows the user to enter an unlimited number

of previously attended colleges, along with their associated data.

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Errors occurred. Please try again. Attended from date must be before
attended to date.

Source: bwskapcl.P_ProcAppPrvCollege
Action: The date entered in the College Attend From Date field must be
earlier than the date in the College Attend From Date field.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 140

 High School (bwskahsc.P_DispAppHighSch)
The High School page captures high school attendance information from an applicant.

When any other data is entered on this page in admissions, the High School Name field,
High School Code field, or Home School checkbox are also required. One of those
fields must be entered, regardless of the setting of the Required checkbox for the items
on SAAWAPP.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an area

and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

High School County The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the County Code Validation Form
(STVCNTY) are displayed.

High School State/ The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
Province set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
State/Province Code Validation Form (STVSTAT) are displayed.

High School Nation The values in the pulldown list come from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from all values from the
Nation Code Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

Phone Country Code Code that designates the region and country of the telephone
number (no validation).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 141

 Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the HIGHSCH Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the HIGHSCH Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the HIGHSCH
Web section.

EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:

Form (SOAXREF) • County codes
• State/province codes
• Nation codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

High school name and Stored in the Electronic Admissions High School Information
address table (SARHSCH) and can be viewed on the Electronic
Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

High school GPA and rank Stored in the Electronic Admissions Degree Summary
data Information Table (SARHSUM) and can be viewed on
SAAETBL.

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 142

 Link Action

Lookup High School Code Goes to the High School Lookup page
(bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code).

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Enter or View another Displays a blank High School page so the applicant can enter
High School information about another school.

Selecting this button allows the user to enter an unlimited number

of high schools, along with their associated data.

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Errors occurred. Please try again. High school name, city, state, zip
and country may be entered only if no high school code type and code
have been entered.

Source: bwskahsc.P_ProcAppHighSch

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 143

 Action: Enter either the school type code and school code, or free-form high
school name and address.

Message: Errors occurred. Please try again. Class size must be greater than
class rank.

Source: bwskahsc.P_ProcAppHighSchh
Action: Change the entered data so that the class size is larger than the class
rank.

College Lookup or High School Lookup

(bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code)
The College Lookup page or High School Lookup page is displayed as “subset” of the
page from which it is called. That is, when a user selects a lookup link on a page, the
original page title continues to be displayed on the lookup pages.

The College Lookup page can be accessed from the following pages:

• Previous College page (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege)

• Transcript Request Address page (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address)
The High School Lookup page can be accessed from the High School page
(bwskahsc.P_DispAppHighSch).

The lookup package/procedure (bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code) is the same for

both college and high school lookup. It works as a series of pages, each with a single
choice for the user to make.

• The first page allows the user to select the state, province, or country.
• The second page allows the user to select the city.
• The third page allows the user to select the school.
When the user selects the copy button on the third page, the system copies data from the
Source/Background Validation Form (SOASBGI) into the appropriate fields on the next
page that is displayed.

Only schools defined on SOASBGI can be found using the lookup pages.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 144

 Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed on the first lookup page.

Select a State or Province State or province of the school being looked up.

The values in the pulldown list come from the State/Province

field of the Source/Background Validation Form (SOASBGI).

Select a Country Country of the school being looked up.

The values in the pulldown list come from the Nation field of
SOASBGI.

The following field is displayed on the second lookup page.

Select College/High City of the school being looked up.

School City
The values in the pulldown list come from the City field of
SOASBGI.

The following field is displayed on the third lookup page.

Select College name Name of the school being looked up.

or
Select High School name The values in the pulldown list come from the Source/
Background Institution field of SOASBGI.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Source/Background Make sure that each school has values in both the City field
Validation Form (SOASBGI) and either the State/Province or the Nation field. Otherwise,
the school will not be available for lookup.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 145

 Link Action

Return Goes to the page the user was viewing before he or she selected
the lookup link.

This link is displayed on all pages in the

bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code package/procedure.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

The following button is displayed on the first lookup page.

List Cities in Selected Goes to the second lookup page.

State, Province or Country

The following button is displayed on the second lookup page.

List Colleges/High Goes to the third lookup page.

Schools in selected City

The following button is displayed on the third lookup page.

Copy selected College/ If the user accessed lookup from the Previous Colleges page
High School information to (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege), goes to the Previous
Data Entry form Colleges page with data from the Source/Background Validation
Form (SOASBGI) displayed in the appropriate fields.

If the user accessed lookup from the High School page

(bwskahsc.P_DispAppHighSch), goes to the High School
page with data from SOASBGI displayed in the appropriate fields.

If the user accessed lookup from the Transcript Request Address

page (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address), goes
to the Select Transcript Type page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type) with
data from SOASBGI displayed in the appropriate fields.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 146

 Test Scores (bwskatst.P_DispAppTests)
The Test Scores page captures information about the applicant’s test scores.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Test The values in the pulldown lists come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the Test Code Validation Form
(STVTESC) are displayed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the TESTS Web section.
Rules Form (SAAWAPP)
In the Data Element Rules window for the TESTS Web section,
specify the elements you want to be displayed on this Web
page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the TESTS
Web section.

EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable test codes.

Form (SOAXREF)

Electronic Admissions For the group DISP, set the Value field for the label
Application Rules Form TESTSDISP to the number of test rows you want to be
(SAAERUL) displayed.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 147

 Item Description

Test data Stored in the Electronic Admissions Test Scores table

(SARTEST) and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission
Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 148

 Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

Message: Request failed. We are unable to process your request at this time.

Source: bwskatst.P_DispAppTests
Action: For the group DISP, set the Value for the label TESTSDISP to a valid
numeric value on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form
(SAAERUL).

International Information
(bwskaint.P_DispAppInternational)
The International Information page captures basic citizenship, visa, and language
information for the applicant. The International Information Form (GOAINTL) allows visa
information to be entered separately from international information and vice versa.
However, if any visa field data is entered then all the other visa information must be
entered as well. Because of this, rules processing on this Web page provides error
messages if the applicant does not enter all the necessary visa information. Applicants
can enter country of citizenship, country of birth and native language without having to
enter any visa information.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Visa The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the Visa Type Code Validation
Form (STVVTYP) are displayed.

Citizenship Country The values in the pulldown list comes from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Nation Code
Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

Birth Country The values in the pulldown list comes from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Nation Code
Validation Form (STVNATN) are displayed.

Native Language The values in the pulldown list comes from SOAXREF. If none are
set up on SOAXREF, then all values from the Language Code
Validation Form (STVLANG) are displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 149

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the INTERNATL Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the INTERNATL Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the
INTERNATL Web section.
EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable the following:
Form (SOAXREF) • Visa type codes
• Nation codes
• Language codes

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Visa Type, number, and Stored in the Electronic Admissions Reference Numbers table
dates (SARRFNO) and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission
Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Nation of Birth, Nation of Stored in the Electronic Admissions Person Table (SARPERS)
Citizenship, and Native and can be viewed on SAAETBL.
Language

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 150

 Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Activities (bwskaact.P_DispAppActivities)
The Activities page allows the applicant to provide to the institution information about
extracurricular activities.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Activity The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the Outside Interest Code
Validation Form (STVINTS) are displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 151

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the ACTIVITIES Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the ACTIVITIES Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the
ACTIVITIES Web section.
EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable outside activity codes.
Form (SOAXREF)

Electronic Admissions For the group DISP, set the Value for the label ACTVSDISP to
Application Rules Form the number of activity rows you want to be displayed.
(SAAERUL)

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Activity and Other Activity Stored in the Electronic Admissions Activities table (SARACTV)
fields and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission Submitted
Form (SAAETBL).

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 152

 Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Additional Information (bwskaudf.P_DispAppUserDef)

The Additional Information page allows you to present up to 20 institution-defined
questions to the applicant.

Web Page Fields

No fields appear on this page by default; you must define your questions on the Web User
Defined Questions Form (SAAWUDQ) and use the Data Element Rules window of the
Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP) to have them displayed on this page.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 153

 Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the ADDITIONAL Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the ADDITIONAL Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on Electronic Admission
Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 154

 Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Requested Materials (bwskamat.P_DispAppMaterials)

The Requested Materials page allows the applicant to request materials from your
institution.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Requested Materials The values in the pulldown list come from the EDI Cross-
Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). If none are set up on
SOAXREF, then all values from the Material Code Validation
Form (STVMATL) are displayed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 155

 Item Description

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the MATERIALS Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the MATERIALS Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed in the
pulldown list.

If you defined a question to be included on this Web page,

specify it on the Data Element Rules window for the
MATERIALS Web section.
EDI Cross-Reference Rules Cross-reference and Web-enable material codes.
Form (SOAXREF)

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Requested Materials Stored in the Electronic Admission Requested Materials table

(SARMATL) and can be viewed on the Electronic Admission
Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 156

 Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Essays (bwskaess.P_DispAppEssay)
The Essays page captures answers to up to ten essay questions. Each answer can be up
to 32,700 characters.

Web Page Fields

No fields appear on this page by default; you must define your questions on the Web User
Defined Questions Form (SAAWUDQ) and use the Data Element Rules window of the
Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP) to have them displayed on this page.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the ESSAY Web section.
Rules Form (SAAWAPP)
In the Data Element Rules window for the ESSAY Web section,
specify the elements you want to be displayed on this Web
page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 157

 Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 158

 Application Preference (bwskaprf.p_disp_pref)
The Application Preference page allows the applicant to assign a preference to an
application. If the applicant has multiple applications, they can be considered in the
specified order.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Application Preference Relative preference of the application. The value entered must be
a whole number between 1 and 99.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web User Defined Define any questions you want to be included on this Web
Questions Form page.
(SAAWUDQ)

Web Application Section In the main window, include a rule for the PREFERENCE Web
Rules Form (SAAWAPP) section.

In the Data Element Rules window for the PREFERENCE Web

section, specify the elements you want to be displayed on this
Web page.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 159

 Item Description

Application Preference Stored in the Admissions Application Repeating Table

(SARADAP) and can be viewed on the following forms:
• Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS)
• Admissions Decision Form (SAADCRV)
• Admissions Decision and Rating Batch Entry Form
(SAADCBT)
• Admission Application/Checklist Summary Form (SAAACKL)
• Admissions Rating Form (SAARRAT)
• Application Questions and Answers Form (SAAQUAN)
• Admissions Application Summary Form (SAASUMI)
• Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS)
• Electronic Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL)

Question answers Stored in the Electronic Admissions Request for Information

table (SARRQST) and can be viewed on SAAETBL.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Checklist without Goes to the Application Checklist page

saving changes (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) without saving changes made to
this page.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Checklist Goes to the Application Checklist page

(bwskalog.P_DispIndex).

Continue Goes to the page for the next application section as specified by
the display order number on the Web Application Section Rules
Form (SAAWAPP) for the application type.

Finish Later Goes to the Application Menu (bwskanam.P_ProcAppName).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 160

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Application Fee Payment (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex)

The Application Fee Payment page captures credit card information needed to process
the applicant’s application fee online.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Credit Card The values in the pulldown list come from the Credit Card
Merchant ID Form (GOAMERC).

Payment Amount The value displayed in this field comes from the Credit Card Rules
window of the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form
(SAAWADF). It cannot be changed.

Credit Card Billing The values default from the First Address and Phone page
Address (bwskaadr.P_DispAppAddr1). The values can be changed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Credit Card Merchant ID Make sure that valid records have been created for the
Form (GOAMERC) appropriate process code.

All other credit card processing setup, including Multiple

Merchant ID Processing, must be completed as well. See the
Payment Processor Connection Handbook for more
information.

Electronic Applicant Web Set up the appropriate payment amount on the Credit Card
Default Rules Form Rules window.
(SAAWADF)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 161

 Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Credit card information Minimal credit card data is stored in the Electronic Admissions
Header table (SARHEAD) and can be viewed on the Electronic
Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Payment Goes to the external vendor payment page for payment by credit
card.

Pay Later Goes to the Signature page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Admissions Agreement (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex)

When an applicant applies for admission, he/she must accept or decline the terms and
conditions of admission before the application can be completed. This agreement to terms
is enabled through the WebTailor Admissions Agreement menu. When the applicant
selects the Application is Complete button on the Application Checklist page
(bwskalog.P_ProcNewApp), the Admissions Agreement page
(bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) is displayed.

When the applicant accepts the terms and conditions by selecting the I agree to the
terms link, processing continues and the Signature page
(bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2) is displayed. The Application Fee Payment page
(bwskalog.P_ProcIndex) may be displayed in place of the Signature page

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 162

 (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2), when credit card payment processing is used for the
application type.

When the applicant declines to accept the terms by selecting the I do not agree link,
processing returns the applicant to the Application Menu page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Web Page Fields

No fields appear on this page.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

WebTailor Menus and Use bmenu.P_AppAgreement and select Enabled

Procedures Indicator to active the web page.

WebTailor Information Text Use bmenu.P_AppAgreement to change the default text.

WebTailor Menu Items Use bmenu.P_AppAgreement to change the default links

or to add new links.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

I agree to the terms Goes to the Signature page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2).

When credit card payment processing is used, goes to the

Application Fee Payment page (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2).

I do not agree Goes to the Application Menu page

(bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 163

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Signature (bwskalog.P_ProcIndex2)
The Signature page is a customized letter displayed on the Web after an application is
completed or after a credit card payment has been made. The letter is created on the
Format HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and is associated with an application type
and letter type on the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). If a
customized signature letter has not been created, then the default Information Text
defined by your institution using Web Tailor is displayed.

Web Page Fields

No fields appear on this page by default; you must define your letter on the Format HTML
Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and use the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form
(SAAWADF) to associate the letter to the application type.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Letter Code Validation Form Create a letter code for the letter you want to be displayed on
(GTVLETR) this page.

HTML Letter Rules Form Associate the letter code with the module code. This
(SOAELTL) determines which variables will be in the letter.

Format HTML Letter Rules Define the text that you want to appear on this Web page.
Form (SOAELTR)

Electronic Applicant Web Associate the application type with the letter type and letter
Default Rules Form code.
(SAAWADF)

Customize a Set of If desired, instead of defining a letter in SOAELTR and

Information Text option in associating it with an application type in SAAWADF, define the
Web Tailor text to appear on this Web page in Web Tailor.

Electronic Admissions For the group DISP, set the Value for the label
Application Rules Form SIGPAGEDISP to TRUE. This setting specifies that the
(SAAERUL) Signature page should be displayed for the application type.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 164

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Application Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Menu

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Access Web for Student Goes to the Login Verification Security Question and Answer
page (bwskalog.P_RegisterNew).

This link is displayed if the Web applicant has a Student record,

and if the application type is set up to use Quick Start processing
and to allow automatic transfer to Student Self-Service.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices)

The Application Menu appears when a user selects the Finish Later button or the Return
to Application Menu link from any of the Web pages. This page displays data for
applications in progress, submitted applications, processed applications, and payment
processing. What is displayed on the Application Menu depends on the following:

• Rules defined on the Web Application Term Calendar Rules Form (SAAWATR)
• Rules defined on the Web Admissions Term Calendar Rules Form (SAAWAAD)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 165

 • Whether the Web applicant has a Web application that is being worked on, whether any
Web applications have been completed, or whether any Web applications have been
pushed to Banner or manually entered into Banner.

• Rules defined on the Web Payment Rules Form (TSAWPAY).

Application payments are listed by admission term and transaction in the Payment
Processing section. Each transaction is a link to the Payment Processing Transaction
page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList). Transactions for the applicant that meet rule criteria
on TSAWPAY are displayed. The Payment Processing section is not displayed if no
payments exist for the applicant or if the applicant does not meet the rule criteria on
TSAWPAY.

Refer to the “Student Accounts” chapter for more information on setting up and using
payment and deposit processing.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Applications in Progress Data for electronic applications is stored in a number of electronic

application holding tables. The Electronic Admissions Application
Header Table (SARHEAD) is the header record to all of the
electronic admissions application holding tables. A summary of
electronic admissions application data can be viewed using the
Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS).

Submitted Applications Data for applications that have been completed on the Web but
have not been pushed to Banner is stored in a number of
electronic application holding tables. The SARHEAD table is the
header record to all of the electronic admissions application
holding tables. A summary of electronic admissions application
data can be viewed using SAAEAPS.

Processed Applications Processed application data comes from the Admissions

Application Repeating table (SARADAP), which houses most
application data.

Payment Processing Payment data comes from Banner Accounts Receivable when
transactions meet the rule criteria on TSAWPAY. Transactions
listed are ready for payment and are links to the payment
processing pages.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 166

 Item Description

Electronic Applicant Web Create rules to specify when Web applications can be created
Calendar Rules Form and/or viewed for the following:
(SAAWATR) • Applications in Progress
• Submitted Applications

Admissions Web Calendar Specify when applications in the permanent Banner tables can
Rules Form (SAAWAAD) be displayed.

Specify whether the status and any decision associated with

the application should be displayed.

Electronic Admissions If you want an e-mail link to be displayed on this Web page,
Application Rules Form then for the group ADMS, enter appropriate values in the Value
(SAAERUL) fields for the labels EMAILSENDADDR and
EMAILSENDLINK.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Term in the Admission In the Applications in Progress section, the term link goes to the
Term area Application Checklist page (bwskalog.P_DispIndex) for the
application selected.

In the Submitted Applications section, the term link goes to the

Web Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatus) page
for the application selected.

In the Processed Applications section, the term link goes to the

Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatusSaradap)
page for the application selected.

Section name in Last Goes to the Web page for the last section the applicant updated.
Section Updated area

Send University Email An e-mail link is displayed if one has been defined on the
Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 167

 Link Action

Transaction item in Goes to the Payment Processing Transaction page

Payment Processing area, (bwskpayg.P_ProcList).
such as Deposit for Fall
2013-2014

Return to Homepage Returns the user to the institution’s homepage.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Web Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatus)

The Web Application Summary page displays a summary of the data for the Web
applications that have been completed but not yet pushed into the permanent tables. It
displays data for the applications listed in the Submitted Applications section of the
Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Name Name and nickname information stored in the Electronic

Admissions Person table (SARPERS). This data can also be
viewed on the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS)
or the Electronic Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Address Address information stored in the Electronic Admissions Address

table (SARADDR). This data can also be viewed on SAAETBL.

Phone Telephone number information stored in the Electronic

Admissions Phone table (SARPHON). This data can also be
viewed on SAAETBL.

Application data Application data stored in the Electronic Admissions Application

Header table (SARHEAD). A summary of electronic admissions
application data can be viewed on the Electronic Application
Process Form (SAAEAPS).

Choice of Studies data is stored in the Electronic Admissions Date

- Field of Study table (SAREFOS) and can be viewed on the
Electronic Admission Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 168

 Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Application Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Menu

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Application Summary (bwskasta.P_DispStatusSaradap)

The Application Summary page displays a summary of the data for applications which are
in the permanent application table (saradap), regardless of the source of the application
(Web, paper, or other). This page displays data for the applications listed in the Processed
Applications section of the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 169

 Item Description/Source Information

Name Name and nickname information stored in the Person

Identification/Name Repeating table (SPRIDEN). This data can
also be viewed on the Identification Form (SPAIDEN).

Address types Address types for the display of addresses are maintained on the
Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) in the
DISP group.
Address Address information stored in the Address Repeating table
(SPRADDR). This data can also be viewed on SPAIDEN.

An address is displayed if its type matches one of the address

display rules, if the address is effective on the system date, and if
the address has not been made inactive.

Phone Telephone number information stored in the Telephone Repeating

table (SPRTELE). This data can also be viewed on the Telephone
Form (SPATELE).

Application data Application data stored in the Admissions Application Repeating

Table (SARADAP). This data can also be viewed on the
Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS).

If an application is displayed on the Application Summary page

with a status that is not Web-enabled, then Not Available is
displayed in the Status field.

If an application is displayed on the Application Summary page

with a decision that is not Web-enabled, then Please
Contact Admissions Office is displayed in the Decision
field.

Requirements Checklist requirements data stored in the Admission Application

Checklist table (SARCHKL).

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Electronic Admissions For the group DISP, enter the address type in the Address
Application Rules Form Type field for labels APPADDR1 and APPADDR2.
(SAAERUL)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 170

 Item Description

Admissions Application Select the Web Ind checkbox for each application status that
Status Code Validation Form you want to be available on the Web.
(STVAPST)

Admissions Application Select the Display on Web checkbox for each application
Decision Code Validation decision that you want to be available on the Web.
Form (STVAPDC)

Admissions Request Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each application
Checklist Code Validation checklist item that you want to be available on the Web.
Form (STVADMR)

Admissions Checklist Status Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each application
Validation Form (STVCKST) checklist status that you want to be available on the Web.

Electronic Admissions If you want to allow applicants to indicate their admission

Applications Rules Form decisions on the web, for group DCSN, enter Y in the Value
(SAAERUL) field for the ALLOWDECISION rule.

Define the other rules for group DCSN as needed to meet your
institution’s requirements. For step-by-step instructions, see
“Set Up Web Acceptance of Admissions Offer” on page 235.

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Confirm Attendance Updates the Decision Data block on the Admissions Decision
Form (SAADCRV).

The label on this button is customized by your institution.

Withdraw Application Updates the Decision Data block on the Admissions Decision
Form (SAADCRV).

Updates the Decision Data block on the Admissions Decision

Form (SAADCRV) if the CAPTUREWDINFO rule is set to Y on
SAAERUL.

The label on this button is customized by your institution.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 171

 Link Action

Return to Application Goes to the Application Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Menu

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Confirm Acceptance Redisplays the Application Summary page with a confirmation

that the application decision was successfully saved.

The label on this button is customized by your institution.

Withdraw Application Does one of the following:

• Goes to Applicant Withdrawal Information page
(bwskadec.P_ApplicationWDInfo) if the
CAPTUREWDINFO rule is set to Y on SAAERUL.
• Redisplays the Application Summary page if the
CAPTUREWDINFO rule is set to N on SAAERUL, with the
application decision for the decision code description associated
with the WITHDRAWCODE rule on SAAERUL.
The label on this button is customized by your institution.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Applicant Withdrawal Information

(bwskadec.P_ApplicationWDInfo)
This page displays the details of all sections in which a student is currently enrolled for the
selected term.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 172

 Item Description/Source Information

Name Name and nickname information stored in the Person

Identification/Name Repeating table (SPRIDEN). This data can
also be viewed on the Identification Form (SPAIDEN).

Address types Address types for the display of addresses are maintained on the
Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) in the
DISP group.
Address Address information stored in the Address Repeating table
(SPRADDR). This data can also be viewed on SPAIDEN.

An address is displayed if its type matches one of the address

display rules, if the address is effective on the system date, and if
the address has not been made inactive.

Phone Telephone number information stored in the Telephone Repeating

table (SPRTELE). This data can also be viewed on the Telephone
Form (SPATELE).

Application data Application data stored in the Admissions Application Repeating

Table (SARADAP). This data can also be viewed on the
Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS).

If an application is displayed on the Application Summary page

with a status that is not Web-enabled, then Not Available is
displayed in the Status field.

If an application is displayed on the Application Summary page

with a decision that is not Web-enabled, then Please
Contact Admissions Office is displayed in the Decision
field.

Withdrawal Reason Reason the applicant is withdrawing the application.

The values in the pulldown list are those reason codes defined on
the Withdrawal Reason Code Validation Form (STVWRSN) and
for which the Display on Web checkbox on the Admission
Application Decision Code Validation Form (STVAPDC) is
selected.

Institution Code Code of the institution that the applicant has decided to attend.

The Look Up College link can be selected to go to the Previous

College page (bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege), which
can be used to find a college code.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 173

 Item Description

Admission Application For each admission application decision code that you want to
Decision Code Validation be available on the web, select the Display on Web checkbox.
Form (STVAPDC)

Updates to Banner
This page updates the following items.

Item Description

Submit button Update SAADCRV with the appropriate decision.

Updates the Withdrawal Data block on the Admissions

Application Form (SAAADMS).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Lookup College Code Goes to the Previous College page

(bwskapcl.P_DispAppPrvCollege).

Return to Application Goes to the Application Menu page

Menu (bwskalog.P_DispChoices).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Redisplays the page with a message confirming that the

withdrawal information was saved successfully.

Reset Deletes the entries the user has made and redisplays the page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 174

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Set Up Admissions Self-Service

This section explains how to implement Admissions Self-Service and includes the
following procedures and information:

• “Setup Steps” on page 175

• “Procedures Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on page 191
• “Routines Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on page 193
• “Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on page 198
• “Delivered Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on page 199
• “Cross-Reference Labels Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on page 208
• “Address Hierarchy Rules for Credit Card Payment” on page 215
• “Identify Payment Profile for Credit Card Payment” on page 215

Setup Steps
This section provides the step-by-step setup procedures.

Warning! Due to data relationships and dependencies, these steps must

be performed in the order specified.

1. Review General Web controls.

Set up the global Web rules using Customize Web Rules in Web Tailor. Set up the
title, header, back URL and link, and help URL and link fields using Customize a Web
Menu or Procedure in Web Tailor. If these rules, links, and fields have not been
reviewed and customized for your institution, do this now.
The Address Role Privileges Form (GOAADRL) should contain entries with the Role
field pulldown set to the value of STUDENT for all address types that are to be used
by self-service admissions processing. These address types are displayed in the List
of Values for the Address Type field in the Section Rules block of the Web Application
Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP).
2. Define values on validation forms used in self-service admissions application
processing.
2.1. Use the EDI Application Source Code Validation Form (STVAPLS) to define
codes and descriptions for the possible sources of electronic applications.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 175

 2.2. Use the Application Verification Steps Validation Form (STVASTA) to define the
manual steps that you want to perform for each electronic application. One
value is required: ID Verification (IDVR).
For every electronic application received, you will need to determine whether
the application was submitted by a person already known to Banner (for
example, someone who is already being recruited) or whether the applicant
does not yet exist in Banner. The ID Verification Step prevents the loading of an
electronic application until you complete the verification and either match an
electronic applicant to an existing Banner person or create the person in
Banner.
You may also wish to define additional manual verification steps. The ID
Verification Step is automatically completed by the Elec. App. Verify/Load
Process (SARETMT) process. Any additional verification steps identified will not
be automatically processed by SARETMT.
2.3. Use the Web Application Section Validation Form (STVWSCT) to define the
sections of Banner Student Self-Service admissions applications. Data was
delivered for this form, but you may wish to review the values, become familiar
with the available sections, and/or update the descriptions of sections as these
descriptions will display at the top of each section when the section is displayed
on the Web.
2.4. Use the Web Application Elements Validation Form (STVWSCF) to define the
data elements that can be used within a given section on the Web application.
The system-required values cannot be modified, with the exception of the
description of the element code and the QUESTION element code.
STVWSCF works in conjunction with the Web Application Section Rules Form
(SAAWAPP). Initial element code descriptions from STVWSCF are defaulted
into SAAWAPP. The element code descriptions can be modified on STVWSCT,
or they can be modified on SAAWAPP, where they are called element rules
labels.
If an institution determines that a user-defined question can only be added to a
specific section, then that section should be identified in the Web Section field
for the QUESTION element code. Otherwise, the Web Section field can be left
blank, allowing questions to be added to any Web section.

Warning! Depending on your locale, it might be illegal to require users to

provide ethnicity and race information. Do not check the Required
checkbox on SAAWAPP for the PERSONAL (Personal Information) Web
application section code if requiring users to provide ethnicity and race
information is prohibited.

If such a regulation applies to your institution, you must also review your
existing Web application definitions and uncheck this checkbox for any
applications for which it is currently checked.

2.5. Use the Application Type Code Validation Form (STVWAPP) to define the types
of applications which can be received electronically and to define the values for
several required data elements for each application type. Your institution may
require different kinds of information from different types of applicants.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 176

 For example, you probably do not want to request prior college information from
first-time applicants but certainly want to ask for this information from transfer
applicants. You do want to ask for visa information from international applicants,
but not from domestic applicants.
The STVWAPP form lets you define the types of applications which will be
available to Web applicants. Think carefully about the kinds of information you
request from applicants, and define appropriate application types for each.
Make the descriptions of each type as clear as possible so that applicants are
able to choose the correct application to complete. Applicants will see the
descriptions from this form on the Web.
Several application types are delivered with the Banner Student Self-Service
system:
– Default Example - All Sections (00)
– Undergraduate Freshman (W1)
– Undergraduate Transfer (W2)
– International Undergraduate Freshman (W3)
– International Undergraduate Transfer (W4)
– Graduate Studies (W5)
– International Graduate Studies (W6)
– Continuing Education, Non Degree (W7)
2.6. Use the EDI Rule Group Validation Form (STVEGRP) to display codes and
descriptions for groups of EDI application processing rules. Group codes are
provided so that rules which apply to similar types of data can be easily queried
on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL). The ADMS
and DISP group codes are the two most used by self-service admissions
processing.

Note: Values in this table (STVEGRP) are not intended to be maintained

locally. All required values are delivered and inserted during the install
process and/or via update scripts. This form and its data are provided to
support other forms, and no changes of any kind should be made to the
data on this form.

2.7. Use the EDI Verification Label Validation Form (STVXLBL) to display codes and
descriptions for EDI data verification labels which are used when processing a
variety of incoming EDI data.

Note: Values in STVXLBL are not intended to be maintained locally. All

required values are delivered and inserted during the install process and/
or via update scripts. This form and its data are provided to support other
forms, and no changes of any kind should be made to the data on this
form.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 177

 3. Set Web Display Indicators on validation forms.
Several admissions-related validation forms include Web Display Indicators. These
indicators control whether a specific value in the validation form will display and/or be
available for selection via the Web. Scripts which added the Web Indicator
checkboxes set the values to unchecked (set to N) for all values on these forms.
These checkboxes must be checked (set to Y) for a value to be available on the Web.
When you Web-enable a value in one of these validation forms, you should also
review the description. The description of a value, not the code itself, displays on the
Web.
The following validation forms include Web Display Indicators which control
admissions application processing via the Web:
• STVADMR - Admission Request Checklist Code Validation Form. An applicant's
outstanding checklist items display in the Review Application Status section of the
Web when the checklist item is Web-enabled using the Web Indicator checkbox.
• STVAPST - Admission Application Status Code Validation Form. Values display
(when the Web Indicator checkbox is checked) when an applicant reviews their
applications via the Web. If the status of an existing application has not been Web-
enabled, the description Not Available is displayed.
• STVAPDC - Admission Application Decision Code Validation Form. If an application
is entered into Banner (either manually or via the Web), the calendar on SAAWAAD
is set up, and the Display on Web checkbox is checked on STVAPDC, then the
most recent decision for that application will display on the Web Application
Summary Page. If the decision code has not been Web-enabled, then the message
Please Contact Admissions Office is displayed.
4. Define user-defined questions.
The Web User Defined Questions Form (SAAWUDQ) is used to define institution-
specific questions which request information not found elsewhere in any application
section. You can use the form to develop questions to collect any additional kind of
information your processing requires. Up to ten user-defined questions can be
displayed on any application section, while up to twenty user-defined questions can
be displayed in the Additional Information section. Each question can be up to 2,000
characters in length. The applicant will have 2,000 characters to answer the question.
This form also allows the user to associate an admission request checklist code with
each question. In addition, the user can specify that a question should have a Yes/No
radio button for its answer, instead of a text box.
In addition, essay questions can be defined on this form. Each essay question can be
up to 2,000 characters in length. The Web applicant has 32,700 characters to answer
the question.
5. Build Banner Student Self-Service applications by combining sections.
In earlier steps, you reviewed and/or created Electronic Application Types (using
STVWAPP) and reviewed delivered Web Application Sections (STVWSCT) and Web
Application Elements (STVWSCF). Now it is time to combine the sections and
elements to make an application. Sections include the actual questions that applicants
will be asked to answer, and each application is composed of a set of sections in a
specific order.
5.1. The Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP) is used to define the
sections and elements that make up each application type. It is also used to

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 178

 specify the address type for each section of an application which collects
address information. This form allows the user to determine in what order the
sections will appear and in what order the data elements will appear within a
section. Users can designate an element as required on this form, as well as
indicate if the element should display on the Web. Users can also assign
specific questions which were previously defined on SAAWUDQ to a Web
section.

Warning! Depending on your locale, it might be illegal to require users to

provide ethnicity and race information. Do not check the Required
checkbox on SAAWAPP for the PERSONAL (Personal Information) Web
application section code if requiring users to provide ethnicity and race
information is prohibited.

If such a regulation applies to your institution, you must also review your
existing Web application definitions and uncheck this checkbox for any
applications for which it is currently checked.

5.2. Use the Web Application Section - Data Element Rules window to enter the data
elements that will display on a given section.
The first time you enter this window when defining a new section, all the data
elements defined on STVWSCF for that Web section will populate the window.
The user can then reorder the elements, as well as delete any not automatically
marked as required. This window enforces the entry requirement of First and
Last Name, Street Line 1, City, and Choice of Study before an application can
be marked complete.
This window allows updates to the Order, Element Rules Label, Question
Sequence Number, Required (Indicator), and Display (Indicator) fields.
The Element Rules block is sorted by the Order field. When data elements
initially populate the Element Rules block, their order is automatically set in
increments of five (5). The user can update the Order field or delete an entire
data element record.
5.3. The user can copy the sections and elements set up for another application type
to a new application type by using the Copy Configuration button. If the
application type being copied from has questions defined for it on SAAWUDQ, a
copy of those questions will be made on SAAWUDQ for the new application
type. If questions have already been defined on SAAWUDQ for the new
application type, the copy process won't touch those questions but will add all
questions with non-matching sequence numbers from the existing application
type to the new application type.
For example:
– A new application type of X1 has questions defined with sequence numbers
1, 2, and 5 on SAAWUDQ.
– Questions with sequence numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 have already been
defined for existing application type of Y1.
– Use SAAWAPP to copy application type Y1 into X1. Questions 1, 2, and 5 for
application type X1 will remain unchanged.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 179

 – Questions 3, 4, 6, and 7 will be copied from application type Y1 to application
type X1.
– During the copy, any questions already assigned to application type X1 will
also be assigned to application type Y1.
6. Establish dates for the creation and receipt of Banner Student Self-Service
applications.
6.1. Define calendars for the application types that have different schedules on the
Web Application Term Calendar Rules Form (SAAWATR). Once this form is
used for an application type, it must always be used. This form allows the
institution to define the dates when applications of each type can be created
and subsequently viewed on the Web.
This form works in conjunction with the Web Application Term Display Control
Form (SOAATRM), where the calendar for all applications can be defined. If no
rules exist on SAAWATR for an application type, then the rules defined on
SOAATRM take effect.
6.2. Define the date ranges during which you will receive applications for a term. The
Web Application Term Display Control Form (SOAATRM) is used to specify
these time periods.
6.3. Control the calendar of applications in the Banner production tables using the
Web Admissions Term Calendar Rules Form (SAAWAAD). This calendar
determines by term, level, campus, college, and admit type when an application
can be viewed (regardless of its source), when the status can be viewed, and
when the most recent decision can be viewed on the Web.
The Priority (Code) field is used to create a unique key for each calendar rule.
It may be necessary to have multiple records for one level and term that start
and end on the same date, in order to exclude specific admit types from ever
displaying on the Web. The Priority (Code) field can be used to make each
record unique.
7. Customize Web pulldowns.
7.1. Define codes, by application type, on the Web Application Customized Lists
Form (SAAWADP) which should display in the Web pulldowns for test codes,
requested materials, interests, and credit card waiver reasons. If no codes are
defined here, the pulldown values will be taken from the appropriate Web-
enabled rows on SOAXREF. If no codes are defined on SOAXREF, the values
will be taken from the appropriate validation table.
7.2. Identify curricula, by application type, on the Web Application Customized
Curriculum Form (SAAWCUR) that you want to appear in the Plan pulldown.
7.3. When you are first setting up self-service admissions, enter SAAWCUR with the
Restricted checkbox in the Key Block unchecked. All appropriate curriculum
rules will display. Check the Restrict to Type checkbox for those curriculum
items which you want to be available for this application type. Upon re-entering
the form, if you want to see only those curricula for this application type, check
the Restricted checkbox in the Key Block.

Note: With the exception of the Restrict to Type checkbox on

SAAWCUR, SAAWCUR and SOAXCUR are query only forms.
SOACURR is used to customize Web application data.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 180

 8. Determine use of medical information question.
Determine whether you want to collect medical information on applications received
via the Web. The data element, Medical, can be defined under the Personal
Information section rule on SAAWAPP. This data element will display the Web-
enabled values defined on SOAXREF (where the label is equal to STVMEDI). If no
values are defined on SOAXREF, then the pulldown list will display all values in the
Medical Code Validation Form (STVMEDI).
9. Customize Signature Page option.
9.1. A default Signature page is delivered with the Banner Student Self-Service
Admissions application, and its display is controlled using the SIGPAGEDISP
label rule on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) for
the group of DISP. The Signature page allows you to provide processing
instructions to applicants who submit applications via the Web.
9.2. The default Signature page is nothing more than Info Text for the page. Sample
Info Text for this page is delivered, but you can customize it to reflect your
institution's processing and desired instructions using Web Tailor. Use the
Format HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) to update the Info Text for the
Display Signature package to reflect your institution's desired instructions, if you
decide to have the Signature page displayed.
9.3. You can customize the Signature page by application type using the Electronic
Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). The Web Signature Letters
window is used to assign customized letters to specific letter types. The letter
type of STANDARD is used to assign a Signature page for Web applicants not
using Quick Start processing. The other letter types are used with Quick Start
processing to identify which letter should be displayed, depending on the
circumstances (i.e., a record is suspended during the automatic match).
The letters assigned to letter types must first be created on GTVLETR and then
associated with the appropriate module code on the HTML Letter Rules Form
(SOAELTL). Then the letter contents must be constructed on the Format HTML
Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR).
SOAELTR allows you to create a letter using electronic applicant variables,
some formatting, and free form text. This form also allows you to see how the
letter will look by using the Display Letter button.
10. Customize Web application data.
Users can customize Web application data by application type using the Electronic
Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). This form is used for entering default
data and rules for curriculum, email address, link text, and credit cards.
The keys to the record are the Web application type and an effective term. The
effective term code in the Default Curriculum block may be different than the effective
term in the key. In order for a curriculum to be used on this form, it must first be set up
on the Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR).
If the term and curriculum are entered on this form, the curriculum data will
automatically populate the student’s application when the electronic application is
created. The Web data section for curriculum does not have to be displayed on the
Web application. If the section is displayed, the curriculum entered on SAAWADF will
automatically be filled in.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 181

 The form can be used to define the email address and the email link text that will
appear on the Application Checklist Menu on the Web. If no link text or email address
exists on this form, but the EMAILSENDADDR and EMAILSENDLINK rules exist on
SAAERUL where the value in the Group field is equal to ADMS, then that link text will
display on the Application Checklist Menu and that email address will become the To:
address.
The Application Credit Card Fee Rule block on SAAWADF is used to define the credit
card processing rules. The institution indicates if they will accept credit cards, and if
they do, the following decisions must be made. Are they required, will waivers be
allowed, what detail code should be associated with the payment, and what, if any,
checklist rule will be satisfied by the credit card payment. The Charge Detail and
Amount are required fields, and the Charge Detail must have a category code of
APF.
11. Build Quick Start processing.
Quick Start processing is turned on and off using the Automated Processing Rules
block (in the Matching and Processing Rule window) on the Electronic Applicant Web
Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). Check the Enable QuickStart Processing
checkbox if you want Quick Start to run for this application type.
11.1. Once Quick Start processing is enabled, you can then customize how you want
it to operate using the remaining fields in the Automated Processing Rules
window. You can indicate that you want to:
– create a recruit record by checking the Automatically Create Recruit
Record checkbox,
– create an application record by checking the Automatically Create
Application Record checkbox, (if an application is created, you also have the
option of creating a decision record by checking the Process Decision
checkbox and entering the decision code in the Admission Decision field),
– access Banner Student Self-Service by checking the Provide Access to
Student Self-Service checkbox, which in turn causes an Access Web for
Students button to be displayed on the Signature page when the applicant
has a student record, and
– create one application (if the Create One Application checkbox is checked,
one application will be created with all curricula; if the field is not checked, a
separate application will be created for each curriculum).
You can select any individual item or a combination of items. There are two
restrictions to remember:
– the Enable QuickStart Processing checkbox must be checked in order to
check any of the other choices, and
– the Process Decision checkbox must be checked in order for a decision
code to be entered in the Admission Decision field. (In addition, the Auto
Student checkbox (in the EDI and Self-Service block of the Majors and
Departments window on SOACURR) must be checked.)
For example, an institution could use Quick Start processing to automatically
create a recruit record and an application record for a standard Web application,
eliminating the need to run the Elec App Verify/Load Process (SARETMT).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 182

 11.2. Quick Start processing attempts to automatically match a Web applicant to an
existing Banner person. Use the Web Matching Rules block on SAAWADF to
set up the rules to be used by the automated matching process.
12. Review and update or define the Procedures and Routines for each application type.
Before loading data from the holding tables into the permanent Banner tables, you
want to make sure that the information submitted by the applicant is as complete and
correct as it can possibly be. Application Procedures and Routines perform much of
this work.
A Procedure is a collection of Routines. Routines check data at the data element
level, and a number of Routines may be included within a Procedure. Procedures are
closely related to each table into which data will be loaded. All required Routines must
be satisfied before a Procedure can be satisfied. A set of Procedures and Routines
has been delivered and is attached to each of the delivered Application Types.
Procedures and Routines are attached to each Electronic Application Type using the
Electronic Admissions Procedure/Routine Control Form (SAAECRL). This form also
includes several flags which specify how each procedure and routine will be used in
electronic application processing.
Both the Procedures section of the main window and the Routines section of the
Admissions Verification and Load Routines window include a Required flag and an
Override flag.
12.1. The Required flag is used to specify the Procedures and Routines which will be
attached to each electronic application when it is received. When a Procedure
or Routine is attached to an application, it needs to be fulfilled before the
application is considered verified and before the data is “pushed” to the
permanent Banner tables. More specifically, each Routine needs to be fulfilled
before the overall procedure can be satisfied.
The Procedures and Routines in effect control the types of data which will be
verified and eventually “pushed” into Banner. You can set Procedures and
Routines to “Not Required” if you do not wish certain data to be verified and/or
loaded into Banner.
For example, you might choose not to load Medical Conditions from electronic
applications. You would set the Required flag for Procedure P060 (Health
Conditions Verification) to unchecked (N), and also set the Required flag for
Routine R0080 (Create Medical Conditions) in Procedure P900 (“PUSH”
Verification) to unchecked (N). This would tell the system not to verify Medical
Conditions and not to push them into Banner.
12.2. The Override flags associated with Procedures and Routines allow you to
specify whether a Routine or Procedure can be overridden manually at the
individual application level on SAAEAPS or automatically using the Elec. App.
Verify/Load Process (SARETMT). If a Routine or Procedure is overrideable, it
will still be attached to an electronic application (based upon the Required flag),
but can be overridden if desired.
For example, you may normally collect required visa types from international
applicants, but not all applicants may understand the visa type they require.
You could require visa types from international applicants, but allow the “push”
of visa information to be overridden if an applicant does not provide the correct
information. In this case, you would set the Required flags for Procedure P032
(International Information Verification) and all of its Routines to checked (Y), but

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 183

 set the Override flag for Routine R0030 (Create International Record) in
Procedure P900 (“PUSH” Verification) to checked (Y) so that you could override
the push of this information.
If a procedure has the Override flag checked, that procedure will be
automatically overridden, regardless of whether any of its routines fail.
If a routine has the Override flag checked, it will automatically be overridden if
the corresponding data field is blank. The only time it will not be over-ridden is if
the incoming data is in error.
The Elec. App. Verify/Load Process (SARETMT) will automatically override a
procedure or routine that fails the verification process due to blank data, if that
procedure or routine is marked as able to be overridden on SAAECRL, and the
AUTOOVERRIDE label for the group VCRL on SAAERUL is set to Y.
12.3. Duplicate processing is governed by rules set up in two places. First, overall
duplicate processing rules exist on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules
Form (SAAERUL) under group ADMS. These rules are: DUPLAPPLCURR,
DUPLAPPLLEVL, DUPLAPPLMAJR, DUPLAPPLPERS, DUPLAPPLTERM.
These rules tell the self-service admissions push packages whether to check for
duplicates in the given category. For example, if DUPLAPPLPERS is set to N,
then the corresponding Web package will not check for duplicate persons for
the Web application being pushed.

Note: The DUPLAPPLCURR rule is not currently used in self-service

admissions processing.

Duplicate processing rules also exist on the Electronic Admissions Procedure/

Routine Control Form (SAAECRL). These rules allow for duplicate processing
to be specified by application type instead of globally for all Web applications.
The rules exist within procedure P050 Application Verification (R0060 -
Duplicate Application for Person, R0070 - Duplicate Application for Term, and
R0080 - Duplicate Application for Level) and procedure P120 Entry Curriculum
Verification (R0010 - Duplicate Application for Major). These routines are
examined if the corresponding rule on SAAERUL is equal to Y.
Whether a specific routine allows duplicates depends on the setting of the
Override flag. If the Override flag is unchecked, then duplicates are not
allowed. If the Override flag is checked, then duplicates are allowed. For
example, if DUPLAPPLTERM is set to Y, routine R0070 is marked as required,
and the Override flag is checked, then multiple applications for the same term
are allowed. However, if DUPLAPPLLEVL is set to Y, routine R0080 is marked
as required, and the Override flag is not checked, then the Web application will
not be pushed if one already exists in Banner for the same term and level.
For delivered Web Application Types, all appropriate procedures and routines have
already been attached to each application type. If you define additional application
types, you need to attach the appropriate procedures and routines to each new
application type. You can do so automatically by using the Copy Procedure button in
the Key Block of SAAECRL. The Copy Procedure button allows you to copy all the
procedures and routines defined for any existing application type to your new
application type.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 184

 Note: See “Procedures Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on
page 191 for a list of the procedures on SAAECRL and their associated
routines.

13. Review and update rule values on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form
(SAAERUL).
The Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) includes a number of
rules which control how data is handled in self-service admissions application
processing. All rules which are used by system processing have been delivered and
should have been installed during the upgrade process.
For convenience purposes, Rules are categorized into Groups. Rule groups are used
to display rules with a similar purpose together, and Group Codes can be used to
specify that you want to display only a single group of rules at one time.
Each Rule is also identified by a Label and a Description. The script which installed
the Rule Groups and Rules also installed either the specific value expected for a rule
or the literal UPDATE ME in the Value field. When an actual value was delivered, its
EDI Indicator was also checked (set to Y) indicating that the rule expects an EDI
value, and the value for these rules should not be changed. When the literal UPDATE
ME was delivered, the value must be updated to reflect the local option for EDI
application processing to be used.
When reviewing and updating rules, you may want to query on the Value field for the
value UPDATE ME. After updating the appropriate rows, you may want to review all
rules so that you better understand how data will be processed.

Note: See “Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on

page 198 for a list of the rules delivered, the group with which they are
associated, a description of each rule, and instructions for updating each
rule.

14. Populate the EDI Cross-Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF).

If you will be processing both Web and EDI admissions applications, then you will
need to refer to the sections on “Processing Self-Service Admissions Applications”,
“EDI Set-up Procedures”, and “Processing EDI Applications” which follow. While much
of the setup on SOAXREF may not be required for your self-service admissions
applications, your EDI admissions application processing still relies heavily on the use
of the EDI Cross-Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF).
SOAXREF is used mainly by Web application processing to customize which values
the applicant will see in the various pulldowns available on the Web application. If an
institution wants all values within a validation table to display in the Web pulldown,
then no data from that validation table should be inserted into SOAXREF. For
example, since most institutions would want all state and province codes to display in
the state pulldown, no state or province codes need be inserted into SOAXREF. If,
however, an institution would like to customize which values from a validation table will
display in the Web pulldown, then they can either use the appropriate script to insert
all values from the validation table and then check the Web (Indicator) for those
values which should display, or they can manually insert only those values which
should display on the Web (remembering to check the Web (Indicator)).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 185

 Data pertaining to which majors a Web applicant can select must be entered on
SOAXREF as well as on SOACURR. The institution can also decide to default in a
curriculum for a given application type. In that case, the major information will come
from the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF). This form also
uses the curricula defined on SOAXREF and SOACURR.
Following are the instructions for running the various scripts to populate SOAXREF for
majors as well as for the other values which an institution may decide to load in order
to customize which values will appear in the Web pulldowns.
Not all rows in SOAXREF are used in self-service admissions application processing.
Many rows are used only to process incoming TS 189 transaction sets received
through EDI. Other rows may be used only to process incoming AMCAS records for
medical school applications. Regardless, only rows which are completely Web-
enabled will be available for display in the self-service admissions application
pulldown lists.
A Web-enabled row is one which:
• exists in SOAXREF.
• has an EDI Value, and perhaps, an EDI Qualifier (depending upon the type of data
reflected in the rule).
• has the Web (Indicator) checked (set to Y).
• has a description.
• has a Banner Value.
In many cases, the only thing you need to do is ensure that all the values you want
displayed on the Web exist on SOAXREF and that the description clearly represents
the value you want the student to select. However, in some cases, you may need to
build additional rules.
For example, the values delivered for the label STVDEGC (Degree Level - Degree
Codes) are generic EDI Degree Levels (Associate, Baccalaureate, Master's). Web-
enabled values for this label are displayed when a transfer applicant is asked about
the degree pursued or earned at a prior college, and you may want to collect
information about specific degrees (Associate of Technology, Bachelor of Arts, Master
of Sciences), and have values in the corresponding Banner validation table which
reflect these specific degrees.
In these cases, you need to make up a value for the Value field, and you should make
sure that the value does not already exist for the label. For these rules, you will also
set the EDI Indicator to unchecked (set to N).
14.1. Define Web-enabled address and telephone types on SOAXREF.
Address and telephone types are assigned to each address section for a given
application type on the Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP). In
order for the Web to understand those values, they must be defined as Web-
enabled rows on SOAXREF. Define the appropriate address types on
SOAXREF using the label STVATYP and telephone types using the label
STVTELE. Remember the Web-enabled rows must contain a Banner value.
14.2. Define EDI cross-reference values for majors on SOAXREF.
Review the values in the CIPC field on the Major, Minor, Concentration Code
Validation Form (STVMAJR).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 186

 For US institutions, values used should be actual CIP (Classification of
Instructional Program) codes. For institutions in other countries, a different code
set (like Stats Canada codes) might be used. Determine the EDI code set used
for this field; the valid choices are listed on SOAXREF for the label FSTYIDQL.
Verify that the value for the rule label DFLTMAJRQLFR on the Electronic
Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) for the group equal to CURR
contains the EDI qualifier for this code set. (If CIP codes are used in the CIPC
field on STVMAJR, the EDI value for this label should be 81.)
For a complete, current set of EDI values, consult the Postsecondary Electronic
Standards Council (PESC) website www.pesc.org, where a link is provided
to EDI Implementation Guides.
Have your Information Services representative run the script
xrefmajr.sql. This script creates a row in the table SORXREF for each row
in STVMAJR which has a value in the CIPC field.

Note: This script can be run whenever values are added to or changed on
STVMAJR. It will always delete all values from SOAXREF (table
SORXREF) and re-populate it with the current values from STVMAJR.

14.3. Define multiple major codes on SOAXREF

In some cases, an institution wants to assign the same CIP code to multiple
majors and then make multiple programs available for selection in the Planned
Course of Study pulldown list in the Banner Student Self-Service Admissions
Application.
To create SORXREF values for multiple major codes that use the same CIP
code, perform the following manual steps:
– On SOAXREF, enter the label STVMAJR in the Key Block.
– Query for the first CIP code which may have multiple values.

Enter the CIP code in the EDI Value field and query on it.
– Review the values that exist, and/or add new values for the majors.

* Enter 81 in the EDI Qualifier field. 81 is the major code qualifier for CIP
codes.

* Enter a value which is different than any existing CIP code. For example, for
the first major code you define in a set, you might use the actual CIP code.

* Enter the corresponding Banner major code for one of the majors
represented by the CIP code.

* For every other major code which uses the same CIP code, create one line
on SOAXREF. On each line, you will need to enter a different EDI value in the
EDI Value field. For example, you might merely put a letter at the end of the
next CIP code. Specifically, Accounting (major code ACCT) might use an EDI
value of 060201, and Fund Accounting (major code ACTF) might use an EDI
value of 060201A.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 187

 For example:

EDI EDI Banner

EDI Label Qualifier Value Student Web Value Description

STVMAJR 81 270101 X X MATH Mathematics

STVMAJR 81 270101A X X AMTH Applied

Mathematics

– Review entries in the Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR) to ensure that you
have an entry for each major. If you do not, create the entry, because cross-
reference rules are dependent on curriculum rules.
– Define the EDI curriculum cross-reference values for the newly created major
codes on SOACURR.

* Query for the first major code.

* Review the EDI cross-reference information for the record. You may need to
define cross-reference values.

* If you need to define cross-reference values, enter the appropriate EDI

degree level code in the EDI Degree field. The appropriate EDI Qualifier and
Identifier Code will display, or a List of Values will be available if more than
one matching record exists on SOAXREF.

* Check (set to Y) the Display on Self-Service (Indicator).

* Enter a Web display description in the Self-Service Description field. This

is what will display in the Planned Course of Study pulldown menu on the
Web application.

* Save.

* Repeat this step until you have appropriate cross-reference values defined
for all major codes that you want to display on the Web application.
– Review your updates by accessing the Planned Course of Study page for a
self-service admissions application. The programs you have just defined
should display.
14.4. Define EDI cross-reference values for states/provinces
Update the EDI Equivalent on the State/Province Code Validation Form
(STVSTAT) with the appropriate EDI values.
For a complete, current set of EDI values, consult the Postsecondary Electronic
Standards Council (PESC) website www.pesc.org, where a link is provided
to EDI Implementation Guides.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 188

 Have your Information Services representative run the script xrefstat.sql.
This script creates a row in the table SORXREF for each row in STVSTAT which
has an EDI Equivalent value.

Note: This script can be run whenever states/provinces are added to or

are changed on STVSTAT. It will always delete all values from SOAXREF
(table SORXREF) and re-populate it with the current values from
STVSTAT.

14.5. Define EDI cross-reference values for nations

Update the EDI Equivalent on the Nation Code Validation Form (STVNATN)
with the appropriate EDI values.
For a complete, current set of EDI values, consult the Postsecondary Electronic
Standards Council (PESC) website www.pesc.org, where a link is provided
to EDI Implementation Guides.
Have your Information Services representative run the script
xrefnatn.sql. This script creates a row in the table SORXREF for each row
in STVNATN which has an EDI Equivalent value.

Note: This script can be run whenever nation codes are added to or are
changed on STVNATN. It will always delete all values from SOAXREF
(table SORXREF) and re-populate it with the current values from
STVNATN.

14.6. Define EDI cross-reference values for ethnicities

Update the EDI Equivalent on the Ethnic Code Validation Form (STVETHN)
with the appropriate EDI values.
For a complete, current set of EDI values, consult the Postsecondary Electronic
Standards Council (PESC) website www.pesc.org, where a link is provided
to EDI Implementation Guides.
Have your Information Services representative run the script
xrefethn.sql. This script creates a row in the table SORXREF for each row
in STVETHN which has an EDI Equivalent value.

Note: This script can be run whenever ethnic values are added to or
changed on STVETHN. It will always delete all values from SOAXREF
(table SORXREF) and re-populate it with the current values from
STVETHN.

See “Cross-Reference Labels Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing” on

page 208 for a list of the labels used on SOAXREF.
15. Review curriculum rules and define EDI cross-reference curriculum rules.
In Banner, a student's academic program is defined by a combination of the data
elements program, campus, college, level, degree, and major, and these data
elements must be valid alone and in combination. When an applicant completes an

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 189

 application for admission, it is not likely that they would know all of the valid
combinations of these elements.
To make Web program choice selection clearer and easier, use the Curriculum Rules
Form (SOACURR). Before beginning Web application processing, you need to update
the curriculum cross-reference rules with appropriate EDI values.
The Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR) displays information for each major
curriculum rule and the base rule to which it is attached. You need to update the EDI
Degree field value. The EDI Level (qualifier) and EDI Identification values are
retrieved by matching the major code from the curriculum rule to a row in SOAXREF.
In addition, you need to update the Web Display (Indicator) and Description values
for all curricula which are to be available for Web selection.
• The EDI Degree field must be updated to a valid value in the label DEGRLEVL
(Degree Level Codes) from the EDI Cross-Reference Rules Form (SOAXREF). This
field defines the generic level of the degree program for which the applicant is
applying.
• The EDI Level (qualifier) field must be updated to a valid value in the label
FSTYIDQL (Field of Study Qualifier Codes) from the EDI Cross-Reference Rules
Form (SOAXREF). This field defines the EDI qualifier for the code set used for Field
of Study Codes, which will be entered in the next field.
• The EDI Identification field must be updated to a valid value in the label STVMAJR
(Field of Study Identifier Codes) from the EDI Cross-Reference Curriculum Rules
Form (SOAXCUR) for a rule using the EDI Field of Study Qualifier entered in the
previous field. This field defines the subject matter of the intended field of study.
• The Display on Self-Service (Indicator) must be checked for all rules for which
applications can be received via Banner self-service admissions application
processing.
• The Auto Student (Indicator) must be checked if this curriculum is to be available
for Quick Start processing.
• The Self-Service Description data must be provided for all rules representing
curricula which will be displayed in self-service admissions applications. The
description maintained is exactly what will be displayed on the Web and also
represents the total information from which the student will be able to select. For
example, if the curriculum rule represents a Bachelor of Arts degree with a major in
English which is only valid on the Main Campus, you would want the description to
be something like “BA - English (Main Campus only)”.
Some cautions are in order as you define your EDI Curriculum Cross-Reference
Rules:
• If possible, you should not use the same combination of EDI degree level, EDI field
of study qualifier, and EDI field of study identifier for more than one curriculum rule.
If you do, Web processing will not be able to map the combination back to a single
major curriculum rule. In this situation, the default values for the group code CURR
(curriculum rules) maintained on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form
(SAAERUL) are used when the application is loaded into the permanent Banner
application tables.
• Web application types include a level in their definition on the Application Type
Code Validation Form (STVWAPP), and curriculum rules require a level in each
base rule on the Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR). Only cross-referenced

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 190

 curriculum rules for the level which matches the Web application type level will be
displayed on the Web. For example, if the level in a Web Application Type is UG
(undergraduate), only cross-referenced curriculum rules for the level UG will display
for that application type.
16. Customize curriculum rules by application type on the Web Application Customized
Curriculum Form (SAAWCUR).
The Web Application Customized Curriculum Form (SAAWCUR) allows institutions to
select only certain qualifying curricula to appear in the Plan pulldown for a particular
application type. This form is query only, except for the use of the Restrict to Type
checkbox.
When you enter the form with a valid application type in the Key Block, the form will
return all SORCMJR records whose level matches the level for the application type
and which have non-null values in SORCMJR_DEGR_CODE, SORCMJR_EDI_QLFR,
and SORCMJR_EDI_VALUE. Once all valid records are displayed, you can choose
which ones should be available for this application type by checking the Restrict to
Type checkbox. A record must have the Display on Self-Service (Indicator)
checked and the Self-Service Description field complete on SOACURR, in order for
the record to display on the Web.
Once all appropriate rules for this application type have had the Restrict to Type
checkbox checked, the user can re-enter the form with the application type and can
check the Restricted checkbox in the Key Block. After performing a Next Block, the
form will display only those curricula which have been restricted to this application
type.

Note: With the exception of the Restrict to Type checkbox on

SAAWCUR, SAAWCUR and SOAXCUR are query only forms.
SOACURR is used to customize Web application data.

Banner can be used to accept admissions applications via the Web using Banner Student
Self-Service Admissions Application processing.

Procedures Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing

The following table is a list of the procedures on SAAECRL that are delivered for the Web
application type of 00.

Procedure Procedure Name Required Override Description

P010 ID Verification Y N The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid ID exists.

P020 Name Verification Y N The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid name
exists. A valid name in Banner must
include a first name and a last name.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 191

Procedure Procedure Name Required Override Description

P030 Biographic Y Y The routines associated with this

Information procedure verify whether valid biographic
information exists.

P032 International Y Y The routines associated with this

Information procedure verify whether valid international
information exists.

P035 Residency Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid residency
information exists.

P040 Address Information Y N The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid address
exists.

P045 Email Verification Y Y The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid email
address exists.

P050 Application Y N The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid
application exists.

P060 Health Conditions Y Y Not used unless Health Question section is

Verification implemented.

P070 Phone Record Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid phone
record exists.

P080 Religion Verification Y Y The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid religion
exists.

P090 Language Record Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid language
record exists.

P100 Immunization Record Y Y Not used at this time.

P110 Applicant Activities Y Y The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether valid applicant
activities exists.

P120 Entry Curriculum Y N The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid entry
curriculum exists.

P130 High School Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid high
school exists.

P135 High School Subj. Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid high school
subjects exist.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 192

Procedure Procedure Name Required Override Description

P140 Previous College Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid previous
college exists. This procedure is not
required if the application type will not
collect this information i.e., the person is a
freshman and has no prior college
information.

P142 Prv. Col. Degree Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid previous
college degree exists.

P145 Prv. Col. Major Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether a valid previous
college major exists.

P150 Test Score Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid test scores
exist.

P160 Relative Information Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid parental
information exists.

P170 Question Answer Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid questions
and answers exist.

P175 Requested Materials Y Y The routines associated with this

Verification procedure verify whether valid requested
materials exist.

P900 "PUSH" Verification Y N The routines associated with this

procedure verify whether a valid PUSH
exists.

Routines Used in Admissions Self-Service Processing

The following table is a list of the routines on SAAECRL, organized by procedure.

Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P010 R0010 Valid ID Found Y N

P010 R0020 ID Length Check Y N

P010 R0200 ID New to Banner; Create PrevID Y N

P010 R9001 Edit Results Y N

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 193

 Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P020 R0010 First Name Check Y N

P020 R0020 Last Name Check Y N

P020 R0030 Previous Last Name Check Y Y

P020 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P030 R0010 Date of Birth Established Y Y

P030 R0020 Ethnicity Established Y Y

P030 R0025 Race Established Y Y

P030 R0030 Ethnic Category Established Y Y

P030 R0031 Veteran Established Y Y

P030 R0040 Legacy Established Y Y

P030 R0050 SSN Established Y Y

P030 R0060 Marital Status Established Y Y

P030 R0080 Gender Established Y Y

P030 R0090 Citizenship Established Y Y

P030 R0091 Nation of Citizenship Est Y Y

P030 R0110 Native Language Established Y Y

P030 R0130 Home Language Established Y Y

P030 R0150 Corresponding Lang. Est Y Y

P030 R0200 Overwrite Existing Gender Y Y

P030 R0210 Overwrite Existing Birthdate Y Y

P030 R0220 Overwrite Existing Citizenship Y Y

P030 R0230 Overwrite Existing Confidential Y Y

P030 R0240 Overwrite Existing Religion Y Y

P030 R0250 Overwrite Existing Marital St Y Y

P030 R0255 Overwrite Existing Race Y Y

P030 R0260 Overwrite Existing Ethnicity Y Y

P030 R0265 Overwrite Ethnic Category Y Y

P030 R0270 Overwrite Existing SSN N N

P030 R0280 Overwrite Existing Legacy Y Y

P030 R0290 Overwrite Existing Veteran Y Y

P030 R9001 Edit Results Y N

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 194

 Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P032 R0010 VISA Type Established Y Y

P032 R0020 VISA Number Established Y Y

P032 R0030 VISA Issue Date Established Y Y

P032 R0040 VISA Expiration Date Y Y

Established

P035 R0010 Residency Established Y Y

P035 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P040 R0010 Address Type Code Established Y N

P040 R0030 Street Line 1 Established Y N

P040 R0040 City Established Y N

P040 R0050 State Code Established Y N

P040 R0060 County Code Established Y Y

P040 R0070 ZIP Code Established Y N

P040 R0080 Nation Established Y Y

P040 R0090 Address Data Relationships Y N

P040 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P045 R0010 Email Type Established Y Y

P045 R0020 Email Address Established Y Y

P045 R9001 Email Record Existence Check Y N

P050 R0010 Application Type Established Y N

P050 R0020 Type Code Established Y N

P050 R0030 Source Established Y Y

P050 R0050 Application Term Established Y N

P050 R0060 Dupl Application for Person Y N

P050 R0070 Dupl Application for Term Y N

P050 R0080 Dupl Application for Level Y N

P050 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P060 R0010 Medical Condition Established Y Y

P060 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P070 R0010 Phone Number Type Established Y Y

P070 R0020 Phone Number Established Y Y

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 195

 Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P070 R9001 Record Existence Check Y N

P080 R0010 Religion Established Y Y

P080 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P090 R0010 Language Established Y Y

P090 R0020 Language Use Established Y Y

P090 R0030 Language Proficiency Estb. Y Y

P090 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P100 R0010 Immunization Established Y Y

P100 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P110 R0010 Activity Established Y Y

P110 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P120 R0005 Degree Level Established Y N

P120 R0006 Fld of Stdy Level Established Y Y

P120 R0007 Fld of Stdy Qualifier Estb. Y N

P120 R0008 Fld of Stdy Ident. Code Estb. Y N

P120 R0009 Banner Equiv. Curriculum Est. Y N

P120 R0010 Duplicate Application; Major Y Y

P120 R9001 Record Edit Results Y N

P130 R0010 High School Established Y Y

P130 R0100 Graduation Date Established Y Y

P130 R0110 Class Rank Established Y Y

P130 R0120 Class Size Established Y Y

P130 R0130 Class Rank-Size Established Y Y

P130 R0140 Grade Point Average Est. Y Y

P130 R0200 Update Existing HS Data Y N

P130 R9001 Record Edit Results Y N

P135 R0010 Subject Established Y Y

P135 R9001 Record Verification Results Y N

P140 R0010 Previous College Established Y Y

P140 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P142 R0010 Degree Established Y Y

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 196

 Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P142 R0030 Degree Date Established Y Y

P142 R0040 Earned Hours Established Y Y

P142 R0050 Bgn Attendance Date Est. Y Y

P142 R0060 End Attendance Date Est. Y Y

P142 R0070 Grade Point Average Est. Y Y

P142 R0200 Update Prior College Data N N

P142 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P145 R0010 Previous College Majors Y Y

P145 R0020 Previous College Minors Y Y

P145 R0030 Previous College Conc. Y Y

P145 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P150 R0010 Test Established Y Y

P150 R0020 Test Date Established Y Y

P150 R0030 Test Score Valid Y Y

P150 R9001 Edit Results Y N

P160 R0010 First Name Established Y Y

P160 R0020 Last Name Established Y Y

P160 R0030 Relationship Code Established Y Y

P160 R9001 Relative Record Check Y N

P170 R0010 Question Established Y Y

P170 R0020 Answer Established Y Y

P170 R9001 Question Answer Checked Y N

P175 R0010 Material Established Y Y

P175 R9001 Material Checked Y N

P900 L010 Create Application Required Y Y

P900 L020 Create Person Record Y Y

P900 L025 Create Race Record Y Y

P900 L030 Create International Record Y Y

P900 L040 Create Address Record Y Y

P900 L045 Create Email Record Y Y

P900 L050 Create Telephone Record Y Y

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 197

 Procedure Routine Routine Name Required Override

P900 L060 Create High School Record Y Y

P900 L070 Create High School Subjects Y Y

P900 L080 Create Medical Conditions Y Y

P900 L090 Create Prior College Record Y Y

P900 L100 Create Prior College Degree Y Y

P900 L110 Create Prior College Major Y Y

P900 L120 Create Prior College Minor Y Y

P900 L130 Create Prior College Conc. Y Y

P900 L140 Create Test Score Record Y Y

P900 L150 Create Outside Interest Record Y Y

P900 L160 Create Parent Information Y Y

P900 L170 Create Question/Answer Y Y

P900 L175 Create Materials Y Y

Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service

Processing
The following table is a list of the rule groups and codes on SAAERUL that are used by
self-service admissions processing.

Group Code Group Name Description

ADDR Address Source Rules Rules in which you specify address source codes to be
used in electronic admissions application processing.

ADMS Admission Rules Rules which control the loading of duplicate applications
and residency information for applications.

ATYP Address Type Rules Rules used to specify the address types to be assigned to
addresses received in electronic applications.

CQLF Code Qualifiers Rules used to specify the EDI code qualifier for types of
data which require special processing.

CURR Curriculum Rules Rules used to translate received information into valid
Banner curricula.

DCSN Applicant Decision Rules used to allow admissions applicants to accept offers
of admission in self-service.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 198

 Group Code Group Name Description

DISP Web Display Rules Rules which control the display of data sections in the
Banner self-service admissions application.

PATH System Path Rules Rules which describe the database path in which various
system components have been installed.

PCOL Prior College Rules Rules which are used to process prior college information.

PQLF Phone Qualifier Code Rules Rules which contain certain EDI telephone type qualifiers.

TEST Test Score Source Rules Rules which are used to identify the source of a test.

VCRL Verification Control Rules Rules which control several of the verification procedures
and routines.

Delivered Rule Groups Used in Admissions Self-Service

Processing
The following table is a list of the rules delivered, the group with which they are
associated, a description of each rule, and instructions for updating each rule.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

ADDR DFLTADDRSRCE Default Address Source N Update the Default Address Source
to the value from the Address Source
Validation Form (STVASRC) that you
want assigned to addresses loaded
from Web applications. (You may
need to build the desired value on
STVASRC first.) (See Note 2 below.)

ADMS DFLTASRCWEB Web Default Application N Update the Web Default Application
Source Source to the value from the EDI
Application Source Code Validation
Form (STVAPLS) that you want
assigned to electronic applications
received via the Web.

ADMS DFLTSBGIWEB Web Default Application N Insert the source STVSBGI value
SBGI Source into the Application Source Table
(SARRSRC).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 199

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

ADMS DUPLAPPLCURR Allow Dup App for N Update the value to Y (checked) to
Curriculum specify that self-service admissions
(Not currently used in Self-
should perform duplicate checking
Service admissions
using the duplicate rules set up on
processing.)
SAAECRL for the given application
type for the same term and
curriculum. Update the value to N
(unchecked) if no duplicate checking
should be done.

ADMS DUPLAPPLLEVL Allow Dup App for Level N Update the value to Y (checked) to
specify that self-service admissions
should perform duplicate checking
using the duplicate rules set up on
SAAECRL for the given application
type for the same term and level.
Update the value to N (unchecked) if
no duplicate checking should be
done.

ADMS DUPLAPPLMAJR Allow Dup App for Major N Update the value to Y (checked) to
specify that self-service admissions
should perform duplicate checking
using the duplicate rules set up on
SAAECRL for the given application
type for the same term and major.
Update the value to N (unchecked) if
no duplicate checking should be
done.

ADMS DUPLAPPLPERS Allow Dup App for Person N Update the value to Y (checked) to
specify that self-service admissions
should perform duplicate checking
using the duplicate rules set up on
SAAECRL for the given application
type for the same person, regardless
of the term, level, curriculum, or
major specified. Update the value to
N (unchecked) if no duplicate
checking should be done.

ADMS DUPLAPPLTERM Allow Dup App for Term N Update the value to Y (checked) to
specify that self-service admissions
should perform duplicate checking
using the duplicate rules set up on
SAAECRL for the given application
type for the same term, regardless of
the level, curriculum, or major
specified. Update the value to N
(unchecked) if no duplicate checking
should be done.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 200

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

ADMS EMAILTYPE Store default e-mails type N Enter a valid value from the E-mail
Address Type Validation Form
(GTVEMAL). This value will be used
when storing email addresses from
Web applications on GOAEMAL.

ADMS EMAILSENDADDR Admissions Email N Update the value to be the email

Address address to which you want the Web
applicant’s email to be sent. For
example: John.Doe@aol.com.

ADMS EMAILSENDLINK Admissions Email Link N Update the value to contain the
Text hyperlink text the Web applicant will
select in order to bring up their
browser’s mail system. For example:
Have questions? Email us.

ADMS FORRESIDCODE Out of Country Residency N Update the Out of Country

Code Residency Code to the value from
the Residence Code Validation Form
(STVRESD) that you want assigned
to an application if the verification
procedures determine that the
person is an out-of-country resident.
(See Note 1 below.)

ADMS INRESIDCODE In State/Prov Residency N Update the In State/Province

Code Residency Code to the value from
the Residence Code Validation Form
(STVRESD) that you want assigned
to an application if the verification
procedures determine that the
person is an in-state/province
resident. (See Note 1 below.)

ADMS ONEAPPORTWO Create One Application N Enter ONE to create one application
or Two with a primary and secondary
curriculum, or enter TWO to create
one application for each area of
study. This value is checked when an
application is loaded into Banner
from the Web. If only one area of
study is indicated on the Web, then
only one application will be created,
regardless of the value of this rule.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 201

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

ADMS OUTRESIDCODE Out of State/Prov N Update the Out of State/Province

Residency Code Residency Code to the value from
the Residence Code Validation Form
(STVRESD) that you want assigned
to an application if the verification
procedures determine that the
person is an out-of-state/province
resident. (See Note 1 below.)

Note 1: Residency determination is made based on answers to a variety of questions. If the system cannot
determine residency, or if no residency codes are specified in these three rules, the “Default” Residency Code,
identified by the value for the label DFLTRESDCODE in the group RESD will be used.

ADMS PRIMSRCEWEB Web Default Application N Mark the value on the Application
SBGI as Primary Source Source Table (SARRSRC) from
DFLTSBGIWEB as the Primary
Source.

ATYP DFLTPARENTATYP Default Parent Address N Update the Default Parent Address
Type Type to the value from the Address
Type Code Validation Form
(STVATYP) that you want assigned
to addresses created from parent
address information. (See Note 2
below.)

ATYP DFLTSTUDENTATYP Default Student Address N Update the Default Student Address
Type Type to the value from the Address
Type Code Validation Form
(STVATYP) that you want assigned
to addresses created from applicant
address information. (See Note 2
below.)

Note 2:. For Web applications, each application section in which address data can be reported has its own
address type assigned to the application section using the Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP).
Default address types defined under Rule Group ATYP are defaults which are used only when the address type to
be assigned cannot be determined based upon other information.

CQLF ACTVCQLFCODE Default Activity Qlfr Code Y The Default Activity Qualifier Code is
an EDI value, and it is delivered as
SA. Specifically, it is used to
distinguish between activities and
awards which may be reported in the
same EDI data segment. This value
also has to be assigned to those
values which are “student activities”
in the EDI Cross-Reference Rules
Form (SOAXREF) for rules with a
label of STVINTS.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 202

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

CQLF AWRDCQLFCODE Default Award Qualifier Y The Default Award Qualifier Code is
Code an EDI value, and it is delivered as
SB. Specifically, it is used to
distinguish between activities and
awards which may be reported in the
same EDI data segment. This value
also has to be assigned to those
values which are “student awards” in
the EDI Cross-Reference Rules
Form (SOAXREF) for rules with a
label of STVINTS.

CURR DFLTCAMPCODE Default Campus Code N Update the Default Campus Code
Value Value to the value from the Campus
Code Validation Form (STVCAMP)
that you want assigned to an
application if the application's
campus cannot be correctly derived
by data viewed in the EDI Cross-
Reference Curriculum Rules Form
(SOAXCUR) or maintained in the
Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR).

CURR DFLTCOLLCODE Default College Code N Update the Default College Code
Value Value to the value from the College
Code Validation Form (STVCOLL)
that you want assigned to an
application if the application's college
cannot be correctly derived by data
viewed in the EDI Cross-Reference
Curriculum Rules Form (SOAXCUR)
or maintained in the Curriculum
Rules Form (SOACURR).

CURR DFLTDEGCCODE Default Degree Code N Update the Default Degree Code
Value Value to the value from the Degree
Code Validation Form (STVDEGC)
that you want assigned to an
application if the application's degree
cannot be correctly derived by data
viewed in the EDI Cross-Reference
Curriculum Rules Form (SOAXCUR)
or maintained in the Curriculum
Rules Form (SOACURR).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 203

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

CURR DFLTDEPTCODE Default Department Code N Update the Default Department Code
Value Value to the value from the
Department Code Validation Form
(STVDEPT) that you want assigned
to an application if the application's
department cannot be correctly
derived by data viewed in the EDI
Cross-Reference Curriculum Rules
Form (SOAXCUR) or maintained in
the Curriculum Rules Form
(SOACURR).

CURR DFLTMAJRCODE Default Major Code Value N Update the Default Major Code Value
to the value from the Major, Minor,
Concentration Code Validation Form
(STVMAJR) that you want assigned
to an application if the application's
major cannot be correctly derived by
data viewed in the EDI Cross-
Reference Curriculum Rules Form
(SOAXCUR) or maintained in the
Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR).

CURR DFLTMAJRQLFR Default Major Code Y The Default Major Code Qualifier is
Qualifier an EDI value, and it is delivered as
81, for CIP code. Specifically, the
Default Major Code Qualifier is used
by the script xrefmajr.sql
delivered to assist in building major
code cross-reference values in the
EDI Cross-Reference Rules Form
(SOAXREF). This script copies each
value in the Major, Minor,
Concentration Code Validation Table
(STVMAJR) which has a value in the
CIPC Code field and creates a rule in
the EDI Cross-Reference Rules
Table using the major code, CIPC
code, and EDI qualifier specified
here.

If the values entered in the CIPC field

on STVMAJR are not Classification
of Instructional Program (CIP) codes,
the correct EDI value for the code set
used for this field should be entered
for this rule.

(See Note 3 below.)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 204

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

Note 3: The value for this rule is used only by the script used to populate major code values in SOAXREF. If you
are not using the script and are instead building appropriate major code translation values by hand, this rule will
not be used.

CURR USEDEFAULTS Use Default Curriculum N Update the value to checked(set to

Values Y) or unchecked(set to N) to specify
whether the campus, college,
department, degree, and major
defaults should be used when an
application is created. (See Note 4
below.)

Note 4: Default values are used when the appropriate value cannot be determined using data viewed in the EDI
Cross-Reference Curriculum Rules Form (SOAXCUR) or maintained in the Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR).
For example:

A single set of EDI cross-reference values can be associated with more than one curriculum rule. If the same EDI
cross-reference values are assigned to more than one curriculum rule, the defaults are used as “tie-breakers” and
assigned to all associated fields.

Regardless of the data elements used when the Banner application is created, curriculum rule checking takes
place according to normal rules when the application data is viewed on any Banner form. If the values loaded for
the application represent an invalid curriculum choice, as defined by existing curriculum rules, an error message
is displayed and corrective action may be required at that time.

DCSN ALLOWDECISION Allow Applicant Decision N Update the Value column from
UPDATE ME to Y or N for the
applicant decision.

DCSN CONFIRMCODE Attendance Confirmation N Update the Value column from

Decision Code UPDATE ME to the value from the
Admission Application Decision
Code Validation Form (STVAPDC)
which should be used for the confirm
decision code.

DCSN CONFIRMLABEL Applicant Confirm Button N Update the Value column from
Label UPDATE ME to any value which
should be used for the Applicant
Confirm label.

DCSN WITHDRAWLABEL Applicant Withdraw N Update the Value column from

Button Label UPDATE ME to any value which
should be used for the Applicant
Withdraw label.

DCSN WITHDRAWCODE Withdraw Decision Code N Update the Value column from
UPDATE ME to the value from the
Admission Application Decision
Code Validation Form (STVAPDC)
which should be used for the
withdraw decision code.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 205

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

DCSN CAPTUREWDINFO Capture Withdrawn N Update the Value column from

Information UPDATE ME to Y or N for the
additional withdrawn information.

DISP ACTVSDISP # of Activity Rows to N The Number of Activity Rows to

Display Display rule is used only in Banner
self-service admissions application
processing. It specifies the number of
free-form activity spaces to display in
the Activities Section of a Web
application. If you do not want to
display free-form activities, set this
value to zero (0).

DISP SIGPAGEDISP Display Sig Page (TRUE/ N The Display Signature page rule is
FALSE) used only in Banner self-service
admissions application processing.
The Banner Web Application
includes the ability to display a
signature, certification, and an
instruction page at the time the
applicant marks the application as
complete. This rule specifies whether
the Signature page is displayed.
(See Note 5 below.) This is true
whether the page is created using
Info Text or the Format HTML Letter
Rules Form (SOAELTR).

Note 5: The “Signature page” is a separate page which can be displayed after marking a Web application as
“complete”. The page contains either Info Text if created using Web Tailor or an HTML letter if created using the
Format HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR). A sample set of InfoText is delivered for this page, but the text can
be customized to suit local options using one of the Banner General Web Forms. For further information on
updating Info Text, see the Banner Web Tailor User Guide.

DISP TESTSDISP # of Test Rows to Display N The Number of Test Rows to Display
rule is used only in Banner self-
service admissions application
processing. It specifies the number of
test report slots to display in the
Tests Section of a Web application. If
you do not wish to collect test scores
via Web applications, do not
associate the Test Information
section with any Web application
type on the Web Application Section
Rules Form (SAAWAPP).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 206

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

PATH CHECKMARKPATH Pathname for checkmark N The Checkmark gif pathname rule is
gif the database pathname for the
Checkmark gif. It is used only in self-
service admissions application
processing. This location should be
verified. Case is important.

PCOL PCOLDFLTDEGC Prior College Default N Update the Prior College Default
Degree Degree rule to the Banner degree
code from the Degree Code
Validation Form (STVDEGC) which
should be assigned as the prior
college degree attempted if an
applicant does not supply a value.

PQLF EMAILPQLFCODE Phone Qualifier for E-mail Y The Phone Qualifier for E-mail rule
specifies the EDI standard telephone
qualifier which identifies an e-mail
address.

Note: The delivered value for this

rule is EM; however, if the same
value has been defined for another
email address and/or telephone type
(such as Emergency), then it is
recommended that this value be
changed.

RESD DFLTRESDCODE Default Residency Code N Update the Default Residency Code
rule to the code from the Residence
Code Validation Form (STVRESD)
which should be assigned to an
applicant if a specific residence
status cannot be determined based
upon other information.

RESD HOMECOUNTY Institution's Home County N Update the Institution's Home County
rule to the code from the County
Code Validation Form (STVCNTY)
which represents the institution's
home county. This value is used, in
conjunction with other information, to
attempt to determine the residency
status to assign to an applicant.

RESD HOMENATION Institution's Home N Update the Institution's Home Nation

Country rule to the code from the Nation
Code Validation Form (STVNATN)
which represents the institution's
home nation. This value is used, in
conjunction with other information, to
attempt to determine the residency
status to assign to an applicant.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 207

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

RESD HOMESTATPROV Institution's Home State/ N Update the Institution's Home State/
Prov Province rule to the code from the
State/Province Code Validation Form
(STVSTAT) which represents the
institution's home state. This value is
used, in conjunction with other
information, to attempt to determine
the residency status to assign to an
applicant.

TEST DFLTTSRCWEB Web Default Test Score N Update the Institution's Web Default
Source Test Score Source rule to the code
from the Admission Test Score
Source Code Validation Form
(STVTSRC) which represents the
institution's test score source.

VCRL AUTOOVERRIDE Automatic Override N The Automatic Override Indicator

Indicator rule is used to specify whether
verification procedures and routines
which allow overrides (as defined on
the Electronic Admissions
Procedure/Routine Control Form
(SAAECRL) will be automatically
overridden. Update this rule to
checked(set to Y) or unchecked(set
to N) depending upon your choice.
Overriding a procedure or routine will
not cause invalid data to be loaded; it
merely reduces the number of
manual overrides you may need to
perform during electronic application
verification.

Cross-Reference Labels Used in Admissions Self-

Service Processing
EDI cross-reference rules are identified by a Label. The label describes the purpose of the
cross-reference rule. The following is a list of all the labels on SOAXREF that are used in
self-service admissions processing.

Note: You need to ensure that each label is set up on SOAXREF as

identified in the accompanying text. If one or more labels are not set up as
specified, self-service admissions processing will not work correctly.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 208

Label Description Processing Notes

DEGRLEVL Degree Level Codes Degree Level Codes are used to describe the generic
level of a degree, and the EDI values delivered roughly
correspond to the values in the Degree Award Category
Code Validation Form (STVACAT). These values are
used only when defining the EDI Curriculum Cross-
Reference Rules. Update the Banner value to the
corresponding value from STVACAT. (The Banner value
will normally be the EDI value without the period.) Do
not check (set to Y) the Web (Indicator) on SOAXREF,
as these values are not used to control Web pulldown
lists, but only to define valid cross-reference values for
building curriculum cross-reference rules.

FSTYIDQL Field of Stdy Qualifier Codes Field of Study Qualifier Codes are used only to specify
the code set which is used to describe field of study
choices. No action is required on any of these rules for
Web processing. However, one of these values will be
associated with the rules for label STVMAJR where it
will identify the code set used to define valid major code
choices.

GENDER Gender Codes Gender Codes are used to define the Banner equivalent
for EDI gender values. Three values are delivered. No
action is required on any of these rules for Web
processing.

STVCITZ Citizenship Type Codes Values in the Citizenship Type Code label are used to
customize the citizenship types which will be available
for Web selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVCITZ.
If all values from STVCITZ should be displayed, then
none need be entered here.

STVDEGC Degree Level-Degree Code For Web application processing, you can identify
specific degree codes to be available for Web selection.
In this case, you default values in the EDI value column
which do not represent EDI Degree Level Codes, set
the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to unchecked (set to N),
and enter the appropriate Banner value for the specific
degree codes to be made available. If all degree codes
from STVDEGC should be available for Web selection,
none need be entered here.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 209

Label Description Processing Notes

STVETHN Ethnic Codes Values in the Ethnic Code label are used to specify the
ethnicities which will be available for Web selection. For
each value which should be Web-enabled, set its Web
(Indicator) to checked (set to Y) and enter the
appropriate Banner value. If you have Banner ethnic
codes which do not correspond to EDI ethnic codes and
you want to make these additional codes available for
Web usage, create new rules, using an EDI value which
is not already in the EDI set and set the (EDI) Standard
(Indicator) to unchecked (set to N) for these rules. (See
Note below.) If all ethnic codes from STVETHN should
be available for Web selection, none need be entered
here.

Note: The script xrefethn.sql is used to populate the STVETHN label rows with values from the Ethnic
Code Validation Form (STVETHN).

STVINTS Award and Activity Codes Values in the Award and Activity Codes label are used
to specify the interests which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, specify the appropriate EDI qualifier which
represents “activities” (this value is SA and is also
entered on SAAERUL to identify student activities), set
its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y) and enter the
appropriate Banner value from STVINTS. If you have
Banner interest codes which do not correspond to EDI
codes, and you want to make these additional types
available for Web usage, create new rules, using an EDI
value which is not already in the EDI set and set the
(EDI) Standard (Indicator) to unchecked (set to N) for
these rules. (See Note below.) If all award and activity
codes from STVINTS should be available for Web
selection, none need be entered here. If the awards and
activities should be specific to an application type, use
the Web Application Customized Lists Form
(SAAWADP).

Note: For rules which represent student awards, set the EDI Qualifier to SB. Awards can also be reported
through the Web, but whether reported through a Web application or a TS 189 transaction set, these values
will not be loaded into the permanent Banner application tables.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 210

Label Description Processing Notes

STVLANGN Language Name Codes Values in the Language Name Codes label are used
specify the languages which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVLANG.
If you have Banner language codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules, using an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. If all language
codes from STVLANG should be available for Web
selection, none need be entered here.

STVMAJR Major Codes Values in the Major Codes label are used to translate
EDI field of study data into Banner major codes. Field of
Study data reported in TS 189 transaction sets includes
a qualifier code and value. Qualifier codes represent
different standard code sets, like Classification of
Instructional Program (CIP) codes or Stats Canada
codes. You use a combination of a Degree Level code
(label DEGRLEVL), Code Set Qualifier, and Banner
code to define the cross-reference from EDI values to
Banner values on the Curriculum Rules Form
(SOACURR). To create rules for the STVMAJR label,
enter the Qualifier which represents a valid EDI field of
study code set, a value from the indicated set, and the
Banner equivalent for the EDI value. (See Note below.)

STVMATL Requested Materials Codes Values in the requested materials label are used to
specify the requested materials which will be available
for Web selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVMATL.
If all requested materials codes from STVMATL should
be available for Web selection, none need be entered
here. If the requested materials should be specific to an
application type, use the Web Application Customized
Lists Form (SAAWADP).

Note: The script xrefmajr.sql is used to populate the STVMAJR label rows with values from the Major,
Minor, Concentration Code Validation Form.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 211

Label Description Processing Notes

STVMEDI Medical Condition Codes Values in the Medical Conditions Codes label are used
to specify the conditions which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVMEDI.
If you have Banner medical codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules, using an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. (See Note below.)
If all medical condition codes from STVMEDI should be
available for Web selection, none need be entered here.

Note: Use the medical condition data element on the Web Application Section Rules Form (SAAWAPP) to
include this data in the Web application.

STVMRTL Marital Status Codes Values in the Marital Status Codes label are used to
specify the marital statuses which will be available for
Web selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVMRTL.
If you have Banner martial status codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules, using an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. If all marital status
codes from STVMRTL should be available for Web
selection, none need be entered here.

STVNATN EDI Nation Codes Values in the Nation Codes label are used to specify the
nation codes which will be available for Web selection.
For each value which should be Web-enabled, set its
Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y) and enter the
appropriate Banner value from STVNATN. If you have
Banner nation codes which do not correspond to EDI
codes and you want to make these additional types
available for Web usage, create new rules, using an EDI
value which is not already in the EDI set and set the
(EDI) Standard (Indicator) to unchecked (set to N) for
these rules. (See Note below.) If all nation codes from
STVNATN should be available for Web selection, none
need be entered here.

Note: The script xrefnatn.sql is used to populate the STVNATN label rows with values from the Nation
Code Validation Form.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 212

Label Description Processing Notes

STVRELG Religion Codes Values in the Religion Codes label are used to specify
the religion codes which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVRELG.
If you have Banner religion codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules, using an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. If all religion codes
from STVRELG should be available for Web selection,
none need be entered here.

STVRELT Relationship Codes Values in the Relationship Codes label are used to
specify the relationship codes which will be available for
Web selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVRELT.
If you have Banner relationship codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules, using an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. If all relationship
codes from STVRELT should be available for Web
selection, none need be entered here.

STVSTAT EDI State Codes Values in the State Codes label are used to specify the
state/province codes which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVSTAT.
(See Note below.) If all state codes from STVSTAT
should be available for Web selection, none need be
entered here.

Note: The script xrefstat.sql is used to populate the STVSTAT label rows with values from the State/
Province Code Validation Form (STVSTAT).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 213

Label Description Processing Notes

STVTESC Sub-Test Codes Values in the Sub-Test Codes label are used to specify
the sub-test codes which will be available for Web
selection. For each value which should be Web-
enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y)
and enter the appropriate Banner value from STVTESC.
If you have Banner test types codes which do not
correspond to EDI codes and you want to make these
additional types available for Web usage, create new
rules. Use an EDI value which is not already in the EDI
set, and set the (EDI) Standard (Indicator) to
unchecked (set to N) for these rules. An EDI Qualifier,
EDI Value, Description, and Banner Value are all
required for STVTESC rules. If all test codes from
STVTESC should be available for Web selection, none
need be entered here. If the test types should be
specific to an application type, use the Web Application
Customized Lists Form (SAAWADP).

STVVTYP VISA Type Codes Values in the Visa Type Codes label are used to specify
the visa codes which will be available for Web selection.
For each value which should be Web-enabled, set its
Web (Indicator) to checked (set to Y) and enter the
appropriate Banner value from STVVTYP. If you have
Banner visa type codes which do not correspond to EDI
codes and you want to make these additional types
available for Web usage, create new rules. Use an EDI
value which is not already in the EDI set, and set the
(EDI) Standard (Indicator) to unchecked (set to N) for
these rules. If all visa type codes from STVVTYP should
be available for Web selection, none need be entered
here.

STVWAIV Application Waiver Codes Values in the Application Waiver Codes label are used
to specify the application waiver codes which will be
available for Web selection. For each value which
should be Web-enabled, set its Web (Indicator) to
checked (set to Y) and enter the appropriate Banner
value from STVWAIV. If you have Banner application
waiver codes which do not correspond to EDI codes and
you want to make these additional types available for
Web usage, create new rules. Use an EDI value which
is not already in the EDI set, and set the (EDI) Standard
(Indicator) to unchecked (set to N) for these rules. An
EDI Qualifier, EDI Value, Description, and Banner Value
are all required for STVWAIV rules. If all application
waiver codes from STVWAIV should be available for
Web selection, none need be entered here. If the
application waiver codes should be specific to an
application type, use the Web Application Customized
Lists Form (SAAWADP).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 214

 Address Hierarchy Rules for Credit Card Payment
Rules with an internal code of WEBCCADDR and an internal code group of ADDRESS are
used with miscellaneous transactions to set up the address hierarchy for Web payment
card payments and to populate the address in the GORCCAU table.

Miscellaneous transactions are used for admissions application fees. When an applicant
pays an application fee that creates a miscellaneous account transaction and uses a
payment card for payment, an address is needed to process the transaction. If no
SARADDR record exists, and no current SPRADDR record exists, the applicant is taken
to a page in Self-Service to enter the address information.

Miscellaneous transactions are also used for transcript request fees and enrollment
verification fees.When a student pays a fee that creates a miscellaneous account
transaction and uses a payment card for payment, an address is needed to process the
transaction. If no current SPRADDR record exists, the student is taken to a page in Self-
Service to enter the address information.

Miscellaneous transactions are not used for registration fees or graduation application
fees. A student does not need an address record to process payment for those fees.

Identify Payment Profile for Credit Card Payment

Payment profiles are configured on GOAMERC. You can query on GTVSDAX for the
WEBSTUCCID internal code group with an internal code of LEVEL, COLLEGE, or
CAMPUS to match the student’s level, college, or campus. The external code value for the
rule is the payment profile.

Process Self-Service Admission Applications

Before you receive your first Web application, you need to establish appropriate policies
and procedures for processing Web applications. For example, you need to determine
whether to weed out frivolous applications, when and how you will collect application fees
(if required), whether you require and how you will collect application certifications and
signatures, and what impact Web applications will have on application and yield statistics.

The Elec. App. Verify/Load Process (SARETMT) is a batch process that is used to match,
verify, and load admissions applications received via the Web. This process allows users
to match, verify, and load large numbers of Web applications at one time. The process
uses the same matching algorithm as the Electronic Prospect Match Process (SRRSRIN)
and the Common Matching Entry Form (GOAMTCH). The Electronic Application Process
Form (SAAEAPS) is used to process Web applications that are placed in suspense or
error status by the SARETMT batch load process. In addition, SAAEAPS can be used to
review Web applications and delete those that are most likely frivolous (i.e., applications
from Mickey Mouse or Claude Monet).

This section covers the following:

• “Receive Web Applications - Overview” on page 216

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 215

 • “Receive Web Applications - Detail Steps” on page 216
• “Manually Match, Verify, and Push Web Admission Applications” on page 220

Receive Web Applications - Overview

The overall process for receiving self-service admissions applications is as follows.
1. The applicant creates and completes the Web application.
2. The institution reviews all Web applications (via SAAEAPS) added on a specific date
that are complete to check for frivolous applications. (Optional)
3. The institution runs the SARETMT process to match, verify, and load Web
applications.
4. The institution reviews Web applications on SAAEAPS that were put into Suspense or
Error status by the SARETMT process.
5. Suspended error records are resolved on SAAEAPS using GOAMTCH to determine if
the applicant is New or is a Match to an existing Banner record.
6. The institution reruns SARETMT to verify and load those applications whose status
has just been resolved. Depending on the number of suspended and error records,
the institution can choose to manually verify and load these Web applications on
SAAEAPS.

Receive Web Applications - Detail Steps

The detailed steps for receiving self-service admissions applications are discussed in this
section.
1. Use the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS) to display received Web
applications.
To display the application(s) for a specific person, enter the electronic ID for that
person in the Key Block or use a List function to display the Electronic Applicant
Search Form (SOAEIDN), where you can search for an electronic applicant using
name and ID.
You can also select only those applications added on a certain date by entering the
Add Date in the Key Block field. Only applications matching the Web ID and/or Add
Date in the Key Block will be displayed.
You can also enter the main block and query on certain fields. Those fields are:
Application Number, Application Type, Completion Indicator, Term, Source
(with a value of WEB), Add Date, Accepted Indicator, Process, Process Date,
Person Status, and Application Status.
If you find applications that you believe are frivolous, they can be deleted using the
Delete Record function. Once an application is deleted on SAAEAPS, its associated
data is also deleted from the electronic application holding tables; therefore, the
application will no longer be viewable on SAAETBL.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 216

 2. Use the Elec. Appl. Verify/Load Process (SARETMT) to match, verify, and load the
Web applications that meet your processing guidelines.
Parameters for SARETMT allow processing based upon Application Type, Application
Source, Application Term, and the Date Range of when applications were added.
2.1. Run SARETMT in audit mode.
SARETMT can be run in audit mode providing the user with the opportunity to
review the match, verify, and load status of each application before it is actually
processed. The Status field will indicate whether the Web application is New,
Matched, Suspended, or in Error based on the matching rules specified by the
matching source code assigned to the interface code on STVINFC. If a Web
application type has previously been pushed for a given Web ID, the Status field
will indicate N/A, as a matching PIDM already existed for the Web ID. The
process will indicate if verification errors occurred or if the application was
pushed.
2.2. Run SARETMT in update mode.
The user can run the match, verify, and load process in update mode. All
electronic applications matching the input parameters will be processed by
SARETMT.
Three possible outcomes can exist for each record processed by SARETMT.
– The record was matched, verified, and pushed successfully resulting in the
creation of a SAAADMS application record.
– The record was placed into suspense or error status during the match
process. Suspended and error records will not be processed further by
SARETMT until the match status has been resolved to either New or
Matched. The user can resolve the suspended status using the Electronic
Application Process Form (SAAEAPS) (See the “Resolve Suspended
Electronic Applications” section below for details.)
– The record failed the verification process. Numerous verification routines exist
to ensure the integrity of the data being loaded into Banner. If certain errors
occur during the verification process, the record will be marked with a
verification error.
3. Resolve suspended and error electronic applications using the Electronic Application
Process Form (SAAEAPS).
3.1. Access the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS).
3.2. Navigate to the main block and query for the appropriate records (i.e., term,
source equals Web etc.) having a Person Status of S or E. These are the
records that will need to be resolved before they can be verified and pushed into
Banner.
4. Select the Verification Steps tab or the Manual Verification Steps option from the
Options Menu to access the Verification Steps window.
5. Mark any of the person or application steps complete, except for the ID Verification
(IDVR) step, and then save the changes.

6. Select the ID Verification (IDVR) step, and then choose the Associate Person with ID
item from the Options Menu.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 217

 7. This opens the Associate Person with ID window, where you can choose which type of
Banner ID to assign to the selected record from the Select an ID field.
• Electronic ID – This is the ID used to create the electronic application.
• Local ID – This is used for applications filed via EDI where the applicant provided a
Local ID.
• SSN – This is the SSN or other Federal ID number specified on the electronic
application.
• Banner ID – This is used if you wish to enter an explicit ID to be used by Banner.
• Generate ID – This indicates that Banner should generate an ID for this person.
8. After choosing the appropriate ID type, either save the changes or select the
Associate Person with an ID button. This will display GOAMTCH.
9. The ID displayed on GOAMTCH should match the option chosen in the Associate
Person with ID window. The Matching Source field should contain the source code
that has been assigned to the interface code on SAAWADF for the application type of
the selected Web application. This source code can be changed if desired.
If no interface code has been specified for the application type on SAAWADF, then the
Matching Source field will contain the default source code assigned to the user ID on
GORCMUS. If no default source code has been assigned on GORCMUS, you will be
able to select a source code from the List of Values.
Perform a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the
incoming electronic applicant record that is present in the temporary tables.
10. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your
institution’s data standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary tables
and used when the applicant's record is created.
11. Once the data has been “cleaned up”, use a Next Block function to call the matching
algorithm, or select the Duplicate Check button.
12. The incoming electronic application can be a match, a potential match, or a new
record:
12.1. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a match to someone in
Banner, the Banner record will be displayed in the Match block.
12.2. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a potential match against
more than one existing Banner record, then all of the possible matches will be
displayed in the Potential Matches window.
12.3. If the electronic application is found to be a new record, an Alert Box will be
displayed with a message asking if you want to create the new person.
13. If the person is found to be an exact match, you can do one of three things:
13.1. Match the incoming record to the Banner record but not update any null fields
that exist for the person in Banner by selecting the Select ID button.
13.2. Match the incoming record to the Banner record and choose to update any null
fields that exist for the person in Banner with data on the incoming record by
selecting the Update ID button.
13.3. Choose to ignore the matched status, and create the person as new by
selecting the Create New button.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 218

 14. After selecting one of the options above, the user will be returned to the Verification
Steps window, and the ID Verification (IDVR) step will be marked as complete.
Continue processing the electronic applicant as needed.
15. Resolve verification errors using the Electronic Application Process Form
(SAAEAPS).
If the AUTOOVERRIDE label on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form
(SAAERUL) for the group VCRL is set to Y, and the procedures and routines are
marked as overrideable on SAAECRL, then SARETMT will not stop the process if
verification errors occur (unless they are data errors). If the AUTOOVERRIDE label is
set to N, then any verification errors found while SARETMT is processing will be
identified on the report file. These errors can be viewed on SAAEAPS and must be
resolved before the affected applications can be re-processed by SARETMT.
Verification errors can only be resolved on SAAEAPS if the routine and/or procedure
causing the error have the Override (Indicator) checked on SAAECRL for the
appropriate application type.
15.1. Access the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS).
15.2. Navigate to the main block and query for the appropriate records (i.e., term,
source, etc.) having a Process field value of E. These are the records that will
need their verification errors resolved before they can be pushed into Banner.
15.3. Select Review Results from the Options Menu or use Next Block to access the
Verification/Load Results window.
In the System Verification Procedure block, each procedure is displayed, one
procedure at a time. At the same time, each routine associated with a procedure
is displayed in the System Verification Routines block.
15.4. Scroll through each procedure to find the procedures that have not been verified
(i.e., the Completion Indicator checkbox is not checked). To resolve a
procedure or routine, check the appropriate override (Override Indicator) box.
If you override an individual routine, only the verification associated with that
routine will be bypassed. If an entire procedure is overridden, none of the
individual routines will have verification performed.
15.5. Once all routines and/or procedures are overridden, return to the main block of
SAAEAPS. You can manually re-verify the application here by selecting Verify
Application from the Options Menu, or you can re-run SARETMT.
16. Re-run SARETMT in update mode.
SARETMT will try to verify all records that were previously suspended and will attempt
to re-verify all applications that originally failed verification. All applications that pass
the match and verification processing will be pushed to Banner. Once an application
has been pushed, the Process field will be set to P(ushed).

Update Null SSN during Admissions Push Process

You can update a Null SSN when performing the Admissions push process.

Use the R0050 routine (SSN Established) for the P030 procedure on SAAECRL for the
Web Application Type of 00. Routine R0050 is used to update the social security

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 219

 number of an existing record with a Null SSN when the Required indicator is checked
(Y).

Routine R0270, Overwrite Existing SSN, will update a Null value and overwrite an
existing value when the Required indicator is checked (Y).

Using a combination of settings for the Required indicators determines how existing
Banner records are updated when a Self-Service application is processed. If there is no
SPBPERS record for an existing person, the SSN will always be updated, even if the
Required indicator for routine R0050 is unchecked (N).

SAAECRL SAAECRL
P030/R0050 P030/R0270
Required Ind Required Ind Existing SSN entered in Self-Service SSN
(Establish) (Overwrite) SPBPERS record Self-Service pushed

Y N No Yes Yes

Y N Yes, no SSN Yes Yes

Y N Yes, with SSN Yes No

Y Y No Yes Yes

Y Y Yes, no SSN Yes Yes

Y Y Yes, with SSN Yes Yes

N Y No Yes Yes

N Y Yes, no SSN Yes Yes

N Y Yes, with SSN Yes Yes

N N No Yes Yes

N N Yes, no SSN Yes No *

N N Yes, with SSN Yes No

* It is possible to push the SSN from Self-Service when using SAAEAPS and the Update
ID button on GOAMTCH during the matching process, if the SSN field is Null on the
existing person record.

Manually Match, Verify, and Push Web Admission

Applications
The following steps how to manually match, verify, and push electronic applications into
Banner using SAAEAPS.
1. Use the Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS) to display received Web
applications.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 220

 To display the application(s) for a specific person, enter the electronic ID for that
person in the Key Block or use a List function to display the Electronic Applicant
Search Form (SOAEIDN), where you can search for an electronic applicant using
name and ID.
You can also select only those applications added on a certain date by entering the
Add Date in the Key Block field. Only applications matching the Web ID and/or Add
Date in the Key Block will be displayed.
You can also enter the main block and query on certain fields. Those fields are:
Application Number, Application Type, Completion Indicator, Term, Source
(with a value of WEB), Add Date, Accepted Indicator, Process, Process Date,
Person Status, and Application Status.
If you find applications that you believe are frivolous, they can be deleted using the
Delete Record function. Once an application is deleted on SAAEAPS, its associated
data is also deleted from the electronic application holding tables; therefore, the
application will no longer be viewable on SAAETBL.
2. Flag applications for further processing.
If you will not process an application until a fee or certification is received, you might
also want to set the Accepted Indicator to N until you receive the appropriate
additional information required by your policies and procedures.
For those applications which you will further process, set this indicator to Y.
3. Perform any required manual verification steps.
Select the Verification Steps tab, use a Duplicate Item function, or select Manual
Verification Steps from the Options Menu to transfer to the Verification Steps window.
There may be two kinds of manual verification steps, those related to person data and
those related to an application. You defined the manual verification steps which would
be required on the Application Verification Steps Validation Form (STVASTA). One
person-related step - ID Verification (IDVR) - is required by system processing and
will be present whether or not you defined additional verification steps.
If the application was received via the student (secured) side of the Web (Record
Type is S), you do not need to complete the ID Verification (IDVR) step. It will be
completed for you when you verify the application's data. Go to Step 11.
If the application was received via the non-secured side of the Web, you must either
match the applicant to an existing Banner person or create the person in Banner.
Either of these functions also completes the ID Verification (IDVR) step. Continue
with Step 3 through Step 10.
When you are positioned on the ID Verification (IDVR) step record, use a function key
to perform special processing. The function can be performed if the ID Verification
(IDVR) step has already been completed.
Use a Count Query Hits function or select Associate Person with ID from the Options
Menu to transfer to the Associate Person with ID window, where you can choose
which type of Banner ID to assign to the selected record in the Select an ID field.
• Electronic ID – This is the ID used to create the electronic application.
• Local ID – Used for applications filed via EDI where the applicant provided a Local
ID.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 221

 • SSN – This is the SSN or other Federal ID number specified on the electronic
application.
• Banner ID – Used if you wish to enter an explicit ID to be used by Banner.
• Generate ID – Indicates that Banner should generate an ID for this person.
4. After choosing the appropriate ID type, either save the changes or select the
Associate Person with an ID button. This will display GOAMTCH.
5. The ID displayed on GOAMTCH should match the option chosen in the Associate
Person with ID window. The Matching Source field should contain the source code
that has been assigned to the interface code on SAAWADF for the application type of
the selected Web application. This source code can be changed if desired.
If no interface code has been specified for the application type on SAAWADF, then the
Matching Source field will contain the default source code assigned to the user ID on
GORCMUS. If no default source code has been assigned on GORCMUS, you will be
able to select a source code from the List of Values.
Perform a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the
incoming electronic applicant record that is present in the temporary tables.
6. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your
institution’s data standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary
tables and used when the applicant's record is created.
7. Once the data has been “cleaned up”, use a Next Block function to call the matching
algorithm, or select the Duplicate Check button.
8. The incoming electronic application can be a match, a potential match, or a new
record:
8.1. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a match to someone in
Banner, the Banner record will be displayed in the Match block.
8.2. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a potential match against
more than one existing Banner record, then all of the possible matches will be
displayed in the Potential Matches window.
8.3. If the electronic application is found to be a new record, an Alert Box will be
displayed with a message asking if you want to create the new person.
9. If the person is found to be an exact match, you can do one of three things:
9.1. Match the incoming record to the Banner record but not update any null fields
that exist for the person in Banner by selecting the Select ID button.
9.2. Match the incoming record to the Banner record and choose to update any null
fields that exist for the person in Banner with data on the incoming record by
selecting the Update ID button.
9.3. Choose to ignore the matched status, and create the person as new by
selecting the Create New button.
10. After selecting one of the options above, the user will be returned to the Verification
Steps window, and the ID Verification (IDVR) step will be marked as complete.
Continue processing the electronic applicant as needed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 222

 11. Verify the application data.
Select Verify Application from the Options Menu to verify the application data.
Verification performs all verification procedures and routines attached to the
application which have not been overridden.
After an application has been verified, its Accepted Indicator on the main window of
SAAEAPS is set either to E, which indicates that errors were found during verification,
or V for verification complete.
12. Review errors, override verification, or correct data.
If errors are encountered during verification, select Review Results from the Options
Menu or use a Next Block function to review the results. The Verification/Load Results
window is displayed.
In the System Verification Procedures section of this window, each procedure and its
associated routines are displayed, one procedure at a time. You scroll through the
procedures using the scroll bar or Next and Previous Record functions, and the
associated routines are displayed for each procedure. As you scroll through the
procedures, you can ignore any which have already been overridden or which have
passed verification. (The Completion (Indicator) checkbox is checked.)
Verification errors must be resolved before the data can be loaded into the Banner
permanent tables from the holding tables. You resolve verification errors by overriding
the routine which failed or by overriding the entire procedure. If you override an
individual routine, only the verification associated with the individual routine will be by-
passed. If you override the procedure, none of the individual routines will be
performed. Only those procedures or routines for which override is allowed (defined
on SAAECRL) can be overridden. If you attempt to override a procedure or routine
when an override is not allowed, an error message displays, and the override is not
processed.
After overriding all routines or procedures that you wish to have ignored, use the
Return button to return to the main window of SAAEAPS, and select Verify Application
from the Options Menu to verify the information again. Only data which had not
previously been verified is processed. Procedures in which you overrode routines can
now be verified.
You should continue verifying data and overriding routines and procedures until
verification is complete (the Accepted Indicator displays V for Verified). When you
push data into the permanent tables, data for procedures which have been verified is
loaded, regardless of the status of other data.
13. Load the verified information into the permanent tables.
Select Load Application from the Options Menu or use an Insert Record function to
push the data to the permanent tables. After you have pushed the data, you can view
the results by selecting Review Results from the Options Menu or by using a Next
Block function to access the System Verification Procedure section of the Verification/
Load Results window. Scroll until you reach procedure P900, the PUSH Verification
Procedure. The routines associated with this procedure push actual pieces of data.
Data has been pushed for routines which are complete, and the message associated
with each completed routine will tell you the number of records created or updated.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 223

 Change PINs
There is one more option available on the Electronic Application Process Form
(SAAEAPS), the Change PIN option, and it is not part of actual application processing.
You use the Change PIN option when an applicant has forgotten the PIN used to submit
application information or when an applicant has been locked out of the non-student (non-
secured) application processing component of self-service admissions.

To use the Change PIN option, select Change PIN from the Options Menu or use a Help
function. The Non-Student PIN Change window is displayed. In this window, you can:

• view the existing PIN and report it to the applicant,

• change the applicant's PIN, or
• unlock a locked application.

Review Applicant Information

If at any point you want to review the application information, either to determine why there
are verification or load errors or to review application information which will not be loaded
to the permanent Banner tables, use the Electronic Admissions Submitted Form
(SAAETBL).

You can now work on another electronic application or move into other Banner forms to
further process the applications you have pushed.

Push Test Score Information

SATI and SATII test scores entered via EDI and pushed into the SORTEST table should
have a value of R placed in the SORTEST_RCRV_IND field if the
SORTEST_TEST_DATE is greater than or equal to April 1, 1995. This will ensure that the
SOPSATS program and/or client-written programs don’t try to further re-center these
scores, as they should already be re-centered.

(These programs use the value or lack of a value in the SORTEST_RCRV_IND field in
their determination of whether to re-center the test scores.)

The following rules need to be added to the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form
(SAAERUL) where the Group field is set to TEST. The Value field will be populated by
the company, as these are required values based on the Banner Test Code Validation
Form (STVTESC). Only those tests received via EDI that have a test code matching one
of the test codes below should have the R added to the Revised or Recentered field on
SOATEST. This is because only SAT I and SAT II tests were affected by the re-centering
change. If additional SATII tests are added by ETS, the additional records will be added to
SAAERUL by the company.

Group Label Description Value

TEST SATV SAT Verbal Test S01

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 224

 Group Label Description Value

TEST SATM SAT Math Test S02

TEST SATR SAT Reading Subscore Test S03

TEST SATV SAT Vocabulary Subscore Test S04

TEST SATAH SAT American History/Social Studies AH

TEST SATBE SAT Bio-Ecological Emphasis BE

TEST SATBM SAT Bio-Molecular Emphasis BM

TEST SATBY SAT Biology Emphasis BY

TEST SATCH SAT Chemistry CH

TEST SATCL SAT Chinese with Listening CL

TEST SATEH SAT European History/World Cultures EH

TEST SATEN SAT English Composition EN

TEST SATES SAT English Composition w/Essay ES

TEST SATFL SAT French with Listening FL

TEST SATFR SAT French FR

TEST SATGL SAT German with Listening GL

TEST SATGM SAT German GM

TEST SATHB SAT Hebrew HB

TEST SATIT SAT Italian IT

TEST SATJL SAT Japanese with Listening JL

TEST SATKR SAT Korean with Listening KR

TEST SATLR SAT Literature LR

TEST SATLT SAT Latin LT

TEST SATM1 SAT Mathematics Level I M1

TEST SATM2 SAT Mathematics Level II M2

TEST SAT1C SAT Mathematics Level IC 1C

TEST SAT2C SAT Mathematics Level IIC – Calculator 2C

TEST SATMH SAT Modern Hebrew MH

TEST SATPH SAT Physics PH

TEST SATSL SAT Spanish with Listening SL

TEST SATSP SAT Spanish SP

TEST SATWH SAT World History WH

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 225

 Group Label Description Value

TEST SATWR SAT Writing WR

Addresses in Banner and Entered on the Web

Addresses entered via the Web that have the same address type as existing Banner
addresses should be loaded as the next sequential address instead of not loading them at
all. The rules for determining From and To dates for existing addresses and new
addresses are detailed below.

When an address comes in via the Web and has the same address type as an existing
Banner address the push process will:

• Select the most current Banner address of that address type. This is either the address
with the correct address type that has a To Date equal to Null or the address with the
correct address type that has a maximum To Date for that person. If two records are
returned, then the one with the Null address is considered to be the most current (as
Null equals valid until the end of time). This will be the address used in all comparisons
below.

• If the incoming Web address matches the most current Banner address of the same
address type, do nothing.

• Otherwise, determine how to update existing or Null To Dates and to insert new From
Dates:
• If the To Date (of the current Banner address) is Null,
– Update the To Date of the current address with the greater of the From Date
(of the current address) or SYSDATE minus one.
– Insert the new address with the From Date with the greater of the From Date
plus one (of current address) or SYSDATE.
This code handles the issue of having someone submit multiple records on the
same day with multiple different addresses.
• If the To Date (of current Banner address) equals the SYSDATE, insert the new
address with a From Date of SYSDATE plus one.
• If the To Date (of current Banner address) is greater than SYSDATE, insert the new
address with the From Date of the current addressee’s To Date plus one.
• If the To Date is less than the SYSDATE, insert the new address with a From Date
of SYSDATE.

Set Up Quick Start for Student Self-Service

Quick Start processing allows an institution to automatically process Web applications in a
number of ways. It can be set up to automatically create a student record, taking the Web
applicant directly to Banner Student Self-Service so they can register. It can also

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 226

 automatically create a recruit and/or application record, thereby eliminating the need to
use SAAEAPS or run SARETMT. A decision record can be created too, as long as an
application record is being created.

You must follow the instructions in the “Set Up Admissions Self-Service” on page 175
before you can use Quick Start processing.

This section covers the following:

• “Processing Steps” on page 227

• “Behind the Scenes” on page 228
• “Application Status Errors and Resolutions” on page 229

Processing Steps
The following describes the steps required to use Quick Start processing. It is followed by
a description of how Quick Start works behind the scenes.
1. Check the Enable QuickStart Processing checkbox in the Automated Processing
Rules block on the Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules Form (SAAWADF).
2. Choose the Quick Start features you would like to use by checking the appropriate
boxes.
• Automatically Create Recruit Record - When checked, a recruit record will be
created for the Web applicant.
• Automatically Create Application Record - When checked, an application record
will be created for the Web applicant.
• Process Decision - When checked, an application decision code can be entered in
the Admission Decision field.
• Admission Decision - When a decision code is entered, an admissions decision
record will be created on SARAPPD.
• Provide Access to Student Self-Service - When checked and the Web applicant
has a student record, an Access Web for Students button will display on
whichever Signature page is displayed.
• Create One Application - When checked, one recruit or application record will be
created for all associated curricula. When unchecked, a new record will be created
for each curriculum (major).
• Auto Student - When checked (in the EDI and Self-Service block of the Majors and
Departments window on SOACURR), a student record will be created on
SGBSTDN, as long as no matching record is found on SOAEQUI.
3. Select the interface code associated with the correct matching source code for the
matching rules to be used by Quick Start on the Web Matching Rules window of
SAAWADF.
4. Create letters to be used with Quick Start processing on SOAELTR.
5. Associate the letters with the appropriate letter types on the Web Signature Letters
window of SAAWADF.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 227

 Behind the Scenes
Quick Start processing begins automatically when:

• The Application Complete button is pressed on the Web Application Checklist page,
and credit card processing has been turned off for the application type on SAAWADF.

- OR -

• Credit card processing is enabled on SAAWADF and:

• The applicant selects the Pay Later button on the Application Fee Payment page.-
OR -
• The applicant is prompted for the Signature page after successfully processing their
credit card payment.

Then the following steps take place:

1. The match package is run to determine if the Web applicant matches an existing
Banner person.
2. If the match package, returns a status of S (Suspended) or E (Error), then the
application status code is updated on SAAEAPS, and the Display Signature package
displays the letter code associated with the SUSPENSE or MATCHERR letter types
respectively.
3. Quick Start processing checks to see if the Automatically Create Application
Record box is checked. If it is checked, run the verification routines (the same
routines as run on SAAEAPS or with the SARETMT process).
If any errors are encountered during the verification process, the Application Status
field on SAAEAPS is updated appropriately, and the Signature Display package
displays the letter assigned to the VERERR letter type on SAAWADF.

4. Now the create_appl package is run. It first checks for the existence of an
application hold for the Web applicant (assuming they had matched someone in
Banner).
If an application hold exists, then the Application Status field on SAAEAPS is
updated appropriately, and the Display Signature package displays the letter assigned
to the APPLHOLD letter type on SAAWADF. If no application hold exists, the
application is created.
5. If the Automatically Create Application Record checkbox is checked, then you can
optionally request that a decision record be created as well, by checking the Process
Decision checkbox and entering a decision code in the Admission Decision field.
Just as with SAAQUIK, no decision code with the Inactive Application (Indicator)
checked on STVAPDC can be created.
6. If the Automatically Create Recruit Record checkbox is checked, run the
create_recruit package to create a recruit record on SRBRECR.
7. If the Create One Application checkbox is checked, then one application will be
created for all associated curricula. If unchecked, then a separate application will be
created for each curriculum (major).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 228

 8. If the Auto Student checkbox is checked (in the EDI and Self-Service block of the
Majors and Departments window on SOACURR) for the applicant’s curriculum, Quick
Start processing is allowed for that curriculum.
8.1. If Quick Start processing is not allowed for the curriculum, then no student
record will be created, and the letter associated with the STANDARD letter type
will be displayed. If you selected the option to create a recruit and/or application
record, these will still be created.
8.2. If Quick Start processing is allowed for the curriculum and the match status
returned earlier is N (New), a student record is created for the Web applicant,
and the Signature page is displayed with the letter assigned to the QUIKADMIT
letter type.
9. If the match status returned earlier is M (Match), SOAEQUI is queried to see if the
Web applicant’s most recent Banner student record and Web application match any of
the exception processing rules on the form.
9.1. If one or more rules match, then the rule with the highest priority number is used
(1 = highest), and no student record is created. If that rule has a letter code
associated with it, then that letter is displayed as the Signature page.
9.2. If no letter code exists on the matching SOAEQUI record, then the letter
associated with the NOSTUREC letter type is displayed. If no letter code has
been assigned to the NOSTUREC letter type, then the letter associated with the
DEFAULT letter type is displayed. If no letter has been assigned to the
DEFAULT letter type, the default Web Tailor letter is displayed.

Application Status Errors and Resolutions

The following are the possible application status codes that can be generated by the
Quick Start process and how they may be resolved. They can be viewed on SAAEAPS.

Application
Status
Code Description Resolution

H Admissions Hold If an admissions hold exists for an applicant, their application

status will be updated to H, and their record cannot be pushed on
SAAEAPS until the hold is removed on SOAHOLD. Even if the
hold is removed, only an application record will be created, not a
student or decision record.

Perform the following steps:

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 229

Application
Status
Code Description Resolution

1. Remove the hold on SOAHOLD, if appropriate.

2. Run the Verification Process by selecting Verify Application from the Options Menu in the main window of
SAAEAPS. This process will run even though the Application Status field is set to H.
3. Run the Load Application process by selecting Load Application from the Options Menu in the main
window of SAAEAPS. Assuming no other errors occur, the application should be pushed. It will not,
however, automatically create a student record if that was indicated for the application type on SAAWADF.
The institution will have to do that manually. It will create the recruit record though, if that was indicated on
the Automated Processing rules window of SAAWADF.
4. You can also run SARETMT to verify and push the application having an application status of H, as long
as the hold has been removed.

I Can’t Insert Decision This error is received when you are trying to create a student
Code record, and the system knows that one or more of the rules
governing the creation of a student record would be broken in
doing so.

For example, if a student record already exists for the same term
as the newly created Quick Start application, the insert of a new
student record would fail, as you cannot insert a new student
record if one already exists for the same term.

However, all other items defined by the indicators in the Automated

Processing Rules window of SAAWADF, as well as items defined
by the SAAECRL rules, will still be processed.

So, the Quick Start applicant won't have a new student record
created, but they could have an application record created,
additional personal data updated on SPAPERS, test score data
added, an application and recruit record created, etc.

P Push Error This error rarely occurs. It is usually caused by invalid data or data
that is not acceptable to the database because of indices. If a push
error occurs, the part of the process receiving the error will not be
pushed. All other pieces will be pushed though.

For example, if a question/answer receives a push error, the

recruit, application, and student record will still be created along
with person data.

R Match Error Perform the following steps:

1. Use the Person Search and/or Create Person items in the Options Menu from the Applicant and
Application Manual Verification window on SAAEAPS to mark the record with the match error as New or
Matched.
2. Mark any of the other manual verification steps as complete in the Manual Person Verification Steps block,
and save the changes.
3. Return to the main block, where the Person Status and Application Status fields should both be set to Y.
4. Now you can either manually verify and push the application* on SAAEAPS or run the SARETMT process
to automatically re-verify and push the application.
* See the section called “Manually Matching, Verifying, and Pushing Electronic Applications” for more
information.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 230

Application
Status
Code Description Resolution

U Suspended Record Perform the following steps:

1. Select the Verification Steps tab or the Manual Verification Steps option from the Options Menu to access
the Verification Steps window.
2. Select the ID Verification (IDVR) step, and then choose the Associate Person with ID item from the
Options Menu.
3. This opens the Associate Person with ID window, where you can choose which type of Banner ID to
assign to the selected record from the Select an ID field.
Electronic ID – This is the ID used by the applicant when the electronic application was submitted.

Local ID – This is the locally assigned ID reported by the applicant when the electronic application was
submitted. It is used for applications filed via EDI. For example, this may be a generated ID from another
institution or the person's high school.

SSN – This field displays the value reported by the applicant as a social security or other Federal ID
number when the electronic application was submitted.

Banner ID – This field is used to specify the ID which should be used when the SPRIDEN record is
created for the applicant in Banner.

Generate ID – This field indicates that Banner should generate an ID for this person.
4. After choosing the appropriate ID type, either save the changes or select the Associate Person with an
ID button. This will display the Common Matching Entry Form (GOAMTCH).
5. The ID displayed on GOAMTCH should match the option chosen in the Associate Person with ID window.
The Matching Source field should contain the source code that has been assigned to the interface code
on SAAWADF for the application type of the selected Web application. This source code can be changed
if desired.
If no interface code has been specified for the application type on SAAWADF, then the Matching Source
field will contain the default source code assigned to the user ID on GORCMUS. If no default source code
has been assigned on GORCMUS, you will be able to select a source code from the List of Values.

Perform a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the incoming electronic
applicant record that is present in the temporary tables.

6. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your institution’s data
standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary tables and used when the applicant's
record is created.
7. Once the data has been “cleaned up”, use a Next Block function to call the matching algorithm, or select
the Duplicate Check button.
8. The incoming electronic application can be a match, a potential match, or a new record:
8.1. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a match to someone in Banner, the Banner record
will be displayed in the Match block.
8.2. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a potential match against more than one existing
Banner record, then all of the possible matches will be displayed in the Potential Matches window.
8.3. If the electronic application is found to be a new record, an Alert Box will be displayed with a message
asking if you want to create the new person.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 231

Application
Status
Code Description Resolution

9. If the person is found to be an exact match, you can do one of three things:
9.1. Match the incoming record to the Banner record but not update any null fields that exist for the person
in Banner by selecting the Select ID button.
9.2. Match the incoming record to the Banner record and choose to update any null fields that exist for the
person in Banner with data on the incoming record by selecting the Update ID button.
9.3. Choose to ignore the matched status, and create the person as new by selecting the Create New
button.
10.After selecting one of the options above, the user will be returned to the Verification Steps window, and the
ID Verification (IDVR) step will be marked as complete. Continue processing the electronic applicant as
needed.

V Verification Error You can go to SAAEAPS to try and override the verification error if
the correct override indicators were set on SAAECRL.

Perform the following steps:

1. Select the Review Results item in the Options Menu in the main window of SAAEAPS to access the
Verification/Load Results window.
2. Scroll through the procedures in the System Verification Procedures block until you find the procedure(s)
where the Completion Indicator checkbox is blank.
3. Select the Override Indicator checkbox for this procedure. If an override is allowed for this procedure,
you can check the box and then save the change.
4. Return to the main block of SAAEAPS. You can either manually verify and push the application *, or you
can run SARETMT to automatically re-verify and push the application.
* See the section called” Manually Matching, Verifying, and Pushing Electronic Applications” for more
information.

Set Up Curriculum Processing for Admissions

Self-Service
Use the following steps to set up curriculum processing when applications are completed
online.
1. Establish major codes on the Major, Minor, Concentration Code Validation Form
(STVMAJR).
2. Create programs on the Program Definition Rules Form (SMAPRLE).
3. Create curriculum rules on the Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR).
4. Set up the EDI values on SOACURR, and make sure that the Display on Self-
Service checkbox is checked (set to Y) so the item is displayed on the Web.
5. Assign majors to be displayed in Self-Service on SOACURR.
5.1. Use the Display on Self-Service checkbox to indicate that the major can be
displayed in the self-service pulldown lists.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 232

 5.2. The Auto Student checkbox is usually optional but is required if you are setting
up a Quick Start application with an applicant acceptance decision. When this
field is checked, the curriculum will be created on the learner curriculum record.
5.3. Use the EDI Degree, EDI Level (qualifier), and EDI Identification fields for
setting up EDI data.
Prior to this release, the self-service application required that EDI codes be set
up for each major that was available on the Web. All three EDI components
were required: the EDI Degree value, the EDI Level (qualifier) value, and the
EDI Identification value. All three fields had to contain valid values that had
been defined on SOAXREF using the following labels:
– EDI degree values and SOAXREF label DEGRLEVL

– EDI level values (qualifier) and SOAXREF label FSTYIDQL

– EDI identification and SOAXREF label STVMAJR

The three codes make up the combination received from EDI that define the
degree, level, and field of study. The EDI degree and EDI level (qualifier) remain
constant. The EDI identification defines the field of study and the program of
which it is a part. There may be many EDI identification values.
As of Release 7.3, the only requirement for ensuring a curriculum is valid for the
self-service processing is to check Display on Self-Service checkbox on
SOACURR.
Here is more information about each of the three EDI components, starting with
the EDI level qualifiers.
The following is from the TS189 EDI application documentation and lists the
code values for valid EDI level codes, also referred to as the Identification Code
Qualifiers.
Identification Code Qualifier
Description: Field of Study Code Set Indicator

Code Description

81 Classification of Instructional Programs (CIP) coding structure

maintained by the U.S. Department of Education’s National Center
for Education Statistics

82 Higher Education General Information Survey (HEGIS) maintained

by the U.S. Department of Education’s National Center for
Education Statistics

CA Statistics Canada Canadian College Student Information System

Course Codes

CC Statistics Canada University Student Information System

Curriculum Codes

ZZ Mutually Defined

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 233

 This relates back to SOAXREF and the FSTYIFQL label.
The following is from the EDI TS189 documentation for degree level codes.
These codes have to be used if EDI processing is being used. It seems that EDI
does not have a list of valid major codes. You could use the web application
type value in this field.
Data Element 1126 - Academic Degree Code
Indicates the level of academic award being described. The decimal is part of
the code and is to be sent.

Code Description

2.1 Postsecondary Certificate or Diploma (less than one year)

2.2 Postsecondary Certificate or Diploma (one year or more but less

than four years)

2.3 Associate Degree

2.4 Baccalaureate Degree

2.5 Baccalaureate (Honors) Degree

2.6 Postsecondary Certificate or Diploma (one year or more but less

than two years)

2.7 Postsecondary Certificate or Diploma (two years or more but less

than four years)

3.1 First Professional Degree

3.2 Post Professional Degree

4.1 Graduate Certificate

4.2 Master’s Degree

4.3 Intermediate or Specialist Graduate Degree

4.4 Doctoral Degree

4.5 Post-Doctoral Award

This relates back to SOAXREF and the DEGRLEVL label.

The EDI identification defines the actual field of study. The new Generate
Identification button on SOACURR creates these values for you. The entries
will be found under the STVMAJR label on SOAXREF. The button performs the
following tasks:
– generates a unique value for the curriculum and the field of study, and
– inserts degree and level qualifiers into SOAXREF under the STVMAJR label.
6. Assign minors and concentrations to be displayed in Self-Service.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 234

 7. Set up the EDI values on SOACURR, and make sure that the Display on Self-
Service checkbox is checked (set to Y) so the items are displayed on the Web. (The
EDI degree will be derived from the primary major.)
8. View the majors, minors, and concentrations by curriculum on the EDI Cross-
Reference Curriculum Rules Form (SOAXCUR).
With the exception of the Restrict to Type checkbox on SAAWCUR, SAAWCUR and
SOAXCUR are query only forms. SOACURR is used to customize Web application
data.
9. Set up restrictions on Web Application Customized Curriculum Form (SAAWCUR).
This step is not required, but it can be used to restrict the curriculum to a particular
Web application type.
With the exception of the Restrict to Type checkbox on SAAWCUR, SAAWCUR and
SOAXCUR are query only forms. SOACURR is used to customize Web application
data.
Keep in mind that all curricula that have a checked Web Display (Indicator) and have
the same level as the Web application type will appear in the list of valid programs,
unless some have a checked Restrict to Type (Indicator). A restriction on at least
one curriculum restricts the list of available curriculum to just the ones with a checked
Web Display (Indicator).

Note: Restrictions are available only on the major and apply only to the
primary major, otherwise known as the Planned Course of Study page in
self-service.

10. Restrict curricula from being pushed to a general student (learner) record.
Use the Auto Student checkbox (in the EDI and Self-Service block of the Majors and
Departments window on SOACURR) to prohibit a particular planned course of study
from creating a learner curriculum.
This means that if the Auto Student checkbox (in the EDI and Self-Service block of
the Majors and Departments window on SOACURR) is not checked for a particular
major, and it appears on a Quick Start application that has an applicant acceptance
decision, the learner curriculum will not be created if an applicant selects that
program.
You can also restrict which curriculum will result in the creation of a learner
curriculum, based on what the applicant has already been accepted into, by setting up
equivalents on the Existing or Incoming Student Data Mapping Form (SOAEQUI).

Set Up Web Acceptance of Admissions Offer

The following step-by-step procedure explains how to set up the accept admissions offer
functionality in Student Self-Service.
1. Access the Electronic Admissions Applications Rules Form (SAAERUL).
2. Enter DCSN in the Group field in the Key block, then go to the next block.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 235

 3. Enter Y in the Value field for the ALLOWDECISION rule.
This must be done to allow applicants to use the web for their decisions. You can
make more refinements, as explained in the following steps, but if the
ALLOWDECISION rule is not set to Y, the Confirm Attendance and Withdraw
Application buttons will not be displayed on the Application Summary page
(bwskasta.P_DispStatusSaradap) regardless of the other details you put in
place.
4. Review the delivered codes, as shown in the following table, and take the action
specified in the “Instructions” column as needed to achieve the setup you desire.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

DCSN CONFIRMCODE Attendance Confirmation N Update the Value column from

Decision Code UPDATE ME to the value from the
Admission Application Decision
Code Validation Form (STVAPDC)
which should be used for the confirm
decision code.

DCSN CONFIRMLABEL Applicant Confirm Button N Update the Value column from
Label UPDATE ME to any value which
should be used for the Applicant
Confirm label.

DCSN WITHDRAWLABEL Applicant Withdraw N Update the Value column from

Button Label UPDATE ME to any value which
should be used for the Applicant
Withdraw label.

DCSN WITHDRAWCODE Withdraw Decision Code N Update the Value column from
UPDATE ME to the value from the
Admission Application Decision
Code Validation Form (STVAPDC)
which should be used for the
withdraw decision code.

DCSN CAPTUREWDINFO Capture Withdrawn N Update the Value column from

Information UPDATE ME to Y or N for the
additional withdrawn information.

5. If you do not want the Withdraw Application button to be displayed on the

Application Summary page under any circumstances, enter N in the Value field for the
ALLOWWITHDRAW rule, and save your changes.
6. If you want to allow the Withdraw Application button to be displayed on the
Application Summary page based on the applicant’s student level, take the following
actions.
6.1. Create a new rule.
6.2. Enter the rule’s name in the Rule Label field, appending a valid student level
code (from the Level Code Validation Form [STVLEVL]) to the rule label.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 236

 For example, if UG is your valid level code for Undergraduate, and you want
to allow applicants at the UG level to withdraw, you could create a rule called
ALLOWWITHDRAWUG.
6.3. Enter the rule description in the Rule Description field.
6.4. Enter Y in the Value field.
6.5. Save your changes.
6.6. Repeat steps Step 6.1 through Step 6.5 for each level for which you want to
allow Withdraw Application button to be displayed on the Application
Summary page.
7. If you want to allow withdrawing applicants to provide more information about their
decisions using the Web, take the following actions.
7.1. Enter Y in the Value field for the CAPTUREWDINFO rule, and save your
changes.
If you set the CAPTUREWDINFO rule to Y, when a user selects the Withdraw
Application on the Application Summary page, the system will display the
Applicant Withdrawal Information page
(bwskadec.P_ApplicationWDInfo).
7.2. Access the Admission Application Decision Code Validation Form (STVAPDC).
7.3. Select the Display on Web checkbox for each decision code you want to be
available on the Web, and save your changes.
7.4. Select the Inactive Application checkbox for each withdrawal decision code
used on STVAPDC and configured on SAAERUL, and save your changes.
7.5. Access the Withdrawal Reason Code Validation Form (STVWRSN).
7.6. Review the existing codes and, if necessary, define any new codes you want to
be available, then save your changes.

Use Payment and Deposit Processing with

Applications
When in Self-Service Admissions, information for payment processing is displayed on the
Application Menu page (bwskalog.P_DispChoicesStu). Under the Applications in
Progress and Submitted Applications sections, you can review a Payment Processing
section with available transactions for the admission term.

You can access this information with a non-secure login as an applicant or a secure login
as a student. When an applicant has submitted an application and the application has
been processed, he/she can view that application on the Application Menu page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices), if payment and deposit processing has been set up in
Banner Accounts Receivable.

Refer to the “Student Accounts” chapter, for more information on setting up and using
payment and deposit processing.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 237

 Non-secure Login
When you are on the Self-Service Homepage and select Apply for Admissions, the path
using the non-secure login is as follows.
1. Select Apply for Admissions.
2. On the Admissions Login page (bwskalog.P_DispLoginNon), enter the
assigned Login ID and PIN, then click Login.
3. View the Payment Processing section on the Application Menu page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices).
4. Select an item under Available Transactions.
5. Access the Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList) for
the transaction.
6. Select an item, such as Deposit for Fall 2013 - 2014, to access the
Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList).

The Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList) displays

the payment information, such as Housing Deposit is $500.00.
7. Select the Continue button to go to the second view of Payment Processing
Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
8. Select the checkbox for the transaction you wish to pay, and then select the Continue
button to go to the third view of Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
9. Enter the number of transactions or fees, and then select the Continue button to
access the Payment Processing Summary page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
10. View the transaction descriptions, amounts, and the total.
11. Choose the Proceed to Payment Page button or the Start Over button.
• The Proceed to Payment Page button goes to the Payment Gateway.
• The Start Over button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure).
• If you select Cancel from the Payment Gateway, you are prompted to select the Try
Again button or the Start Over button.
• The Try Again button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_DispFailure).
• The Start Over button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure).
12. Once you have completed the payment using the Payment Gateway, the Payment
Processing Successful Payment page (bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess) page is
displayed.
13. View the Student Account Detail Page (TSADETL) to see processed payments.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 238

 Secure Login
When you are on the Homepage and select Enter Secure Area, the path using the secure
student login is as follows.
1. Select Enter Secure Area.
2. On the Login page, enter the your Login ID and PIN, and click Login.
3. On the Main Menu (bmenu.P_MainMnu) select the Student option.

4. On the Student Menu (bmenu.P_StuMainMnu) select the Admissions option.

5. View the Payment Processing section on the Application Menu page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices).
6. Continue with step 4 above, under “Non-secure login”.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Admissions Self-Service 239

 Registration

Banner Student Self-Service registration processing allows users to do the following:

• Add and drop classes

• Find classes in the class schedule and subsequently register in them
• Change their class options
• View their schedules by day and time or in detail
• View tuition and fee assessment charges associated with class registrations for a
selected term

• View registration status

• Add or change study paths
To access registration functions, the student must enter the secure area of your site.

In support of open learning courses, Banner Student Self-Service:

• Permits students to select, as part of the registration process, either the date they wish
to start their course or the date they wish to finish the course

• Calculates either the start and/or expected completion dates of the class based on the
duration of the section in conjunction with the date the student selected at the time of
registration

• Displays all registration activity for a student, regardless of term

• Processes withdrawals or drops based on the individual student's progress in the course
versus static date ranges for the term or part-of-term

Note: The primary way that the system recognizes an open learning
course is that no part of term is associated with it.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Drop/Withdrawal Functionality” on page 241, which explains how the system processes
automatic drops for connected classes and administrative drops

• “Registration Web Pages” on page 252, which provides details about each Web page in
the Registration module

• “Set Up Basic Registration on the Web” on page 329, which provides detailed steps for
setting up registration on the Web

• “Display Term Date Ranges” on page 335, which provides information on how to display
term ranges in term pulldown fields.

• “Set Up and Use Study Paths” on page 336, which provides details about how to set up
study paths in baseline and self-service for registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 240

 • “Set Up Immediate Registration Fee Assessment” on page 338, which provides detailed
steps for setting up immediate registration fee assessment on the Web

• “Set Up Registration Time-Ticketing” on page 339, which provides detailed steps for
setting up registration time-ticketing

• “Set Up Third-Party Controls” on page 346, which provides detailed steps for setting up
third-party controls, which you can use instead of time-ticketing

• “Set Up Alternate PIN Processing” on page 347, which provides detailed steps for
setting up alternate PIN processing

• “Set Up Registration Permit-Overrides” on page 349, which provides detailed steps for
setting up registration permit overrides

• “Allow Major, Educational Goal, and Employment Expectation Updates” on page 355,
which provides information about allowing students to update majors, educational goals
and employment expectations via the Web

• “Use Registration on the Web” on page 356, which provides step-by-step procedures

Drop/Withdrawal Functionality
This section uses the following terminology related to drops/withdrawals.

• Connected refers to courses that are associated with each other via co-requisites,
prerequisites, or links.

• Connection refers to a set of connected courses. For example, the connected courses of
Biology 101 lecture and lab (co-requisites) would be considered a connection.

Courses cannot be dropped via the Web and refunded at 100% unless the drop meets
criteria specified on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) and has been assigned
the appropriate setup code (allowing a course to be dropped and refunded at 100%) on
the Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) (for traditional courses) or Schedule
Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) (for open learning courses). Connected classes are
included in this processing.

Note: A connected class will not be dropped and given a 100% refund
unless the code is designated for use on SFARSTS or SSARULE.

Errors are tracked as the following:

• “Registration add” (displayed on the Add or Drop Classes page

[bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse] when a class is added), which reports errors that are
encountered when a student is trying unsuccessfully to register for a class, (for example,
a time conflict)

• “Registration update” (displayed on the Add or Drop Classes page), which appears
when a connected class is dropped or withdrawn from and either has no drop code
assigned or has multiple drop codes assigned, and can also appear when a student
tries to change the status of a class that has a connection

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 241

 • “Administrative” (not displayed to the student), which can be reviewed on the
Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM)

The rest of this section discusses the following topics:

• “Status Types” on page 242

• “Automatic Drops” on page 242
• “Administrative Drops” on page 247
• “Rules on GTVSDAX” on page 250

Status Types
Web registration uses the Status Type field on the Course Registration Status Code
Validation Form (STVRSTS) to determine the type of code that can be placed on the
course and the processing that is affected based on this code. This type code determines
what is displayed in the Action pulldown list on the Add or Drop Classes page.

Note: The Status Type field must be filled in for every status code that is
in use. If the Status Type field is left blank, unexpected results can occur.

The following conditions apply when using status type codes:

• If the course status is marked as an R (Registered) type code, then all other type codes
can be displayed (depending on their availability).

• If the course status is marked as a D (Drop) or W (Withdrawal) type code, then only R
type actions will be displayed.

• The RE (Registered) type code or other R type codes (with the exception of the
WEBRSTSREG code) will be included in the pulldown list if the Web Indicator checkbox
is selected on STVRSTS.

• The registration code designated on GTVSDAX for internal code WEBRSTSREG is not
displayed in the pulldown list, because it is used only for initial registration via the Web.

The system does not allow a student to drop a class that has already been dropped or
withdrawn. See the “Setup Requirements” section for the Add or Drop Classes page on
241 for additional information.

Automatic Drops
An automatic drop is one that occurs if certain conditions are met when a user attempts to
drop a connected course. When a connected course is dropped, the appropriate drop
code and refund (if any) are applied to the student.

A single, active drop code must be available for a successful connected or automatic drop
to occur.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 242

 • If no drop codes exist for any part of a connection, no courses in the connection are
allowed to be dropped.

• If multiple drop codes exist for any part of a connection, no courses in the connection
are allowed to be dropped automatically. This is because the system does not choose
which drop code to use for the automatic drop. In this case, the user can initiate the drop
by selecting one of the multiple drop codes where necessary. The drop is processed
with the selected drop code, and the refund (if any) associated with the code is applied.

Example
Let’s say a student is registered for History 308, English 310, and Mathematics 125.
History 308 and English 310 are corequisites. History 308 has a single drop code of
DC, but English 310 has two drop codes available: DC and DW.
Now let’s say that the user chooses to drop History 308 with the DC code. The system
determines that it is connected to English 310, which has two drop codes. In this case,
the drop is rejected because the system does not know which of the two drop codes to
assign to English 310.
On the other hand, if the user chooses to drop English 310 with either of the drop
codes, the system drops History 308 automatically with the DC drop code, because it
is the only one available.
Finally, if the user chooses to drop both courses simultaneously and specifies a drop
code for each, the drops are allowed.

When a student is dropped or withdraws from a connected course without dropping the
entire connection, the system determines which of the following conditions applies and
takes the associated action shown in the table that follows.

Condition Action Taken GTVSDAX Setting

Connected drops are The Connected Course Drop Confirmation page AUTODROP set to C
processed only with approval (bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drop) is
of the user displayed asking the user whether all connected
classes should be dropped.
• If the user chooses to drop all connected
classes, they are all dropped simultaneously.
• If the user chooses not to drop all connected
classes, the initial request is ignored and the
student continues to be registered in all
connected classes.
The drops occur only if all classes that are
connected have a single, active drop code.

Connected drops are The drop is processed and the student is dropped AUTODROP set to Y
processed automatically (all from all connected classes with no notification.
connected classes are
dropped when one is) The drops occur only if all classes that are
connected have a single, active drop code.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 243

Condition Action Taken GTVSDAX Setting

Connected drops are not The drop is cancelled and a message is displayed AUTODROP set to N
allowed saying that all connected classes must be dropped
simultaneously. The user can initiate the drop for
all connected classes at the same time and the
drops will be successful.

Note: In Banner Voice Response, error checking is performed on each

CRN as it is entered. Because of this, if you enter N for AUTODROP, it will
not be possible for connected courses to be dropped via Voice Response.
Therefore, if your institution uses both Voice Response and Banner
Student Self-Service, it is recommended that you use either C or Y for
AUTODROP.

The connected course(s) that can be dropped are dropped with the appropriate drop code
based on the settings on the following forms:

• Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX)

• Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) (for traditional courses)
• Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) (for open learning courses)
The code designated in WEBRSTSDRP does not work as a “clean up” code for registration
errors related to automatic drops and administrative drops. The WEBRSTSDRP code
works like a regular drop/withdrawal.
For example, if a user tries to register a student for Psychology 200 and the
registration results in a PREQ or TEST SCORE error, the DW code is used to remove
the course from the schedule and reverse any charges that were associated with it.

If your institution does not allow a student’s last class to be dropped via the Web (that is,
the external code for WEBDROPLST is N), then the system will not drop a connection if the
student is not registered in any other classes.

The rest of this section provides a variety of scenarios to help illustrate how the system
processes requests based on your system setup. These scenarios are not meant to be all-
inclusive but rather to show several examples.

Connected Drops Allowed with User Approval

You want the system to notify the user if one course is dropped, but a course to which it is
associated is not, thereby allowing the user to choose to drop both or to drop neither. To
accomplish this, you have set the external code to C for the AUTODROP rule.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• History 320 (corequisite with Sociology 320)

• Sociology 320 (corequisite with History 320)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 244

 • Religious Studies 225
• Mathematics 162
If a user attempts to drop the history course but not the sociology one, the system displays
the Connected Course Drop Confirmation page
(bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drop) letting the user know that the two courses
must be dropped simultaneously and asking whether the user wants to drop or not drop
the entire connection. If the user chooses to drop, both courses are dropped. If the user
chooses not to drop, neither course is dropped.

If a user attempts to drop the history course and the mathematics class, but not the
sociology course, the system displays the Connected Course Drop Confirmation page
letting the user know that the history and sociology courses must be dropped
simultaneously and asking whether the user wants to drop or not drop them. Regardless
of the user’s choice regarding dropping the connection, the mathematics course is
dropped per the student’s original request.

Now let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Biology 405 lecture (linked to Biology 405 lab)

• Biology 405 lab (linked to Biology 405 lecture)
• Anthropology 307 (corequisite with Archeology 305)
• Archeology 305 (corequisite with Anthropology 307)
• Latin 150
If a user tries to drop the Biology lecture course and the Anthropology course, the system
displays the Connected Course Drop Confirmation page showing both connections and
asking whether the user wants to drop or not drop them. The decision the user makes on
this page applies to both connections: if the user chooses to drop the courses, all four are
dropped; if the user chooses not to drop the courses, none of the four are dropped.

Connected Drops Processed Automatically

You want the system to automatically drop a linked course if the course to which it is linked
is dropped. To accomplish this, you have set the external code to Y for the AUTODROP
rule.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Zoology 505 lecture (linked to Zoology 505 lab)

• Zoology 505 lab (linked to Zoology 505 lecture)
• Psychology 410
• Mathematics 380
• German 202
If a user attempts to drop the lecture course but not the lab, the system automatically
drops both. The system does not notify the user that the lab was also dropped.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 245

 Note: The system drops both courses in the connection as long as the
connected course has a single, active drop code; otherwise both classes
are returned to their original registration status.

Connected Drops Not Allowed

You do not want students to be able to drop a connected course unless all the courses in
the connection are dropped simultaneously by the user. To accomplish this, you have set
the external code to N for the AUTODROP rule.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Biology 101 lecture (linked to Biology 101 lab)

• Biology 101 lab (linked to Biology 101 lecture)
• English 105
• History 102
If a user attempts to drop the lecture course but not the lab, the system displays a
message that the course cannot be dropped unless the course to which it is linked (in this
case, the lab) is dropped at the same time. The student remains registered in both
courses.

To drop both classes, the user must select both in the same transaction.

Note: In Banner Voice Response, error checking is performed on each

CRN as it is entered. Because of this, if you enter N for the AUTODROP
rule, it will not be possible for connected courses to be dropped.
Therefore, it is recommended that you use either C or Y for the
AUTODROP rule.

Drop Last Class Not Allowed

You do not want a student to be able to drop his or her last class via the Web. To
accomplish this, you have set the external code to N for the WEBDROPLST rule.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• English 260 (corequisite with English 260W)

• English 260W (corequisite with English 260)
If a user attempts to drop one course but not the other (or if the student attempts to drop
both simultaneously), the system does not drop either course because of the setting on
the WEBDROPLST rule, regardless of the setting for the AUTODROP rule.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 246

 Administrative Drops
An administrative drop is one that occurs automatically when a user accesses a student’s
registration record after certain changes that affect registration records occur within the
system, after registration has opened and enrollment for a course exists. These changes
can include:

• a CRN’s prerequisites are changed

• a CRN’s corequisites are changed
• a CRN is linked to another CRN
• an approval requirement is added to a CRN
• the meeting day or time of a CRN is changed (which can cause a time conflict in a
student’s schedule)

• an equivalent course is added (which can cause a duplicate course error on the
student's schedule)

When a student has registered and later their registration record is accessed via Banner
self-service or Banner Voice Response, the system determines whether any of the above
kinds of changes occurred. If so, the system determines which of the following conditions
applies and takes the associated action shown in the table below.

GTVSDAX
Condition Action Taken Setting

Administrative drops are The drop is automatically processed, and a message is ADMINDROP
allowed. written to the SFTRGAM table, but the user is not notified of set to Y
the action.

The drop occurs only if all courses with administrative

errors or classes that are connected to them have a single,
active drop code.

Administrative drops are A message is written to the Student Course Registration ADMINDROP
not allowed. Audit Form (SFASTCA), but the drop is not processed, and set to N
the student continues to be registered in the course.

Note: The system does not perform an administrative drop if a student

fails an in-progress prerequisite after registering for a CRN, although the
Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) captures the error.

Also, if registration is accessed via the Student Course Registration Form

(SFAREGS), the ADMINDROP rule is not invoked, because the types of
errors that the ADMINDROP rule addresses would be encountered and
dealt with by the administrator.

If the student’s record is accessed and changed in the Student Course Registration Form
(SFAREGS), any administrative errors encountered must be resolved. You can run the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 247

 Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) to review administrative drop errors
that need to be resolved.

The rest of this section provides a variety of scenarios to help illustrate how the system
processes requests based on your system setup. These scenarios are not meant to be all-
inclusive, but rather to show several examples.

Administrative Drop if an Approval is Added to a CRN

You want the system to perform administrative drops. To accomplish this, you have to set
the external code to Y for the ADMINDROP rule. You have also included a single, active
drop code (DC for Drop Course) for Linguistics 318 on these forms:

• Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) (for open learning courses)

• Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) (for traditional courses)
Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Linguistics 318
• English 350
• Comparative Lit 302
• Geology 220
After the student has registered in the course, an instructor approval code is added to
Linguistics 318.

If a user accesses the student’s registration record via Banner self-service or Banner
Voice Response, the system checks for administrative errors and finds one for this
student: in this case, that the student no longer meets the requirements of Linguistics 318.
That is, that the student does not have the required instructor approval. The system then
checks SSARULE or SFARSTS (as applicable) and finds the DC drop code, so it changes
the student’s registration status to DC. This occurs before the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwlkfrad.P_FacAddDropCrse) is displayed on the Web, and the change is
reflected when the page is displayed. No additional information is provided to the student.

Only those students whose records are accessed will have this drop performed. For
example, if 30 students were registered in this class and only three of these students’
records were accessed, they would be the only ones dropped from the course.

The Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) identifies the students who might
have had classes dropped after a change has been made. You can use this report to
identify and resolve the errors in Banner (for example, enter an override) before the
students’ records are accessed. See the Banner Student User Guide for more information
about this report.

Administrative Drop if a Corequisite is Added to a CRN

You want the system to perform administrative drops. To accomplish this, you have set the
external code to Y for the ADMINDROP rule. You have included a single, active drop code

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 248

 (DC for Drop Course) on the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) for Astronomy
105 and for Astronomy 106.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Astronomy 105 (corequisite with Astronomy 106)

• Astronomy 106 (corequisite with Astronomy 105)
• Mathematics 130
• Physical Education 154
• Computer Science 205
After the student has registered in the course, an Astronomy 107 seminar is added as a
corequisite of Astronomy 105.

If a user accesses the student’s registration record via Banner self-service or Banner
Voice Response, the system checks for administrative errors and finds one for this
student: in this case, that the student has not registered in a corequisite. The system then
checks SSARULE and finds the DC drop code for both courses, so it drops the courses
and changes the registration status for both courses to DC. This occurs before the Add or
Drop Classes page is displayed on the Web, and the change is reflected when the page is
displayed.

Administrative Drops if Active Drop Codes are Not Defined

You want the system to perform administrative drops. To accomplish this, you have set the
external code to Y for the ADMINDROP rule. You have included a single, active drop code
(DC for Drop Course) for Anthropology 215 on the Schedule Processing Rules Form
(SSARULE), but you have not defined an active drop code for Sociology 215 on
SSARULE (for open learning courses) or the Course Registration Status Form
(SFARSTS) (for traditional courses).

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Anthropology 215 (corequisite with Sociology 215)

• Sociology 215 (corequisite with Anthropology 215)
• Economics 105
• French 201
After the student has registered in the course, a seminar is added as a corequisite of
Anthropology 215.

If a user accesses the student’s registration record via Banner self-service or Banner
Voice Response, the system checks for administrative errors and finds one for this
student: in this case, that the student has not registered in a corequisite. Processing
continues, and the system finds that Sociology 215 is a corequisite of Anthropology 215,
and therefore must also be dropped. There is no active drop code, however, for Sociology
215. Because both courses cannot be dropped appropriately, neither are dropped, and

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 249

 both are returned to their previous registration statuses. This occurs before the Add or
Drop Classes page is displayed on the Web.

Administrative Drops if Other Errors are Found during Processing

You want the system to perform administrative drops. To accomplish this, you have to set
the external code to Y for the ADMINDROP rule. You have also included a single, active
drop code (DC for Drop Course) on the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) and
the Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) for Music 118 and Music 250, but you
have not defined an active drop code for Physics 105.

Let’s say a student has registered in the following courses:

• Music 118 (corequisite with Music 250)

• Music 250 (corequisite with Music 118)
• Political Science 101
• Physics 105
After the student has registered in the course, a seminar is added as a corequisite of
Music 118.

If a user accesses the student’s registration record via Banner self-service or Banner
Voice Response, the system checks for administrative errors and finds one for this
student: in this case, that the student has not registered in a corequisite. Processing
continues, and the system finds that Music 250 is a corequisite of Music 118, and
therefore must also be dropped. There is an active drop code for both music courses.

Processing continues further, and the system finds that the meeting day of Physics 105
has been changed and now conflicts with Political Science 101. There is no active drop
code, however, for Physics 105. Because Physics 105 cannot be dropped appropriately,
none of the courses are dropped, and all are returned to their previous registration
statuses. This occurs before the Add or Drop Classes page is displayed on the Web.

Rules on GTVSDAX
Two rules are used on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) with the improved
drop/withdrawal processing:

• “AUTODROP” on page 250

• “ADMINDROP” on page 251

AUTODROP
The AUTODROP internal code is used to determine whether connected classes that are in
error can be dropped using self-service.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 250

 Internal
Code
External Sequence Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

C AUTODROP N/A REGISTRATION Drop connected Sysdate

courses

This rule can be set to process the dropping of connected classes in three ways:

• C (Confirm) — Automatic drops are allowed for connected classes, after input is
received from the user. This is the default value.

• Y (Yes) — Automatic drops are allowed for connected classes. A single, active drop
code must exist for all connected classes that would be dropped. No input is needed
from the user.

• N (No) — No automatic drops are allowed for connected classes. The user must
initiate dropping the connected classes. All connected classes must be dropped at the
same time.

Note: In Banner Voice Response, error checking is performed on each

CRN as it is entered. Because of this, if you enter N for AUTODROP, it will
not be possible for connected courses to be dropped via Voice Response.
Therefore, if your institution uses both Voice Response and Banner
Student Self-Service, it is recommended that you use either C or Y for
AUTODROP.

If multiple drop codes exist or no drop codes exist, no connected class drops are allowed
to occur.

ADMINDROP
The ADMINDROP internal code is used to drop classes where schedule or restriction
changes have occurred after enrollment exists or where in-progress prerequisites have
failed.

Internal
Code
External Sequence Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y ADMINDROP N/A REGISTRATION Drop courses in Sysdate

admin error

This rule can be set to process the dropping of classes in one of the following ways:

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 251

 • Y (Yes) — Classes with administrative errors are allowed to be dropped if a single,
active drop code is available for the section or the part-of-term.

• N (No) — Classes that have administrative errors are not dropped. Run the
Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) to see errors in the student’s
schedule. Registration leaves the classes with administrative errors in their registered
status on the schedule.

You can run the SFRRGAM report to review any errors in the student’s schedule
regardless of how ADMINDROP is set up. See the Banner Student User Guide for more
information about this report.

The Registration Administrative Message Temporary Table (SFTRGAM) stores the error
messages that result from the use of ADMINDROP to drop classes during the registration
session.

Registration Web Pages

The following Web pages compose Banner Student Self-Service Registration:

• “Registration Term (bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm)” on page 253

• “Add or Drop Classes (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse)” on page 255
• “Connected Course Drop Confirmation (bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drops)” on page 267
• “Registration Start Date (bwckcoms.p_disp_start_confirm_date)” on page 269
• “Alternate PIN Verification (bwskfreg.P_AltPin)” on page 271
• “Select Term or Date Range (bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search)” on page 273
• “Select Study Paths (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) and
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath)” on page 275

• “Look Up Classes (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)” on page 277

• “Look Up Classes - Courses Found (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)” on page 278
• “Look Up Classes Results (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)” on page 280
• “Advanced Search (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced)” on page 287
• “Change Class Options (bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt)” on page 291
• “Week at a Glance (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd)” on page 295
• “Student Detail Schedule (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl)” on page 297
• “Registration Fee Assessment (bwskffee.P_FeeAsses)” on page 301
• “Tuition and Fees Payment (bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected)” on page 303
• “Withdrawal Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw)” on page 306

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 252

 • “Title IV Fund Detail (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail)” on page 309
• “Registration Status (bwskrsta.P_RegsStatusDisp)” on page 311
• “Active Registrations (bwsksreg.p_active_regs)” on page 315
• “Registration History (bwskhreg.p_reg_hist)” on page 318
• “Office Hours (bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours)” on page 321
• “Concise Student Schedule (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdDetl)” on page 323
• “Concise Student Schedule by Centric Period (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdScp)” on page 325

Registration Term (bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm)

This page is used to select a term for use in registration-related activities. (There are
similar pages used in other processing, for example, for the display of the student
schedules.) If no registration term has been selected for the current Web session and the
student requests a registration-related page that requires a term, this page is displayed.
Similarly, if a student has been using one term and wants to change to another, he or she
can access this page via the Registration Menu to do so. The message View Only is
displayed after the term if the Web Registration dates for the term exclude the date on
which the information is being accessed.

For a term to be available on the Web, you must select the Master Web Term Control
checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Term Term the student wants to access.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 253

 Item Description

Term Control Form Select the Master Web Term Control checkbox.
(SOATERM)
For registration to be allowed, select the Permit checkbox in the
Registration section.

For registration to be allowed, complete the Web Registration

Dates block.

Crosswalk Validation Form Set the WEBTRMDTE rule for group STUWEB to Y to display date
(GTVSDAX) ranges for terms on all Banner Student Self-Service pages where
the term is selected.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to one of the following.

• If this page was accessed from the Registration Menu, the
system returns to the Registration Menu.
• If the page was displayed when a page requiring term selection
was accessed, the system displays the accessed page.
• If payment is by credit card, goes to the Tuition and Fees
Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 254

 Web Name Web URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Add or Drop Classes (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse)

This page allows a student to register for classes. It also allows students to drop courses
for which they are currently registered.

Note: If your institution has set up alternate PIN processing and the valid
alternate PIN for the selected term has not been entered, the system
displays the Alternate PIN Verification page (bwskfreg.P_AltPin)
before displaying this page.

Students cannot access this page if any of the following conditions exist:

• Web registration dates prohibit Web registration

• The student’s enrollment status prohibits registration
• The student status in the student record in effect for the selected term is inactive
• The student has an active registration hold
• The student’s academic standing prohibits registration
• The student’s time ticket or registration appointment is not valid for the day and time or
time controls are in place for the institution

• The student has not been enrolled since the re-admit term, if specified on the Term
Control Form (SOATERM)

If the registration status date on the Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS)
prohibits registration for all or part of the term or if the registration status date on the
Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) prohibits registration for that section,
students can access the page but not perform registration-specific activities.

If the student has not selected a term during the current Web session and selects the Add
or Drop Classes link from the Registration Menu, the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) is displayed first. If a term has been selected, that term
is used, and the Add or Drop Classes is displayed.

For any course section a student has registered for, the actions available in the pulldown
list are controlled by the following requirements, in the order displayed:

• The course status must be Web-enabled on the Course Registration Status Code
Validation Form (STVRSTS) (for traditional courses) or on the Schedule Processing
Rules Form (SSARULE) (for open learning courses).

• The Allowed to Enter checkbox must be selected for the course status on STVRSTS.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 255

 • The course status must be defined for the part of term for the section on SFARSTS.
• The course status must be valid for the current date on SFARSTS.

Error Message Section

There are a number of error conditions that prevent a student from attempting to register.
Although there can be multiple reasons that a student cannot register, only the first error
that prevents registration is displayed for a student at any time. In other words, a student
could be prevented from registering for one error that is resolved by administrative action,
only to be denied registration for another error later. The following errors prevent
registration activity:

• User has no student record. If the user has no student record for the selected term (for
example, the student's first admission is for a future term), the message Invalid Student
Status Code is displayed.

• Student status prevents registration. If the student status in the student record, as
displayed on the General Student Form (SGASTDN), for the selected term is one that
prevents registration, the message Student Status prohibits registration is displayed.

• Academic standing prevents registration. If the student's current or override academic

standing, as displayed on SGASTDN, prevents registration, the message Academic
Standing prohibits registration is displayed.

• Time ticket error. If registration time ticket slots have been assigned to the student, and
the student accesses the Add or Drop Classes page outside of the assigned time slots
on the Student Registration Group Form (SFARGRP), an error message is displayed
informing the user of the assigned time slots. No add or drop activity is allowed until the
assigned time slot. (If no time ticket assignments have been made, the user can register
at any time in which registration is available.)

• Time control error. If the user accesses this function outside the time period specified on
the Third Party Registration Time Controls form (SFARGTC), the system displays an
error message. Unlike with time-ticket errors, information about the specific time periods
when registration is open is not displayed.

• Hold error. If a hold that prevents registration is in place for the user this page is
accessed, a hold error is displayed. No add or drop activity is allowed until the hold is
resolved. A link to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold) is available so
that the student can view the holds.

• Invalid or undefined enrollment status. If the current date is not included in the available
date range for the selected term, as maintained on the Enrollment Status Control Form
(SFAESTS), the message Invalid or undefined Enrollment Status or date range invalid is
displayed.

• Course status dates not within range for part of term. If the current date is not included in
the available date range for the part of term or class section, or if the value entered on
the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) for the WEBREG internal code group for
internal code WEBRSTSREG is not included in the available course registration status
codes as maintained on the Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) or the
Process Scheduling Rules Form (SSARULE), the message Course status dates not
within range for part of term is displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 256

 • Drop failed. If a student tries to drop a connection but at least one of the courses has
either multiple or no active drop codes, the following message is displayed: Due to a
problem with a connected course, the drop you requested could not be performed. You
may try to drop all connected courses in the same transaction.

• Drop confirmed. If a student selected the Drop button on the Connected Course Drop
Confirmation (bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drop) to drop all connected courses,
the system drops them and redisplays this page with the message: All connected
courses that could be dropped were done so at your request.

• Drop rejected. If a student selected the Do not drop button on the Connected Course
Drop Confirmation (bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drop) to reinstate all
connected courses, the system reinstates them and redisplays this page with the
message: You choose not to drop all connected course in question. All courses that
would have been affected have been returned to their original registration status.

• Drop prohibited. If a student tries to drop part of a connection, and if you have entered N
in the External Code field for the AUTODROP internal code on the Crosswalk Validation
Form (GTVSDAX), the system reinstates the course(s) and redisplays this page with the
message: You must drop all connected courses in the same transaction. Please try
again.

• Drop last class. If a student tries to drop his or her last class, and if you have entered N
in the External Code field for the WEBDROPLST internal code on GTVSDAX, the
system displays the following message: You may not drop your last class. Please
contact the Registrar’s office.

Current Schedule Section

The Current Schedule section is displayed if the user is currently registered for any
classes in the selected term. The Current Schedule section can be used to drop active
registrations, if allowed. Other courses (such as waitlisted or dropped courses or those
from which the student has withdrawn) may be displayed in this section if their
corresponding course registration status codes have been set up on the Course
Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS) to print on the schedule (that is, the
Print on Schedule checkbox has been selected).

The Study Path field displays the study path for the CRN. When the Study Path
Required checkbox on SOATERM is checked, a study path must be entered in order to
register for the class. When a study path has been selected, the detail of the selected
study path is displayed in the Add Classes Worksheet section. When None is selected, the
detail text informs the student that courses entered for registration will not have a study
path applied to them. When study paths are not in use (the Enable Study Paths checkbox
is unchecked on SOACTRL), the Study Path field is not displayed.

The Select Study Path button is used to open the Select Study Paths page
(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) so you can select a value for the Study Path field
or change the existing study path. You can then return to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) and complete adding or dropping classes.

When the Add or Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) is selected from

the main menu and a study path is required for registration, the Select Study Paths page
(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) is displayed first. You can select a study path from

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 257

 the pulldown list and press the Submit button. Processing then takes the user to the Add
or Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Registration Add Errors Section

The Registration Add Errors section is displayed if the student has attempted to register
for a class that for which he or she cannot register. A summary of the class's information
and the error condition (that is, the reason the registration could not be performed) are
displayed. Unsuccessful registration attempts are logged and can be displayed on the
Student Course Registration Audit Form (SFASTCA).

Registration Update Errors Section

The Registration Update Errors section is displayed if the student has attempted to make
a registration change (for example, drop or withdraw from a class) that is not allowed. A
summary of the class's information and the error condition (that is, the reason the change
could not be made) are displayed. Unsuccessful registration attempts are logged and can
be displayed on the Student Course Registration Audit Form (SFASTCA).

Add Classes Worksheet Section

The Add Classes Worksheet is displayed only when the user accesses the Add or Drop
Classes page for a single term and can be used to add classes using the CRN (course
reference number), if known. The user can enter CRNs and select the Submit Changes
button to process the registration request. After processing, the request is be added to the
student's schedule or an appropriate error message is displayed.

If an open learning course is added, when the user selects the Submit Changes button,
the Registration Start Date Confirmation page
(bwckcoms.p_disp_start_date_confirm) is displayed prompting the user for a
start or end date.

Registration Fee Assessment

You can set up fee assessment so that fees are assessed as soon as a student
successfully registers in a class. For more information, see the “Set Up Immediate
Registration Fee Assessment” on page 338.

Web Drop
The Web drop functionality is the same as the use of the standard DD code in online
processing, with the following important exception: the Web drop also deletes the
registration entirely, whereas in the online system, you must perform a Delete Record
function to remove the registration entirely.

Other course registration statuses (such as audit, drops during refund periods, and so
forth) will be available in the pulldown list after the student initially registers for a section, if
those statuses have been Web-enabled on the Course Registration Status Code

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 258

 Validation Form (STVRSTS) and if the current date falls within the date range defined for
those statuses on the Course Registration Status Form (SFARSTS) (for traditional
courses) or on the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) (for open learning
courses). If no other actions are available, the pulldown list will not be displayed next to
the current schedule. These additional drop codes do not get entered on the Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX).

Note: If the student has registered in a class and subsequently dropped

it, the value in the Type field can also affect the values in the pulldown list.
See the “Status Types” on page 242 for more information.

If the Voice Response and Self-Service Available checkbox is cleared on the Schedule
Form (SSASECT) for a class, the class cannot be dropped nor can its options be
changed. You can allow students to add (if a CRN is known), update, or drop a class even
if it is unavailable for Web access (that is, the Voice Response and Self-Service
Available checkbox on the Term Control Form [SOATERM] is cleared) by entering Y in
the External Code field for the CRNDIRECT internal code on GTVSDAX.

Drop Last Class

The action of a student dropping his or her last class is significant, because it may
constitute withdrawal from your institution. Withdrawing from an institution can have
implications on financial aid, accounts receivable, etc.

The registration methods are the following.

• In the Banner Student System, an administrative user may drop a student’s last class. It
is assumed that the administrative user has evaluated the student’s decision to drop the
last class and has deemed the consequences of the action to be acceptable.

• A rule in the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) is used by Student Self-Service

and Faculty and Advisor Self-Service to determine whether or not the last class may be
dropped.

The internal code WEBDROPLST for the WEBREG internal code group with the
description of Web Drop Last Class must be entered manually at your institution.

• The self-service applications check the WEBDROPLST rule on GTVSDAX. If the

External Code field has a value of Y, the last class may be dropped. If the External
Code field has a value of N, the last class may not be dropped, and the student must
contact the Registrar’s office.

The AUTODROP settings on GTVSDAX are also applicable to dropping the last class. See
“AUTODROP” on page 250 for more information.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 259

 Item Description/Source Information

Status Current status of the registration for the class.

Action Action that the student wants to take for this class, such as “Drop”
or “Audit.”

Associated Term Term code and description. This field is displayed only if the user
searched for classes by a date range that spans multiple terms. If
multiple terms are not selected, this column is not displayed.

CRN Course reference number.

Subj Subject of the course.

Crse Course number.

Sec Section number of the course.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

If no course level exists that matches the current general student

level, the system displays an error message and the student will
not be permitted to register in the class.

If multiple course levels are available for the class, the system
initially uses the level that matches that of the current General
Student record and displays the level as a hyperlink to the
Change Class Options page
(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt), where the student can
change the level if desired.

Cred Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

If multiple credit-hour options are available for the class, the

system initially uses the minimum credit hours and displays the
credit-hours value as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options
page.

Grade Mode Grade mode for which the student is registered for the class.

If multiple grade modes are available for the class, the system
initially uses the default grade mode and displays the level as a
hyperlink to the Change Class Options page.

Title Title associated with the course.

Study Path Study path associated with the course.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 260

 Item Description/Source Information

Waitlist Action If a student attempts to register for a class that is closed (that is,
available seats are less than 1), but wait list seats are still
available for the section, a message is displayed. The message
includes the number of students already waitlisted. In addition, a
pulldown list containing all available waitlist statuses is displayed.
The student can choose to be placed on the waitlist by selecting
one of the available statuses.

Open learning courses are not available for waitlisting.

The following fields are displayed in the Registration Add Errors section of page, if applicable.

Status Reason that the add was not processed as requested.

CRN CRN of the class that was not added due to an error.

Subj Subject associated with the CRN.

Crse Course number of the class.

Sec Section number of the class.

Level Level of the class.

Cred Credit hours for the class.

Grade Mode Grade mode for the class.

Title Title associated with the course.

The following fields are displayed in the Registration Update Errors section of page, if
applicable.

CRN CRN of the connected class that the student did not select to drop
but was part of connection, at least one of which classes the
student tried to drop.

Subj Subject associated with the CRN.

Crse Course number of the class.

Sec Section number of the class.

Status Reason that the drop was not processed as requested. This field
displays all CRNs in the connection, including the course(s) that
the student did select.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 261

 Item Description

Automated Waitlist Term If your institution is using waitlist automation, define waitlist
Control Form (SOAWLTC) registration verification checking and error severity warnings.

Course Registration Status Define the registration dates for your traditional courses for your
Form (SFARSTS) “Web registered,” “Web drop,” and “waitlist” course registration
status codes, as well as any other codes you deem necessary.

Schedule Processing Add your “Web registered” and “Web drop” course registration
Rules Form (SSARULE) status codes, as well as any other codes you deem necessary, to
your open learning courses.

Define usage/cutoff rules for each course registration status code

you are using. See the “Class Schedule" chapter in the Banner
Student User Guide for more information.

Enrollment Status Control Define the enrollment status codes. EL (Eligible to Register) is
Form (SFAESTS) required for students to be able to register.

Term Control Form If your institution is setting up fee assessment so that student
(SOATERM) registration fees are assessed as soon as registration entries
have been completed or change have been made on the Web,
take the following steps.
• Select the Online checkbox in the Registration Fee Assessment
section.
• Select the Online radio button in the Web Self-Service and
Voice Response section.
For registration to be allowed, select the Permit checkbox in the
Registration section.

If you want to enable credit hour changes on the Web, select the
Change Credit Hours checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

If you want to enable grade mode changes on the Web, select the
Change Grade Mode checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

If you want to enable course level changes on the Web, select the
Change Level checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 262

 Item Description

Course Registration Status For Web registration:

Code Validation Form
(STVRSTS) Create the course registration status code for “Web registered”.
Select the following checkboxes:
• Allowed to Enter
• Count in Enrollment
• Count in Assessment
• Gradable Indicator
• Print on Schedule
• Web Indicator
Clear the following checkboxes:
• Withdrawal Indicator
• Waitlist Indicator
For Web drop:

Create the course registration status code for “Web drop”. Select
the following checkboxes:
• Allowed to Enter
• Web Indicator
Clear the following checkboxes:
• Count in Enrollment
• Count in Assessment
• Withdrawal Indicator
• Waitlist Indicator
• Gradable Indicator
• Print on Schedule
For waitlisting:

Create the course registration status code for “waitlist”. Select the
following checkboxes:
• Allowed to Enter
• Web Indicator

Course Registration Status For every status code in use, in the Status Type field, enter the
Code Validation Form status code type.
(STVRSTS)
(continued) R - Registered (enrolled)
D - Dropped
L - Waitlisted
W - Withdrawn

Warning! If the Status Type field is left

blank, unexpected results can occur.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 263

 Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form For the internal code WEBRSTSREG, enter your “Web registered”
(GTVSDAX) course registration status code (defined on STVRSTS) in the
External Code field.

For the internal code WEBRSTSDRP, enter your “Web drop”

course registration status code in the External Code field.

You can define only one code for “Web registered” and one for
“Web drop” on GTVSDAX. If you wish to change the code later,
change the GTVSDAX external code.

For the internal code MAXREGNO with internal code group

WEBREG, in the External Code field, enter the maximum number
of enrollment attempts your institution wants to allow on the Web.

If you want to allow a student to register for or update a class that

is not Voice Response/Web-available on the Add or Drop Classes
page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) if the CRN is known,
enter Y in the External Code field for internal code CRNDIRECT.

Voice Response and self-service availability is specified in the

Voice Response and Self-Service Availability field on the
Schedule Form (SSASECT).

Crosswalk Validation Form For the internal code AUTODROP, enter the appropriate value in
(GTVSDAX) the External Code field.
(cont.)
• If you want students to be allowed to choose whether to drop all
or no connected courses if not all were selected to be dropped,
enter C.
• If you want an entire connection to be automatically dropped if
not all were selected to be dropped, enter Y.
• If you want no connected courses to be dropped unless all were
selected, enter N.
In Voice Response, error checking is performed on each CRN as
it is entered. Because of this, if you enter N for AUTODROP, it will
not be possible for connected courses to be dropped via Voice
Response. Therefore, if your institution uses both Voice
Response and Student Self-Service, it is recommended that you
use either C or Y for AUTODROP.

For the internal code ADMINDROP, enter the appropriate value in

the External Code field.
• If you want administrative errors that have been encountered
when a registration record is accessed to be ignored, enter N.
• If you want the system to automatically drop a course if an
administrative error is encountered when a registration record is
accessed, enter Y.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 264

 Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Registration transactions A user’s first attempt at registration for a term creates an

Enrollment Status (SFBETRM) record, and information from
that record is displayed in the Registration Information block of
the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS).

All registration transactions, whether adds, drops, or waitlist

requests, are logged and displayed on the Student Course
Registration Audit Form (SFASTCA).

All successful registration transactions, whether adds, drops, or

waitlist requests, update the section enrollment counts and are
displayed on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) and in other
forms and reports that detail section enrollment data.

All successful registration transactions are reflected in the

student's enrollment information, as displayed on SFAREGS or
on the Add or Drop Classes page in the Current Schedule
section. The Web drop code specified on the Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX) removes the enrollment entirely,
and courses dropped using Web Drop no longer appear
anywhere except on SFASTCA. Other drop codes will leave the
class on the student’s schedule.

The Registration Temporary table (SFTREGS) is used

extensively throughout the Registration module. See the
“Registration Temporary Table (SFTREGS)” on page 328 for
more information.

The Additional Registration Record table (SFRAREG) is also

use extensively throughout the Registration module, regardless
of the type of section (open learning or traditional). See the
“Additional Registration Information Table (SFRAREG)” on
page 328 for more information.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Level If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 265

 Link Action

Cred If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page.

Grade Mode If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page.

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Change Course Options Goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Registration Fee Goes to the Registration Fee Assessment page

Assessment (bwskffee.P_FeeAsses).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Changes If an open learning course is being added, goes to the

Registration Start Date Confirmation page
(bwckcoms.p_disp_start_date_confirm).

If a change other than adding an open learning course is being

made, redisplays to the Add or Drop Courses page with the
results of the change. (This can show a successful addition,
change, or deletion of a class, or it could show a registration
error.)

Class Search Goes to the Look Up Classes page

(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) where you can perform a course
search or an advanced search.

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the
default settings.

Select Study Path Goes to the Select Study Paths page

(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menus have a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 266

 Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages
A number of error messages described earlier in this section (for example, Invalid Student
Status Code) report valid data conditions that do not require specific action. However, a
number of error messages report conditions that fail to allow Web registration to function
correctly. These messages are reported below.

Message: Invalid or undefined Enrollment Status or date range invalid.

Source: bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse
Action: End-user or administrative action required. The Web enrollment status
has not been correctly entered in the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX) or the entered code is not valid for the current date on the
Enrollment Status Control Form (SFAESTS).

Message: Registration is not available at this time.

Source: bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse
Action: End-user or administrative action required. The “Web registered” and/
or “Web drop” code(s) have not been correctly defined on the Course
Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS) or have not
been entered correctly in GTVSDAX, or the available dates for these
codes do not include the current date on the Course Registration
Status Form (SFARSTS) for traditional courses or the Schedule
Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) for open learning courses.

Connected Course Drop Confirmation

(bwskfreg.p_disp_confirm_drops)
This page is displayed when a student attempts to drop a connected course without
dropping the entire connection (that is, the course[s] to which it is associated). It tells the
student that either all connected courses or no connected courses must be dropped and
provides buttons that allow the student to select his or her choice.

This page is displayed only under the following circumstances:

• The external code is set to C for internal code AUTODROP on the Crosswalk Validation
Form (GTVSDAX).

• The student has not selected all connected courses to drop.

• All connected courses have a single, active drop code available. (The system checks for
this before displaying the page.)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 267

 If the student performs other registration activity in the same transaction, the other
registration activity is processed as usual. For example, if a student tries to drop an
unconnected course and only one from a connection, then regardless of which drop
decision the student chooses on this page, the unconnected course will be dropped as
usual (assuming there is no other reason it cannot be). Similarly, if a student tries to drop
all courses in one connection and only one course from another connection, then
regardless of which drop decision the student chooses on this page, the first connection
will be dropped as usual (assuming there is no other reason that the connected courses
cannot be).

The info text delivered with this page is: You have selected to drop a course that has a
connected course. Listed below are courses that are connected and must be dropped in
the same transaction.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

CRN CRN of the connected course that the student did not select to
drop but was part of a connection.

Subj Subject associated with the CRN.

Crse Course number of the class.

Sec Section number of the class.

Title Title associated with the course.

Registration Issues Reason that the drop was not processed as requested. This
field displays all CRNs in the connection, including the
course(s) that the student did select.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form For the internal code AUTODROP, enter C in the External Code
(GTVSDAX) field.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 268

 Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Drop button Updates the SFRSTCR table.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Drop Drops all of the connected courses and redisplays the Add or
Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) showing
the successful drops.

Do not drop Does not drop any of the connected courses and redisplays the
Add or Drop Classes page with the set of connected courses in
their original registration status.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Registration Start Date

(bwckcoms.p_disp_start_confirm_date)
This page is displayed if a user registers in a open learning class and require the student
to enter a desired start or end date for the registration. The start date determined on this
page represents the official start of the class, with the end date identifying the expected
completion date of the course.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 269

 Item Description/Source Information

CRN CRN of the class selected on the previous page.

Associated Term Term associated with the class. This column is displayed only if
the user searched for classes by a date range that spans multiple
terms.

Course Course number of the class.

Course Title Title associated with the course.

Duration Duration number of units and duration units (for example, days or
weeks), concatenated.

Start Date Start date, entered by the user.

The system calculates the end date based on the start date
entered in this field and the duration.

The user must enter either a start date or an end date, but not
both.

End Date End date, entered by the user.

The system calculates the start date based on the end date
entered in this field and the duration.

The user must enter either a start date or an end date, but not
both.

Permitted Start Date Start from and to dates defined for the section.

Permitted End Date Derived end dates:

Start From Date + (No. of Days equivalent of duration unit *

number of duration units)

Start To Date + (No. of Days equivalent of duration unit *

number of duration units)

No date adjustments are made for exclusion dates (that is,

statutory holidays). If the calculation of the duration period results
in a fraction of a day, that fraction is rounded up. For example: 10
hours where 1 hour equals .25 of a day calculates to 2.5 days, so
it is rounded up to 3 days.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 270

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Changes After the user enters a start or end date and selects the Submit
Changes button, the following processing occurs:
• Based on the start or end date entered by the user, the system
calculates the other date. That is, if the user enters an end date,
the system calculates the start date. The system makes sure
that the dates are within the allowable date range.
• If registration is successfully processed, an entry in the
Additional Registration Record table (SFRAREG) is created,
regardless of the type of section (open learning or traditional).
• An instructor is assigned to the student.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Alternate PIN Verification (bwskfreg.P_AltPin)

If your institution has set up alternate PIN processing and an alternate PIN has been
entered for the student on the Alternate Personal Identification Number Form (SPAAPIN),
this page is displayed when a student tries to perform initial add/drop activity or look up
classes for a term. (If no alternate PIN has been entered on SPAAPIN, the system
displays the requested page without displaying this page first.)

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 271

 Item Description/Source Information

Alternate PIN Student’s alternate PIN.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want to use alternate PIN processing, enter Y in the
(GTVSDAX) External Code field for the WEBALTPINA internal code.

Alternate Personal Define an alternate PIN for the term and the student.
Identification Number Form
(SPAAPIN)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Verifies the PIN and if valid, goes to the page initially
requested by the user.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 272

 Select Term or Date Range (bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search)
This page is displayed when a user accesses the Look Up Classes page
(bwskfcls.P_CrseSearch).

Note: If your institution does not want to permit searching by date range,
the fields can be omitted from the page by setting the value in the
External Code field on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) to N
for the SCHBYDATE internal code.

For term class schedule information to be displayed on the Web, the Master Web Term
Control checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) must be selected.

Messages
If the dates entered are invalid, the following message is displayed:
You have entered an invalid date.

If the From Date is greater than the To Date, the following message is displayed:
From Date must be less than or equal to the To Date

If neither a term nor a date range are entered, the following message is displayed:
You must enter either a term or date range.

If your institution has not selected the Master Web Term Control checkbox on the Term
Control Form (SOATERM), the following message is displayed:
No terms available.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Search by Term Terms available for display on the Web.

Search by Date Range User enters the first and last dates of the range he or she wants
From and To to view on the Web.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 273

 Item Description

Term Control Form To include the term in the Search by Term pulldown list, select
(SOATERM) the Master Web Term Control checkbox.

Crosswalk Validation Form To display the Search by Date Range fields, enter Y in the
(GTVSDAX) External Code field for the SCHBYDATE internal code.

If the SCHBYDATE internal code has not been set up as

described in the setup requirements, the Search by Date
Range From and To fields will not be displayed on the page.

Crosswalk Validation Form Set the WEBTRMDTE rule for group STUWEB to Y to display
(GTVSDAX) date ranges for terms on all Banner Student Self-Service pages
where the term is selected.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Look Up Classes page

(bwskfcls.P_CrseSearch).

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the
default settings.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menus have a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 274

 Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Select Study Paths (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) and

(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath)
The Select Study Path pages are used to select a study path when registering for a single
term (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) and to select study paths for multiple terms
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath) when registering from the Look Up
Classes page (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date) using a date range.

These pages are available when the Enable Study Paths checkbox is checked on
SOACTRL. These pages are not available when study paths are optional (the Study Path
Required checkbox is unchecked on SOATERM), when the student registering has no
valid study paths.

When a term is selected and then the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) is accessed and a study path is required for
registration, the Select Study Paths page (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) is
displayed first. You can select a study path from the Select a Study Path field and press
the Submit button. You are then returned to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

When study paths are not enabled, the Select Study Paths pages
(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) or (bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath)
are not displayed. You are taken directly to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

When study paths are enabled but not required (the Study Path Required checkbox is
unchecked on SOATERM), and the student being registered has no valid study paths for
the selected term, processing takes the user directly to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse). The Select Study Paths pages
(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) or (bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath)
are not displayed.

When the Study Path Required checkbox is checked on SOATERM, study paths are
required. You must select a study path to proceed, or an error is displayed. If no valid
study path exists for registration, you cannot proceed. When the Study Path Required
checkbox is unchecked on SOATERM, study paths are optional. You can choose a study
path value or select None from the Select a Study Path field.

Only study paths with a curriculum that is active and current for the term and statuses that
allow registration will be displayed in the study path list. An error is displayed if the student
has no study paths that are eligible for registration. Only one study path can be selected at
a time.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 275

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Study Path Study path for the student’s courses. Select a value from the
list. When study paths are required, a value must be selected.
When study paths are optional, None can be selected.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths
(SOATERM) checkbox on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study

Path checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 276

 Button/Icon Action

Register Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) when looking up classes by
date range.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Look Up Classes (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)

This page is displayed when you perform a search by term or date range on the Select
Term or Date Range page (bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search) and click the Submit
button. A summary list of subjects is displayed for the term or date range. You can then
select a subject and perform a basic course search or an advanced course search.

The basic course search follows this path:

1. Select a subject and then select the Course Search button.
2. You are taken to the Look Up Classes - Courses Found page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).
You can view a list courses which have section information created for the term or
date range you requested.
3. Select the View Sections button for a course.
4. You are taken to the Look Up Classes Results page (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).
You can view the sections found by the search.

The advanced course search follows this path:

1. Select a subject and then select the Advanced Search button.
2. You are taken to the Advanced Search page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced).
3. Enter the detailed search criteria.
4. Select the Section Search button.
5. You are taken to the Look Up Classes Results page (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).
You can view the sections found by the search.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 277

 Item Description/Source Information

Subject Subjects available for the term or date range.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Course Search Goes to Look Up Classes - Courses Found page

(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).

Advanced Search Goes to the Advanced Search Page

(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Look Up Classes - Courses Found (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)

This page is displayed when you click Course Search button on the Look Up Classes
page (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 278

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Subject Subjects available from course search.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Schedule Form (SSASECT) For each class that you want to be available on the Web, select
the Voice Response and Self-Service Availability checkbox.

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want the Cap, Act, and Rem fields to be displayed on this
(GTVSDAX) page, enter Y in the External Code field for the DISPENROLL
internal code.

If you want the WL Cap, WL Act, and WL Rem fields to be

displayed on this page, enter Y in the External Code field for
the DISPWL internal code.

If you want the XL Cap, XL Act, and XL Rem fields to be

displayed on this page, enter Y in the External Code field for
the DISPXLL internal code.

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths
(SOATERM) checkbox on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study

Path checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 279

 Link Action

If multiple terms are in effect for the search and a student selects a link, the system uses the last
term that is part of the date search as the term for the page to be displayed.

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

View Sections Goes to Look Up Classes Results (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).

New Search Goes to the Select Term or Date Range page

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Look Up Classes Results (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse)

This page displays the results of the search specified on the Look Up Classes - Courses
Found page (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date) or the Advanced Search page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced).

Note: If your institution has set up alternate PIN processing and the valid
alternate PIN for the selected term has not been entered, the system
displays the Alternate PIN Verification page (bwskfreg.P_AltPin)
when the student selects the Register button or the Add to WorkSheet
button.

If the user selected more than 333 subjects, the system displays the following message
(where AAA represents the first subject selected, and MMM represents the 333rd subject):

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 280

 You have selected too many subjects. Results for this search include only subjects AAA
through MMM.

Please note the following conditions:

• For each class for which the student can register, a checkbox is displayed in the Select
field. The student can register in the class by selecting the checkbox and then selecting
either the Register or the Add to Worksheet button.

• If the student has already registered in a class, the Select field is blank.
• For each class for which the student cannot register, one of the following codes is
displayed.

Code Description

NR Generally associated with registration restrictions on the course, which

(not allowed come from the following:
for registration) • Registration Dates fields on the Schedule Form (SSASECT)
• Start and End fields on the Course Registration Status Form
(SFARSTS) for traditional courses for that part of term or on the
Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) for open learning
courses associated with the WEBRSTSREG internal code on the
Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX)
• Enrollment Status Dates block of the Enrollment Status Control Form
(SFAESTS)
• Web Registration Dates block of the Term Control Form (SOATERM)

SR Generally associated with registration restrictions on the student and

(student term, which come from the following:
restriction) • Time tickets or third-party controls
• Student status
• Academic standing
• Holds
• Readmit term

C The class is closed.

(closed class)
Closed classes are displayed on this page only if your institution has
selected the Display Closed Section checkbox on the Web Display
Controls window of SOATERM.

The system determines whether a section is available for registration as follows.

• For open learning courses, the system checks the dates entered in the Registration
Dates fields on the Schedule Form (SSASECT). The system also checks for a section-
level registration status code on the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) that
has been defined as the WEBRSTSREG internal code on the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX).

• For traditional courses, the system checks the dates associated with the WEBRSTSREG
internal code on GTVSDAX in the Base Part of Term block of SOATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 281

 If the student cannot register for any displayed classes, the Register and Add to
Worksheet buttons are not displayed.

A re-admitted student cannot use this page to register for classes if the registration term is
earlier than the student’s re-admit term.

If you have set up alternate PIN processing, a user using Look Up Classes is prompted to
enter the alternate PIN once classes have been selected for registration. If alternate PINs
have been set up for multiple terms, the user is prompted for all alternate PINs at the
same time.

Actual, waitlist, and crosslisted enrollments can be displayed on this page. Use the
following internal codes for the WEBREG internal group on the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX) to specify which counts, if any, are to be displayed:

• DISPENROLL (Display Enrollment Counts)

• DISPWL (Display Wait List Counts)
• DISPXL (Display Cross List Counts)

Using Study Paths

When study paths are enabled and a date range has been used for the course search, the
Register button on this page is changed to read Submit. This indicates that the Select
Study Paths page (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) will be displayed before
registration occurs. When the Submit or Register button is pressed, the student’s
eligibility is checked, and the study path enrollment records (SFRENSP) and overall term
enrollment records (SFBETRM) are created, if they do not already exist.

When the Study Path Required checkbox is checked on SOATERM, study paths are
required during registration. You must select a study path to proceed, or an error is
displayed. If no valid study path exists for registration, you cannot register for courses in
that term. The CRNs will not be registered when the Submit button is pressed. When the
Study Path Required checkbox is unchecked on SOATERM, study paths are optional.
You can choose a study path value or select None from the Select a Study Path field.

Look up classes and search by date range

Do the following to look up classes and search by date range as a student:
1. Select Look Up Classes from the main menu.
The process takes you to the Select Term or Date Range page
(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).
2. Enter the term or from and to dates.
3. Click the Submit button.
This takes you to the Look Up Classes page (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) where you
can select a subject and perform a course search or an advanced search.
4. Perform a course search by selecting the Course Search button.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 282

 4.1. This takes you to the Look Up Classes - Courses Found page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).
You can view a list courses which have section information created for the term
or date range you requested.
4.2. Select the View Sections button for a course.
4.3. You are taken to the Look Up Classes Results page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).

or
5. Perform an advanced search by selecting the Advanced Search button.
5.1. This takes you to the Advanced Search page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced).
5.2. Enter the detailed search criteria.
The subject is required. You can select multiple subject using the Ctrl key.
5.3. Select the Section Search button.
5.4. You are taken to the Look Up Classes Results page
(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse).
6. Determine which courses you wish to register for.
Courses are sorted by term and subject. The Select checkbox is displayed next to
courses that are not restricted by course data or student registration restrictions. You
can choose one or more courses from multiple terms in which to register.
7. Check the Select checkbox for each CRN in which you wish to register, whether study
paths are in use or are not in use.
7.1. When study paths are not in use, click the Register button.
The Register button is displayed when Enable Study Paths is unchecked on
SOACTRL.
The process goes to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse), and the courses are recorded.
7.2. Use the Add or Drop Classes page to drop courses you selected from the
search results or to perform additional class searches.

or
7.3. When study paths are in use, click the Submit Changes button.
The Submit Changes button is displayed when Enable Study Paths is
checked on SOACTRL, and it takes the place of the Register button.
The process goes to the Select Study Paths page
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath) for study path selections.
7.4. Use the Select a Study Path field to choose a study path for each term in which
courses have been selected for registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 283

 If study paths are required for the term associated with the selected CRN, you
must choose a study path, or an error is displayed. If study paths are optional,
you can choose a study path value or choose None.
The page displays information below each term description that indicates
whether study paths are optional or required for each term.
7.5. After study paths have been selected, press the Register button to register for
the courses.
7.6. The process goes to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse), and the courses are recorded. You can
drop courses you selected from the search results or perform additional class
searches.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select If a checkbox is displayed, the student can select it to register in

the class.

If no value is displayed, the student is registered in the class.

If a code is displayed, the student cannot register in the class.

See the descriptions of the codes above.

Associated Term Term code and description. This field is displayed only if the user
searched for classes by a date range that spans multiple terms.

CRN CRN of the class, displayed as a hyperlink to the Class Schedule

Listing page (bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Subj Subject code description of the class.

Crse Course number of the class.

Sec Section number of the class.

Cmp Campus associated with the class.

Cred Credit hours associated with the class. If there are multiple credit
hours, the range is displayed.

Title Title associated with the course.

Days Day(s) on which the class is scheduled to meet. If the class is an

open learning class, TBA is displayed.

Time Beginning and end times of the class.

Cap Capacity (that is, maximum number of places) in the class.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 284

 Item Description/Source Information

Act Number of students currently registered in the class.

Rem Number of open seats remaining in the class.

WL Cap Waitlist capacity (that is, maximum number of waitlist places)

allotted for the class.

WL Act Number of students currently waitlisted for the class.

WL Rem Number of available waitlisted seats remaining for the class.

XL Cap Crosslist capacity (that is, maximum number of crosslist places)

allotted for the class.

XL Act Number of students currently crosslisted for the class.

XL Rem Number of available crosslisted seats remaining for the class.

Instructor Name of the instructor. This includes the last name prefix if it
exists.

Date Dates available for registration.

Location Location of the class. If the class is an open learning class, TBA is
displayed.

Attributes Course attributes.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Schedule Form For each class that you want to be available on the Web, select
(SSASECT) the Voice Response and Self-Service Availability checkbox.

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want the Cap, Act, and Rem fields to be displayed on this
(GTVSDAX) page, enter Y in the External Code field for the DISPENROLL
internal code.

If you want the WL Cap, WL Act, and WL Rem fields to be

displayed on this page, enter Y in the External Code field for the
DISPWL internal code.
If you want the XL Cap, XL Act, and XL Rem fields to be
displayed on this page, enter Y in the External Code field for the
DISPXLL internal code.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 285

 Item Description

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

If multiple terms are in effect for the search and a student selects a link, the system uses the last
term that is part of the date search as the term for the page to be displayed.

CRN If hyperlinked, goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

View Fee Assessment If only one term is in effect for the search, goes to the
Registration Fee Assessment page
(bwskffee.P_FeeAsses).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 286

 Button/Icon Action

Register Adds the class (unless there are registration restrictions) and
goes to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

When the pressed, the student’s eligibility is checked, and the

study path enrollment records (SFRENSP) and overall term
enrollment records (SFBETRM) are created, if they do not already
exist.

Submit Button appears in place of the Register button when study paths
are enabled and a date range has been used for the course
search.

The Select Study Paths page

(bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) will be displayed before
registration occurs.

When the pressed, the student’s eligibility is checked, and the

study path enrollment records (SFRENSP) and overall term
enrollment records (SFBETRM) are created, if they do not already
exist.

Add to WorkSheet Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page with the selected CRN(s)
displayed in the Add Classes Worksheet section.

New Search Goes to the Select Term or Date Range page

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Advanced Search (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse_Advanced)

This page is used to search for available classes. This page is accessed using the
Advanced Search button from the Look Up Classes page
(bwckgens.p_sel_term_date).

Searches for looking up classes can be performed by term or date range. The Subject
field will include only subjects for which classes exist for the term or selected date range
and that are Web-enabled on the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ). The
Advanced Search functionality allows classes to be searched if the registration status
codes are inactive, but searching by the part-of-term is not allowed. Look Up Classes can
be viewed outside of the Web registration dates (although no registration activity can be
performed).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 287

 The Select Study Paths pages (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) or
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath) are displayed from this page with a list of
study paths for all terms from which courses have been selected for registration.

When the Advanced Search page is used to search for a course by term, the student can
select a study path to apply to the courses that will be returned by the search. When this
page is used to search for courses using a date range that spans multiple terms, the
student can select CRNs for multiple terms and select a valid study path for each term.
This allows the student to choose different study paths for each term when multiple terms
are selected.

The Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP) is used to specify which values
for validation codes (except for subject validation codes) are to be made available on the
Web. Web availability for subject codes is defined on the Subject Code Validation Form
(STVSUBJ).

The Web Registration Dates block of SOATERM is used as an overall control in turning off
registration for periods of time for all types of courses.

After entering search criteria, the student can click on the Section Search button to
perform the search.

Info Text and Help Text

The following Info Text must be reviewed and updated as needed for your institution.

Info Text Update Information

bwskfcls.P_GetCrse You can update this text to:

Label: DEFAULT • Reflect that checkboxes are not displayed if the person is not
able to register
• Provide more specific instructions to your students.

bwskfcls.P_Crse You can update this text to provide more specific instructions for
Search_Advanced your students.

Label: DEFAULT
bwskfcls.P_Crse You can update this text to provide more specific instructions for
Search your students.
Label: HELP
bwskfcls.P_GetCrse You can update this text to:
Label: HELP • Reflect that checkboxes are not displayed if the person is not
able to register
• Provide more specific instructions to your students.

bwskfcls.P_Crse You can update this text to provide more specific instructions for
Search_Advanced your students.

Label: HELP

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 288

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Subject Course subjects from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Course Number CRN for which the user wants to view classes. The user can enter
up to five digits or use the wildcard character (%) (that is, a search
for 2% retrieves all CRNs beginning with 2).

Title Course name. The user can enter up to 30 characters or use the
wildcard character % (that is, a search for %introduction%
retrieves all courses with the word “introduction” in the title).

Schedule Type Schedule types from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Instructional Method Instructional methods (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Credit Range Range of credit hours for which the user wants to view classes.
(For example, this could be used if a student cannot take more
than a particular amount of credits.)

Campus Campuses from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Course Level Level of courses from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Part of Term Parts of term from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Duration Duration periods for open learning courses from which the user
can choose for display on the Web. The user can select multiple
values using the Shift key (to select consecutive values) and/or
Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive values).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 289

 Item Description/Source Information

Instructor Instructors from which the user can choose for display on the
Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to
select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

The last name prefix is displayed, if applicable.

Session Sessions from which the user can choose for display on the Web.
The user can select multiple values using the Shift key (to select
consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-consecutive
values).

Attribute Type Course attributes from which the user can choose for display on
the Web. The user can select multiple values using the Shift key
(to select consecutive values) and/or Ctrl key (to select non-
consecutive values).

Start Time Class start time the user wants to display on the Web for hours,
minutes, and AM/PM. To display all start times, the Hours and
Minutes fields must be set to 00.

End Time Class end time the user wants to display on the Web for hours,
minutes, and AM/PM. To display all end times, the Hours and
Minutes fields must be set to 00.

Days Class days the user wants to display on the Web. To display all
days, the checkboxes must all be cleared.

Setup Requirements
This page is controlled by the setup of your class schedule. See “Class Schedule” on
page 71, for more information.

To use study paths, use the setup requirements below.

Item Description/Source Information

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 290

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Section Search Goes to the Look Up Classes Results page

(bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) with the results of the search.

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the default
settings.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Change Class Options (bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt)

This page is used to change the following options for a course in which the student is
already registered:

• Credit hours
• Grade mode
• Course level

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 291

 • Study path
These options can be changed only if the class has be set up with multiple values, and
only those options that have been set up with multiple values can be changed. No values
can be modified once the final grade has been rolled to Academic History.

If the Voice Response and Self-Service Availability checkbox is cleared on the

Schedule Form (SSASECT) for a class, the class’s options cannot be changed unless you
have entered Y in the External Code field for the CRNDIRECT internal code on the
Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX).

If no class in which the student is registered has changeable options, the message No
class change available is displayed. If any one class in which the student is registered has
changeable options, all classes for the term are displayed.

If your institution has set up immediate registration fee assessment, then a registration
change or request to view fee assessment for any courses that have cleared the
registration restrictions check will cause fee assessment to run. Transactions for the new
assessment are written to the TBRACCD table for the student at that time.

The Study Path field allows the student to change the study path to which the course is
assigned. This field is displayed in each section of information such as Instructional
Methods and so on. You can select values from the pulldown list when multiple study
paths exist that are eligible for the term.

• When the Change Study Path checkbox on SOATERM is checked, users are allowed
to change the study path on this page.

• When the Change Study Path checkbox on SOATERM is not checked, the study path
that was selected at the time of registration is displayed, but it cannot be changed.

• When the Enable Study Paths checkbox is unchecked on SOACTRL, this field is not
displayed.

Registration Restrictions
The same registration restrictions that exist in the Add or Drop Class and Look-Up Class
pages exist on this page, except for the Registration Status date.

Note: If a student changes the credit hours for a variable credit hour
course, the billing hours will also be changed to that same value, if
available. Otherwise the billing hours will remain the same.

For example:

Course Credit Hour Range Billing Hour Range

ANTH 250 3 to 5 3 to 5

ARTS 420 2 to 4 3 to 6

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 292

 If a student registered for ANTH 250 for 4 credit hours and 4 billing hours, and then
changed the credit hours to 3, the billing hours would also be adjusted to 3.
If, however, a student registered for ARTS 420 for 4 credit hours and 6 billing hours,
and changed the credit hours to 2, the billing hours would remain at 6 because 2 is not
a valid value for billing hours.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Title associated with the course.

Course CRN, subject code, course number, and section, concatenated.

Credit Hours If a class has multiple credit hours, a field for this option is
displayed. The range of credit hours is displayed next to the field
name.

Grade Mode If a class has multiple grade modes, a pulldown list for this option
is displayed.

Course Level If a class has multiple course levels, a pulldown list for this option
is displayed.

Study Path If a class has multiple study paths, a pulldown list for this option is
displayed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want to enable credit hour changes on the Web, select the
(SOATERM) Change Credit Hours checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

If you want to enable grade mode changes on the Web, select the
Change Grade Mode checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

If you want to enable course level changes on the Web, select the
Change Level checkbox on the Web Processing Controls
window.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 293

 Item Description

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

All Changes update the registration in the section, as reflected on the

Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS) and a number of
other forms in the system.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Previous Returns to the previous page the user was viewing.

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Changes Redisplays the Change Course Options page with changes or
error messages (for example, Maximum Hours
Exceeded).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 294

 Button/Icon Action

Reset Deletes the choices the user has made and returns to the
default settings.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Week at a Glance (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd)

This page displays a student's schedule for the selected term in a matrix format. The page
displays a week’s actual schedule based on the Additional Registration record
(SFRAREG) that is created at the point of registration. (That is, the page dynamically
displays the schedule for the selected week, including open learning classes that are not
scheduled “in parallel” with traditional classes.)

The display of registered courses on this page is controlled by the Print On Schedule
checkbox on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS). Only
courses with statuses for which the Print On Schedule checkbox selected are included
when the schedule is displayed. It is recommended that statuses for dropped courses
should not have the Print On Schedule checkbox selected, as listing dropped courses on
the schedule may cause confusion.

All classes for which a student is registered are displayed for terms for which the Master
Web Term Control checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) has been selected.
Therefore, it is not necessary to select a term before accessing this page.

Determining the Week for which a Registration Record should be

Slotted
The date range defined in the most current record in the Additional Registration
Information table (SFRAREG_START_DATE and SFRAREG_COMPLETION_DATE)
determines the week for which a registration should be slotted.

• For open learning registration records, this date range reflects the start and expected
completion date defined by the student at the time they registered.

• For non-opening learning registration records, these dates reflect the from and to
information specified for the part of term specified for the section at the time of
registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 295

 The Week at a Glance page also takes into consideration any extensions that are “active”
for the course. The dates are respective of the extension only when the extension is
active.

Courses without Assigned Meeting Times

Under this heading, all registrations for sections with no SSRMEET records are displayed.

The schedule type is displayed to the right of the course information as a partial
explanation as to why the class is listed under this heading.

Courses with Time Conflicts

The schedule cannot display multiple records, so courses that are displayed under this
heading are those for which meeting times overlap.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Go to Allows the user to specify a date to which he or she wishes to

navigate. When the new week is displayed, the “Week of”
heading changes to represent the Monday of the corresponding
week for the date requested. For example, if May 4, 2009 is
selected, the heading says, “Week of May 04, 2009.

The numbers displayed in parentheses after the “Week of”

heading represent which week is being viewed within the date
range of all classes displayed.

If a user enters a date past the last date for which there is
information, the system displays the last existing week. For
example, if there are 30 weeks from January to August 2009, and
a user enters September 30, 2009, the system displays the week
including August 31. Likewise, if the user enters a date that falls
before the first week, the first week is displayed.

Schedule information Subject code, CRN, meeting type, meeting time, and class
location, concatenated and displayed as a hyperlink to the
Student Detail Schedule page
(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 296

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Previous Week Goes to the previous week (from Monday to Sunday).

Next Week Goes to the next week (from Monday to Sunday).

Course details Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

This is the case for all courses that are displayed as hyperlinks.

Active Registration Goes to the Active Registrations page

(bwsksreg.p_active_regs).

Registration History Goes to the Registration History page

(bwskhreg.p_reg_hist).

Look Up Classes Goes to the Select Term or Date Range

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Add or Drop Classes Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Student Detail Schedule (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl)

This page displays the details of all sections in which a student is currently enrolled for the
selected term.

The display of registered courses on this page is controlled by the Print On Schedule
checkbox on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS). Only

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 297

 courses with statuses for which the Print On Schedule checkbox selected are included
when the schedule is displayed. It is recommended that statuses for dropped courses
should not have the Print On Schedule checkbox selected, as listing dropped courses on
the schedule may cause confusion.

If the user has not selected a term during the current Web session and selects Student
Detail Schedule from the Registration Menu, the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) is displayed first. If a term has been selected, that term
is used, and the Student Detail Schedule page is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Title associated with the course.

Associated Term Registration term attached to the selected CRN.

CRN Course reference number.

Status Registration status and date of the activity.

Waitlist Position Number indicating the student’s position in the waitlist. If the
student was waitlisted and has been notified that he or she now
has a place in the class, the value displayed is 0.

Notification Expires Date and time by which the student must enroll in the CRN. A
value is displayed after a place has opened in a previously full
CRN and the waitlisted student has been notified that he or she
can now enroll.

If the student does not enroll before the expiration date and time,
the registration is cancelled.

Assigned Instructor Name of the instructor(s) assigned to the class. This includes the
last name prefix if it exists.

Grade Mode Grade mode for which the student is registered for the class. If
multiple grade modes are available for the class, the system
displays the level as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options
page (bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt), where the student
can change the level if desired.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class. If
multiple credit-hour options are available for the class, the system
displays the credit-hours value as a hyperlink to the Change
Class Options page.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class. If multiple
course levels are available for the class, the system displays the
level as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 298

 Item Description/Source Information

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Course URL URL defined for this class in the URL field of the Section Syllabus
Form (SSASYLB) is displayed as a hyperlink. If no URL has been
defined for this class, the Course URL field is not displayed.

The following fields are displayed in the Scheduled Meeting Times area, which is included only
for open learning course registrations.

Type Class’s meeting type, such as Class or Chat.

Time Class’s meeting times.

Days Day(s) the class meets.

Where Location where the class meets.

Date Range Beginning and ending dates of the class. The dates are
calculated based on the start or end date that the student
specified when registering for the class.

Schedule Type Schedule type associated with the course.

Instructors Instructor name assigned to the student at the time the

registration was processed.

If the instructor has entered office hours via Faculty and Advisor
Self-Service, the name is displayed as a hyperlink to the Office
Hours page (bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours).

An e-mail icon (web_email.gif) is displayed to the right of the

instructor's name, providing students with a means to e-mail the
instructor. The e-mail address of the instructor is retrieved based
on the e-mail type that is marked as preferred, active, and
available for Web display on the E-mail Address Form
(GOAEMAL) for that instructor.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Automated Waitlist Term If your institution is using waitlist automation, the Show waitlist
Control Form (SOAWLTC) position on Student Self-Service checkbox must be checked.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 299

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Level If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Cred If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page.

Grade Mode If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page.

Associated Instructor If hyperlinked, goes to the Office Hours page

(bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours).

E-mail icon If the e-mail icon is displayed, launches the user’s e-mail program
with the instructor’s e-mail address.

Return to Previous The previous page being viewed by the user.

Show Active Registrations Goes to the Active Registrations page

(bwsksreg.p_active_regs)

Show Registration History Goes to the Registration History page

(bwskhreg.p_reg_hist).

Add or Drop Classes Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Look Up Classes Goes to the Select Term or Date Range page

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 300

 Registration Fee Assessment (bwskffee.P_FeeAsses)
This page calculates and displays a student’s registration fee assessment for the selected
term, if online fee assessment is allowed at the time that the student accesses the page.

The Registration Fee Assessment page calculates the student’s tuition and fee charges
associated with the term selected and displays the charges in summary fashion.

If the Online checkbox in the Fee Assessment section of the Term Control Form
(SOATERM) is cleared, then no fee assessment is available on the Web and the message
Fee assessment calculations are not being performed at this time is displayed.

If fee assessment is allowed at the current time for the selected term, and fee assessment
rules have been defined on the Registration Fees Process Control Form (SFARGFE), fee
assessment is performed only when the student selects the Registration Fee
Assessment link.

If fee assessment is allowed at the current time for the selected term, but no fee
assessment rules, as defined on SFARGFE, apply to the student, the message You are
currently enrolled. However no registration related fees are due is displayed.

If the Online checkbox in the Fee Assessment section of SOATERM is selected, and
Online radio button in the Web Self-Service and Voice Response section of SOATERM is
selected, student registration fees are assessed as soon as registration entries have been
completed or changes have been made on the Web.

You can choose to have detail codes, in addition to the detail code descriptions, included
on this page.

The Registration Fee Assessment page displays only those charges associated with
tuition and fees for the selected term. All other account detail is displayed on the Account
Summary page (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal) or Account Summary by Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Total Credit Hours Number of credit hours for which the student is registered for the
selected term.

Detail Code Detail code of the assessed fee.

Description Description of the assessed fee.

Amount Monetary amount of the assessed fee.

Total Charge Total monetary amount due.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 301

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want fee assessments to be displayed on the Web, select
(SOATERM) the Online checkbox in the Fee Assessment section.

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want detail codes to be displayed, enter Y in the External
(GTVSDAX) Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code.

See “Set Up Immediate Registration Fee Assessment” on page 338 for more information
about immediate fee assessment.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Credit Card Payment Goes to the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Use the Submit button on the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected) to access the
external vendor payment page for payment by credit card.

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Account Summary by Goes to the Account Summary by Term page

Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 302

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Tuition and Fees Payment

(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected)
This page allows a student to make a payment card payment via Student Self-Service. It
cannot be accessed from a menu. It can only be accessed from pages where Self-Service
has been set up to accept payment card payments for registration fees and student
accounts. The transaction is then submitted to an external vendor for payment and
payment card processing through the Web Services payment processor connection.

If an approval is received for the transaction, an account detail (TBRACCD) record is

written for the student, and the transaction is recorded as part of an open cashiering
session for the user ID of the Web session. Settlement with external payment vendors is
accomplished using the Web Services payment processor connection. Your institution
closes and balances cashiering session(s) that contain payment card payments using
normal institutional procedures. Payment card transactions are authorized, settled, and
inserted into Banner.

The payment card payment information is transmitted to the selected external payment
vendor, and the user receives either an approval or denial message for the transaction. If
a denial is received, a denial message is returned to the student. If an approval is
received, an approval message is returned and a payment transaction is written to the
student’s account. Denial and approval messages are maintained by the payment vendor.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Payment Amount Amount being paid by payment card.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 303

 Item Description

Credit Card Merchant ID Define the payment card types that you want to be displayed on
Form (GOAMERC) the Web. The system code, the process code, and the merchant
ID determine the payment card types that will be displayed to the
user.

All other payment card processing set up must be completed as

well. See the Payment Processor Connection Handbook for more
information.

Process Name Validation Check that appropriate process name codes and external
Form (GTVPROC) merchant ID numbers have been set up on GTVPROC.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Payment Detail If the payment card payment request is approved, a detail

transaction is written to the Account Charge Payment Detail
Table (TBRACCD).

The values in the following table will be used when the account detail record is written.

Column Description

TBRACCD_PIDM PIDM from Web session

TBRACCD_TRAN_NUMBER Generate oneup number from PIDM’s account

TBRACCD_TERM_CODE Default Term Code for Detail Code

(TBBDETC_TERM_CODE) to be used when no term
has been selected

TBRACCD_DETAIL_CODE Detail Code for credit card type from TTVCCRD

TBRACCD_USER Web UserID

TBRACCD_ENTRY_DATE Sysdate

TBRACCD_AMOUNT Payment amount requested

TBRACCD_BALANCE Because this is a payment, negative value of amount

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 304

 Column Description

TBRACCD_EFFECTIVE_DATE Sysdate

TBRACCD_BILL_DATE Null

TBRACCD_DUE_DATE Null

TBRACCD_DESC Detail code description from TBBDETC

TBRACCD_RECEIPT_NUMBER Receipt number

TBRACCD_TRAN_NUMBER_PAID Null

TBRACCD_CROSSREF_PIDM Null

TBRACCD_CROSSREF_NUMBER Null

TBRACCD_CROSSREF_DETAIL_ Null
CODE
TBRACCD_SRCE_CODE Source Code from GTVSDAX

TBRACCD_ACCT_FEED_IND Y

TBRACCD_ACTIVITY_DATE Sysdate

TBRACCD_SESSION_NUMBER Zero (This emulates an open session.)

TBRACCD_CSHR_END_DATE Null (This emulates an open session.)

TBRACCD_CRN Null

TBRACCD_CROSSREF_SRCE_ Null
CODE
TBRACCD_LOC_MDT Null

TBRACCD_LOC_MDT_SEQ Null

TBRACCD_RATE Null

TBRACCD_UNITS Null

TBRACCD_DOCUMENT_NUMBER Null

TBRACCD_TRANS_DATE Sysdate

TBRACCD_INVOICE_NUMBER Null

TBRACCD_STATEMENT_DATE Null

TBRACCD_INV_NUMBER_PAID Null

TBRACCD_CURR_CODE Null

TBRACCD_EXCHANGE_DIFF Null

TBRACCD_FOREIGN_AMOUNT Null

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 305

 Column Description

TBRACCD_LATE_DCAT_CODE Null

TBRACCD_FEED_DATE Null

TBRACCD_FEED_DOC_CODE Null

TBRACCD_ATYP_CODE Null

TBRACCD_ATYP_SEQNO Null

TBRACCD_CROSSREF_DCAT_ Null
CODE
TBRACCD_ORIG_CHG_IND Null

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other Web pages.

Buttons/icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the external vendor payment page.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Withdrawal Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw)

This page displays withdrawal information if the student has withdrawn from your
institution for the selected term. Although this page is part of the Financial Aid module, it
can be accessed only from the Registration menu, so it is covered in this chapter.

If there is no withdrawal information for the student for the selected term, the message
You are not being processed for withdrawal for the selected term is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 306

 Item Description/Source Information

Fields are displayed on this page only if the student has withdrawn from your institution in the
selected term.

Withdrawal Reason Reason the student withdrew from your institution.

Enrollment Start Date Start date of the enrollment period.

Enrollment End Date End date of the enrollment period.

Effective Withdrawal Date Date the student’s withdrawal took effect.

Percent Attended Percentage of the enrollment period that the student was
enrolled.

The following fields are included in the Title IV Aid to be Returned section, which is not
displayed if no refund calculation has been performed.

Amount of Title IV Aid Amount of Title IV aid that has already been disbursed to the
Disbursed student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the Title IV
Fund Detail page (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).

Amount of Title IV Aid Amount of Title IV aid that has not yet been disbursed to the
Eligible to be Disbursed student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the Title IV
Fund Detail page.

Unearned Title IV Aid Amount of Title IV aid that has been paid to the student’s account
Disbursed and for which the student is no longer eligible.

Title IV Aid to be Returned Amount of Title IV aid that has been disbursed to the student and
that must be returned due to withdrawal.

Institution’s Required Amount of Title IV aid that your institution is required to return.
Return Amount

Student’s Required Return Amount of Title IV aid that the student is required to return.
Amount

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 307

 Item Description

Web Tailor Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students:
• DEFAULT, Sequence 1

The DEFAULT Information Text is displayed at the top of the

Withdrawal Information page.
• NOT_WITHDRAWN, Sequence 1

The NOT_WITHDRAWN Information Text is displayed after the

DEFAULT Information Text when a person has no withdrawal
records (SFRWDRL) for the selected term. It tells the student
that he or she is not being processed as a withdrawn student for
the term.
• NOTIFICATION, Sequence 1

The NOTIFICATION Information Text is displayed at the end

of the Withdrawal Information section and before the Title IV Aid
to be Returned section. It tells the student that he or she is not
being processed as a withdrawn student for the selected term.
Use the Web Tailor Information Text option to update the text, if
desired.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Amount of Title IV Aid If the Title IV Aid to be Returned section is displayed, goes to the
Disbursed Title IV Fund Detail page (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).

Amount of Title IV Aid If the Title IV Aid to be Returned section is displayed, goes to the
Eligible to be Disbursed Title IV Fund Detail page (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).

Select Another Term Goes to the Registration Term page

(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 308

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Title IV Fund Detail (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail)

This page displays information about each Title IV fund the student was eligible to receive
for the selected term. Although this page is part of the Financial Aid module, it can be
accessed only from the Withdrawal Information page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw), so it is covered in this chapter.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Fund Description Description of the fund.

Disbursed Amount Amount of Title IV aid that has already been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the Title IV
Fund Detail page (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).

Eligible to be Disbursed Amount of Title IV aid that has not yet been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the Title IV
Fund Detail page.

Unearned Title IV Aid Amount of Title IV aid that has been paid to the student’s account
Disbursed and for which the student is no longer eligible.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 309

 Item Description

Web Tailor Review the text for the following item for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students:

NOTE, Sequence 1

The NOTE Information Text is displayed after the Title IV Fund

Detail section of the page. It can be used to provide information
that clarifies the contents of the Title IV Fund detail information.
As delivered, it states that the Federal Work Study totals
displayed indicate eligibility rather than the amount actually
earned.

Use the Web Tailor Information Text option to update the text, if
desired.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Return to Withdrawal Goes to the Withdrawal Information page

Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 310

 Registration Status (bwskrsta.P_RegsStatusDisp)
The Registration Status page displays information about items that affect a student's
ability to register. It reports time-ticket assignments or time control messages, holds,
academic standing, student status, calculated student classification, current level, current
college, current major, current degree, and current campus. In addition, it displays a
summary of any hours already earned. Unless otherwise indicated below, information is
taken from the student record currently in effect for the selected term. Curriculum data
elements are displayed for the current and active primary curriculum as well as for any
current and active secondary curricula in effect for the term selected.

An error is displayed if registration is prevented due to study path status, academic

standing status, or combined academic standing and progress evaluation status. When
registration is prevented due to the student's overall academic standing codes, general
student status, or override standing, any study path statuses that prevent registration are
not displayed. It is assumed that no study path can used during registration when the
student's overall standing or status prevents registration.

If the user has not selected a term during the current Web session and selects the
Registration Status link from the Registration Menu, the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) is displayed first. If a term has been selected, that term
is used, and the Registration Status page is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Registration Time Ticket Time period(s) during which the student can register. If no time
ticket has been assigned, the message You have no Registration
Time Ticket. You may register at any time is displayed.

Time Controls Time control message.

Holds Any registration holds for the student.

Academic Standing Notice indicating whether the student’s academic standing affects
his or her ability to register for the selected term.

Student Status Notice indicating whether the student’s status affects his or her
ability to register for the selected term.

Class Student’s classification (for example, Freshman, Year 3, and

so on).

The following fields are displayed in the Earned Credit section.

Level Student’s level.

Type Type of earned credits, such as institutional or transfer.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 311

 Item Description/Source Information

Hours Number of hours earned at each level for which the student has
earned hours in Academic History.

The following fields are displayed in the Curriculum Information section.

(Primary) Current Program Name of the student’s current active primary learner curriculum.

(Primary) Study Path Study path associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Level Student level associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Admit Term Admit term associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Admit Type Admit type associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Catalog Term Catalog term associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary learner curriculum. If no department is associated
with the current active primary learner curriculum, the field label
says only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple other fields of study.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 312

 Item Description/Source Information

Secondary Name of the student’s current active secondary curriculum. If the

student has multiple current active secondary curricula, the set of
fields will be displayed multiple times.

(Secondary) Study Path Study path associated with the current active secondary learner
curriculum.

(Secondary) Level Student level associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary curriculum.

(Secondary) Admit Term Admit term associated with the current active secondary learner
curriculum.

(Secondary) Admit Type Admit type associated with the current active secondary learner
curriculum.

(Secondary) Catalog Term Catalog term associated with the current active secondary learner
curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary learner curriculum. If no department is
associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum,
the field label will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple majors.

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner

Concentration curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Setup requirements
This page has no overall setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 313

 To use study paths, do the following setup.

Item Description

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Degree Goes to the General Student Record page

(bwskgstu.P_StuInfo).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Add or Drop Classes Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 314

 Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Active Registrations (bwsksreg.p_active_regs)

This page displays all the user’s classes that are considered active (that is, that have not
been graded and rolled to Academic History). Since there is no term requirement,
registration information displayed may cross various terms. Therefore, the information is
presented by course within term.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated and
displayed as a hyperlink to the Class Schedule Listing page
(bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Associated Term Term associated with the class.

CRN CRN of the class, displayed as a hyperlink to the Student Detail

Schedule page (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Status Status of the registration and the date of the status, concatenated.

Schedule Type Schedule types associated with the class.

Instructional Method Instructional method (for example, Traditional, Web-

Based, etc.) associated with the class.
Campus Campus associated with the class.

Class Start Date Date the student has elected to start the class (for open learning
classes only).

Expected Completion Date on which the student is expected to complete the class (for
open learning classes only).

Credits Credit hours that the student elected for this class. If a range of
credit hours has been defined for the class, the value is displayed
as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options page
(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 315

 Item Description/Source Information

Grade Mode The grade mode the student has elected for the class. If multiple
grade modes have been defined for the class, the value is
displayed as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options page.

Course Level Level at which the student has registered for this class. If multiple
levels have been defined for the class, the value is displayed as a
hyperlink to the Change Class Options page.

Midterm Grade Midterm grade assigned to the student for the class.

Grade Detail If grade detail has been defined for the registration, the word
Available is displayed as a hyperlink to the Component Grade
Detail page (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Associated Instructor Instructor assigned to teach the class. This includes the last name
prefix if it exists.

An e-mail icon (web_email.gif) is displayed to the right of the

instructor's name, providing students with a means to e-mail the
primary instructor. The e-mail address of the primary instructor is
retrieved based on the e-mail type that is marked as preferred,
active, and available for Web display on the E-mail Address Form
(GOAEMAL) for that instructor.

If office hours exist for this section the associated instructor’s

name is displayed as a hyperlink to the Office Hours page
(bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours).

Course URL URL for the class, displayed as a link to the course Web page.

Setup requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Web Processing Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want grade detail displayed on the Web, select the Display
Grade Detail checkbox.

If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
Web, select the Display Midterm Grades checkbox.

Web Display Controls window:

If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 316

 Item Description

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display
From (SSAWSEC) Midterm Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting
in SOATERM.

Grade Component Define grade detail for the class if your institution wants the word
Definition Form Available to be displayed.
(SHAGCOM)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Course title Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

CRN Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Credits If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Grade Mode If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Course Level If hyperlinked, goes to the Change Class Options page

(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Grade Detail If the word Available displayed, goes to the Component

Grade Detail page (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Instructor’s name If hyperlinked, goes to the Office Hours page

(bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours).

E-mail icon If the e-mail icon is displayed, launches the user’s e-mail program
with the instructor’s e-mail address.

Course URL Goes to the displayed URL.

Registration History Goes to the Registration History page

(bwskhreg.p_reg_hist).

Week at a Glance Goes to the Week at a Glance page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchd).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 317

 Link Action

Look Up Classes Goes to the Select Term or Date Range page

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Add or Drop Classes Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Account Summary Goes to the Account Summary page

(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Registration History (bwskhreg.p_reg_hist)

This page displays all the student’s registration activity, regardless of status or term. Since
there is no term requirement, registration information displayed may cross various terms.
Therefore, the information is presented by course within term. The term is displayed
above the group of CRNs with which it is associated.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

CRN CRN of the class displayed as a hyperlink to the Student Detail

Schedule page (bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 318

 Item Description/Source Information

Course Subject code and course number, concatenated and displayed as

a hyperlink to the Class Schedule Listing page
(bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Course title Course title, displayed as a hyperlink to the Class Schedule

Listing page (bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Credits Credit hours that the student elected for this class. If a range of
credit hours has been defined for the class, the value is displayed
as a hyperlink to the Change Class Options page
(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

Level Level at which the student has registered for this class. If multiple
levels have been defined for the class, the value is displayed as a
hyperlink to the Change Class Options page.

Status Status of the registration and the date of the status,

concatenated.

Midterm Grade Midterm grade assigned to the student for the class.

Final Grade Final grade assigned to the student for the class.

Study Path Study Path for the CRN in registration history.

When the Enable Study Paths checkbox is unchecked on

SOACTRL, this field is not displayed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Web Processing Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
Web, select the Display Midterm Grades checkbox.

If you want final grades for the whole term displayed on the Web,
select the Display Final Grades checkbox.

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 319

 Item Description

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display
From (SSAWSEC) Midterm Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting
in SOATERM.

For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display Final

Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting in
SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

CRN Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Course Goes to the Class Schedule Listing page

(bwckschd.p_disp_listcrse).

Active Registration Goes to the Active Registrations page

(bwsksreg.p_active_regs).

Grade Detail Goes to the Grade Detail Term page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_term_selection).

Look Up Classes Goes to the Select Term or Date Range page

(bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search).

Add or Drop Classes Goes to the Add or Drop Classes page

(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Account Summary Goes to the Account Summary page

(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 320

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Office Hours (bwskoffh.p_display_office_hours)

This page displays the contact information and availability of an individual instructor for a
CRN.

If the faculty member has not selected the Display checkbox for the office hours for this
term or section when entering information on the faculty Office Hours page
(bwlkoffh.P_Fac_Office_Hours), no information is displayed. This is the case
even if the current date is not within the effective date range on the Office Hour record.
The Office Hours link is displayed on the Active Registrations page
(bwsksreg.p_active_regs) page.

This page is accessed when a user selects the instructor’s name, if it is displayed as a
hyperlink, on appropriate pages.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Course title Subject code, course number, and course title, concatenated.

CRN Course reference number of the class.

Type Meeting types associated with the class.

Time Beginning and ending times of the class.

Days Days of the week on which the class meets.

Where Place where the class meets.

Date Range Beginning and ending dates of the class.

Schedule Type Schedule types associated with the class.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 321

 Item Description/Source Information

Instructor Instructor assigned to teach the class.

An e-mail icon (web_email.gif) is displayed to the right of the

instructor's name, providing students with a means to e-mail the
primary instructor. The e-mail address of the primary instructor is
retrieved based on the e-mail type that is marked as preferred,
active, and available for Web display on the E-mail Address Form
(GOAEMAL) for that instructor.

The last name prefix is displayed, if applicable.

Office Hours Instructor’s office hours for the class.

Contact Number Instructor’s phone number, including country code, area code,
phone number, and extension.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Web Display Controls window:

(SOATERM)
If you want to allow the search and display of long section titles,
select the Display Long Section Title checkbox.

Faculty Office Hours page The faculty member must define his or her office hours on the
Office Hours page (bwlkoffh.P_Fac_Office_Hours).

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

E-mail icon If the e-mail icon is displayed, launches the user’s e-mail program
with the instructor’s e-mail address.

Return to Previous Goes to the previous page being viewed by the user.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 322

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Concise Student Schedule (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdDetl)

This page displays the details of all sections in which a student is currently enrolled for the
selected term.

The display of registered courses on this page is controlled by the Print On Schedule
checkbox on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS). Only
courses with statuses for which the Print On Schedule checkbox selected are included
when the schedule is displayed. It is recommended that statuses for dropped courses
should not have the Print On Schedule checkbox selected, as listing dropped courses on
the schedule may cause confusion.

If the user has not selected a term during the current Web session and selects Concise
Student Schedule from the Registration Menu, the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) is displayed first. If a term has been selected, that term
is used, and the Concise Student Schedule page is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Name Student’s name.

Classification Student’s classification (for example, Freshman, Year 3, and

so on).

Level Student’s level.

College Name of the college associated with the student.

Major and Department Major and department associated with the primary curriculum.

Concentration Concentration associated with the primary curriculum.

Minor Minor associated with the primary curriculum.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 323

 Item Description/Source Information

Address Line 1 Student’s street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

CRN Course reference number.

Course Subject code and course number, concatenated.

Title Base course title.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Start Date First date on which the class meets for traditional classes or date
selected as the start date for open learning classes.

End Date Last date on which the class meets for traditional classes or date
selected as the end date for open learning classes.

Days Day(s) the class meets.

Time Class’s meeting times.

Location Location or room assignment where the class meets.

Instructor Name of the instructor. This includes the last name prefix if it
exists. If the primary instructor is associated with the session, this
is the primary instructor’s name; if not, this is the most recent
instructor added to the session.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 324

 Link Action

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Concise Student Schedule by Centric Period

(bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdScp)
This page displays the details of all sections in which a student is currently enrolled for the
selected term by student centric period. You must select a term from the Registration
Term page (bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) before you can view the Concise Student
Schedule by Centric Period page (bwskcrse.P_CrseSchdScp) from the Registration
Menu.

The process checks the general student record for the term and retrieves the cycle
designator if it exists. Then the process determines student centric period and selects the
coursework for all the associated terms. Courses are sorted by most recent term, subject,
course number, and section. If no cycle designator exists for the effective term on the
general student record, a message is displayed when the page is accessed.

The display of registered courses on this page is controlled by the Print On Schedule
checkbox on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS). Only
courses with statuses for which the Print On Schedule checkbox selected are included
when the schedule is displayed. It is recommended that statuses for dropped courses
should not have the Print On Schedule checkbox selected, as listing dropped courses on
the schedule may cause confusion.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 325

 Item Description/Source Information

Name Student’s name.

Classification Student’s classification (for example, Freshman, Year 3, and

so on).

Level Student’s level.

College Name of the college associated with the student.

Major and Department Major and department associated with the primary curriculum.

Concentration Concentration associated with the primary curriculum.

Minor Minor associated with the primary curriculum.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Address Line 1 Student’s street address (no validation).

Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4

CRN Course reference number.

Course Subject code and course number, concatenated.

Title Base course title.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Start Date First date on which the class meets for traditional classes or date
selected as the start date for open learning classes.

End Date Last date on which the class meets for traditional classes or date
selected as the end date for open learning classes.

Days Day(s) the class meets.

Time Class’s meeting times.

Location Location or room assignment where the class meets.

Instructor Name of the instructor. This includes the last name prefix if it
exists. If the primary instructor is associated with the session, this
is the primary instructor’s name; if not, this is the most recent
instructor added to the session.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 326

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form Set the PROCESSSCP rule to Y to use student centric
(GTVSDAX) - for student processing.
centric periods
Set the AUTOASSIGN rule to Y to automatically assign the
cycle designator during admissions based on the data on
SOASCPT, when a student is admitted and the initial general
learner record is created.

Set the AUTOUPDATE rule to Y to validate the cycle designator

for the student’s first enrollment record at registration.

When the first enrollment term has a different cycle designator

than the one assigned during admissions, a new general
student record is created. When this rule is N, the cycle
designator is not automatically updated when a student enrolls
for the first term. The cycle designator assigned during
admissions is not valid.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Student Detail Schedule Goes to the Student Detail Schedule page

(bwskfshd.P_CrseSchdDetl).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 327

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
The following menus have a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Registration Menu bmenu.P_RegMnu

Registration Processing Tables

The following temporary tables are used with registration.

Registration Temporary Table (SFTREGS)

The Registration Temporary table (SFTREGS) is used extensively throughout the
Registration module. Whenever a student registration is processed via Banner (using the
Student Course Registration Form [SFAREGS]), the Web, or Voice Recognition (VR), the
system takes the following actions.

• The records from the SFRSTCR table are copied to the SFTREGS table.
• All add and drop requests are processed on SFTREGS.
• Any errors are handled.
• A record is created in the SFRRACL table.
• When the user saves the changes, the SFTREGS records are copied to SFRSTCR.
If desired, you can periodically purge SFTREGS of old records. For more a complete
discussion, see the "Registration" chapter in the Banner Student User Guide.

Additional Registration Information Table (SFRAREG)

This table stores the selected/derived start and expected completion dates for open
learning courses or the part of term start/end dates of the section in which the student
registered.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 328

 Set Up Basic Registration on the Web
This section covers how to set up basic registration on the Web. First, a summary of the
steps is provided in “Setup Summary” on page 330, and then the detailed steps are
provided in “Setup Steps” on page 331. These implementation steps do not include other
baseline setup requirements for registration processing in Banner, such as establishing
fee assessment rules and registration status rules for students and courses, and so forth.
Refer to the Banner Student User Guide for more information about baseline setup.

Note: Before you begin, make sure you have activated any appropriate
Web display indicators in Banner as explained in “Supporting Validation
Forms” on page 329.

You can also set up the following registration options.

• If you are setting up the display of term date ranges for term fields, see “Display Term
Date Ranges” on page 335.

• If you are setting up study paths, see “Set Up and Use Study Paths” on page 336.
• If you are setting up immediate registration fee assessment, see “Set Up Immediate
Registration Fee Assessment” on page 338.

• If you are setting up priority time-ticketing, see “Set Up Registration Time-Ticketing” on

page 339.

• If you are setting up third-party controls, which you can use instead of time-ticketing, see
“Set Up Third-Party Controls” on page 346.

• If you are setting up alternate PIN processing, see “Set Up Alternate PIN Processing” on
page 347.

• If you are setting up registration permit overrides, see “Set Up Registration Permit-
Overrides” on page 349.

Supporting Validation Forms

A number of validation forms include Web display indicators. These indicators control
whether a specific value in the validation form will display and be available for selection via
the Web. In most cases, the Web Indicator must be checked (set to Y) for a value to be
available on the Web.

In addition to setting the Web indicators correctly, you should also review the description
of each value flagged for Web display. The description of a value will display on the Web
when an item is Web-enabled.

The following validation forms include Web display indicators which control Registration
processing via the Web.

• Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ)

• Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 329

 Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ)
Indicated values will display in the list of subjects available to search when the Look Up
Classes to Add page is selected. The output of the Catalog and Schedule reports for
display on the corresponding Web pages also is restricted to the Web-enabled subject
codes. Please note that a student will not be prevented from registering for a specific
section by entering the CRN directly, even if the subject code for that section is not Web-
enabled.

Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS)

Values which are Web-enabled will be used either in the Add/Drop process or as
additional options which a student can select, such as audit or waitlist.

At least two values, one which will be used when courses are added via the Web and one
which will be used when courses are dropped via the Web, must be Web-enabled. The
specific values you use for these two actions will be controlled by entries in the Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX). You can use the traditional RE (Registered) and DD
(Drop/Delete) values for these entries, or you can define additional values for Web
Registered and Web Dropped. If you define additional values for the codes used for these
purposes, you must set all the indicators for each value to correspond with the indicators
set for RE and DD.

Warning! Careful consideration should be given to which codes are Web-

enabled. For example, if students should only be permitted to add
courses on the Web, no drop status codes should be Web-enabled. Also,
a waitlist course status should be Web-enabled only if students should be
permitted to select a waitlist status for a course if a section is closed and a
waitlist is available. An institution may also want to consider whether
course statuses with refunding rules should be Web-enabled.

Setup Summary
The following steps summarize the actions you need to take to set up registration on the
Web. These steps are described in detail in the next section.
1. Set up the global Web rules using Customize Web Rules in Web Tailor.
2. Establish Web processing and Web display controls on the Term Control Form
(SOATERM) for a specific term. This step is required for every registration term.
3. Establish and Web-enable Web-related enrollment and course status codes on the
Course Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS). This step is required
for the initial set-up of Web registration.
4. Establish term-specific date ranges for course statuses on the Course Registration
Status Form (SFARSTS) or the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE). This
step is required for every registration term.
5. Update rules for registering or dropping via the Web on the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX) as necessary. This step is required for the initial set-up of Web
registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 330

 6. Review the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ) for those codes that should be
Web-enabled. This step is only required for the initial set-up of Web registration.
7. Establish the appropriate display settings for midterm and final grades. This step is
required for every registration term.

Setup Steps
The following steps provide detailed information to set up registration on the Web. The
steps include only the information you need for implementing registration on the Web.
Refer to the Banner Student User Guide for complete information about each Banner
form.
1. Set up the global Web rules using Customize Web Rules in Web Tailor. Set up the
title, header, back URL and link, and help URL and link fields using Customize a Web
Menu or Procedure in Web Tailor. If these rules, links, and fields have not been
reviewed and customized for your institution, do this now.
2. Establish term-specific Web controls on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) for the
following sets of information.
• Web Processing Controls
• Web Display Controls
• Web Registration Dates
This is required for each registration term.
2.1. Review and/or establish term-specific Web Processing and Web Display
Controls.
On the Term Control Form (SOATERM), enter a term in the Key Block and use
Next Block to access the fields in the main window. Select the Process Web
Controls button to display the Web Processing Controls window.
The fields in this window are used for two main functions:
– to restrict or enable selected registration related actions in self-service for
Class Change Options, Grade Display, Faculty and Advisor, and WebCAPP,
and
– to restrict or enable selected searching capabilities for Catalog and Schedule
(including open learning courses) when a student performs a search for
available sections on the Look Up Classes page.
For more information on the fields in this window, see SOATERM in the Banner
Student online help.
2.2. Review and/or establish Web registration date range periods to restrict Web
registration.
On the Term Control Form (SOATERM), enter a term in the Key Block, use a
Next Block function to navigate through the main window, and use a second
Next Block function to access the Part of Term and Web Registration Controls
window.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 331

 The Web Registration Dates section of the Part of Term and Web Registration
Controls window is used to specify the date ranges during which registration via
the Web is available for the term in the Key Block. Web registration dates are
established as follows:
– Enter one or more start and end dates for Web Registration periods. Note that
the ability to enter more than one Web Registration period allows the
institution to turn Web Registration access on and off during the term.
– The start and end dates entered should not fall outside (either before or after)
the date ranges that are established for both student enrollment statuses
(SFAESTS) and course registration statuses (SFARSTS) for the term, or
errors will prevent a student from registering via the Web.
3. Establish and Web-enable Web-related course status codes on the Course
Registration Status Code Validation Form (STVRSTS).
This is an initial set-up requirement only.
Status codes that are Web-enabled are used either in the Add/Drop process or as
additional options that a student can select, such as Audit or Waitlist.
To use registration on the Web, you must have at least one course status code
enabled. If you want to allow students to drop classes from their schedules using the
Web, you also need to define a drop status code and Web-enable it. You can use the
traditional RE (Registered) and DD (Drop/Delete) codes, or you can create
new codes. If you create new codes, you must set all indicators for each value to
correspond with the settings for RE and DD. (The codes RW and DW are delivered,
which you can use if you choose, or you can create new codes.)

Note: You can give any names to these status codes; the documentation
uses the generic terms “Web registered” and “Web drop”. When naming
your course status codes, remember that the descriptions are what will be
displayed on the Web and should therefore be clear enough to be
understood by your users.

The Web registered status is required to initially add a class on the Web. An institution
can disable the Web-dropped status if students should not be allowed to drop classes
on the Web. Optionally, other course statuses may be Web-enabled, such as Audit,
Waitlist, etc., if institutional policies determine that these actions should be available
for selection on the Web.
The Web Registered (RW) and Web Drop (DW) course status codes are controlled by
entries in the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX), which is covered in the next
step.

Note: A student may be able to waitlist a course if a waitlist course status

is Web-enabled on STVRSTS, a valid date range is defined for the status
on SFARSTS, and a waitlist is available. Careful consideration should be
given as to whether institutional policy should allow waitlist registrations
via the Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 332

 Warning! Set the indicators on STVRSTS as specified in the following
table. These indicators must not be changed, or Web registrations will not
be processed properly:

Processing Indicator Add Drop

Allowed to Enter checked/Y checked/Y

Count in Enrollment checked/Y unchecked/N

Count in Assessment checked/Y unchecked/N

Withdrawal Indicator unchecked/N unchecked/N

Waitlist Indicator unchecked/N unchecked/N

Gradable Indicator checked/Y unchecked/N

Print on Schedule (Indicator) checked/Y unchecked/N

Web (Registration) Indicator checked/Y checked/Y

In order for the system to determine which status code(s) to be displayed, in the
Status Type field, enter the status code type:
• R — Registered (enrolled)

• D — Dropped

• L — Waitlisted

• W — Withdrawn

Note: If the Status Type field is left blank, unexpected results can occur.

4. Establish term-specific date ranges for enrollment and course statuses.

This is required for each registration term.
4.1. Review and/or establish enrollment status codes, their associated start and end
dates, and refunds as applicable for the registration term on the Enrollment
Status Control Form (SFAESTS).
4.2. Review and/or establish course registration status codes, their associated start
and end dates, and refunds as applicable for the registration term and parts-of-
term within the registration term on the Course Registration Status Form
(SFARSTS).
4.3. For open learning courses, define usage/cutoff rules for course registration
status codes on the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE).
5. Update the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) as necessary.
5.1. If you created new course status codes for Web processing, take the following
actions.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 333

 – If you created a new course status code for “Web registered”, for the internal
code WEBRSTSREG, enter your “Web registered” code in the External Code
field.
– If you created a new course status code for “Web drop”, for the internal code
WEBRSTSDRP, enter your “Web drop” course registration status code in the
External Code field.
– If you are using the RE and DD course status codes for Web registrations and
drops, you do not need to make any changes to the entries for the
WEBRSTSREG or WEBRSTSDRP internal codes for the WEBREG internal
code group on GTVSDAX, because as delivered, these codes are set up for
use on the Web.

Note: You may define only one code for “Web registered” and one for
“Web drop” on GTVSDAX. If you wish to change the code later, change
the external code on GTVSDAX.

The drop code that is crosswalked to the WEBRSTSDRP internal code

drops the course and removes it from the student’s schedule.

5.2. For the internal code MAXREGNO with internal code group WEBREG, in the
External Code field, enter the maximum number of enrollment attempts your
institution wants to allow on the Web.
5.3. To display the Dynamic Schedule by Date Range field values on the select
term or date range, enter Y in the External Code field for the SCHBYDATE
internal code.
5.4. For the internal code AUTODROP, enter the appropriate value in the External
Code field.
– If you want users to be allowed to choose whether to drop all or no connected
courses if not all were selected to be dropped, enter C.
– If you want an entire connection to be automatically dropped if not all were
selected to be dropped, enter Y.
– If you want no connected courses to be dropped unless all were selected,
enter N.

Note: In Banner Voice Response, error checking is performed on each

CRN as it is entered. Because of this, if you enter N for AUTODROP, it will
not be possible for connected courses to be dropped via Banner Voice
Response. Therefore, if your institution uses both Banner Voice
Response and Banner Student Self-Service, it is recommended that you
use either C or Y for AUTODROP.

5.5. For the internal code ADMINDROP, enter the appropriate value in the External
Code field.
– If you want administrative errors that have been encountered when a
registration record is accessed to be ignored, enter N.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 334

 – If you want the system to automatically drop a course if an administrative error
is encountered when a registration record is accessed, enter Y.
6. Review subjects for Web display on the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ).
This is an initial set-up requirement only.
Web-enable those subjects that should display when a student searches for available
sections on the Web. Remember that the Web-enabled subject codes will also control
the Catalog and Schedule display as well.
The Web (Display) Ind(icator) checkbox on the Subject Code Validation Form
(STVSUBJ) specifies which subjects are allowed to be displayed in the Web Course
Catalog, Class Schedule, and Look Up Classes pages. The installation process
automatically defaults checked or Y for the Web (Display) Ind(icator) for all of your
subject codes. Without any changes, all subject code descriptions will display on the
Web. You should review subject code descriptions for clarity, as well as update the
Web (Display) Ind(icator) to N only for the subject code descriptions that should not
be displayed on the Web.
7. Establish the appropriate display settings for midterm and final grades.
This step is required for every registration term.
On the Term Control Form (SOATERM), enter a term in the Key Block and use Next
Block to access the fields in the main window. Select the Process Web Controls
button to display the Web Processing Controls window.
Use the grade display checkboxes on SOATERM to control the display for the whole
term. You can, however, then use the Section Web Controls From (SSAWSEC) to
override the SOATERM setting for specific classes.
For example, if you choose to display midterm grades for the whole term on
SOATERM, but a particular professor does not want to display their midterm grades,
you can uncheck the Display Midterm Grades checkbox on SSAWSEC.
7.1. Set the Grade Display checkboxes in the Web Processing Controls window of
SOATERM to specify whether you want midterm and/or final grades and/or
grade detail for the whole term to be available on the Web. For more information
on the fields in this window, refer to the online help.
7.2. If you want to override the settings on SOATERM for a specific class, set the
Grade Display checkboxes on SSAWSEC in the Banner Student Self-Service
Display Controls block.
7.3. On the Grade Component Definition Form (SHAGCOM), define grade detail for
the class if your institution wants grade detail to be available via the Active
Registrations page (bwsksreg.p_active_regs).

Display Term Date Ranges

A system-required rule is delivered on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) for use
with term selection in Banner Student Self-Service. Use this rule to display term date
ranges in the Term field pulldown lists on Web pages. This helps the user determine
which term to select without being dependent on term descriptions.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 335

 Set the WEBTRMDTE rule for group STUWEB to Y to display date ranges for terms on all
Banner Student Self-Service pages where the term is selected. The date display format is
controlled by the setting in Banner General.

Internal
Code
External Sequence Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

N WEBTRMDTE N/A STUWEB Web Term Displays Sysdate

Dates

Set Up and Use Study Paths

This section discusses using study paths in Banner Student Self-Service. Study paths can
be optional or required for registration. You can allow students to view or change study
paths while adding or dropping courses. When study paths are enabled in Banner Student
(the Enable Study Paths checkbox is checked on SOACTRL), study path information will
be displayed in Self-Service.

When you allow study paths to be updated (the Change Study Path checkbox is checked
on SOATERM), the student or faculty member can change the study path after registering
for a course using the Change Class Options page (bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt)
in Self-Service. When study paths cannot be updated (the Change Study Path checkbox
is unchecked on SOATERM), the study path information on the Change Class Options
page is display only.

When study paths are required (the Study Path Required checkbox is checked on
SOATERM), the student or faculty member must select one to continue processing. When
study paths are not required (the Study Path Required checkbox is unchecked on
SOATERM), the student or faculty member may select None and continue.

When study paths are enabled and a term is selected, when the user chooses to add or
drop courses, the Select Study Paths pages (bwckcoms.P_StoreStudyPath) or
(bwckcoms.P_StoreMultiStudyPath) are displayed. Once the study path is
selected, processing continues to the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) for registration.

Set Up Study Paths in Baseline

Use these steps to set up study paths. Please refer to Appendix E “Study Path
Processing” in the Banner Student User Guide for information on using study paths in
baseline Banner Student.
1. Build study path status codes on STVSTSP.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 336

 2. Check the Active and Allow Registration indicator on STVSTSP for study path
codes that permit registration.
3. Check the Enable Study Paths indicator for the curriculum rules on SOACTRL.
4. Define the study path naming convention in the Study Path Name Components
Window on SOACTRL.
4.1. Enter the sequence number for the column order in the study path name.
4.2. Enter the columns from SOVSPNM that are used in the study path name.
4.3. Enter separators for the column values in the study path name.
5. Check the Study Path indicator on SOACURR to enable study paths for the
curriculum rule during admissions acceptance.
6. Check the Study Path Required indicator on SOATERM if you wish to require study
paths on all registered courses.
7. Set up study path information for students in the Study Path window on SGASTDN.
7.1. Enter status information in the Study Path Status block.
When study paths are created, the default status is AS (active study paths).
7.2. Enter any pertinent student information in the Study Path Student Information
block.
8. Use the Study Path field on SGASADD to include student cohorts in the study path.
9. Use the Study Path field on SGASADD to include student attributes in the study path.
10. Use the Enrollment Study Path block on SFAREGS to enter the enrollment study path
status and allow study paths to be associated with courses during registration.
11. Set up study path information in the Study Path window on SFAREGS.
11.1. Enter status information in the Study Path Status block.
11.2. Enter student information in the Study Path Student Information block.
12. Check the Roll and Apply Courses by Study Path indicator on SHACTRL to include
the study path code in the match between the learner and outcome curriculum records
for the outcome record creation.
13. Use SHRROLL to roll grades to history with or without study paths.

Set Up Study Paths in Self-Service

Use these steps to set up study paths in Banner Student Self-Service.
1. Enable study paths on SOACTRL using the Enable Study Paths checkbox.
2. Check the Study Path Required checkbox on SOATERM to require study paths for
registration.
When this indicator is unchecked, the use of study paths is optional. Students with
study paths will still be prompted to selected a study path for registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 337

 3. Check the Change Study Path checkbox on SOATERM to allow students or faculty
members to change the study path on the Add or Drop Classes page.

Set Up Immediate Registration Fee Assessment

You can set up fee assessment so that student registration fees are assessed as soon as
registration entries have been completed or changes have been made on the Web.

Each time a student submits a registration or asks to view fee assessment any courses
that have cleared the registration restrictions checking, the system runs fee assessment.
Transactions for the new assessment are written to the TBRACCD table for the student at
that time.

Set the following controls on the Term Control Form (SOATERM).

1. Select the Online checkbox in the Fee Assessment section.
2. Select the Online radio button in the Web Self-Service and Voice Response section.

Note: If the Online checkbox in the Fee Assessment section is selected,

but the Online radio button in the Web Self-Service and Voice Response
section is not selected, fee assessment occurs as explained in
“Registration Fee Assessment (bwskffee.P_FeeAsses)” on page 301.

The p_immediate_fee_assess procedure is called by p_regsresult after

displaying the Add or Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse) and by
P_DispChgCrseOpt after displaying the Change Class Options page
(bwskfreg.P_ChangeCrseOpt).

This procedure does the following:

• checks that SOBTERM_FEE_ASSESS_VR is set to Y

• checks for the existence of a SFRBTCH record for the term/PIDM
• calls existing Web fee assessment procedure bwckregs.P_RegsFees
• deletes the SFRBTCH row

Implementing Detail Code Displays

You can control detail code display via the WEBDETCODE entry in the Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX). This setting affect the registration fee assessment, account
summaries and installment plan displays.

• If the code is set to Y the detail codes will display.

• If the code is set to N the detail codes will be suppressed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 338

 Internal
External Code Seq Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y/N WEBDETCODE 1 WEBACCTSUM Display Detail Code Sysdate

on WEB

Set Up Registration Time-Ticketing

Registration time-ticketing allows institutions to optionally establish priority driven
registration period time slots for registration via Banner Student Self-Service registration.

Time-Ticketing slots for Web and telephone registration processing are established using
the following forms:

• Registration Priority Control Form (SFARCTT)

• Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL)
• Student Registration Group Query Form (SFIRGRP)
There are two primary methods of registration eligibility control checking:

• Registration Time-Ticketing

If time tickets are used to control registration eligibility, there are two variations available,
unrestricted time ticketing and restricted to time ticketing.
• Unrestricted time tickets refers to students with assigned time tickets who are only
eligible for registration (for the term) as applicable for their time ticket. If a student
does not have a time ticket, that student may register (for the term) at any time
(subject to other restrictions, as applicable).
• Restricted time tickets refers to students with assigned time tickets who are subject
to the same eligibility restrictions as with unrestricted time tickets. The difference
with this method is that all students must have a time ticket to register. If they do not
have an assigned time ticket, the student will not be eligible for registration (for the
term) under any circumstances.

• Registration Time Controls

The Third Party Registration Time Controls Form (SFARGTC) provides an alternative to
individually assigned time-ticketing, by offering the ability to create term-specific
registration eligibility profiles whereby only those students who match the criteria for a
valid time control may register at any given time.

These methods are controlled by rules on GTVSDAX (and GORFLAG for Banner Voice
Response) and provide a registration indicator of eligible or ineligible for the student based
on the selected method of registration control and checking against the rules on
SFARGTC (for registration time controls) or the records on SFARGRP (for restricted and

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 339

 unrestricted time tickets). The student is permitted to continue with registration once the
checks have taken place.

The rule on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) must be created as follows:

• The Internal Code is WEBRESTTKT.

• The Sequence (Number) is blank (Null).
• The (Internal) Group (Code) value is WEBREG.
• The External Code can be set to Y, to restrict registration to time tickets, or N, to not
restrict registration to time tickets. N is the delivered default.

• The Description is WebVR Restrict Reg to Time Tkt.

• The Translation Code and Reporting Date can be left blank (Null).
• The System Requirements (Indicator) must be checked.
Students with time tickets (for a specified term) can only register within the timeframes
established for that ticket (or tickets). All students must have a time ticket to register. If a
student does not have a time ticket established, they are not eligible for registration under
any circumstances.

Registration Priority Time-Ticketing Setup Overview

The following steps are required to implement Registration Priority Time-Ticketing:
1. Build registration group codes in the Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL).
2. Build registration time slots in the Registration Priority Control Form (SFARCTT).
3. Link the time slots with their priorities to the Registration Groups.
4. Assign term specific registration groups to individual students on the Student
Registration Group Form (SFARGRP).

Steps 1 through 4 are required for each registration term. However, Steps 1 and 2 may be
completed in reverse order. If the time slots are built first on the Registration Priority
Control Form (SFARCTT) as indicated in Step 2, then steps 1 and 3 can be combined as
the next step.

In addition, a model script is available to partially automate the building of registration

group codes and assign those codes to students who are eligible to register. See
additional detailed notes about this script (sfrgrup.sql) following the implementation
steps below.

Registration Priority Time-Ticketing Setup Steps

1. Build registration group codes in the Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL).

Note: At this time, build the codes only; do not try to associate a priority
with a group until the next step has been completed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 340

 The Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL) is used to define registration group
codes and the assigned registration priorities for those group codes for Banner
Student Self-Service Web registration and Banner Voice Response telephone
registration. There is no validation for the group code. A group code may be initially
defined without a priority, and the priority may be associated with the code after time
slots and priorities are established on the Registration Priority Control Form
(SFARCTT).
Students assigned to registration groups will be permitted access to Web and
telephone registration only during the time slot(s) specified by their assigned
registration group code and assigned priority on the Student Registration Group Form
(SFARGRP). Codes must be established on the Registration Group Control Form
(SFARCTL) before they can be assigned to students on the Student Registration
Group Form (SFARGRP).
Procedurally, registration group codes can be defined on SFARCTL without priorities
at the same time that registration time slots are defined on SFARCTT. Priorities can
then be assigned to the group codes on SFARCTL after the time slots exist with their
assigned priorities on SFARCTT.
2. Build registration time slots in the Registration Priority Control Form (SFARCTT).
The Registration Priority Control Form (SFARCTT) is used to define rules that assign
the begin and end dates and times and priority assignment for each registration time
slot for Banner Student Self-Service Web registration and Banner Voice Response
telephone registration. Time slots are required to have a begin date and time, end
date and time, and a priority.
More than one registration time slot can be assigned the same priority. If more than
one time slot has the same priority, any group assigned that priority on the
Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL) will have all of those time slots assigned
and available for Web and telephone registration. Students who are assigned to the
group in the Student Registration Group Form (SFARGRP) will be permitted to
register via the Web or telephone during any of the time slots assigned to the priority
of the group.
3. Link the time slots with their priorities to the registration groups.
Link the time slots with their priorities to the registration groups by updating the Group
Priority field on the Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL).
4. Assign term-specific registration groups to individual students on the Student
Registration Group Form (SFARGRP).
The Student Registration Group Form (SFARGRP) is used to assign a registration
group to individual students on a term-by term-basis. A registration group that has
been defined, but not associated with a priority, cannot be assigned to a student on
this form. Only one registration group can be assigned to a student for a specific term.
Use a List function from the (Registration) Group (Code) field to display the
Registration Group Control Form (SFARCTL), which in turn displays the valid codes
and allows for an Exit with Value.
The user ID that assigned the registration group code is stored and displayed on the
form, as well as the activity date associated with the most recent change.
Registration group assignments cannot be made when the student status for the
selected term does not allow registration (i.e., the Allow Registration flag on the
Student Status Code Validation Form (STVSTST) is unchecked or N). You cannot

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 341

 create group assignments for a term for which the student record has an inactive
status.
You may query the registration time slots and the students who have been assigned
to those time slots for specific registration group codes using the Student Registration
Group Query Form (SFIRGRP).
When more than one time slot is assigned the same priority, and that priority has been
assigned to a registration group, all of the time slots are displayed in the Student
Registration Group Control section of the form. The cursor cannot be positioned to
any fields in the form, but in query mode, (Registration) Group Code, Group
Priority, Begin Date, End Date, Begin Time, and End Time can be accessed and
used to specify query criteria.
Students assigned to the registration group code display in the Student Information
section of the form. When the cursor is scrolled through multiple time slot records, it
they exist, the list of student names that displays will be the same for each record.
Group is an optional Key Block field. If no group code is entered in the Key Block, all
existing registration groups and their assigned students, if any exist, are retrieved for
display.
See the "Model Script for Populating Registration Groups" topic below for more
information.
5. Set up the following rule for restricted time tickets on GTVSDAX.

Internal
Code
External Sequence Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y/N WEBRESTTKT WEBREG WebVR Restrict Reg Sysdate

to Time Tkt

Model Script for Populating Registration Groups

The SQL script sfrgrup.sql may be used as a model for creating registration groups
from your existing student population. This script should be analyzed and modified as
appropriate by technical support staff prior to execution. The model script does the
following:

• Prompts for a term code.

• Creates student registration group records (SFBRGRP) for every general student in the
database whose student status (SGBSTDN_STST_CODE) allows registration
(STVSTST_REG_IND is set to Y). (These students represent the IDs that will be
entered in the Key Block of SFARGRP).

• Creates registration group code records (SFBWCTL) and assigns the appropriate code
to each of the students (SFBRGRP) above by examining academic history as follows:

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 342

 • Sums the earned hours in academic history for all of the Term GPA records
(SHRTGPA_HOURS_EARNED) that have the same level as the level of the general
student record that is effective for the term specified in the prompt.
• Subtracts the sum of hours from the previous step from 1000. This result is the
group code that is assigned to the student.
The following are some examples:

Sum of Hours Group Code

Student Earned Calculation Assigned

One 46 1000 - 46 0954

Two 104 1000 - 104 0896

Three 18 1000 - 18 0982

Four * 0 1000 - 0 1000

* Freshmen with no earned hours in academic history will be assigned to group 1000 based on
the logic in the model script.

Once the script is executed, the group codes are associated with the students. The group
codes are displayed on SFARCTL. The order of the display of the codes is by earned
hours seniority, if no modifications are made to the script. In other words, the group codes
are character values and are ordered in ascending order.

The students who have completed the most hours will have codes that are at the top of the
list of codes displayed on SFARCTL, and the students who have completed the fewest
hours will have codes that are at the bottom of the list of codes displayed on SFARCTL.

The codes in the example above would be displayed in the following order on SFARCTL:

• 0896
• 0954
• 0982
• 1000
When the group codes have been associated with students, you must build the time slots
and their priorities on SFARCTT (if not built previously), then associate the time slots
(priorities) with the groups on SFARCTL by populating the Group Priority field. Once
those tasks have been completed, the SFARGRP form can be used to display the time
slots for individual students for the term, and the Student Registration Group Query Form
(SFIRGRP) can be used to query registration groups, their associated time slots, and the
students assigned to those groups.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 343

 Scenarios for Using the GTVSDAX Rules for Restricted Time Tickets
and Time Controls
1. Time Controls
• WEBMANCONT = Y

• WEBRESTTKT = N (This record setting is not applicable if you are using third-party
controls.)
• No valid SFARGTC record profile match exists for the student/term at this time.
Because no SFARGTC record exists, when the user tries to access the Add or Drop
Class and Change Class Options pages, the following MCERR message is displayed:
The student is not permitted to register at this time.
The Look Up Classes page will display, the search can be performed, and the results
are displayed without a Registration checkbox.
2. Time Controls
• WEBMANCONT = Y

• WEBRESTTKT = N (This record setting is not applicable if you are using third-party
controls.)
• SFARGTC = Last Name same as student
• The Add or Drop Class, Change Class Options, and Look Up Classes pages can be
accessed.
3. Time Controls
• WEBMANCONT = Y

• WEBRESTTKT = Y (This record setting is not applicable to Third Party Controls.)

• No valid SFARGTC record profile match exists for the student/term at this time.
Because no SFARGTC record exists, when the user tries to access the Add or Drop
Class and Change Class Options pages, the following MCERR message is display
ed:
The student is not permitted to register at this time.
The Look Up Classes page is displayed, the search can be performed, and the results
are displayed without a Registration checkbox.
4. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

• WEBRESTTKT = N
• No SFARGRP record
The Add or Drop Class, Change Class Options, and Look Up Classes pages can be
accessed. The Registration Status page displays the time ticket appropriately.
5. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 344

 • WEBRESTTKT = Y
• No SFARGRP record exists for the student.
If Web registration is attempted, then because WEBRESTTKT is set to Y, the user will
receive the following TTERR message:
You have no Registration Time Ticket. Please contact the registration administrator
for your time ticket.
The Look Up Classes page is displayed, the search can be performed, and the results
are displayed without a Registration checkbox. The Registration Status page can be
accessed.
6. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

• WEBRESTTKT = N
• A valid SFARGRP record exists for the student.
The Add or Drop Class, Change Class Options, and Look Up Classes pages can be
accessed. The Registration Status page displays the time ticket appropriately.
7. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

• WEBRESTTKT = N
• An invalid SFARGRP record exists for the student.
Because the student does not have an active SFARGRP record, the following
TTTIMES error message is displayed on the Add or Drop Class and Change Class
Options pages:
You may register during the following times.
The Look Up Classes page is displayed, the search can be performed, and the results
are displayed without a Registration checkbox. The Registration Status page
displays the time ticket appropriately.
8. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

• WEBRESTTKT = Y
• A valid SFARGRP record exists for the student.
The Add or Drop Class, Change Class Options, and Look Up Classes to Add pages
can be accessed. The Registration Status page displays the time ticket appropriately.
9. Time Tickets
• WEBMANCONT = N

• WEBRESTTKT = Y
• An invalid SFARGRP record exists for the student.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 345

 Because the student does not have an active SFARGRP record, the following
TTTIMES error message is displayed on the Add or Drop Class and Change Class
Options pages:
You may register during the following times.
The Look Up Classes page is displayed, the search can be performed, and the results
are displayed without a Registration checkbox. The Registration Status page
displays the time ticket appropriately.

Set Up Third-Party Controls

Your institution can choose to use third-party controls instead of time-ticketing. Third-party
controls allow you to define rules that control timed access to add/drop functions. Time
control records can use any combination of the following to define assigned time slots for
registration activity:

• PIN
• Last name
• Student type
• Earned hours
• College
• Degree
• Department
• Campus
• Class
• Major
Management control time ticketing is dynamic. When a student attempts to register, his or
her current data is compared to defined management control records to determine
whether the action can be performed. Management controls are maintained and displayed
in the Third Party Registration Time Controls Form (SFARGTC).

Use the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) to indicate that you are using third-party
controls. The rule on GTVSDAX should be set up as follows:

• The Internal Code is WEBMANCONT.

• The Sequence (Number) is blank (Null).
• The (Internal) Group (Code) value is WEBREG.
• The External Code should be Y. (The delivered value is N, which should be changed if
you want to use third-party controls instead of registration group time ticketing controls.)

• The Description is Web Use Management Controls.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 346

 • The Translation Code and Reporting Date can be left blank (Null).
• The System Requirements checkbox must be checked.
When third-party controls are being used to enforce Web registration availability, a
student’s characteristics are matched against management control records maintained in
the SFRCTRL table and displayed on SFARGTC. Multiple records can be defined for each
term.

Management control records are checked against the student’s data to determine at the
time of login whether any permit the student to perform add/drop activity. If no
management control records that allow access at the current date and time are matched,
the message Please contact the registration administrator for your time ticket is displayed,
and add/drop activity will not be allowed.

One of the items that can be used in management control time-ticket rules is PIN. Different
registration periods can be defined for different PIN ranges. Because two PINs can exist
for a student (the login PIN and the term-specific alternative PIN), you can select which
PIN is to be used in management control checking. The PIN selection is done using
another GTVSDAX rule, which should be set up as follows:

• The Internal Code is WEBALTPINU.

• The Sequence (Number) is blank (Null).
• The (Internal) Group (Code) value is WEBREG.
• The External Code should be Y if you want the alternative PIN (from the SPRAPIN
table) for the term to be used when matching management control time ticket records to
student characteristics, or External Code should be N if you want the login PIN (from
the GOBTPAC table) to be used.

• The Description is Web Alt PIN Use.

• The Translation Code and Reporting Date can be left blank (Null).
• The System Requirements checkbox must be checked.

Set Up Alternate PIN Processing

Alternative PIN processing allows you to require a student to enter an additional PIN
before he or she can perform initial add/drop activity for a term. Institutions typically use
this functionality to “force” a student to contact an advisor, who will provide the PIN, before
initially registering for the term. When a student tries to register for the first time (via either
the Add or Drop Classes page or the Look Up Classes Results page), if alternative PIN
processing is turned on and an alternative PIN has been entered for the student on the
Alternate Personal Identification Number Form (SPAAPIN), then the system displays the
Alternate PIN Verification page. (If no alternative PIN has been entered on SPAAPIN, the
system displays the requested page without displaying this page first.)

Alternative PIN processing works together with third-party controls. The following table
shows the different combinations you can use to set up alternative PIN processing in the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 347

 Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX). The internal codes in the table are described as
follows.

• WEBMANCONT - Uses third-party controls to determine when students are eligible to

register.

• WEBALTPINA - Indicates that the alternative PIN is required if it has been set on
SPAAPIN.

• WEBALTPINU - Indicates when Y that the alternative PIN from the SPRAPIN table is
used for the term, or indicates when N that the login PIN from the GOBTPAC table is
used.

Here are the alternative PIN rule combinations, settings, and results.

Internal Code External Code System Action

Here is rule combination number one.

WEBMANCONT N Use registration time-ticketing as set up on

SFARCTT.

WEBALTPINA Y Requires entry of the alternative PIN

designated for the student and term on
SPAAPIN, if one exists.

WEBALTPINU N This value is not relevant, as third party

controls on SFARGTC are not used when the
WEBMANCONT rule is set to N.
Here is rule combination number two.

WEBMANCONT Y Requires that registration appointment

requirements defined on SFARGTC be met.

WEBALTPINA Y Requires entry of the alternative PIN

designated on SPAAPIN for the student and
term, if one exists, for process name TREG.

WEBALTPINU N Requires that the GOATPAD PIN for the

student is in the range set up on SFARGTC.

Here is rule combination number three.

WEBMANCONT Y Requires that registration appointment

requirements defined on SFARGTC be met.

WEBALTPINA N Student will not be required to enter an

alternate PIN, even if one has been assigned
on SPAAPIN.

WEBALTPINU Y Alternate PIN from SPAAPIN for process

name TREG will be used by the SFARGTC
PIN range settings.

Here is rule combination number four.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 348

 Internal Code External Code System Action

WEBMANCONT N Use registration time-ticketing as set up on

SFARCTT.

WEBALTPINA N Student will not be required to enter an

alternate PIN, even if one has been assigned
on SPAAPIN.

WEBALTPINU Y This value is not relevant, as third party

controls on SFARGTC are not used when the
WEBMANCONT rule is set to N.
Here is rule combination number five.

WEBMANCONT Y Requires that registration appointment

requirements defined on SFARGTC be met.

WEBALTPINA Y Requires entry of the alternative PIN

designated for the student and term on
SPAAPIN, if one exists.

WEBALTPINU Y Requires entry of the alternative PIN

designated on SPAAPIN for the student and
term, if one exists, for process name TREG.

1. On the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX), enter the appropriate value, as

described in the table above, in the External Code field for the following internal
codes:
• WEBMANCONT

• WEBALTPINA

• WEBALTPINU
2. For each term code for which you want to use alternative PIN processing, on the
Alternate Personal Identification Number Form (SPAAPIN), define the alternative
PIN(s) as follows.
• In the Term Code field, enter the term code.
• In the Process Name field, enter TREG.
• In the Alternate PIN field, enter the PIN.
• Save your changes.

Set Up Registration Permit-Overrides

This section applies to Banner Student System registration, Telephone Registration
processing, and Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-Service registration.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 349

 Note: Permit-override processing in registration is the same for Banner
Faculty and Advisor Self-Service and Banner Voice Response telephone
registration. You should, therefore, be careful about making changes, as
any changes you make affect both products.

Registration Permit-Override processing allows institutions to optionally establish

combinations of allowable automatic overrides for registration processing that can be
assigned to individual students. These permit-overrides are available by term on a course
or section basis. These overrides will by-pass the error checking that would normally be
performed in the baseline Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS), Telephone
Registration processing, and Banner Student Self-Service Registration, if the
corresponding term controls on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) were flagged as
either Warning, or Fatal, where applicable.

The following registration errors can be designated for permit-overrides on the

Registration Permit-Overrides Control Form (SFAROVR):

• prerequisite and test score override

• corequisite override
• course link override
• special approval override
• department override
• duplicate course override
• repeat hours override
• repeat limit override
• time conflict override
• student attribute override
• college override
• campus override
• class override
• capacity permit override
• cohort override
• level override
• program override
• degree override
• field of study override
• mutual exclusion override

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 350

 Note: A duplicate course is one that has the same subject, course
number, and schedule type.

For more detailed information about the above registration error checking categories, refer
to the “Catalog”, “Class Schedule”, “Registration” and chapters in the Banner Student
User Guide:

The rest of this section covers the following:

• “Permit-Overrides Set-Up Summary” on page 351

• “Student Registration Permit-Override Steps” on page 351

Permit-Overrides Set-Up Summary

1. Initial Set-up
1.1. Review and/or establish permit-overrides on the Registration Permit-Override
Code Validation Form (STVROVR).
1.2. Enter permit-override codes and their descriptions on the form.
2. Term-Specific Processing
2.1. Review and/or establish term specific permit-override processing rules on the
Registration Permit-Overrides Control Form (SFAROVR).
2.2. Review and/or establish the automatically allowed registration error checking
override flags for permit-override codes available for the registration term.
3. Permit-Override Processing
3.1. Assign specific permit-overrides to students for courses and/or sections on the
Student Registration Permit-Override Form (SFASRPO).
3.2. Review and/or assign registration permit-override codes to individual students
for specific courses and/or sections.

Student Registration Permit-Override Steps

Permit-overrides are established in the following order:
1. Define permit-override codes on the Registration Permit-Override Code Validation
Form (STVROVR).
The Registration Permit-Override Code Validation Form (STVROVR) is used to define
and maintain the codes and descriptions for assigning registration permit-override
groups to individual students in the Student Registration Permit-Override Form
(SFASRPO) for registration processing. The rules for each registration permit-override
group are defined on the Registration Permit-Overrides Control Form (SFAROVR) on
a term-by-term basis, and must exist before they can be assigned to students.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 351

 2. Establish, on a term-by-term basis, the permit-override codes and the specific
registration error checking overrides that are allowed using the Registration Permit-
Overrides Control Form (SFAROVR).
The Registration Permit-Overrides Control Form (SFAROVR) is used to establish the
registration permit-override codes and their associated allowable registration error
overrides on a term-by-term basis. When a new permit-override code is added, all
overrides initially default to unchecked or N (no automatic override), but may be
updated to checked or Y (registration error checking override automatically allowed).
These override codes are then assigned to individual students on a specific term and
course or section basis.
You cannot make a permit-override entry until a Permit-Override code (defined on the
Registration Permit-Override Code Validation Form (STVROVR)) has rules defined for
the term in the Key Block of SFAROVR. Entry of a code which is defined only on
STVROVR which does not have rules defined on SFAROVR for the Key term is not
allowed.
3. Assign student-specific permit-override codes on a term and course or section basis
using the Student Registration Permit-Override Form (SFASRPO).
The Student Registration Permit-Override Form (SFASRPO) is used to assign specific
permit-override codes to individual students on a term and course or section basis.
When a code is assigned to a student for a specific term, the CRN, Subject, Course
Number, and Section fields are available to specify when assigning the specific
permit-override code. At a minimum, a subject and course number must be
designated when assigning a code. If a subject and course number are specified, the
permit-override registration error checking will apply to any section of that subject and
course number when the student registers. If a specific CRN is entered, the subject,
course number, and section number will default. If a subject, course number, and
section number are entered, the CRN will default. Multiple permit-override codes can
be assigned to the same subject and course number combination, or the same CRN.

Warning! Caution should be exercised when assigning permit-override

codes. If a permit-override code is assigned to a subject and course
number combination that is not associated with a CRN, and a different
permit-override code (with a different set of registration error overrides
allowed) is assigned to a specific CRN that has the same subject and
course number, the logic in the permit-override checking “combines” the
rules in the sense that all of the Y (Yes) overrides for registration error
checking are combined from both rules.

This is not a problem if the Y overrides permitted for the specific CRN are
the same, or include more Y overrides than the rule associated with the
same subject and course number combination.

This is a problem if the Y overrides permitted for the specific CRN are
fewer and/or different from the overrides permitted for the same subject
and course number combination.

The effects of combining overrides when the same subject and course
number are specified in more than one permit-override rule are illustrated
in the following examples.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 352

 Examples of Permit-Override Rules

Permit Co- Pre-

Code Capacity Duplicates Links Reqs Reqs Time

ALLOWALL Y Y Y Y Y Y

Spc- Rpt Rpt

Appr Major College Level Class Camp Hrs Lmt Deg Prgm

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Permit Co- Pre-

Code Capacity Duplicates Links Reqs Reqs Time

CAPACITY Y N N N N N

Spc- Rpt Rpt

Appr Major College Level Class Camp Hrs Lmt Deg Prgm

Y N N N N N N N N N

In the examples below, the “student” is an undergraduate sophomore biology major, and
Section 02 of PSYC 300 (CRN 10050) and Section 03 of PSYC 300 (CRN 10051) are
restricted to junior and senior psychology majors at the undergraduate level.

Example 1 of specific overrides assigned to the student:

Permit Code CRN Subj Course Section

ALLOWALL PSYC 300

CAPACITY 10050 PSYC 300 02

In Example 1, the student has been granted an automatic override for the specific section
02 of PSYC 300 (CRN 10050) only if the class's maximum enrollment has been reached
or exceeded (capacity permit = Yes). However, because the ALLOWALL rule grants
automatic overrides for all registration error checking categories, the student will
automatically be enrolled in the either section 02 or 03 of PSYC 300, if selected at the time
of registration, even though the student does not meet the requirements for the class and
major for enrollment in the sections.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 353

 Example 2 of specific overrides assigned to the student:

Permit Code CRN Subj Course Section

CAPACITY PSYC 300

ALLOWALL 10050 PSYC 300 02

In Example 2, the student has been granted an automatic override for all registration error
checking categories for the specific section 02 of PSYC 300 (CRN 10050). If the student
attempts to register for section 02 of PSYC 300 only, the ALLOWALL rule will grant
automatic overrides for all registration error checking categories, including the capacity
error, and the student will be successfully registered in the section. If the student attempts
to register for section 03 of PSYC 300 (CRN 10051), registration errors will occur on both
Class restriction and Major restriction, but not capacity.

Permit-override codes are assigned in the Student Registration Permit-Overrides section

of SFASRPO. Permit-override types can be assigned only when they have been
authorized for the term in the Key Block using the Registration Permit-Overrides Control
Form (SFAROVR). Several functions are available in this section as follows:

• A List function from the Permit (-Override Code) field displays the Registration Permit-
Override Codes list of values, which is derived from the Registration Permit-Overrides
Control Form (SFAROVR). You may select a value from this window or select Define
Permit/Override Rules from the Options Menu to access SFAROVR, which displays the
valid codes and allows Exit with Value.

• A Help function from the CRN field displays the Registration Course Query Form
(SFQSECT) when a valid CRN is present. You may also use the Search feature and
select View Section Information (SFQSECT) to access SFQSECT.

• A List function from the Subject field displays a list of valid subject codes.
• A Count Query Hits function from the CRN, Subject, Course Number, and Section
fields displays the Registration Section Query Form (SFQSECM). You may also use the
Search feature and select Search for Sections (SFQSECM) to access SFQSECM from
the CRN field.

• A Duplicate Record function from the Subject and Course Number fields displays the
Existing Courses list of values, which is derived from the Subject/Course Query Form
(SCQSUBJ).

The user ID that assigned the override-permit code is stored and displayed on the form, as
well as the activity date associated with the most recent change.

Student Schedule information is also displayed on the form. The information displayed is
the same as that displayed in the Student Schedule section of the Registration Section
Query Form (SFQSECM).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 354

 Allow Major, Educational Goal, and Employment
Expectation Updates
When Banner Student Self-Service is delivered, the following procedures and menu are
disabled:

• bwskxmis.p_studenttermdata (procedure)
• bwskxmis.p_updatestudenttermdata (procedure)
• bwskxmis.p_studenttermdata (menu)
These items can be used to permit students to update their major, educational goal, and
employment expectation for any term for which they haven’t already registered or
changed the information.

If a student tries to access this information for a term for which changes have been made
or registration has occurred, one of the following messages is displayed:

• You have already entered student data for this term

• You have already registered for this term
Your institution can turn off the update for both the educational goal and employment
expectation. The rows in the following table are delivered on the Crosswalk Validation
Form (GTVSDAX) with Y in the External Code field.

If a student accesses a term for which no student record (SGASTDN) exists, no major is
available to be selected.

If data is successfully changed, the student is directed back to the Registration menu and
the message Student data successfully updated is displayed.

This updated information can then be viewed on the Registration Status and View Student
Information from the Student Records menu or the Degree link on the Registration Status
page.

Set up the following rows on GTVSDAX to either enable or disable this option.

Internal
External Code Seq Internal Code Activity
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Date

Y/N WEBEDGOAL 1 STUWEB Display/Update Sysdate

Education Goal

Y/N WEBEMPLEXP 1 STUWEB Display/Update Sysdate

Employment Exp

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 355

 Use Registration on the Web
This section provides step-by-step instructions for using registration on the Web. It
includes the following procedures:

• “Search for Classes and Registering via the Web” on page 356
• “Register for a Known CRN via the Web” on page 357
• “View Active Registrations via the Web” on page 358

Search for Classes and Registering via the Web

This procedure explains how a student can find classes and register for them.
1. The student selects the Look Up Classes link from the Registration Menu.
2. The Select Term or Date Range page (bwskfcls.p_sel_crse_search) is
displayed, on which the student either selects a term from the pulldown list or enters a
date range, and then selects the Submit button to proceed.

Note: The terms presented in the pulldown are not restricted to those that
are available for registration, but are delineated by the Master Web Term
Control checkbox on the Term Control Form (SOATERM). If the Web
registration dates are not active, the message View only is displayed to
the right of the term.

3. The Look Up Classes page (bwckgens.p_sel_term_date) is displayed. It

contains 16 parameters that may be used to narrow the user’s search for the desired
class. After selecting search parameters, the user selects the Class Search button to
initiate the search.
4. The Look Up Classes Results page (bwskfcls.P_GetCrse) is displayed. Only
classes that have been identified as available on the Web (that is, those for whom the
Voice Response and Self-Service Available checkbox on the Schedule Form
[SSASECT] has been selected) are displayed.

Note: This page is different from the page seen by a prospective student
on the unsecured side of the Web site.

If desired, the student can select the CRN link for a specific class to view more in-
depth information about the class, including the syllabus, to make a more informed
decision as to the suitability of the course. Then the student can return to the Look Up
Classes search result page.
The student now can decide to add the desired class to the worksheet (see step 5),
conduct another class search (see step 6), or register directly for the section (see step
7).
5. To add classes to the worksheet, the student selects the Select checkbox for the
applicable sections, then selects the Add to Worksheet button to go to the Add or

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 356

 Drop Classes page (bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse), at which point the system
populates the Add Classes Worksheet with the selected CRN.

Note: The Add to Worksheet button is not available if the search is

being performed for a date range that spans multiple terms.

Note: The student is not registered in the class until he or she selects the
Submit Changes button.

6. To continue searching for classes, the student selects the Class Search button to go
to the Look Up Class Search Criteria page.
7. To register directly for the class, the student selects the Select checkbox for the
applicable sections, then selects the Register button.
If the class (or one of the classes, if multiple are selected) is an open learning class,
the Registration Start Date Confirmation page is displayed, requiring the student to
enter a desired start or end date for the registration. The start date determined on this
page represents the official start of the class, with the end date identifying the
expected completion date of the course. The student selects the Submit Changes
button to proceed with the registration and display the Add or Drop Classes page.
8. To register in a class in a different term, the student must return to the Registration
menu and repeat the steps beginning with step Step 1.
9. A successful registration creates an opening record in the new Additional Registration
Information table (SFRAREG). This table stores the selected/derived start and
expected completion dates for open learning courses or the part of term start/end
dates of the section in which the student registered. These dates, instead of the
Census dates, are now used in the Financial Aid process.
For open learning course registrations, the Additional Registration Information table
(SFRAREG) also stores the instructor assigned to the student, that is, the primary
instructor assigned to the section.

Register for a Known CRN via the Web

This procedure explains how a student can register for a class if he or she already knows
the CRN.
1. The student selects the Add or Drop Classes link from the Registration Menu.
2. If the student has not yet selected a term in this Web session, the system displays the
Registration Term page (bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm). The student selects the
desired term from the Select a Term pulldown list and selects the Submit button.

Note: The terms presented in the pulldown are not restricted to those that
are available for registration, but are delineated by the Master Web Term
Control checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window of the Term
Control Form (SOATERM). If the Web registration dates are not active,
the message View only is displayed to the right of the term.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 357

 3. The system displays the Add or Drop Classes page
(bwskfreg.P_AddDropCrse).
4. The student enters the CRN in the Add Classes Worksheet area, then selects the
Submit Changes button.
If the class (or one of the classes, if multiple are selected) is an open learning class,
the Registration Start Date Confirmation page (bwckcoms.P_Regs) is displayed,
requiring the student to enter a desired start or end date for the registration. The start
date determined on this page represents the official start of the class, with the end
date identifying the expected completion date of the course. The student selects the
Submit Changes button to proceed with the registration and display the Add or Drop
Classes page.

Note: Waitlisting is not permitted for open learning classes.

5. A successful registration creates an opening record in the new Additional Registration

Information table (SFRAREG). This table stores the selected/derived start and
expected completion dates for open learning courses or the part of term start/end
dates of the section in which the student registered. These dates, instead of the
Census dates, are now used in the Financial Aid process.
For open learning course registrations, the Additional Registration Information table
(SFRAREG) also stores the instructor assigned to the student, that is, the primary
instructor assigned to the section.

View Active Registrations via the Web

A student can view active registrations (those that have not been graded and rolled to
Academic History).
1. The student selects the Active Registration link from the Registration menu.
2. The Active Registrations page (bwsksreg.p_active_regs) displays all
registration activity, in summary, that has not yet been graded and rolled to Academic
History. These classes may span multiple terms and are therefore displayed with the
most recent activity first, with the registrations sorted in course sequence.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Registration 358

 Technical Flows
This section provides diagrams of the following technical flows:
Banner Student Self-Service User Guide

• “Add or Drop Classes” on page 360

• “Change Class Options” on page 364
• “Look Up Classes” on page 365
|
359
Add or Drop Classes

Page 1 of 4
Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 360
Add or Drop Classes - Page 2 of 4 Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 361
Add or Drop Classes - Page 3 of 4 Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 362
Add or Drop Classes - Page 4 of 4 Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 363
Change Class Options Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 364
Look Up Classes Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | 365
 Student Records

The Student Records portion of Banner Student Self-Service allows a student to do the
following:

• View his or her academic records

• View his or her General Student record
• View holds that may exist on his or her records
• Display his or her grades for the term
• Review his or her unofficial transcripts
• Audit his or her course work against a selected primary or secondary program offering at
your institution, initiate an audit, and view results

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Student Records Web Pages” on page 366, which provides details about each Web
page accessed from the Student Records Web pages

• “Set Up Student Records on the Web” on page 483, which provides detailed steps for
setting up Student Records on the Web

• “Use Student Records on the Web” on page 508, which provides step-by-step
procedures

Student Records Web Pages

The following Web pages compose Banner Student Self-Service Student Records:

• “View Holds (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold)” on page 368

• “Midterm Grades Term (bwskmgrd.P_Write_Term_Selection)” on page 370
• “Midterm Grades (bwskmgrd.P_Write_Midterm_Grades)” on page 372
• “Final Grades Selection (bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde)” on page 375
• “Final Grades (bwskogrd.P_ViewGrde)” on page 377
• “Grade Detail Term (bwsksmrk.P_Write_Term_Selection)” on page 382
• “Section Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection)” on page 383
• “Component Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail)” on page 385
• “Subcomponent Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail)” on page 387
• “Academic Transcript Options (bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran)” on page 388

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 366

 • “Academic Transcript (bwskotrn.P_ViewTran)” on page 391
• “Transcript Request Address (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address)” on page 402
• “Select Transcript Type (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type)” on page 403
• “Transcript Request Options (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_data)” on page 406
• “Payment Options (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Trans_Request_Charges)” on page 408
• “Transcript Request Summary (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type)” on page 411
• “Signature Page (bwskwtrr.P_DispSigPage)” on page 413
• “Transcript Order Date (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Order_Requests)” on page 414
• “Transcript Order Status (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Status_of_Order)” on page 416
• “Degree Evaluation Record (bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent)” on page 417
• “Previous Evaluations (bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval)” on page 422
• “Degree Evaluation Results Report (bwcksxml.report)” on page 423
• “Generate New Evaluation (bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm)” on page 424
• “What-If Analysis (Step One) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one)” on page 426
• “What-If Analysis (Step Two) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two)” on page 428
• “What-If Analysis (Step Three) (bwcksmds.P_whatif_step_three)” on page 430
• “What-If Analysis (Add More) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step)” on page 432
• “What-If Analysis (Evaluation Term) (bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step)” on page 433
• “General Student Information (bwskgstu.P_StuInfo)” on page 435
• “Enrollment Verification Request (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type)” on page 439
• “Enrollment Verification Delivery (bwskrqst.p_proc_term_type)” on page 441
• “Enrollment Verification Address (bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery)” on page 442
• “Enrollment Verification Payment (bwskrqst.p_proc_payment)” on page 444
• “Enrollment Verification Request Summary (bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm)” on page 446
• “Enrollment Verification Signature (bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm)” on page 449
• “Enrollment Verification Request Date (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates)” on page 450
• “Enrollment Verification Request Status (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_status)” on page 451
• “Test Scores (bwsktesc.p_view_tests)” on page 453
• “Curriculum Term Selection (bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term)” on page 454
• “Curriculum Selection (bwskgrad.p_disp_gradapp)” on page 457
• “Graduation Date Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_grad_date)” on page 460

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 367

 • “Graduation Ceremony Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_ceremony)” on page 463
• “Diploma Name Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name)” on page 464
• “Diploma Name Selection - Name Change (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name)” on
page 467

• “Name Change Information (bwgkoinf.P_DispUpdName)” on page 469

• “Diploma Mailing Address Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr)” on page 470
• “Diploma Mailing Address Selection - Address Change
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr)” on page 472

• “Graduation Application Payment (bwskgrad.p_proc_payment)” on page 475

• “Graduation Application Summary (bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm)” on page 476
• “Graduation Application Signature (bwskgrad.p_disp_sigpage)” on page 479
• “Graduation Application (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp)” on page 481
Students can also access your institution’s course catalog and class schedule. Refer to
the following chapters for more information:

• “Course Catalog” on page 44

• “Class Schedule” on page 71

View Holds (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold)

This page displays a student’s holds. To be displayed on the Web, the hold type must be
Web-enabled and the hold must be in effect (that is, the current date is within the date
range specified on the Hold Information Form [SOAHOLD] for the student).

If the person has no holds, the message No holds exist on your record displayed. If the
person has holds in effect, but none of the holds are Web-enabled, the message The
holds on your record may not be viewed on the Web is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Hold Type Description type of hold assigned to the student.

From Date Date on which the hold went into effect.

To Date Date on which the hold ends.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 368

 Item Description/Source Information

Amount Amount associated with the hold. If no value exists, the field is
blank.

Reason Reason the hold was placed on the account.

Originator Person or office that authorized the hold.

Processes Affected Web processes affected by the hold, as follows.

• Registration holds prevent Web registration.
• Grades holds prevent the display of the grades on the Web.
• Transcript holds prevent the display of the academic
transcript on the Web.
• Compliance holds prevent access to student compliance and
any compliance processing.
• Admissions holds prevent an application from being
processed.
• Accounts Receivable holds prevent registration
payments from being made on the Web.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Hold Type Code Validation Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each hold type code that
Form (STVHLDD) you want to be displayed on the Web.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Financial Aid Holds Goes to the Financial Aid Holds page

(bwrkhold.P_DispHold).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 369

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Midterm Grades Term

(bwskmgrd.P_Write_Term_Selection)
This page is displayed when the user selects the Midterm Grades link from the Student
Records menu. The user must select a term from the pulldown list. Term codes available
include all terms for which the student has an active registration and at least one midterm
grade, and that have been specified as viewable on the Term Control Form (SOATERM)
and/or the Section Web Controls (SSAWSEC). (SOATERM controls the display for all
classes in a term, but the display of grades for a specific class can be overridden on
SSAWSEC.)

If the student is not actively enrolled in a class for which midterm grades are available, the
message You have no midterm grades to display is displayed.

If a grade hold is currently in effect for the student, the message Your grades are not
available due to holds on your record is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Term Term for which the student wants to view midterm grades.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 370

 Item Description

Term Control Form If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
(SOATERM) Web, select the Display Midterm Grades checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window.

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display
From (SSAWSEC) Midterm Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting
in SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Midterm Grades page

(bwskmgrd.p_write_midterm_grades) with the data for
the selected term displayed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 371

 Midterm Grades (bwskmgrd.P_Write_Midterm_Grades)
This page displays any midterm grades that have been assigned for active registrations
for the selected term. When a user selects the Midterm Grades link from the Student
Records menu, the system automatically displays the Midterm Grades Term page
(bwskmgrd.P_Write_Term_Selection) first.

The Midterm Grades page includes the following sections.

• The Student Information section includes high-level information about the student.
• The Course Work section includes specific information about the course the student is
taking. If a student has course work at multiple levels for a term in which midterm grades
exist, a separate section is displayed for each level.

Grade Display Controls

Midterm grades can be viewed only if they are specified as viewable on the Term Control
Form (SOATERM) and/or the Section Web Controls (SSAWSEC). (SOATERM controls
the display for all classes in a term, but the display of grades for a specific class can be
overridden on SSAWSEC.)

Note: These controls also control the display of grades on the Active
Registrations page (bwsksreg.p_active_regs).

Example
If there are three courses for which midterm grades have been assigned to the student for
a term and the Display Midterm Grades checkbox in the Web Processing Controls
window of SOATERM is cleared, then the grades are not available for display.

The grades are also not available for display if the Display Midterm Grades checkbox on
SSAWSEC is cleared for all three courses.

However, if the indicator on SOATERM is selected, and for one of the three courses the
indicator on SSAWSEC is selected while for the other two it is cleared, the midterm grade
(if one exists) for only the one course is displayed. The other two courses' grades are not
displayed, even if they exist.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed in the Student Information section.

(Primary) Current Program Name of the student’s current active primary learner curriculum.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 372

 Item Description/Source Information

(Primary) Level Student level associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary learner curriculum. If no department is associated
with the current active primary learner curriculum, the field label
says only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple other fields of study.

Secondary Name of the student’s current active secondary curriculum. If the

student has multiple current active secondary curricula, the set of
fields will be displayed multiple times.

(Secondary) Level Student level associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary learner curriculum. If no department is
associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum,
the field label will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple majors.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 373

 Item Description/Source Information

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner

Concentration curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

The following fields are displayed in the Coursework section of this page.

CRN Course reference number for the class. If gradable components

have been defined for the class, the CRN is displayed as a
hyperlink to the Component Grade Detail page
(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Section Section number of the class.

Course Title Title associated with the course.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the course.

Midterm Grade Midterm grade assigned to the student.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
(SOATERM) Web, select the Display Midterm Grades checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 374

 Item Description

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display
From (SSAWSEC) Midterm Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting
in SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

CRN If hyperlinked, goes to the Component Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Select another Term Goes to the Midterm Grades Term page

(bwskmgrd.P_Write_Term_Selection).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Final Grades Selection (bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde)

This page is displayed when the user selects the Final Grades link from the Student
Records menu. The user must select a term from the pulldown list. Term codes available
include all terms for which the student has graded courses in Academic History and that
have been specified as viewable on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) and/or the
Section Web Controls (SSAWSEC). (SOATERM controls the display for all classes in a
term, but the display of grades for a specific class can be overridden on SSAWSEC.)

If a grade hold is currently in effect for the student, the message Your grades are not
available due to holds on your record is displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 375

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Term Term for which the student wants to view final grades.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
(SOATERM) Web, select the Display Final Grades checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window.

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display Final
From (SSAWSEC) Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting in
SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 376

 Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Final Grades page

(bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde) with the data for the selected
term displayed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Final Grades (bwskogrd.P_ViewGrde)

This page displays any final grades that have been rolled to Academic History for the
selected term. It also displays the student’s academic standing (if available), GPA, and
credit statistics for a selected term.

Note: Because academic standing, hours, and grade statistics are values
that are normally calculated by batch processes at the end of a term,
making the Display Grades functions available before end-of-term
processing has been completed for a term may cause incomplete or
erroneous information to be displayed.

If the student has taken courses at multiple course levels in the term, separate Course
Work sections are displayed for the different levels.

When a user selects the Final Grades link from the Student Records menu, the system
automatically displays the Final Grades selection page
(bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde) first.

The Final Grades page includes the following sections.

• The Student Information section includes high-level information about the student.
• The Coursework section includes specific information about the course the student is
taking. If a student has course work at multiple levels for a term in which midterm grades
exist, a separate section is displayed for each level.

• The Incomplete Coursework section includes information about courses for which the
student has received a grade signifying “incomplete.” This section includes the
extension date by which coursework must be submitted and the grade the student will
receive if the coursework is not submitted.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 377

 • The Summary section includes cumulative information about the student’s coursework.

Grade Display Controls

Final grades can be viewed only if they are specified as viewable on the Term Control
Form (SOATERM) and/or the Section Web Controls (SSAWSEC). (SOATERM controls
the display for all classes in a term, but the display of grades for a specific class can be
overridden on SSAWSEC.)

Note: These controls also control the display of grades on the Active
Registrations page (bwsksreg.p_active_regs).

Example
If there are three courses for which midterm grades have been assigned to the student for
a term and the Display Final Grades checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window
of SOATERM is cleared, then the grades are not available for display.

The grades are also not available for display if the Display Final Grades checkbox on
SSAWSEC is cleared for all three courses.

However, if the indicator on SOATERM is selected, and for one of the three courses the
indicator on SSAWSEC is selected while for the other two it is cleared, the final grade (if
one exists) for only the one course is displayed. The other two courses' grades are not
displayed, even if they exist.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed in the Student Information section.

(Primary) Current Program Name of the student’s current active primary learner curriculum.

(Primary) Level Student level associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 378

 Item Description/Source Information

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary learner curriculum. If no department is associated
with the current active primary learner curriculum, the field label
says only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple other fields of study.

Secondary Name of the student’s current active secondary curriculum. If the

student has multiple current active secondary curricula, the set of
fields will be displayed multiple times.

(Secondary) Level Student level associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary learner curriculum. If no department is
associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum,
the field label will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple majors.

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 379

 Item Description/Source Information

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner

Concentration curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Academic Standing Student’s academic standing for the term.

The following fields are displayed in the Coursework section of this page.

CRN Course reference number for the class. If gradable components

have been defined for the class, the CRN is displayed as a
hyperlink to the Component Grade Detail page
(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Section Section number of the class.

Course Title Title associated with the course.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the course.

Final Grade Final grade assigned to the student.

Attempted Attempted credit hours for the class.

Earned Earned credit hours for the class.

GPA Hours Number of hours used to calculate the student’s GPA for the
class.

Quality Points Number of points earned for the class (earned credit hours
multiplied by GPA).

The following fields are in the Incomplete Coursework section. This section is displayed only if
the student has incomplete coursework.

CRN Course reference number for the class.

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Section Section number of the class.

Extension Date Date by which coursework must be submitted to earn a grade

other than the default final grade specified.

Default Final Grade Grade that will be assigned for the class if coursework is not
submitted by the extension date.

The following fields are displayed in the Summary section.

Current statistics Current hour and GPA statistics.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 380

 Item Description/Source Information

Cumulative statistics Cumulative hour and GPA statistics.

Transfer statistics Cumulative transfer hour and GPA statistics.

Overall statistics Overall hour and GPA statistics.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
(SOATERM) Web, select the Display Final Grades checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window.

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display Final
From (SSAWSEC) Grades checkbox as appropriate to override the setting in
SOATERM.

Incomplete Grade Rules If you want the Incomplete Coursework section to be displayed on
Form (SHAINCG) the Web, select the Web Display checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

CRN If hyperlinked, goes to the Component Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Select another Term Goes to the Final Grades selection page

(bwskogrd.P_ViewTermGrde).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 381

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Grade Detail Term (bwsksmrk.P_Write_Term_Selection)

This page is displayed when the user selects the Grade Detail link from the Student
Records menu. The user must select a term from the pulldown list. Term codes available
include all terms for which the student has an active registration and at least one gradable
component, and that have been specified as viewable on the Term Control Form
(SOATERM) and/or the Section Web Controls (SSAWSEC). (SOATERM controls the
display for all classes in a term, but the display of grades for a specific class can be
overridden on SSAWSEC.)

If a grade hold is currently in effect for the student, the message None of your courses
have grade detail to display is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Term Term for which the student wants to view grade detail.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the
(SOATERM) Web, select the Display Grade Detail checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window.

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display Grade
From (SSAWSEC) Detail checkbox as appropriate to override the setting in
SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 382

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Section Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection) with the data for
the selected term displayed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Section Grade Detail (bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection)

This page is used to view a list of the student’s active registrations for the selected term. If
the class has gradable components, the CRN of the class is displayed as a hyperlink,
allowing the user to access the Component Grade Detail page
(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail) for that class.

When a user selects the Grade Detail link from the Student Records menu, the system
automatically displays the Grade Detail Term page
(bwsksmrk.p_write_term_selection) first.

This page includes the following sections.

• The Student Information section includes high-level information about the student.
• The Course Work section includes specific information about the course the student is
taking.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 383

 Item Description/Source Information

Degree Degree associated with the student’s primary curriculum for the
selected term.

Major Student’s declared major.

Level Student’s level.

CRN Course reference number for the class.

If gradable components have been defined for the class, the CRN
is displayed as a hyperlink to the Component Grade Detail page
(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Section Section number of the class.

Title Title associated with the course.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the course.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form If you want final grades for the whole term displayed on the Web,
(SOATERM) select the Display Grade Detail checkbox in the Web Processing
Controls window.

Section Web Controls For a specific class, if desired, select or clear the Display Grade
From (SSAWSEC) Detail checkbox as appropriate to override the setting in
SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 384

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

CRN If hyperlinked, goes to the Component Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Select another Term Goes to the Grade Detail Term page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_term_selection).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Component Grade Detail

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail)
This page displays the detail of gradable components for the section chosen on the
Section Grade Detail page (bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection).

The midterm and final grades displayed on this page do not reflect any changes to made
after grades have been posted to Academic History, but these changes are reflected on
the student’s academic transcript.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

CRN Course reference number for the class.

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Section Section number of the class.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 385

 Item Description/Source Information

Title Title associated with the course.

Credits Credit hours for which the student is registered for the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Midterm Percent Midterm calculated percent, if any, assigned to the student.

Midterm Grade Midterm grade, if any, assigned to the student.

Final Percent Final calculated percent, if any, assigned to the student.

Final Grade Final grade, if any, assigned to the student.

Component Title Title of a gradable component.

Score/Out Of Score the student was assigned for the component and the total
available points, displayed in nn/nnn format. If no score has been
assigned, an asterisk is displayed in place of a student score.

Percentage Percentage assigned, if any, for the component.

Letter Grade Letter grade assigned if any, for the component.

Must Pass Indicates whether the student must earn a passing grade for the
component to pass the class.

Weight Percentage of the total class score assigned to this component.

Include in Midterm or Final Indicates whether the component is to be calculated in the

midterm grade (M) or the final grade (F).

All grades are included in the final grade.

Subcomponents If subcomponents have been defined for this component, the

word View is displayed as a hyperlink to the Subcomponent
Grade Detail page (bwsksmrk.P_DispSubc). If no
subcomponents have been defined for this component, the word
None is displayed.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 386

 Link Action

View If displayed in the Subcomponents field, goes to the

Subcomponent Grade Detail page (bwsksmrk.P_DispSubc).

Return to Previous Goes to the previous page being viewed by the user.

Select Another CRN Goes to the Section Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_crn_selection).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Subcomponent Grade Detail

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail)
This page displays the detail of the gradable subcomponents chosen on the Component
Grade Detail page (bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Title Title associated with the course.

Course Course number of the class.

CRN Course reference number for the class.

Component Title Title of a gradable component.

Subcomponent Title Title of a gradable subcomponent.

Score/Out Of Score the student was assigned for the component and the total
available points, displayed in nn/nnn format. If no score has been
assigned, an asterisk is displayed in place of a student score.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 387

 Item Description/Source Information

Percentage Percentage assigned, if any, for the component.

Letter Grade Letter grade assigned if any, for the component.

Must Pass Indicates whether the student must earn a passing grade for the
component to pass the class.

Weight Percentage of the total class score assigned to this component.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Back Returns to the Component Grade Detail page

(bwsksmrk.p_write_grade_detail).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Academic Transcript Options

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran)
This page is displayed when the user selects the Academic Transcript link from the
Student Records menu or the Eligibility menu. The user must select a transcript level and
type from the pulldown list. Level codes available include every level at which the student

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 388

 has work in Academic History, plus the default value All Levels. Type codes available
include all transcript types that have been Web-enabled.

If any holds preventing the running of transcripts are in effect for the student, the message
Your transcript is not available due to holds on your record is displayed. To view the holds,
the student can select the View Holds link.

The list of valid values for the In Progress Cut-off Term field displays only terms with in-
progress courses, based on the course level. The default value is the highest term from
the available terms in the list. None can also be selected from the list.

The Delivery Method field is required, and the value defaults to None. The student must
make a select a different value to continue. When None is selected, the Payment Options
page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Trans_Request_Charges) is not displayed. A value of
No Charge is displayed as an option when the amount is 0 on SHATPRT.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Transcript Level Level for which the student wants to view a transcript.

The pulldown list includes every level at which the student has
work in academic history, plus the default value All Levels. If
All Levels is selected, the transcript will include all work in
Academic History for all levels, with courses displayed in the term
in which they were taken. If a single level is selected, the
transcript will include work only at the selected level.

Transcript Type Type of transcript the student wants to view.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Transcript Type Rules Define your Web transcripts types.

Form (SHATPRT)

Transcript Type Code Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each transcript type you
Validation Form want to be available on the Web.
(STVTPRT)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 389

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Printed Transcript Goes to the Transcript Request Address page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address).

Transcript Request Status Transcript Order Date page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_order_requests).

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Academic Transcript page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTran).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Eligibility menu bmenu.P_FACostMnu

Student Records menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Web Page Fatal/Warning Error Messages

A number of error messages described earlier in this section (for example, Invalid Student
Status Code) report valid data conditions that do not require specific action. However, a

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 390

 number of error messages report conditions that fail to allow Web registration to function
correctly. These messages are reported below.

Message: Transcript not Available

Source: bwskotrn.P_ViewTran
Action: End user or administrative action required. The transcript type has
been defined on the Transcript Type Code Validation Form
(STVTPRT), but no rules for the type have been defined on Transcript
Type Rules Form (SHATPRT).

Academic Transcript (bwskotrn.P_ViewTran)

This page displays an unofficial transcript, based on the rules for the selected transcript
level and type.

When a user selects the Academic Transcript link from the Student Records menu or the
Eligibility menu, the system automatically displays the Academic Transcript Options
(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran) first.

The transcript data displayed is similar in content and format to the printed Banner
transcript, but has some important differences:

• Web transcripts are always unofficial. The statement This is NOT an official transcript is
displayed after every major transcript section.

• Printed transcripts print for one level only. One option for Web transcripts is “All Levels”.
When an all-level transcript is displayed on the Web, all courses, regardless of their
level, print in chronological order in the term in which they were taken.

• Web transcripts provide term-by-term running cumulative totals for GPA statistics.
Printed transcripts do not include running cumulative totals.

• If the displayed transcript is for all levels, the term-by-term running cumulatives will
reflect the combined totals for all levels. The Transcript Totals at the bottom of the
transcript will reflect separate totals for each level included in the transcript. Degree
GPA statistics will reflect only courses applied to the specific degree.

• Printed transcripts only print awarded degrees. Web transcripts display Degree
information for all degrees that are Web-enabled, regardless of the degree status, and
also print the status of the degree(s).

• Web transcripts include pre-Banner hours in the final Transcript Totals, but these hours
are not included in the term-by-term running cumulative totals.

• Web transcripts include transfer work in Degree GPA statistics and in the final Transcript
Totals, but these hours are not included in the term-by-term running cumulative totals.

• Not all data available for printing on a transcript are available for display on the Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 391

 Enrollments that have not yet been graded and rolled to Academic History are displayed in
the Courses in Progress section of the page.

Because academic standing is calculated by batch processing at the end of a term, only
courses that have been rolled to Academic History are displayed on Web transcripts.
Because transcript totals display the stored cumulative GPA statistics, Web transcripts
may reflect incomplete or erroneous information during end-of-term processing. You may
want to consider disabling display of the transcript pages during end-of-term processing.

Web transcripts include a number of sections. Transcript sections may or may not be
displayed, depending on the rules for the transcript type or data available for the individual
student/level combination. For example, transfer work may be displayed depending on the
transcript rules, while degree information may be displayed depending on the student's
data.

Transcripts with Student Centric Periods

The Academic Transcript page (bwskotrn.P_ViewTran) displays course history
information and GPA totals by student centric period without term details for students
included in student centric periods.

The student centric period is displayed as one continuous enrollment period that is not
broken up by the terms contained in the student centric period. The term header is not
displayed on the Self-Service transcript for student centric periods. Terms are grouped
within the student centric period for the student.

Note: For more information on setting up and using student centric period
processing, please see the “Student Centric Period Processing”
procedure topic in the “Registration” chapter in the Banner Student User
Guide.

A term that is not associated with a student centric period is displayed chronologically on
the Web page after the end of the student centric period (which starts before that term
begins) and the start of the next student centric period. For example, an intersession
which is not part of a student centric period, which falls between the two terms that make
up the student centric period, will be printed after that student centric period.

The student centric period data is substituted for the term data when the Student Centric
Period Statistics checkbox is checked (set to Y) on SHATPRT. When the Student
Centric Period Statistics checkbox is unchecked (set to N), data is processed using
standard term functionality.

The Self-Service transcript reports data in three scenarios when the Student Centric
Period Statistics checkbox is checked.

• When all of a student's coursework belongs to a student centric period, data is reported
by student centric period for all of the student’s enrollment and/or academic history
records.

• When some of a student's coursework belongs to a student centric period and some
coursework does not belong to a student centric period, data is reported by student
centric period and by standard terms (presented as if the term is a student centric
period) for the student’s enrollment and/or academic history records.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 392

 • When none of a student's coursework belongs to a student centric period and no
student centric period exists, data is reported by standard terms (presented as if the
term is a student centric period) for the student’s enrollment and/or academic history
records.

Note: When the Student Centric Period Statistics checkbox is checked

(set to Y) on SHATPRT, all information is presented as if it belongs to a
student centric period header. Data is displayed as being in a “period”.
However, the data may actually reflect term data when student centric
periods are not in use or when the term does not have an associated
student centric period.

The process checks the term header record (SHRTTRM) for each term in the student’s
academic history. When the SHRTTRM_SCPS_CODE is Null for a term, the student
does not have a student centric period associated with that term. In this case, the standard
term information is displayed on the transcript for the academic history information.

When a student has a registration record for a term but no term header record exists, the
student centric period to which that term is associated is determined by:

• finding the general student record (SGBSTDN) that is active for the registration term
• using the student centric period cycle code (SGBSTDN_SCPC_CODE) from that record
• finding the record for that registration term in the SORSCPT table where:
• that registration term matches the SORSCPT_TERM_CODE

• the cycle code (SGBSTDN_SCPC_CODE) from the SGBSTDN table matches the
cycle code (SOBSCPS_SCPC_CODE) in the SOBSCPS table
• the student centric period code from the SOBSCPS table matches the student
centric period code from the SORSCPT table

When the SHRTTRM_SCPS_CODE has a student centric period value for the term, that
code is used to group the terms that belong to each student centric period. It also
populates the Academic Session data on the transcript. The GPA totals and GPA
information for the student centric period are used to populate the Academic Summary
data on the transcript. Data for standard term information for the Academic Session and
Academic Summary comes from SHRTGPA.

When the student centric period is in effect for the term and student:

• Term comments for all terms are grouped together.

• The major that is effective for the first term of the student centric period is used.
• Term statistics data comes from SHRSGPA.
• Academic standing by term data comes from the highest term header record in the
student centric period.

• In-progress courses are listed at the end with the associated student centric period.
• Coursework from academic history data is displayed for the associated student centric
period.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 393

 Transfer coursework is not associated with a student centric period. Transfer credit is
displayed at the beginning of the transcript based on the transfer attendance period
entered on SHATRNS.

Study Path Charges

This page displays charges by term with study paths, when study paths are used, and the
Display Study Paths checkbox is checked on the Student Billing Control Form
(TSACTRL). Charges are grouped by study path under the subheading of the study path
name. Charges are sorted in ascending order by study path sequence number for the
term in the TBRACCD table. Charges are sorted in date order within the study path. When
multiple study path sequence numbers exist, a subheading is created for each study path
name, and the associated charges are listed.

General charges are displayed first in ascending order by date. When no study path
information exists, all charges for the term are displayed as general charges without a
study path subheading. Credits and payments are then listed, and the summary totals are
displayed. The naming rules created on SOACTRL determine whether the study path
name is displayed.

Note: For more information on setting up and using study paths, please
see Appendix E, “Study Path Processing”, in the Banner Student User
Guide.

Source Information
Due to the repetitive nature of the Academic Transcript page, the sources of the data are
provided in the following list.

• Data for the Student Information section comes from the General Student Form
(SGASTDN).

• Data for the Degree Information section comes from degree records displayed and
maintained on the Degrees and Other Formal Awards Form (SHADEGR). Degree
information is displayed only if the degree code is Web-enabled.

• Data for the Transfer Credit Accepted by Institution section comes from transfer work in
Academic History, as maintained on the Transfer Course Form (SHATRNS). Work in
Transfer Articulation (that is, that has not yet been rolled to Academic History) is not
displayed.

• Data for the Pre-Institutional Hours section comes from the SHRTPGA table.
• Data for the Institution Credit section comes from work at your institution that has been
rolled to Academic History. Institutional courses are displayed on the Course Summary
Form (SHACRSE). Academic standing for each term is the end-of-term academic
standing maintained on the Term Course Maintenance Form (SHAINST). The current
and cumulative GPA statistics displayed are calculated. (They are not the stored
SHRTGPA information).

• Data for the Transcript Totals section comes from the stored level GPA information
contained on the Term Sequence Course History Form (SHATERM). Because this is

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 394

 stored information, if a GPA calculation has not been performed after rolling new
courses into history, this information will not be up to date.

• Data for the Courses in Progress section comes from work at your institution that has
been graded and rolled to Academic History.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed in the Student Information section.

Name Student’s full name, including last name prefix, if applicable.

Birth Date Student’s date of birth.

Student Type Student type associated with the term.

(Primary) Current Program Name of the student’s current active primary learner curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary learner curriculum. If no department is associated
with the current active primary learner curriculum, the field label
says only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple other fields of study.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 395

 Item Description/Source Information

Secondary Name of the student’s current active secondary learner

curriculum. If the student has multiple current active secondary
learner curricula, the set of fields will be displayed multiple times.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary learner curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum.

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary learner curriculum. If no department is
associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum,
the field label will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple majors.

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner

Concentration curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

The following fields are displayed in the Degrees Awarded section. This section name can be
changed by your institution. See the Setup Requirements below for more information.

Degree Status and Degree The field label for this field is the status of the degree, such as
Pending, Awarded, and so on.
Degree Date Date on which the degree was awarded.

Institutional Honors Honors given to the student by the institution.

Departmental Honors Honors given to the student by a department.

Primary Degree Label denoting that the fields displayed below are for the primary
outcome curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
outcome curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
outcome curriculum.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 396

 Item Description/Source Information

(Primary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active primary
outcome curriculum.

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary outcome curriculum. If no department is associated
with the primary outcome curriculum, the field label says only
Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
Concentration outcome curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times
if there are multiple other fields of study.

Secondary Label denoting that the fields displayed below are for the
secondary outcome curriculum.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary outcome curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
outcome curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
outcome curriculum.

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary outcome curriculum. If no department is
associated with the secondary outcome curriculum, the field label
will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple majors.

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary outcome curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 397

 Item Description/Source Information

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration of the current active secondary

Concentration outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary outcome curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Committee Name(s) of any committee(s) on which the student served.

Status Student’s status on the committee.

Papers Title(s) of any qualifying paper(s) submitted by the student. For

example, if the paper is a doctoral dissertation, the field label is
Doctoral Dissertation.

Comments Any comment text associated with a qualifying paper.

Events Description(s) of any events(s) associated with the student.

Decision Decision associated with the event.

Grade Grade associated with the event.

The following fields are displayed at the end of each section (except the Courses in Progress
section). Data is included, if available, for both current totals and cumulative totals.

Attempt Hours Total number of credit hours attempted by the student.

Passed Hours Total number of credit hours for which the student received a
passing grade.

Earned Hours Total number of credit hours earned by the student.

CEU Hours Number of credit hours associated with a continuing education

course.

GPA Hours Total number of hours included in GPA calculations.

Quality Points Total number of points earned by the student.

GPA Student’s GPA.

The following fields are displayed in the Pre-Institutional Hours section of the transcript. The
data displayed in these fields is for transfer work. If the user selects All Levels in the Transcript
Level field on the Academic Transcript Options page (bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran), then
all pre-institutional hours for all levels are displayed as a single total.

Attempt Hours Total number of credit hours attempted by the student.

Passed Hours Total number of credit hours for which the student received a
passing grade.

Earned Hours Total number of credit hours earned by the student.

GPA Hours Total number of hours included in GPA calculations.

Quality Points Total number of points earned by the student.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 398

 Item Description/Source Information

GPA Student’s GPA.

The following fields are displayed in the Transfer Credit section of the transcript.

Term Term for which the transfer credit was earned.

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Title In-progress course title.

Grade Grade the student earned for the class.

Quality Points Number of points earned for the class (earned credit hours
multiplied by GPA).

R Indicates that the class has been repeated. If the class has been
repeated, one of the following values is displayed:

A - The class is excluded from earned hours but included for GPA
calculation.

E - The class is excluded from both earned hour and GPA

calculation.

I - The class is included in both earned hour and GPA

calculation.

Credit Hours Earned credit hours for the class.

The following fields are displayed in the Institution Credit and Courses in Progress sections of
the transcript.

Term Description of the term.

Term comments Any comments about the term, displayed under the term header.

College College associated with the term.

Major Major associated with the term.

Student type Student type associated with the term.

Academic Standing Student’s academic standing for the term.

Subject Subject of the class.

Course Course number of the class.

Course comments Any comments about institutional courses, displayed under the
course title.

Campus Campus associated with the class.

Level Level at which the student is registered for the class.

Title Title associated with the course.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 399

 Item Description/Source Information

Grade Grade the student earned for the class.

Quality Points Number of points earned for the class (earned credit hours
multiplied by GPA).

Credit Hours Earned credit hours for the class.

Start and End Dates Start and end dates of an Open Learning or a continuing
education course. Dates for a continuing education course are not
displayed until the course is graded.

R Indicates that the class has been repeated. If the class has been
repeated, one of the following values is displayed:

A - The class is excluded from earned hours but included for GPA
calculation.

E - The class is excluded from both earned hour and GPA

calculation.

I - The class is included in both earned hour and GPA

calculation.

CEU Contact Hours Number of contact hours associated with a continuing education
course.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Degree Code Validation Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each degree code that
Form (STVDEGC) you want to be available on the Web.

Transcript Type Rules Define your Web transcripts types. See “Set Up Academic
Form (SHATPRT) Transcripts on the Web” on page 484 for more information.

Transcript Type Code Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each transcript type code
Validation Form that you want to be available on the Web.
(STVTPRT)

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want the Name and Birth Date fields to be displayed in the
(GTVSDAX) Student Information section, enter TRUE in the External Code
field for the NAMEWTRAN internal code.

Web Tailor If desired, modify the text associated with the SPACER label for
the procedure bwskotrn.P_ViewTran.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 400

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Transfer Credit Goes to the Transfer Credit section of the page. (This link is
displayed only if the information is included on the transcript.)

Institution Credit Goes to the Institution Credit section of the page. (This link is
displayed only if the information is included on the transcript.)

Transcript Totals Goes to the Transcript Totals section of the page. (This link is
displayed only if the information is included on the transcript.)

Courses in Progress Goes to the Courses in Progress section of the page. (This link is
displayed only if the information is included on the transcript.)

Overall Financial Aid If an aid year has not been selected in the current Web session,
Status goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).

If an aid year has been selected in the current Web session, goes
to the Financial Aid Status for Award Year page
(bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).

Financial Aid Eligibility Goes to the Eligibility menu (bmenu.P_FACostMnu).

Menu

Request Printed Transcript Goes to the Transcript Request Address page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address).

Transcript Request Status Goes to the Transcript Order Date page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_order_requests).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 401

 Transcript Request Address
(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address)
This page allows a student to specify where a transcript is to be sent. It is the first page in
the process for requesting transcripts. A value can be entered in only one of the fields on
this page. (See “Request Transcripts” on page 508 for step-by-step procedures.)

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

External College Code External code assigned to the outside institution. This field should
be used if the transcript is to be sent to an institution. If the user
doesn’t know the external code, he or she can use the Look Up
College Code link to locate the institution. If an invalid code is
entered in this field, the message External college code is invalid
is displayed.

One Of Your Addresses Student’s address. This field should be used if the transcript is to
be sent to one of the student’s addresses.

Internal College Name of the internal college. This field should be used if the
transcript is to be sent to a college within your institution.

Issue to Name of the person or office to whom the transcript is to be sent.

This is a free-form text field (up to 185 characters), and the value
entered in it is automatically displayed in the Issued To field on
the Select Transcript Type page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type).

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

This page collects name and address information that will be inserted into the Transcript
Request Collector table (SHTTRAN). Although it does not update Banner itself, it does
pass information to the next page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 402

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Lookup College Code Goes to the College Lookup page

(bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Select Transcript Type page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Select Transcript Type

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type)
This page is used to specify the transcript type the student wants sent and to provide
address and contact information for the recipient. It is accessed in one of the following
ways:

• when the user selects the Continue button on the Transcript Request Address page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 403

 • when the user selects the Copy selected College information to Data Entry form
button on the third College Lookup page (bwskalog.p_proc_sbgi_code)

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Transcript Type Type of transcript to be sent.

Course Levels Level of courses to be included on the transcript.

College Name Name of the institution to which the transcript is to be sent.

If the user used the lookup function or selected an internal

college on the Transcript Request Address page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address), the
system automatically enters the institution name in this field.

If the user specified one of his or her own addresses or did not
specify anything on the Transcript Request Address page, this
field is not displayed; instead, the Issued To field is displayed.

Issued To Name of the person or institution to which the transcript is to be

sent. This includes the last name prefix of the person, if
applicable.

If the user specified one of his or her own addresses on the

Transcript Request Address page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address), the
system automatically enters the student’s name in this field.

If the user did not specify anything on the Transcript Request

Address page, this field is blank.

If the user used the lookup function or selected an internal

college on the Transcript Request Address page, this field is not
displayed; instead, the College Name field is displayed.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries
(no validation).

Street Street address to which the transcript is to be sent. Up to four

lines of information can be entered. Any default values can be
changed.

City City of the transcript recipient’s address. Any default values can
be changed.

State or Province State or province of the transcript recipient’s address. Any

default values can be changed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 404

 Item Description/Source Information

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code of the transcript recipient’s address. Any
default values can be changed.

Nation Nation of the transcript recipient’s address. Any default values

can be changed.

Country Code, Area Code, Phone number of the transcript recipient.

Phone Number, Extension,
and International Access
Code

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Transcript Type Code Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each transcript type you
Validation Form want to be available on the Web.
(STVTPRT)

Web Transcript Request If you want all course levels to be included on all transcripts,
Rules Form (SHAWTRR) select the Default course level to ALL on transcript checkbox.

If you select this checkbox, the Course Levels field will not be
displayed on the Select Transcript Type page.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

This page collects information that will be inserted into the Transcript Request Collector
table (SHTTRAN). Although it does not update Banner itself, it does pass information to
the next page in the process.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 405

 Link Action

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Transcript Request Options page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_data).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Transcript Request Options

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_data)
This page is used to provide more information about the transcript request. It is accessed
when the user selects the Continue button on the Select Transcript Type page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_type).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Number of Copies Number of transcript copies the student wants sent.

(Up to X)

Official Transcript Radio button group the student uses to indicate whether an
official or unofficial transcript is to be generated.

In Progress Last term for which the student wants “in progress” work to
Cut-off Term appear on the transcript. The pulldown list displays all terms for
which the student has active registrations that have not been
rolled to academic history for the course level(s) selected. The
default value is the maximum term for the displayed terms.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 406

 Item Description/Source Information

Print Transcript Designation for when the student wants the transcript to be
printed.

The pulldown list includes the value As soon as possible,

and can include other values such as Hold for grades and
Hold for degree.
Send Electronically Radio button group the student uses to indicate whether the
transcript should be sent electronically.

This field is displayed only if your system is set up for electronic

data interface (EDI) and if the student entered the college code or
used the lookup function on the Transcript Request Address page
(bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_address).

Delivery Method Method by which the student wants the transcript to be delivered.

This field is required for Self-Service transcript requests. If a

delivery method is not selected, the user is prompted to select
one to continue with the request.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Web Transcript Request In the Maximum transcripts per request field, enter the
Rules Form (SHAWTRR) maximum number of transcripts you want a student to be able to
order per request.

Transcript Type Rules In the Self-Service Print Options window:

Form (SHATPRT)
If you want to allow students to be able to specify that transcript
requests be held until grades have been posted, select the Allow
Hold for End of Term Processing checkbox.

If you want students to be able to request that transcripts be sent

via electronic data interchange (EDI), select the Allow Electronic
Transcripts on the Web checkbox.

If you want to allow students to be able to specify that transcript

requests be held until degrees have been posted, select the
Allow Hold for Degree Processing checkbox.

Source/Background If you want students to be able to request that transcripts be sent

Institution Code Validation electronically, select EDI in the Electronic field.
Form (STVSBGI)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 407

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

This page collects information that will be inserted into the Transcript Request Collector
table (SHTTRAN). Although it does not update Banner itself, it does pass information to
the next page in the process.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue If the request requires payment, goes to the Payment Options

page (bwskwtrr.p_disp_trans_request_charges).

If the request does not require payment or if there is only one

applicable payment type, goes to the Transcript Request
Summary page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Payment Options
(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Trans_Request_Charges)
This page allows the user in specify payment options. It is displayed when the student
selects the Continue link on the Transcript Request Options page

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 408

 (bwskwtrr.p_disp_transcript_request_data) and if there is a charge
associated with the delivery method.

If there is no charge associated with the delivery method, the Transcript Request
Summary (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type) page is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Payment Total Amount due for the transcript request.

Payment Method Method by which the student will make the payment.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements, unless you are using study paths.

To use study paths, do the following setup.

Item Description

Web Self Service Option Define the delivery methods and their associated charges.
Code Validation Form
(STVWSSO)

Web Payment Option Define the payment methods. If a method is to incur credit card
Code Validation Form charges, be sure to select the For Credit Card checkbox.
(STVWPYO)

Web Transcript Request In the Maximum free transcripts before charges field, enter the
Rules Form (SHAWTRR) maximum number of transcripts a student can request before
charges are applied to requests.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 409

 Item Description

Transcript Type Rules In the Service Level block (accessed via the Web Transcript
Form (SHATPRT) Control option):

Define each delivery method that you want to be available on the

Web.

In the Per field, specify whether charges are to be assessed per

copy (C) or per request (R).

“Per request” charges will always be charged. “Per copy” charges

will be charged only if the student has exceeded the number of
free transcript copies allowed before charges (as established on
SHAWTRR).

In the Payment Options block (accessed via the Web Transcript

Control option):

Define each payment option that you want to be available on the

Web.

Credit Card Merchant ID Define the credit card types that you want to be displayed on the
Form (GOAMERC) Web. The system code, the process code, and the merchant ID
determine the credit card types that will be displayed to the user in
the drop-down list for the Credit Card Type field.

If Credit Card Payment processing has already been set up for other procedures, creating a
new Process Name record in GTVPROC is the only step that is required to implement Credit
Card Payment processing for Web Transcript Request functionality.

Process Name Create a new record in the Process Name Validation Form
(GTVPROC) with the following values in each field:
• GTVPROC_CODE = WEBCCTRANSREQ
• GTVPROC_DESC = Web Credit Card Request
Process
• GTVPROV_SYS_REQ_IND = Y
• GTVPROC_USER_ID = GENERAL
• GTVPROC_ACTIVITY_DATE = SYSDATE

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

This page collects some information that will be inserted into the Transcript Request
Collector table (SHTTRAN). Although it does not update Banner itself, it does pass
information to the next page in the process.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 410

 Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Transcript Request Summary page

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type).

Use the Submit Request button on the Transcript Request

Summary page to access the external vendor payment page for
payment by credit card or display the Signature page
(bwskwtrr.p_dispsigpage).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Transcript Request Summary

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type)
This page displays a summary of the transcript request. When the student selects the
Submit Request button, the data that has been collected through the transcript request
process is inserted as a new record into the Transcript Request Collector table
(SHTTRAN).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 411

 Item Description/Source Information

Issued to Name of the person or institution to whom the transcript is to be

sent. This includes the last name prefix of the person, if
applicable.

Address and Phone Address and phone information for the transcript recipient.

Course Levels Course level(s) specified by the student.

Copies Ordered Number of transcript copies requested.

Official Transcript Indicator of whether or not the transcript requested is an official

one.

Delivery Method Delivery method specified by the student.

Cost of Order Amount due for the transcript request.

Payment Method Method by which the student will pay any charges due.

Print Transcript Designation for when the student wants the transcript to be
printed.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

All fields Stored in the Transcript Request Collector Table (SHTTRAN).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 412

 Button/Icon Action

Submit Request Accesses the external vendor payment page for payment by
credit card or displays the Signature page
(bwskwtrr.p_dispsigpage).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Signature Page (bwskwtrr.P_DispSigPage)

This page displays a customized message verifying that the transcript request has been
received. The message can vary depending on the transcript type selected for the
request, or it can be the same for every transcript type. If no customized message is set
up, the message Your transcript request has been received is displayed.

The Signature Page is a customized letter displayed on the Web after an application is
completed or after a credit card payment has been made. The letter is created on the
HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and is associated with an transcript type and letter
type on the Transcript Type Rules Form (SHATPRT). If a customized signature letter has
not been created, then the default Information Text defined by your institution using Web
Tailor is displayed.

Web Page Fields

No fields appear on this page by default; you must define your letter on the Format HTML
Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and use the Transcript Type Rules Form (SHATPRT) to
associate the letter to the transcript type.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Letter Code Validation Create a letter code for the letter you want to be displayed on this
Form (GTVLETR) page.

Format HTML Letter Rules Create a line for the letter code you defined on GTVLETR, and
Form (SOAELTR) enter T in the Module field.

Define the text that you want to appear on this Web page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 413

 Item Description

Transcript Type Rules Enter the letter code in the Electronic Letter Code field in the
Form (SHATPRT) Self-Service Print Options window.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Request Printed Transcript Goes to the Transcript Request Address page

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Transcript Order Date

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Order_Requests)
This page is used to select the order date of transcript requests to be viewed. It is
displayed when the View Status of Transcript Requests link is selected from the
Student Records menu.If the user does not have any transcript requests, the system
displays the message You have no transcript records on file.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 414

 Item Description/Source Information

Date Ordered Date for which the user wants to view transcript requests.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Request Printed Transcript Goes to the Transcript Request Address page

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Transcript Order Status page

(bwskwtrr.p_disp_status_of_order).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 415

 Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Transcript Order Status

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Status_of_Order)
This page displays a summary of information about the transcript request(s) made on the
date selected on the Transcript Order Date page
(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Order_Requests).

If the transcript has not yet been sent, a message appears in the Date Sent field indicating
that the order is still being processed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Date Sent Date that the transcript was sent. If the transcript has not yet been
sent, the system displays the message Your order is still in
processing. Please check again at another time.

Issued to Name of the person or institution to whom the transcript is to be

sent. This includes the last name prefix, if applicable.

Address and Phone Address and phone information for the transcript recipient.

Course Levels Course level(s) specified by the student.

Number of Copies Number of transcript copies requested.

Ordered

Official Transcript Indicator of whether or not the transcript requested is an official

one.

Delivery Method Delivery method specified by the student.

Cost Of Order Amount due for the transcript request.

Payment Method Method by which the student will pay any charges due.

Print Transcript Designation for when the student wants the transcript to be
printed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 416

 Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Academic Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Request Printed Transcript Goes to the Transcript Request Address page

(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Address).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Degree Evaluation Record (bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent)

This page displays the curriculum for which a student can run a degree evaluation. It lists
information for a student’s curriculum program (primary and secondary). It is using this
page that the student accesses the full Degree Evaluation functionality on the Web.

Degree Evaluation allows students to access WebCAPP (Curriculum, Advising and

Program Planning on the Web). The student uses WebCAPP to audit course work against
a selected primary or secondary program offering at your institution. The student can also
initiate an audit, view results, and print degree audit reports via the Web.

The student can also generate a “what-if analysis,” which allows him or her to generate
evaluations showing what courses need to be taken to meet a particular requirement and
which courses that have already been completed would apply to the discipline in question.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 417

 To access WebCAPP, the student must have a record on any of the following forms:

• Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)

• Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS)
• General Student Form (SGASTDN)
• Degree and Other Formal Awards Form (SHADEGR)
If a compliance hold exists for the student on the Hold Information Form (SOAHOLD), the
message You may not view your evaluations due to holds on your record. is displayed.

If a program description on the record is hyperlinked, a degree evaluation has been run
and can be viewed by selecting the hyperlink. If the program is not hyperlinked, then a
degree evaluation has not been run against that program. Other previously run
compliances can be viewed by selecting the Previous Evaluations link, which goes to the
View Degree Evaluations page (bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

If the following conditions apply, an e-mail link to the student’s advisor is displayed on the
page.

• The student has a primary advisor assigned to him or her on the Multiple Advisors Form
(SGAADVR) for the catalog term associated with the degree evaluation.

• The advisor has an active, preferred, and Web-displayable e-mail address on the E-mail
Address Form (GOAEMAL).

• The e-mail address type on GOAEMAL matches that which is designated in the Faculty
Email field on the WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL).

Determining the Information Displayed

The information on the Degree Evaluation Record page is determined by the following:

• Sequence number associated with the WEBCURR internal code and the external code
associated with the sequence number on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX)

• Record that first matches the hierarchy set up for WEBCURR on GTVSDAX
For example, let’s say that your institution has decided that the information displayed
in WebCAPP will match the following setup in GTVSDAX:

Internal Sequen Associated

Internal Code ce External Banner
Code Group Number Code Form

WEBCURR WEBCAPP 1 DEG SHADEGR

WEBCURR WEBCAPP 2 GST SGASTDN

WEBCURR WEBCAPP 3 ADM SAAADMS

WEBCURR WEBCAPP 4 REC SRARECR

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 418

 In this instance, when a student logs into Student Self-Service and selects Degree
Evaluation from the Student Records menu, the system goes through the following
sequence to determine what should be displayed.
• If the student has a SHADEGR record, the system displays it. If not, the system
goes to the next step.
• If the student has a SGASTDN record, the system displays it. If not, the system
goes to the next step.
• If the student has a SAAADMS record, the system displays it. If not, the system
goes to the next step.
• If the student has a SRARECR record, the system displays it. If not, the system
goes to the next step.
• If the student does not have any of the above records, the system displays the
message No current curriculum information was found, and the student cannot
access Degree Evaluation.

Determining the Number of Records Displayed

The number of records displayed is determined by the setting of the Secondary
Curriculum checkbox on the WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL). (See “Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX) Records for WebCAPP Processing” on page 495 for more
information.)

• When the Secondary Curriculum checkbox is selected on SMAWCRL:

• If either the DEG or REC record is designated on GTVSDAX to be displayed, then all
SHADEGR or SRARECR records are displayed. The records are displayed in
catalog term and sequence number order.
• If either the GST or ADM record is designated on GTVSDAX to be displayed, then
both the primary and secondary curriculum (if one exists) are displayed.

• When the Secondary Curriculum checkbox is not selected on SMAWCRL:

• If either the DEG or REC record is designated on GTVSDAX to be displayed, then
the highest catalog term and lowest sequence number SHADEGR or SRARECR
record is displayed
• If either the GST or ADM record is designated on GTVSDAX to be displayed, then
only the primary curriculum is displayed, even if a secondary curriculum exists.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 419

 Item Description/Source Information

Program Name of the curriculum program.

If a degree evaluation has been run for the program, the program
name is displayed as a hyperlink to the Degree Evaluation
Results Report page (bwcksxml.report).

Catalog Term Catalog term associated with the curriculum program.

Level Level associated with the curriculum program.

Campus Campus associated with the curriculum program.

College College associated with the curriculum program.

Degree Degree associated with the curriculum program.

First Major First major associated with the curriculum program.

Department Department associated with the curriculum program, if one exists.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form For the WEBCURR internal code and WEBCAPP internal code
(GTVSDAX) group, specify values in the Sequence and External Code fields
to designate the order in which you want the system to search for
records to be displayed.

WebCAPP Rules Form If you want secondary curriculum program information to be

(SMAWCRL) displayed, select the Secondary Curriculum checkbox.

Decide whether to specify the print type or the compliance type.

• If you want to display any text associated with a print type code,
then in the Print Type field, enter the compliance print code.
• If you want text to be displayed based on rules for a compliance
type, then in the Compliance Type field, enter the compliance
type code.
If you want an e-mail link for the primary advisor to be displayed,
enter the appropriate e-mail type code in the Faculty Email field.

The faculty member must also have an e-mail address assigned

on the E-mail Address Form (GOAEMAL) and be assigned to the
student for an e-mail link to be displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 420

 Item Description

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Program name Goes to the Degree Evaluation Results Report page

(bwcksxml.report).

E-mail your advisor Launches the user’s e-mail program with the advisor’s e-mail
address.

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

What-if Analysis Goes to the What-if Analysis page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwckoacc.P_ViewHold).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 421

 Previous Evaluations (bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval)
This page displays a list of all evaluations that have been run for a student. The student
can select the program name hyperlink to view the results of that evaluation.

You can choose to allow students to delete Web-generated compliance requests and
results using the WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL).

Note: Only requests submitted via the Web can be deleted via the Web.
All other requests must be purged using the Compliance Purge Process
(SMPCPRG).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Program Name of the curriculum program.

Submission Date Date that the evaluation was run.

Request Number Sequence number associated with the evaluation.

Delete Checkbox allowing the student to delete the evaluation from the
system. Only Web-generated evaluations can be deleted.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

WebCAPP Rules Form If you want students to be able to delete Web-generated

(SMAWCRL) evaluations, select the Student Delete checkbox.

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 422

 Item Description

Delete Deleted evaluations are purged from the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

What-if Analysis Goes to the What-If Analysis page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Degree Evaluation Results Report (bwcksxml.report)

This page is used to display the complete compliance evaluation results on one scrollable
page. It contains requirements and detail information for the compliance request. The
report output is available in XML format. The information that is displayed in the XML
output is based on the rules set up on Compliance Print Type Rules Form (SMACPRT)
and is formatted by a stylesheet. You can customize the output using the delivered
template or your own customized template. You can pare down the information that is
displayed to suit your needs or depending on what a student or faculty member should or
should not see.

Web Page Fields

This page does not have any web page fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 423

 Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Note: For more information about using XML compliance output, refer to
the “Use XML Compliance Output” topic in the "Compliance Requests”
chapter of the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page has no links to other web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Generate New Evaluation (bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm)

This page is used to select the curriculum and anticipated graduation term for which the
student wants to run a new degree evaluation, and then to run the evaluation.

Each curriculum for which a student can generate a degree evaluation is displayed as a
radio button selection group composed of the Program, Degree, and Major fields. These
fields are populated from the values from the record that was pulled based on the
WEBCURR internal code on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX).

Each radio button selection group represents a unique curriculum for that source.

The term selected should be the anticipated graduation term. The terms that are included
in the pulldown list are those for which the Web Evaluation Term checkbox in the Web
Processing Controls window of the Term Control Form (SOATERM) is selected. Your
institution may want to add or remove terms on a term-by-term basis.

When the system generates the new evaluation, it uses the defaults defined for the WEB
default compliance code on the Compliance Default Parameters Form (SMADFLT).

After the system generates the new evaluation, it automatically displays the Degree
Evaluation Results Report page (bwcksxml.report).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 424

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Program, Degree, and Radio button group that the student uses to choose the
Major curriculum for which the degree evaluation is to be run.

Term Graduation term for which the student wants to run the degree
evaluation.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Originator Code Validation Define an originator code called WEB.

Form (STVORIG)

Program Definition Rules For each program that you want available for degree evaluations
Form (SMAPRLE) on the Web, select the Web checkbox.

Crosswalk Validation Form Define the settings for the WEBCURR internal code.
(GTVSDAX)

Term Control Form Select the Web Evaluation Term checkbox in the Web
(SOATERM) Processing Controls window for each term that you want available
for degree evaluations on the Web.

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Generate Request When the degree evaluation is successfully run, the data is stored
on the Compliance Management Request Form (SMARQCM).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 425

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

What-if Analysis Goes to the What-if Analysis page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Generate Request Runs the degree evaluation, then goes to the Degree Evaluation
Results Report page (bwcksxml.report) so the user can
view the results.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

What-If Analysis (Step One)

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one)
This page is used to begin a “what-if analysis.” What-if analysis is used to create sample
degree evaluations, which are also called “what-if scenarios”, allowing a student to see
what requirements need to be fulfilled for any possible degree program offered by your
institution.

The what-if analysis functionality is a series of Web pages, beginning with

bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one, that the student uses to select various aspects of
the potential program. On the last page, bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step, the
student generates an evaluation for the choices made on the previous pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 426

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Entry Term Beginning term for the sample evaluation.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Select the Web Catalog Term checkbox on the Web Processing
(SOATERM) Controls window for each term that you want available for degree
evaluations on the Web.

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 427

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the What-If Analysis (Step Two) page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

What-If Analysis (Step Two)

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two)
This is the second page in a what-if analysis. The value selected on the previous page is
displayed on this page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Program Program for the sample evaluation.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Curriculum Rules Form For every program you want associated with the term, take the
(SOACURR) following actions:
• Make sure that a record exists for the curriculum rule and that
the Locked checkbox is selected.
• On the Module Control window, select the On radio button for
Curriculum, Advising, and Program Planning.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 428

 Item Description

Program Definition Rules For every program that you want available on the Web:
Form (SMAPRLE) • Select the Web checkbox.
• Select the Locked checkbox.

Program Requirements For every program that you want to be active, select the Active
Form (SMAPROG) radio button.

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the What-If Analysis (Step Three) page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_three).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 429

 What-If Analysis (Step Three)
(bwcksmds.P_whatif_step_three)
This is the third page in a what-if analysis. The values selected on the previous pages are
displayed on this page. The level, degree, and college associated with the program
chosen on the What-If Analysis (Step Two) page (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two)
are also displayed.

If you have established department, concentrations, and/or minors for the major on the
Curriculum Rules Form (SOACURR) and selected the related checkboxes on the
WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL), the page includes an Add More button that can be
selected to add more details regarding the program. A value must be selected for the First
Major field before the Add More button is selected.

The next page displayed is determined dynamically by the system. The same package/
procedure name, bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step, is used, but the field(s)
displayed depends on which button the user selects.

• If the user selects the Add More button, the next page displays additional program-
related fields.

• If the user selects the Submit button, the next page displays the Evaluation Term field.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Campus Campus associated with the program.

First Major Major that the student wants to include in the evaluation.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Curriculum Rules Form If you want only majors associated with a program to be available
(SOACURR) on this page, make sure that they are defined on the Majors/
Department Rules window.

WebCAPP Rules Form Select the appropriate checkboxes in the What-If Analysis Display
(SMAWCRL) section to make concentrations and departments available for
what-if analysis on the Web.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 430

 Item Description

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Add More Goes to the What-If Analysis (Add More)

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step) with one or more
additional program-related fields displayed.

Submit Goes to the What-If Analysis (Add More) page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step) with the Evaluation
Term field displayed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 431

 What-If Analysis (Add More)
(bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step)
This page is displayed if the user selects the Add More button on the previous page.
Every time the user selects the Add More button, this page is redistilled adding more
fields until no more fields can be added.

The fields that can be displayed for department, concentrations, and/or minors are
controlled by curriculum rules established for the program on the Curriculum Rules Form
(SOACURR) and by selecting the related checkboxes on the WebCAPP Rules Form
(SMAWCRL). You can allow the user to specify:

• Up to two majors
• A department for each major
• Up to three concentrations for each major
• Up to two minors for the curriculum

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The fields described below are added to the page incrementally (each time the user selects the
Add More button).

First Department Department associated with the major.

Concentration 1, 2, and 3 Concentration(s) that the student wants to include in the

evaluation.

First Minor and Second Minor(s) that the student wants to include in the evaluation.
Minor

Second Major Second major that the student wants to include in the evaluation.

Second Department Department associated with the second major.

Second Major Concentration(s) for the second major that the student wants to
Concentration 1, 2, and 3 include in the evaluation.

Setup Requirements
There are no additional setup requirements for this page.

For this page to be accessible, the setup details described for the What-If Analysis (Step
Three) (bwcksmds.P_whatif_step_three) must be in place.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 432

 For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs, refer to the Banner
Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the What-If Analysis (Add More) page

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step) with the Evaluation
Term field displayed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

What-If Analysis (Evaluation Term)

(bwcksmds.p_whatif_next_step)
This is the last page in a what-if analysis. The values selected on the previous pages are
displayed on this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 433

 Once the user chooses the evaluation term (that is, the graduation term) and selects the
Submit button, the system generates the new evaluation and displays the Degree
Evaluation Results Report page (bwcksxml.report).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Evaluation Term Ending term for the sample evaluation.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Term Control Form Select the Web Evaluation Term checkbox on the Web
(SOATERM) Processing Controls window for each term that you want available
for degree evaluations on the Web.

CAPP For complete information about setting up your CAPP programs,

refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Submit Stores the data on the Compliance Request Management Form

(SMARQCM).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 434

 Link Action

Current Enrollment Goes to the Degree Evaluation Record page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Previous Evaluations Goes to the Previous Evaluations page

(bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval).

Generate New Evaluation Goes to the Generate New Evaluation page

(bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Generate Request Goes to the Degree Evaluation Results Report page

(bwcksxml.report).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

General Student Information (bwskgstu.P_StuInfo)

This page displays the majority of data in the General Student record. It also displays any
curriculum information that was entered on the record. This page is accessed via the View
Student Information link on the Student Records menu.

If the user has not selected a term during the current Web session and selects the View
Student Information link from the Student Records menu, the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) is displayed first. If a term has been selected, that term
is used, and the General Student Information is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 435

 Item Description/Source Information

Registered for Term Indicates whether the student is registered for the selected term.

First Term Attended First term the student attended your institution.

Last Term Attended First term the student attended your institution.

Status Student’s current status.

Residence Student’s residency status.

Student Type Student type associated with the student.

Class Student’s class.

Academic Standing Status Student’ academic standing.

Academic Standing Term Term for which academic standing was evaluated.

Primary Advisor Student’s primary advisor.

Primary Advisor Type Advisor type associated with the primary advisor.

Expected Graduation Date Date on which the student is expected to graduate.

Expected Graduation Term Term in which the student is expected to graduate.

Expected Graduation Year Academic year in which the student is expected to graduate.

The following fields are displayed in the Curriculum Information section.

(Primary) Current Program Name of the student’s current active primary learner curriculum.

(Primary) Study Path Study path for the primary learner curriculum.

When the Enable Study Paths checkbox is unchecked on

SOACTRL, this field is not displayed.

(Primary) Level Student level associated with the current active primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Admit Term Term in which the student was admitted to the primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) Admit Type Admission type by which the student was admitted to the primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Catalog Term Term in which the student was admitted to the primary learner
curriculum.

(Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

(Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 436

 Item Description/Source Information

(Primary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active primary learner curriculum. If no department is associated
with the current active primary learner curriculum, the field label
says only Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple majors.

(Primary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations.

(Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Primary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active primary
learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any
major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
concentrations.

(Primary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple other fields of study.

Secondary Name of the student’s current active secondary curriculum. If the

student has multiple current active secondary curricula, the set of
fields will be displayed multiple times.

(Secondary) Study Path Study path associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

When the Enable Study Paths checkbox is unchecked on

SOACTRL, this field is not displayed.

(Secondary) Level Student level associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Program Name of the program associated with the current active
secondary curriculum.

(Secondary) Admit Term Term in which the student was admitted to the current active
secondary learner curriculum.

(Secondary) Admit Type Admission type by which the student was admitted to the current
active secondary learner curriculum.

(Secondary) Catalog Term Term in which the student was admitted to the current active
secondary learner curriculum.

(Secondary) College Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

(Secondary) Campus Name of the college associated with the current active secondary
curriculum.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 437

 Item Description/Source Information

(Secondary) Major and Name of the major and department associated with the current
Department active secondary learner curriculum. If no department is
associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum,
the field label will say only Major. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple majors.

(Secondary) Major Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
Concentration current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

(Secondary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active secondary
learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there
are multiple minors.

(Secondary) Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner

Concentration curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are
multiple concentrations.

(Secondary) Other field of Name of any other field of study associated with the current active
study secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple
times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Setup Requirements
This page has no overall setup requirements.

To use study paths, do the following setup.

Item Description

Term Control Form To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox
(SOATERM) on SOACTRL.

To require study paths, check the Study Path Required

checkbox on SOATERM.

To allow changes to study paths, check the Change Study Path

checkbox on SOATERM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 438

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Enrollment Verification Request

(bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type)
This page is used to specify the term and type of enrollment verification to be sent.

If the student has no enrollment information, the system displays this page
(bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type) with a message stating that there is no enrollment
information.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Term Term for which the enrollment verification request is to be

produced.

Verification Type Type of enrollment verification to be produced.

Number of Copies Number of copies of the enrollment verification request to be

produced.

Issued To Name of the person to whom the request is to be sent.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 439

 Item Description

Enrollment Verification If you want the enrollment verification type to be available on the
Request Rules Form Web, select the Self-Service Request checkbox.
(SFAEPRT)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Enrollment Verification Delivery page

(bwskrqst.p_proc_term_type).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 440

 Enrollment Verification Delivery
(bwskrqst.p_proc_term_type)
This page is used to specify delivery information for an enrollment verification request.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Academic Year Academic year for the enrollment verification request.

Delivery Method Method by which the student wants the enrollment verification
request to be delivered.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Enrollment Verification If you want the academic year to be specified on this page, select
Request Rules Form the Self-Service Academic Year checkbox in the Self-Service
(SFAEPRT) Print Options window.

Create a record in the Service Level block of the Self-Service

Print Options window for each delivery type you want to be
available on this page.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 441

 Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Enrollment Verification Address page

(bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Enrollment Verification Address

(bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery)
This page is used to specify where the enrollment verification request is to be sent.

A user can enter only one kind of information if multiple options are available. For
example, if an address is selected in the One of Your Addresses field and an address is
entered in the address fields, the system displays an error message.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 442

 Item Description/Source Information

One of Your Addresses Student’s address. This field should be used if the transcript is to
be sent to one of the student’s addresses.

Fax Country Code Country code for the fax number, if the request is to be sent via
fax.

Fax Area Code Area code for the fax number, if the request is to be sent via fax.

Fax Number Phone number for the fax number, if the request is to be sent via
fax.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Line 1 Street address to which the transcript is to be sent. Up to four

Street Line 2 lines of information can be entered. Any default values can be
Street Line 3 changed.
Street Line 4

City City of the transcript recipient’s address. Any default values can
be changed.

State or Province State or province of the transcript recipient’s address. Any default
values can be changed.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code of the transcript recipient’s address. Any
default values can be changed.

Nation Nation of the transcript recipient’s address. Any default values

can be changed.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 443

 Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to one of the following:

• If a payment is associated with the request, the system displays
the Enrollment Verification Payment page
(bwskrqst.p_proc_payment).
• If a payment is not associated with the request, the system
displays the Enrollment Verification Request Summary page
(bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Enrollment Verification Payment

(bwskrqst.p_proc_payment)
This page is used to confirm the payment details if the enrollment verification request has
a payment associated with it. If the request does not have a payment associated with it,
this page is not displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 444

 Item Description/Source Information

Payment Total Total monetary amount due.

Payment Method Method by which the payment is to be made.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Credit Card Merchant ID Make sure that valid records have been created for the
Form (GOAMERC) appropriate process code.

All other credit card processing set up must be completed as well.

See the Payment Processor Connection Handbook for more
information.

Enrollment Verification For enrollment verification requests, set up the following:

Request Rules Form • Appropriate payment amount(s) in the Service Level block of the
(SFAEPRT) Self-Service Print Options window.
• Appropriate payment option(s) in the Payment Options block of
the Self-Service Print Options window.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 445

 Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Summary page

(bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Enrollment Verification Request Summary

(bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm)
This page is used to confirm the details of the enrollment verification request before it is
submitted. The system displays only the fields for which data was entered on the
preceding Web pages. For example, if the Academic Year field is displayed on the
Enrollment Verification Delivery page, but the user does not select a value for it, the
Academic Year field is not displayed on this page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Term Term specified on the Enrollment Verification Request page

(bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

Academic Year Academic year specified on the Enrollment Verification Delivery

page, if one was selected.

Verification Type Type of enrollment verification request specified on the

Enrollment Verification Request page.

Number of Copies Number of copies of the request to be produced, entered on the

Enrollment Verification Request page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 446

 Item Description/Source Information

Issued To Name to whom the enrollment verification is to be sent, as

entered on the Enrollment Verification Request page. This
includes the last name prefix, if applicable.

If the Issued To field is left blank on the Enrollment Verification

Request page, the system automatically enters the student’s
name.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Street address entered on the Enrollment Verification Address

page (bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery).
-or-
If only one street line is in the address, the field label Street is
Street Line 1 displayed; if there is more than one address line, the field labels
Street Line 2 Street Line 1, Street Line 2, Street Line 3, and Street Line 4, as
Street Line 3 applicable, are displayed.
Street Line 4

City City entered on the Enrollment Verification Address page.

State or Province State or province entered on the Enrollment Verification Address

page.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code entered on the Enrollment Verification Address
page.

Nation Nation entered on the Enrollment Verification Address page.

Fax Country Code Country code of the fax number entered on the Enrollment
Verification Address page.

Fax Area Code Area code of the fax number entered on the Enrollment
Verification Address page.

Fax Number Fax phone number entered on the Enrollment Verification

Address page.

Delivery Method Delivery method specified on the Enrollment Verification Delivery

page.

Cost of Order Monetary amount of the fee associated with the delivery method.

Payment Method Method of payment specified on the Enrollment Verification

Payment page.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 447

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Request Goes to one of the following:

• If a credit card payment is associated with the request, the
system displays the external vendor payment page.
• If a payment other than a credit card payment is associated with
the request, the system displays the Enrollment Verification
Signature page (bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm).

If no credit card payment is associated with the request, it is

assumed that payment will be by some other system, such as
billing to an account, so no further information needs to be
collected. In this case, the transaction goes to verification and
the charging/collection is turned over to the client internal
procedures.
• If no payment is associated with the request, the system
displays the Enrollment Verification Signature page.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 448

 Enrollment Verification Signature
(bwskrqst.p_proc_confirm)
This page confirms that the system has processed the enrollment verification request.

Web Page Fields

This page has no fields.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

View Status of Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
Verification Requests (bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 449

 Enrollment Verification Request Date
(bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates)
This page is used to specify the date of an enrollment verification request so that the
request information can be viewed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Date Ordered Date for which enrollment verification requests are to be viewed.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 450

 Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request Status page

(bwskrqst.p_disp_request_status).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Enrollment Verification Request Status

(bwskrqst.p_disp_request_status)
This page is used to view existing enrollment verification requests for the date specified on
the Enrollment Verification Request Date page
(bwskrqst.p_disp_request_dates). The system displays only the fields for
which data was entered when the enrollment verification was requested. For example, if
the Academic Year field is displayed on the Enrollment Verification Delivery page, but the
user does not select a value for it, the Academic Year field is not displayed on this page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Status of Enrollment Date on which the enrollment verification was requested.

Verification Requests

Date Sent Date on which the enrollment verification was sent. If it has not
been sent yet, the following message is displayed in the field:
Your order is still in processing. Please check again at another
time.

Term Term specified on the Enrollment Verification Request page

(bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 451

 Item Description/Source Information

Academic Year Academic year specified on the Enrollment Verification Delivery

page.

Verification Type Type of enrollment verification request specified on the

Enrollment Verification Request page.

Number of Copies Number of copies of the request to be produced, entered on the

Enrollment Verification Request page.

Issued To Name to whom the enrollment verification is to be sent, as

entered on the Enrollment Verification Request page. This
includes the last name prefix, if applicable.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Street address entered on the Enrollment Verification Address

page (bwskrqst.p_proc_delivery).
-or-
If only one street line is in the address, the field label Street is
Street Line 1 displayed; if there is more than one address line, the field labels
Street Line 2 Street Line 1, Street Line 2, and Street Line 3, and Street Line
Street Line 3 4, as applicable, are displayed.
Street Line 4

City City entered on the Enrollment Verification Address page.

State or Province State or province entered on the Enrollment Verification Address

page.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code entered on the Enrollment Verification Address
page.

Nation Nation entered on the Enrollment Verification Address page.

Fax Country Code Country code of the fax number entered on the Enrollment
Verification Address page.

Fax Area Code Area code of the fax number entered on the Enrollment
Verification Address page.

Fax Number Fax phone number entered on the Enrollment Verification

Address page.

Delivery Method Delivery method specified on the Enrollment Verification Delivery

page.

Cost of Order Monetary amount of the fee associated with the delivery method.

Payment Method Method of payment specified on the Enrollment Verification

Payment page.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 452

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Request Enrollment Goes to the Enrollment Verification Request page

Verification (bwskrqst.p_disp_term_type).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Test Scores (bwsktesc.p_view_tests)

This page is used to display test score information for a student. Test data is ordered by
test description. Test score information comes from SOATEST and is enabled for Web
display on SOAWDSP.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Test Description Test type and description, such as SATII - Biology.

Test Score Numeric test score.

Date Taken Date test was taken.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 453

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Test Score Information Enter test scores and test dates for each test code for the student.
Form (SOATEST)

Web Display List Set up test codes for Web display.

Customization Form
(SOAWSDP)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Curriculum Term Selection

(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term)
When a student selects the Apply to Graduate option from the Student Records menu
(bmenu.P_AdminMnu), the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) is displayed. A term must be selected to continue
with the application process. Once a term is submitted, the student can continue through

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 454

 the various graduation and diploma pages and to the Graduation Application page
(bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

The curriculum select hierarchy that determines whether the student is eligible to select a
specific curriculum record works as follows. The terms displayed for selection by the
student are controlled by the rules on the Academic History Control Form (SHACTRL).
The process checks for the rule in place for which terms to display. The process also
examines the SHRTTRM records and/or and the SFBETRM records for the student. When
the student selects a term, the process performs eligibility checking to see which
curriculum record will be displayed based on the rules on SHAGELR for the Module field
(Leaner, Outcome, or Either).

The process uses the term selected from the Select a Term field to provide the valid
curriculum records for the student. Next, any current and active curriculum records found
for the student for that term are used to determine eligibility based on the rules on
SHAGELR and SHAGADS. Data is displayed based on the rules on SHAGADR.

If the rules on SHAGADS and SHAGELR do not allow the student’s graduation application
to proceed for any curriculum that is active and current for the selected term, the following
message is displayed: You have no curriculum eligible for graduation application for this
term. Select another term, or contact an administrator for help.

Restrict Term Selection

You can use the Self-Service Graduation Term Control field on the Academic History
Control Form (SHACTRL) to define/restrict which terms are displayed for selection in
Banner Self-Service for the graduation application. The student can select from terms for
the graduation application based on the rule selected in the Self-Service Graduation
Term Control field. The rule can be set to: all terms, the latest academic history term, the
latest registration term, or the latest academic history term and the latest registration term.

This term restriction prevents any/all terms in which the student had registration records or
academic history from being displayed for selection. Therefore, a student cannot select a
term and curriculum record from an earlier registration period or term of academic history
after a curriculum change had been made. In some institutions, this earlier curriculum
record may no longer be valid for use with a graduation application.

Note: Eligibility processing on SHAGELR works as usual with the term

control.

All terms
A student can select any term in which registration or academic history records exist, even
if the curriculum has changed and is no longer current in the latest term of attendance.
The curriculum that is displayed is still dependent on the setting of the SHAGELR module
control (Learner, Outcome, or Either).

When the Apply to Graduate option is selected in Banner Student Self-Service, the Select
a Term field on the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) displays a list of any term with any curriculum that
is current and active for that term.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 455

 Latest academic history term
A student can select only the last term in which grades were rolled to academic history
(the term on SHRTTRM). The curriculum that is displayed is still dependent on the setting
of the SHAGELR module control (Learner, Outcome, or Either).

When the Apply to Graduate option is selected in Banner Student Self-Service, the Select
a Term field on the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) displays only the latest term for which the student
has an SHRTTRM record with the curriculum that is current and active for that term.

Latest registration term

A student can only select a term using the latest term in which the student is registered for
classes. This prevents a student from graduating based on a curriculum that is associated
with earlier terms and consequently for a curriculum that may have been changed since
the prior term of registration. The curriculum that is displayed is still dependent on the
setting of the SHAGELR module control (Learner, Outcome, or Either).

When the Apply to Graduate option is selected in Banner Student Self-Service, the Select
a Term field on the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) displays only the latest term for which the student
has an SFBETRM record with the curriculum that is current and active for that term.

Latest academic history and registration term

A student can select from two terms, the latest registration term and the latest academic
history term. The curriculum that is displayed is still dependent on the setting of the
SHAGELR module control (Learner, Outcome, or Either).

When the Apply to Graduate option is selected in Banner Student Self-Service, the Select
a Term field on the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) displays the latest term for which the student has
an SFBETRM record and the latest term for which the student has an SHRTTRM record,
with the curriculum that is current and active for that term.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select a Term Terms where registration and/or academic history records exist.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 456

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Goes to the Curriculum Selection page

(bwskgrad.p_disp_gradapp).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Curriculum Selection (bwskgrad.p_disp_gradapp)

This page is used to select the curriculum for which the student wants to apply to
graduate. A term must be selected on the Curriculum Term Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term) before this page can be accessed.

Multiple curricula can be selected. All curricula for which the following are true are
displayed:

• Are current and active

• Have a display selection rule in on the Graduation Application Display Rule Selection
Form (SHAGADS) that matches the curriculum for the student and the code for which a
display rule also exists in on the Graduation Application Display Rules Form
(SHAGADR)

• Have qualifying eligibility rules

• Do not have an existing active graduation application for the curriculum
• Do not have an awarded degree
• Either an academic history (SHRTTRM) record or registration (SFBETRM) record exists
The system checks the following to determine whether a curriculum is to be displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 457

 • Application display rules are defined on SHAGADS.
• Curriculum module controls are defined on the Graduation Application Display Eligibility
Rules Form (SHAGELR).

• Eligibility is determined by the rules created on SHAGELR.

• Curricula data elements are displayed with labels specified for the transcript type code
on SHAGADR. The curriculum labels created in SHATPRT for the transcript type code
determine what is displayed with the curricula data in the Graduation Application pages
in self-service. This provides consistency between the academic transcript pages and
the graduation application pages.

• The date on which the student is applying is within the range set on the Graduation Date
Availability Tab of SHAGADR.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Curriculum name Name of the curriculum.

Degree (untitled) Name of the degree (such as Bachelor of Arts).

Level Student level associated with the current active curriculum

selected for the graduation application.

Program Name of the program associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

College Name of the college associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

Major and Department Name of the major and department associated with the current
active curriculum selected for the graduation application. If no
department is associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application, the field label says only
Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
majors.

Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
current active curriculum selected for the graduation application.
This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple minors.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 458

 Item Description/Source Information

Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This concentration is not
attached to any major. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple concentrations.

Other field of study Name of any other field of study associated with the current
curriculum selected for the graduation application. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Graduation Application Select the Web Indicator checkbox for each application status
Status Validation Form code that you want to be available on the Web.
(STVGAST)

Graduation Application Create graduation display rule validation codes.

Display Rules Validation
Form (STVGADR)

Graduation Application Define your selection rules for when a graduation application
Display Rule Selection display rule will be used.
Form (SHAGADS)

Self-Service Graduation Define your graduation application display rules.

Application Display Rules
Form (SHAGADR)

Graduation Application Define your graduation application eligibility rules.

Eligibility Rules
(SHAGELR)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 459

 Link Action

Term Selection Goes to the Curriculum Term Selection page

(bwskgrad.p_disp_grad_term).

View Holds Goes to the View Holds page (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold).

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

View Student Information Goes to the Registration Term page

(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm).

Degree Evaluation Goes to the Select Current Term page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Graduation Date Selection page

(bwskgrad.p_proc_grad_date).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Records Menu bmenu.P_AdminMnu

Graduation Date Selection (bwskgrad.p_proc_grad_date)

This page is used to select the graduation date.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 460

 Web Page Fields
This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Curriculum name Name of the curriculum.

Degree (untitled) Name of the degree (such as Bachelor of Arts).

Level Student level associated with the current active curriculum

selected for the graduation application.

Program Name of the program associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

College Name of the college associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

Major and Department Name of the major and department associated with the current
active curriculum selected for the graduation application. If no
department is associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application, the field label says only
Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
majors.

Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
current active curriculum selected for the graduation application.
This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple minors.

Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This concentration is not
attached to any major. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple concentrations.

Other field of study Name of any other field of study associated with the current
curriculum selected for the graduation application. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Graduation Date Date on which the student wants to graduate.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 461

 Item Description

Self-Service Graduation Define graduation dates in the Graduation Date Availability

Application Display Rules window.
Form (SHAGADR)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Graduation Ceremony Selection page

(bwskgrad.p_proc_ceremony).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 462

 Graduation Ceremony Selection
(bwskgrad.p_proc_ceremony)
This page is used to specify whether the student plans to attend the graduation ceremony.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Attend Ceremony Radio button group used to indicate whether the student plans to
attend the graduation ceremony.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Self-Service Graduation Select the Ceremony checkbox in the Graduation Date

Application Display Rules Availability window. If this checkbox is cleared, the ceremony will
Form (SHAGADR) not be available for selection.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Attend Ceremony radio Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and
buttons viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 463

 Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to one of the following pages

• If the graduation application display rule is set to display the
Diploma Name Selection page, this button goes to the Diploma
Name Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name).
• If the graduation application display rule is not set to display the
Diploma Name Selection page, but is set to display the Diploma
Mailing Address Selection page, this button goes to the Diploma
Mailing Address Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr).
• If the graduation application display rule is not set to display
either of the able pages, this button goes to the Graduation
Application Summary page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Diploma Name Selection

(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name)
This page is used to specify the name to be printed on the diploma. It is displayed only if
the Display Page checkbox is selected in the Diploma Name section of the Diploma
Name/Address Options window of the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules
Form (SHAGADR) for the associated graduation application display rule.

The name to be printed on a student’s diploma is displayed only if the Diploma Name
Display checkbox is selected in the Diploma Name section of the Diploma Name/Address
Options window of SHAGADR for the associated graduation application display rule. If the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 464

 curriculum selected for the application to graduate is a curriculum for an existing degree
record and the diploma table for that degree sequence has been created, the diploma
name value (SHBDIPL_NAME) for that record is displayed on this page.

If the Diploma Name Display checkbox is cleared or the Degree Record (SHRDGMR) or
Diploma Record (SHBDIPL) have not yet been created for the selected curriculum, then
no value will be displayed in the Diploma Name field on the Diploma Name Selection
page.

A student can change the diploma name if the Edit checkbox is selected in the Diploma
Name section of the Diploma Name/Address Options window of SHAGADR for the
associated graduation application display rule. If this has been set up, the value New will
be available on the One Of Your Names pulldown list, and if the student selects New and
then selects Continue, the system displays the Diploma Name Selection - Name Change
page (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name) with fields for the parts of the name that
can be changed.

The SPRIDEN Legal Name field value is never used for self-service diploma name
information. This field is a single-name field that has been concatenated and, therefore,
cannot be broken into first, middle, last, and suffix columns for display or editing via the
Web.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Name Student’s current or alternative name from the SPRIDEN table,

depending on the setting on SHAGADR. This name will be printed
on the diploma unless the student changes it. The last name
prefix is included, if applicable.

Current Diploma Name Name that is to be printed on the diploma. A value is displayed in
this field only if the name has been changed. If this field is blank,
the value in the Name field will be printed.

One of Your Names Pulldown list used to specify the name to be printed on the
diploma.

If New is selected, the system displays the Diploma Name

Selection - Name Change page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name) with fields for the
parts of the name that can be changed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 465

 Item Description

Self-Service Graduation For each graduation application display rule for which you want
Application Display Rules this page to be displayed, select the Display Page checkbox in
Form (SHAGADR) the Diploma Name section of the Diploma Name/Address Options
window.

If you want a student’s name to be displayed on this page, select

the Diploma Name Display checkbox in the Diploma Name
section of the Diploma Name/Address Options window.

Specify which name is to be displayed as follows.

• If you want the current name on SPRIDEN to be displayed,
select the Current radio button.
• If you want the alternate name on SPRIDEN to be displayed,
select the Alternate radio button and specify the alternate name
type in the Alternate Name field.
If you want to allow students to change the diploma name, select
the Edit checkbox in the Diploma Name section of the Diploma
Name/Address Options window, and select the checkboxes for
the parts of the name that you want to allow students to change.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Name Change Information Goes to the Name Change Information page

(bwgkoinf.P_DispUpdName).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 466

 Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to Diploma Name Selection - Name Change page

(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Diploma Name Selection - Name Change

(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name)
This page is used to change the name to be printed on the diploma. It is displayed when a
student selects New on the One Of Your Names pulldown list on the Diploma Name
Selection page (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name). This can occur only if the Edit
checkbox is selected in the Diploma Name section of the Diploma Name/Address Options
window of the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR) for
the associated graduation application display rule. The First, Middle, Last, and Suffix
checkboxes on SHAGADR are used to specify which part of the student’s name can be
changed.

The SPRIDEN Legal Name field value is never used for self-service diploma name
information. This field is a single-name field that has been concatenated and, therefore,
cannot be broken into first, middle, last, and suffix columns for display or editing via the
Web.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

First Name Student’s first name to be printed on the diploma.

Middle Name Student’s middle name to be printed on the diploma.

Last Name Student’s last name (with prefix if it exists) to be printed on the
diploma.

Suffix Student’s suffix to be printed on the diploma.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 467

 Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Self-Service Graduation Select the checkboxes for the parts of the name that you want to
Application Display Rules allow students to change. Choices are First, Middle, Last, and
Form (SHAGADR) Suffix.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

First Name Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Middle Name Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Last Name Prefix Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and
viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Last Name Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Suffix Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable on the Graduation Application Form (SHAGAPP).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 468

 Link Action

Name Change Information Goes to the Name Change Information page

(bwgkoinf.P_DispUpdName).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to one of the following:

• If the graduation application display rule is set to display the
Diploma Mailing Address Selection page, this button goes to the
Diploma Mailing Address Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr).
• If the graduation application display rule is not set to display the
Diploma Mailing Address Selection page, this button goes to the
Graduation Application Summary page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Name Change Information (bwgkoinf.P_DispUpdName)

This page displays instructions for students who change diploma names. Use Web Tailor
to define the text you want to appear on this page.

Web Page Fields

This does not have any web page fields.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Text Define the text you want to appear on this page in Web Tailor.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 469

 Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page has no links to other web pages.

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Diploma Mailing Address Selection

(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr)
This page is used to select the address to which the diploma is to be mailed. It is displayed
only if the Display Page checkbox is selected in the Diploma Mailing Address section of
the Diploma Name/Address Options window of the Self-Service Graduation Application
Display Rules Form (SHAGADR) for the associated graduation application display rule. If
the Display checkbox is also selected, the address currently associated with the Diploma
Record will also be displayed. If the Edit checkbox is also selected, the value New will be
available on the One Of Your Addresses pulldown list, and if the student selects New
and then selects Continue, the system displays the Diploma Mailing Address Selection -
Address Change page (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr) with fields for the new
address.

If the Display Page checkbox is cleared or the Degree Record (SHRDGMR) or Diploma
Record (SHBDIPL) have not yet been created for the selected curriculum, then no
address information will be displayed on the Diploma Mailing Address Selection page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 470

 Item Description/Source Information

Street Line 1 Up to four lines for the street address.

Street Line 2
Street Line 3
Street Line 4

City City for the street address.

State or Province State or province for the street address.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code for the street address.

Nation Nation for the street address.

One of Your Addresses Pulldown list used to specify the address to which the diploma is
to be mailed.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Self-Service Graduation For each graduation application display rule for which you want
Application Display Rules this page to be displayed, select the Display Page checkbox in
Form (SHAGADR) the Diploma Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/
Address Options window.

If you want the address currently associated with the Diploma

Record to be displayed, select the Display checkbox in the
Diploma Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/Address
Options window.

If you want to allow students to change the address to which the

diploma is to be mailed, select the Edit checkbox in the Diploma
Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/Address Options
window.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 471

 Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

View Addresses and Goes to the View Addresses and Phones page
Phones (bwgkogad.P_SelectAtypView).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Diploma Mailing Address Selection - Address

Change page (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Diploma Mailing Address Selection - Address Change

(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr)
This page is used to enter the address to which the diploma is to be mailed. If the Edit
checkbox is selected in the Diploma Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/
Address Options window of the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form
(SHAGADR) for the associated graduation application display rule, the available
addresses selected can also be edited. The system displays the current address by
default, but the student can change it.

This page is displayed when the Display Page checkbox is checked in the Diploma
Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/Address Options window of SHAGADR for
the graduation application display rule. If desired, you can also have the system display
any existing diploma mailing address for the selected curriculum.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 472

 Item Description/Source Information

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Line 1 Up to four lines for the street address.

Street Line 2
Street Line 3
Street Line 4

City City for the street address.

State or Province State or province for the street address.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code for the street address.

Nation Nation for the street address.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Self-Service Graduation If you want to allow students to change the address to which the
Application Display Rules diploma is to be mailed, select the Edit checkbox in the Diploma
Form (SHAGADR) Mailing Address section of the Diploma Name/Address Options
window.

If you want to have the system display any existing diploma

mailing address for the selected curriculum, select the Display
checkbox in the Diploma Mailing Address section of the Diploma
Name/Address Options window.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 473

 Item Description

New address Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable in the Diploma Address window of the Graduation
Application Form (SHAGAPP).

If Create/Update Degree checkbox has been selected in the

Overall window of SHAGADR, the value is also stored in the
SHBDIPL table and viewable on the Diploma Form (SHADIPL).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

View Addresses and Goes to the View Addresses and Phones page
Phones (bwgkogad.P_SelectAtypView).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to one of the following:

• If the application requires payment, goes to the Graduation
Application Payment page (bwskgrad.p_proc_payment).
• If the application does not require payment or if there is only one
applicable payment type, goes to the Graduation Application
Summary (bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 474

 Graduation Application Payment
(bwskgrad.p_proc_payment)
This page is used to confirm the payment details if the graduation application has a
payment associated with it. If the request does not have a payment associated with it, this
page is not displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Payment Total Total monetary amount due.

Payment Method Method by which the payment is to be made.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Credit Card Merchant ID Make sure that valid records have been created for the
Form (GOAMERC) appropriate process code.

All other credit card processing set up must be completed as well.

See the Payment Processor Connection Handbook for more
information.

Self-Service Graduation For graduation applications, set up the following.

Application Display Rules • Select the Create/Update Degree checkbox in the Overall
Form (SHAGADR) window.
• Select the Charge Graduation Fee checkbox in the Processing
Control block of the Payment Options window
• Define the appropriate payment amount(s) in the Payment
Options block of the Payment Options window.
• Define the appropriate payment option(s) in the Payment
Options block of the Payment Options window.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 475

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the Graduation Application Summary

(bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Graduation Application Summary

(bwskgrad.p_disp_confirm)
This page is used to review the details selected for the graduation application and submit
it. If payment is required via a credit card, the data will not be submitted until credit card
processing is successful.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Date Date of the selected ceremony.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 476

 Item Description/Source Information

First Name Student’s first name to be printed on the diploma.

Middle Name Student’s middle name to be printed on the diploma.

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

Last Name Student’s last name to be printed on the diploma.

Suffix Student’s suffix to be printed on the diploma.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Line 1 Up to four lines for the street address.

Street Line 2
Street Line 3
Street Line 4

City City for the street address.

State or Province State or province for the street address.

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code for the street address.

Nation Nation for the street address.

Curriculum name Name of the curriculum.

Degree (untitled) Name of the degree (such as Bachelor of Arts).

Level Student level associated with the current active curriculum

selected for the graduation application.

Program Name of the program associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

College Name of the college associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

Major and Department Name of the major and department associated with the current
active curriculum selected for the graduation application. If no
department is associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application, the field label says only
Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
majors.

Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
current active curriculum selected for the graduation application.
This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 477

 Item Description/Source Information

Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple minors.

Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This concentration is not
attached to any major. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple concentrations.

Other field of study Name of any other field of study associated with the current
curriculum selected for the graduation application. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Fee Monetary amount of the fee for the graduation application.

Payment Method Method by which the payment is to be made.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Submit Request Stored in the Graduation Application Table (SHBGAPP) and

viewable in the Diploma Address window of the Graduation
Application Form (SHAGAPP).

If Create/Update Degree checkbox has been selected in the

Overall window of SHAGADR, the value is also stored in the
SHBDIPL table and viewable on the Diploma Form (SHADIPL),
and stored in the SHRDGMR and viewable on the Degree and
Other Formal Awards Form (SHADEGR).

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 478

 Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit Request Goes to one of the following:

• If the application requires payment, goes to the external vendor
payment page.
• If the application does not require payment, goes to the
Graduation Application Signature page
(bwskgrad.p_disp_sigpage).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Graduation Application Signature

(bwskgrad.p_disp_sigpage)
This page displays a customized message verifying that the graduation application has
been received. The message can vary depending on the associated graduation
application display rule, or it can be the same for every graduation application display rule.
If no customized message is set up, the message Your graduation application has been
received is displayed.

The Graduation Application Signature Page is a customized letter displayed on the Web
after an application is completed or after a credit card payment has been made. The letter
is created on the HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and is associated with a
graduation application display rule on the Self-Service Graduation Application Display
Rules Form (SHAGADR). If a customized signature letter has not been created, then the
default Information Text defined by your institution using Web Tailor is displayed.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 479

 Web Page Fields
No fields appear on this page by default; you must define your letter on the Format HTML
Letter Rules Form (SOAELTR) and use the Self-Service Graduation Application Display
Rules Form (SHAGADR) to associate the letter to the graduation application display rule.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Letter Code Validation Create a letter code for the letter you want to be displayed on this
Form (GTVLETR) page.

Format HTML Letter Rules Create a line for the letter code you defined on GTVLETR, and
Form (SOAELTR) enter T in the Module field.

Define the text that you want to appear on this Web page.

Self-Service Graduation Enter the letter code in the Confirmation Letter field in the
Application Display Rules Overall window.
Form (SHAGADR)

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Graduation Goes to the Graduation Application page

Applications (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 480

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.

Graduation Application (bwskgrad.p_view_gradapp)

This page is used to review the details of graduation applications that have been
submitted. Inactive applications are not displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Name Student’s name.

Application Number One-up sequence number assigned to the application.

Request Date Date on which the student submitted the application.

Application Status Status of the application.

Application Status Date Date on which the status of the application last changed.

Date Date of the selected ceremony.

Attend Ceremony Indicator for whether the student plans to attend the ceremony.

First Name Student’s first name to be printed on the diploma.

Middle Name Student’s middle name to be printed on the diploma.

Last Name Prefix Prefix that precedes a last name (for example, “Von” in the last
name “Von Hintz”).

Last Name Student’s last name to be printed on the diploma.

Suffix Student’s suffix to be printed on the diploma.

House Number Unique number assigned to each building on a street or in an

area and used as part of the postal address in some countries (no
validation).

Street Line 1 Up to four lines for the street address.

Street Line 2
Street Line 3
Street Line 4

City City for the street address.

State or Province State or province for the street address.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 481

 Item Description/Source Information

Zip or Postal Code ZIP or postal code for the street address.

Nation Nation for the street address.

Curriculum name Name of the curriculum.

Degree (untitled) Name of the degree (such as Bachelor of Arts).

Level Student level associated with the current active curriculum

selected for the graduation application.

Program Name of the program associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

College Name of the college associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application.

Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active

curriculum selected for the graduation application.

Major and Department Name of the major and department associated with the current
active curriculum selected for the graduation application. If no
department is associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application, the field label says only
Major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple
majors.

Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the
current active curriculum selected for the graduation application.
This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major
concentrations.

Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This field is displayed
multiple times if there are multiple minors.

Concentration Name of the base concentration for the current active curriculum
selected for the graduation application. This concentration is not
attached to any major. This field is displayed multiple times if
there are multiple concentrations.

Other field of study Name of any other field of study associated with the current
curriculum selected for the graduation application. This field is
displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 482

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Transcript Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page

(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).

Degree Evaluation Goes to the Select Current Term page

(bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Set Up Student Records on the Web

This section explains how to implement Student Records on the Web. Refer to the Banner
Student User Guide for more information about Banner forms.

For information about setting up credit card payment processing for the Web, see the
Payment Processor Connection Handbook.

This section includes the following procedures:

• “Set Up Holds on the Web” on page 484

• “Set Up Grade Display on the Web” on page 484
• “Set Up Academic Transcripts on the Web” on page 484
• “Set Up the Web Transcript Requests” on page 489
• “Set Up Enrollment Verification Requests on the Web” on page 491
• “Set Up Degree Evaluation on the Web” on page 492
• “Use Pipes Processing” on page 496
• “Use Advanced Queue Processing” on page 500
• “Set Up Graduation Application on the Web” on page 504

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 483

 Set Up Holds on the Web
In the Hold Type Code Validation Form (STVHLDD), select the Web Indicator checkbox
for each hold type code that you want to be displayed on the Web.

Set Up Grade Display on the Web

1. Set up midterm grade display as follows.
• If you want midterm grades for the whole term displayed on the Web, select the
Display Midterm Grades checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window of the
Term Control Form (SOATERM).
• If you want to override the setting in SOATERM for a specific class, select or clear,
as appropriate, the Display Midterm Grades checkbox on the Section Web
Controls From (SSAWSEC).
2. Set up final grade display as follows.
• If you want final grades for the whole term displayed on the Web, select the Display
Final Grades checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window of SOATERM.
• If you want to override the setting in SOATERM for a specific class, select or clear,
as appropriate, the Display Final Grades checkbox on SSAWSEC.
3. Set up grade detail display as follows.
• If you want final grades for the whole term displayed on the Web, select the Display
Grade Detail checkbox in the Web Processing Controls window of SOATERM.
• If you want to override the setting in SOATERM for a specific class, select or clear,
as appropriate, the Display Grade Detail checkbox on SSAWSEC.

Set Up Academic Transcripts on the Web

1. On the Degree Code Validation Form (STVDEGC), select the Web Indicator
checkbox for each degree code that you want to be available on the Web.
2. Create your transcript types on the Transcript Type Code Validation Form
(STVTPRT). Be sure to select the Web Indicator checkbox for the transcript types
that you want to be available on the Web.
3. On the Print Options tabs of the Transcript Type Rules Form (SHATPRT), select the
appropriate checkbox for each item you want displayed on Web transcripts.

Note: Choices made on this tab affect both the standard transcript and
the Web transcript. If defining a transcript type that is to be available as
both standard and Web, make sure your choices take this into account.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 484

 Select this checkbox To display

Transcript Type Description associated with the transcript type.

Description

Transcript Type Transcript type code.

Student Address Student’s address, as defined on the General Person

Identification Form (SPAIDEN).

Issued Address Address to which the transcript is to be issued, as defined on

the Transcript Request Form (SHARQTC).

High School Name of the student’s high school.

Current Student Type Description associated with the current student type, which is
the most recent General Student Record (SGASTDN).

Term Admitted Description associated with the term in which the student was
admitted.

Term Matriculated Description associated with the term in which the student was
graduated.

Committees Names of any committees on which the student served.

Academic Events Names of academic events in which the student participated.

Academic Event Decision Decisions associated with academic events in which the
student participated.

Academic Event Grade Grades earned for academic events in which the student
participated.

Degree GPA Student’s degree GPA.

Qualifying Papers Names of the student’s qualifying papers.

Qualifying Papers Text Descriptions of the student’s qualifying papers.

Level Comments Comments associated with the level.

Term Comments Comments associated with the term.

Course Comments Comments associated with the course.

College by Term Name of the college associated with the term.

Major by Term Name of the major associated with the term.

Student Type by Term Description of the student type associated with the term.

Course Campus Code of the campus associated with each institutional course
detail record.

Long Course Title Long title of each course.

Transfer Detail Details about the student’s transfer courses.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 485

 Select this checkbox To display

Registration Start and End Start and end dates for open learning courses.
Dates

CEU Units Number of continuing education credits earned by the student.

CEU Dates Start and end dates associated with continuing education
courses.

These dates are displayed only if the CEU Units checkbox is

also selected.

CEU Contact Hours Number of contact hours associated with continuing education
courses.

These dates are displayed only if the CEU Units checkbox is

also selected.

GPA Statistics Student’s GPA statistics.

Dean’s List Statement that the student made the dean’s list.

Academic Standing by Student’s academic standing for each term.

Term

Last Academic Standing Student’s academic standing in his or her last term.

Institution Totals Total credits the student earned at your institution.

Transfer Totals Total credits the student earned at a transfer institution.

Overall Totals Total credits the student earned at both your institution and
transfer institutions.

Student Centric Period Student centric period GPA totals for the last term in the
Statistics student centric period.

The following fields affect XML transcripts only.

Test Scores Test scores included on the Test Score Information Form
(SOATEST).

College Transcript Institution-defined information about the college transcript.

Student Institution-defined information about the student.

Academic Record Institution-defined information about the student’s academic

record.

Course Institution-defined information about the course.

4. Use the Curriculum Print Options tab of SHATPRT to modify several of the labels that
appear on the Academic Transcript page (bwskotrn.P_ViewTran).
• If you want to change the Current Program field label on the Academic Transcript
page, enter the desired value in the Primary Learner Curriculum field.
• If you want to change the Secondary field label on the Academic Transcript page,
enter the desired value in the Secondary Learner Curriculum field.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 486

 • If you want to change the Degrees Awarded section label on the Academic
Transcript page, enter the desired value in the Award Label field.
• If you want to change the Primary Degree field label on the Academic Transcript
page, enter the desired value in the Primary Outcome Curriculum field.
• If you want to change the Secondary field label on the Academic Transcript page,
enter the desired value in the Secondary Outcome Curriculum field.
5. On the Curriculum Print Options tab of SHATPRT, select the appropriate checkbox for
each curriculum-related item you want displayed on Web transcripts.

Note: Choices made on this tab affect both the standard transcript and
the Web transcript. If defining a transcript type that is to be available as
both standard and Web, make sure your choices take this into account.

Select this checkbox To display

Program Description associated with the student’s curriculum (primary

learner, secondary learner, primary outcome, and/or
secondary outcome).

Degree Description of the degree associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner and/or secondary learner).

College Description of the college associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner, primary
outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Campus Description of the campus associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner, primary
outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Major Description of the major associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner, primary
outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Major Concentration Description of the major concentration associated with the

student’s curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner,
primary outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Minor Description of the minor associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner, primary
outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Concentration Description of the concentration associated with the student’s

curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner, primary
outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Other Fields of Study Description of the other fields of study associated with the
student’s curriculum (primary learner, secondary learner,
primary outcome, and/or secondary outcome).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 487

 6. On the Personalization Print Options tabs of SHATPRT, define print options for
personal information for Web transcripts.

Note: Choices made on this tab affect both the standard transcript and
the Web transcript. If defining a transcript type that is to be available as
both standard and Web, make sure your choices take this into account.

6.1. If you want the student’s birth date to be displayed, take the following actions.
– Select the Birth Date checkbox.
– In the Birth Date Mask field, select the format in which you want the birth
date to be displayed.
6.2. If you want the student’s Banner ID to be displayed, take the following actions.
– Select the Banner ID checkbox.
– In the Label for ID field, enter the label you want to be displayed for the
Banner ID.
6.3. If you want the student’s tax identification number to be displayed, take the
following actions.
– Select the SSN/SIN/TIN checkbox.
– In the Label for SSN/SIN/TIN field, enter the label you want to be displayed
for the tax identification number.
– In the SSN/SIN/TIN Mask field, specify the masking you want to use. Use the
character X to indicate that the data in that position is to be displayed, and use
the character * to indicate that the data in that position is to be concealed.
6.4. Use the Name Hierarchy block to define the hierarchy the system is to use to
determine which name to display.
– In the Sequence Number field, enter the sequence number for where this
name type should fall in the hierarchy in ascending order. In other words, if a
student has the type of name you assign as sequence number 1, that name
will be displayed; if he or she does not have that name type, the system will
check for a type designated as sequence number 2, and so on until it finds a
name type.
– In the Source field, enter the code of the source for the name.
– In the Name Type field, enter the code of the name type.
7. On the Self-Service Print Options tab, define the processing controls, service options,
and payment options. These are used for processing Web transcript requests and are
explained in detail in the procedure “Set Up the Web Transcript Requests” on
page 489.
8. If you want the student’s name to appear on the Web transcript, set up the following
row on the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) and set the External Code to
TRUE.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 488

 Internal
External Code Seq Activity
Code Internal Code Number Internal Code Group Description Date

TRUE/ NAMEWTRAN 1 WEBTRANSTUNAME Stu.Name on Sysdate

FALSE WebTrans

Set Up the Web Transcript Requests

1. On the Self-Service Print Options tab of the Transcript Type Rules Form (SHATPRT),
take the following actions.
• If you want students to be able to request that transcripts be sent via electronic data
interchange (EDI), select the Allow Electronic Transcripts on the Web checkbox.
• If you want to allow students to be able to specify that transcript requests be held
until grades have been posted, select the Allow Hold for End of Term Processing
checkbox.
• If you want to allow students to be able to specify that transcript requests be held
until degrees have been posted, select the Allow Hold for Degree Processing
checkbox.
2. In the Service Level block of the Self-Service Print Options tab of SHATPRT, take the
following actions.
• In the Code field, enter or select the self-service option code to be associated with
the transcript request type.

A service level record must be defined for each transcript type that is available for
Self-Service transcript processing.
• In the Description field, enter the description for the code.
• In the Type field, enter the code for the type of Accounts Receivable account the
charges associated with the transcript request will be posted. Valid values are S
(Student) and M (Miscellaneous).
• In the Charge field, enter the monetary amount of the charge associated with the
self-service option code entered in Code field. The system automatically defaults
the charge value defined on the Web Self-Service Options Validation Form
(STVWSSO), but you can change it.
• In the Per field, enter the code for the indicator for whether the option will be
charged per transcript request. Valid values are R for per-request and C for per-
copy.
3. If you want to associate a fee with Web transcript requests, in the Payment Options
block, in the Code field, select the payment option code to be associated with the
transcript type.
4. On the Web Self Service Option Code Validation Form (STVWSSO), define the
delivery methods and their associated charges.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 489

 5. On the Web Payment Option Code Validation Form (STVWPYO), define the payment
methods. If a method is to incur credit card charges, be sure to select the For Credit
Card checkbox.
6. In the Service Level block of SHATPRT (accessed via the Web Transcript Control
option), take the following actions.
• Define each delivery method that you want to be available on the Web. Delivery
method is required in Self-Service.

At least one service level record must be defined on SHATPRT for the delivery
method. If your institution does not charge for transcript requests, you need to
create a service level record on SHATPRT with a Charge of $0.00. This is
displayed as a value of No Charge in the Delivery Method drop down in Self-
Service.
• In the Per field, specify whether charges are to be assessed per copy (C) or per
request (R).
• In the Payment Options block (accessed via the Web Transcript Control option),
define each payment option that you want to be available on the Web.
7. On the Transcript Type Code Validation Form (STVTPRT), select the Web Request
Indicator checkbox for each transcript type you want to be available on the Web.
8. On the Degree Code Validation Form (STVDEGC), select the Web Indicator
checkbox for each degree code that you want to be available on the Web.
9. If you want all course levels to be included on all transcripts, select the Default
course level to ALL on transcript checkbox on the Web Transcript Request Rules
Form (SHAWTRR).
10. On SHAWTRR, in the Maximum transcripts per request field, enter the maximum
number of transcripts you want a student to be able to order per request.
11. On SHAWTRR, in the Maximum free transcripts before charges field, enter the
maximum number of transcripts a student can request before charges are applied to
requests.
12. If you want students to be able to request that transcripts be sent via EDI, select EDI
in the Electronic field of the Source/Background Institution Code Validation Form
(STVSBGI).
13. In the Source/Background Validation Form (SOASBGI), for each school that you want
to be available via the lookup functionality, enter appropriate values in both the City
field and either the State/Province or the Nation field.
14. Set up your Signature Page in one of the following ways.
• Define your letter in Web Tailor using the Customize a Set of Information Text
option.
- OR -
• Define your letter in Banner as follows.
14.1. On the Letter Code Validation Form (GTVLETR), create a letter code for the
letter you want to be displayed on this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 490

 14.2. On the Format HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTL), create a line for the letter
code you defined on GTVLETR, and enter T in the Module field.
14.3. On the Email Letter Form (SOAELTR), define the text that you want to appear
on this Web page.
14.4. On the Transcript Type Rules Form (SHATPRT), enter the letter code in the
Electronic Letter Code field in the Self-Service Print Options window.

Set Up Enrollment Verification Requests on the Web

Do the following to set up Web display.

1. Use the Enrollment Verification Type Code Validation Form (STVEPRT) to define the
codes you want to be available on the Web.
2. Access the Enrollment Verification Request Rules Form (SFAEPRT).
3. In the Key Block, scroll to the enrollment verification type code you want to define.
4. Go to the Print Options window.
5. Select each appropriate checkbox for each option you want to be printed on the
enrollment verification for this type code.
6. If you select the SSN/SIN/TIN checkbox, use the SSN/SIN/TIN Mask field to specify
the masking you want to use. Use the character X to indicate that the data in that
position is to be displayed, and use the character * to indicate that the data in that
position is to be concealed.
7. Use the Birth Date Mask pulldown list to select the format in which you want the birth
date to be displayed.
8. Save your changes.
9. Go to the Self-Service Print Options window.
10. In the Processing Controls block, take the following actions.
10.1. Select the Self-Service Request checkbox to allow paper enrollment
verification requests to be processed from self-service.
10.2. Select the Self-Service Academic Year checkbox to allow enrollment
verification requests to be selected by academic year when processed from
self-service.
10.3. Use the Self-Service Confirmation Letter field to select the self-service
confirmation letter to be used for the enrollment verification request.
10.4. Use the Self-Service Printers field to select the destination printer where the
confirmation letter is to be printed.
11. In the Service Level block, take the following actions.
11.1. In the Code field, enter or select the self-service option code to be associated
with the enrollment verification request type.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 491

 11.2. In the Type field, enter the code for the type of Accounts Receivable account
the charges associated with the learner’s enrollment verification request will be
posted. Valid values are S (Student) and M (Miscellaneous).
11.3. In the Charge field, enter the monetary amount of the charge associated with
the self-service option code entered in Code field. The system automatically
defaults the charge value defined on the Web Self-Service Options Validation
Form (STVWSSO), but you can change it.
11.4. In the Per field, enter the code for the indicator for whether the option will be
charged per enrollment verification request or per enrollment verification copy.
Valid values are R for per-request and C for per-copy.
12. In the Payment Options block, in the Code field, select the payment option code to be
associated with the enrollment verification request type.
13. Save your changes.

Do the following to limit the number of requests a student can make via the
Web.
1. On the Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX), specify the maximum number of
requests allowed per term in the External Code field for internal code MAXEVREQNO.

Internal
Code Internal
External Sequence Code System
Code Internal Code Number Group Description Required

number of MAXEVREQNO N/A STUWEB Max Enrl Ver Requests Y

requests per Term
allowed per
term

2. Save your changes.

Set Up Degree Evaluation on the Web

To set up degree evaluation on the Web, begin by performing the tasks shown in the
following table.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 492

 Form Task

Term Control Form Under Web Processing Controls/ WebCAPP Controls, the
(SOATERM) Web Evaluation Term checkbox in the Web Processing
Controls window must be selected to permit new degree
evaluations to be generated for that term.

This field may need to be updated each term, depending upon

your institution’s policy on running a degree audit against a
term in the past.

Program Definition Rules If the Web checkbox is selected, the program will be available
Form (SMAPRLE) when a new degree evaluation is generated. This will not
prevent a student from viewing a previously generated degree
evaluation for this program.

This indicator defaults to being selected.

Curriculum Rules Form For every program you want associated with the term, take the
(SOACURR) following actions:
• Make sure that a record exists for the curriculum rule and
that the Locked checkbox is selected.
• On the Module Control window, select the On radio button for
Curriculum, Advising, & Program Planning.

Program Requirements Form For every program that you want to be active, select the
(SMAPROG) Active radio button.

WebCAPP Rules Form Select the appropriate checkboxes in the What-If Analysis
(SMAWCRL) Display section to make concentrations and departments
available for what-if analysis on the Web.

CAPP Compliance Default Enter Web into the Default Code field. The appropriate
Parameter Form (SMADFLT) compliance request default parameters must be set up. For
more information about SMADFLT, see the Banner Student
CAPP Handbook.

Originator Code Validation The Web code is used for recording where a compliance had
Form (STVORIG) been requested from. When a request is made, the Origin
field on the Compliance Request Management Form
(SMARQCM) is populated with Web.

E-mail Address Type Create a code for student and faculty/advisor e-mail. This code
Validation Form (GTVEMAL) is used to populate the student and faculty e-mail on the
WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL).

Compliance Print Code Create a code for use with degree evaluations on the Web.
Validation Form (STVPRNT) This code should be entered in the Print Type field on the
WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL), if you choose to use
print types. This code is also used for the print code in CAPP
for its display; including program, area, group, and rule text.
Single text type only.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 493

 Form Task

Compliance Type Code Create a code for use with degree evaluations on the Web.
Validation Form (STVCPRT) This code should be entered in the Compliance Type field on
SMAWCRL, if you choose to use compliance types. This code
is also used to determine print codes in CAPP for its display;
including program, area, group, and rule text. Multiple text
types: Met/Not Met).

Crosswalk Validation Form See “Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) Records for
(GTVSDAX) WebCAPP Processing” on page 495.

WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL)

This form is used to set up the controls for the WebCAPP rules for evaluation requests.
The following controls are displayed on the form:

• What-If Analysis Display

• Evaluation Display
For detailed information about SMAWCRL, see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.

WebCAPP Rules Form (SMAWCRL) Records Descriptions

Record Description

Print Type/Compliance Type The external code should be a print type code entered on
STVPRNT. The text associated with this print type is displayed
in various areas on the General Requirements page
(bwcksmlt.P_DispEvalGeneralReq)and Detail
Requirements page
(bwcksmlt.P_DispEvalDetailReq). If no code is
designated, no text will be printed.

Your institution can select multiple text types. You can either
choose a single text type (STVPRNT) or enter a compliance
type (STVCPRT). If the compliance type is entered, two types
of text can be displayed for the program, area, or group: Met
and Unmet.

Faculty Email Type This external code should be a valid e-mail type on GTVEMAL.
The e-mail address associated with this code (that is, active)
and marked as Preferred and Display on Web on GOAEMAL
will be displayed. If the faculty member has no e-mail address
on GOAEMAL associated with the e-mail type designated
here, the Email your Advisor link will not be displayed on the
applicable Web pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 494

 Record Description

Student Email Type This external code should be a valid e-mail type on GTVEMAL.
The e-mail address associated with this code (that is, active)
and marked as Preferred and Display on Web on GOAEMAL
will be displayed. If the student has no e-mail address on
GOAEMAL associated with the e-mail type designated here,
the Email Student Name link will not be displayed on the
applicable Web pages.

What-if Analysis Display Select the curriculum components that you want to allow
students to run degree evaluations against. Major 1 is always
required and therefore is not included as a selection.

Purge Controls - Student This indicator is used to specify whether a student can delete
Delete degree evaluations that he or she ran.

Secondary Curriculum This external code will be Y or N.

Display
If SECONDCURR is set to Y, the secondary curriculum will be
displayed if populated on the General Student or Applicant
record and all Recruiting and Degree records will be displayed.

If SECONDCURR is set to N, the secondary curriculum will not

be displayed even if populated on the Admissions Application
or General Student record. If the Recruiting or Degree record
is being displayed, the record with the highest catalog term
and lowest sequence number is displayed.

Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) Records for WebCAPP

Processing
The following values must be entered manually by your institution. These records are
described in the section following this table.

Internal Internal System

Internal Seq Code External Required
Code Number Group Code Description Indicator

WEBCURR 1 WEBCAPP DEG WebCAPP Curriculum Selected

Source

WEBCURR 2 WEBCAPP GST WebCAPP Curriculum Selected

Source

WEBCURR 3 WEBCAPP ADM WebCAPP Curriculum Selected

Source

WEBCURR 4 WEBCAPP REC WebCAPP Curriculum Selected

Source

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 495

 Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) record descriptions

Rule Description

WEBCURR The sequence number is 1, 2, 3, or 4.

(WebCAPP Curriculum
Source) The WEBCURR rule is a hierarchy of values from which the
current curriculum record is pulled. The valid values that can
be entered in the external code are the following:

DEG — Degree Record (SHADEGR)

GST — General Student Record (SGASTDN)
ADM — Applicant Record (SAAADMS)
REC — Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)
The sequence number associated with the external code
determines what record appears on the Current Curriculum
page (bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent).

For example, if DEG is sequence 1, and the student does not

have a Degree record, the system looks for sequence 2. If the
record does not exist for that sequence it will go on to the next
sequence number. If no record is found, the message No
Curriculum Record Found is displayed.

These four records must have a value. If only one record is

desired, for example, DEG, either enter DEG for all four
records, or enter some other unknown value (other than DEG,
GST, ADM, or REC), such as 123.

Use Pipes Processing

When using WebCAPP, Oracle database pipes are used for session communications for
compliance processing and CAPP area prerequisite checking in baseline and Self-
Service. Pipes are used to submit compliance requests from the various registration
processes.

The following pipe programs are used.

• The Pipe Initialization Process (SFRPINI) initializes the pipe process for each pipe listed
in the database pipe (SFBPIPE) table.

• The Pipe Process (SFRPIPE) is used as a listening agent for Oracle pipes to initiate the
compliance process and to perform compliance evaluations from Self-Service.

Note: All registration activity from Self-Service and SFAREGS that

involves area prerequisite checking depends on the pipe process.
However, only degree evaluations initiated from self-service require the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 496

 pipe process. Compliance evaluations initiated from SMARQCM do not
depend on the pipe process.

The following objects are used when processing compliance evaluations from the Web.

• SFBPIPE — The database table that holds the names of the “named” database pipes.
• SFRPIPE — A listener process that accepts messages for a named database pipe (from
the SFBPIPE table).

• SFRPINI — A looping process that starts the SFRPIPE listener for each “named”
database pipe in the SFBPIPE table.

• SFKPIPE — The database package responsible for submitting a request to the listener
(SFRPIPE).

• SFKCOMM - The database package used to determine the communication protocol.

Note: The SFKPREQ package calls SFKPIPE for pipes processing and
SFKCOMM for advanced queue processing.

SFKCOMM Package
The SFKCOMM package is a wrapper package that surrounds the SFKPIPE/SFRPIPE
and SOKADVQ/SFRADVQ communication processes. This package reads the
GTVSDAX setting for the CAPP AQ4PIPES rule and determines which communication
protocol is being used to submit the compliance process (DBMS_PIPES processing or
advanced queuing). It then sends the appropriate message to either the
sfkpipe.p_sfkcmpl_submit procedure (to communicate through the
DBMS_PIPE communication protocol) or to the sokadvq.p_sfkcmpl_submit
procedure (to communicate through the Oracle Advanced Queue's communication
protocol). The p_sfkcmpl_submit procedure is used to accept a request for running
compliance.

The following parameters are used with this package:

• sf_one_up_no

Job submission oneup number.

• sf_runmode

Run mode used to submit compliance. Values are I and P.

• sf_pidm

PIDM for which the request is generated.

• sf_new_request_no

Compliance request number.

• sf_status

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 497

 Return parameter indicating the success or failure of the compliance request. Returns 0
for failure or 1 for success.

Initialize Pipes
The pipes used, which are the same as the pipes used by CAPP area prerequisite
processing, are similar to those used by Job Submission (GURJOBS), and their
management is usually the responsibility of a database or system administrator.
Appropriate pipes must be initialized for processing to occur, and they can be best
initialized during normal system start-up routines. Determining the required number of
pipes to use is your institution's responsibility. If processes are waiting for pipe responses,
it may be best to initialize additional pipes.

In essence, this process is the same technology as job submission functionality

(GURJOBS). The primary differences are as follows.

• GURJOBS attempts to run any valid process defined in Banner. The SFRPINI process
runs only the SMRCMPL process. Any other command automatically shuts down the
listener process.

• GURJOBS consists of only one database pipe and one listener process. This process
can have (n) amount of database pipes and listeners, as determined by the number of
pipe names in the SFBPIPE table (SFKPIPE01 -> SFKPIPE(n)).

For test instances it is recommended that you delete all but one database pipe name.
Otherwise, it would be the same as having ten “job submissions” running on the system.

For production instances it is recommended that you start with one pipe and listener, and
increment that number based on demand. Demand can be tracked by the
sfkpipe(n).lis output files listing processing totals. However, determining the
required number of pipes to use is your institution’s responsibility.

Before starting the pipes process, users running SFRPINI must update privileges to the
SFBPIPE table. This enables the process to track the least busy pipe when multiple pipes
are used.

To start the process, you only need to run the SFRPINI process. This process conforms to
Banner coding methodology, which states that all processes must run through job
submission.

The total amount of time that the Web will wait for a request to complete is three minutes.
You may need to monitor the SFKPIPE(n).lis output files to ensure that the
compliance times do not exceed this three-minute wait period. If compliance times do
exceed this three-minute wait period:

• Web requesters will receive the “unable to connect” message when, in fact, the process
could still be running.

• It is recommended that you adjust the MAX_WAIT_REC variable in sfkpip1.sql to

a value that matches the maximum compliance evaluation time.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 498

 GTVSDAX Rules
Use the AQ4PIPES GTVSDAX rule for the internal code group of CAPP to toggle
between pipes processing and advanced queue processing.

Internal Code Internal Code Group External Code Description

AQ4PIPES CAPP Y All CAPP Processing

This rule is used as follows:

• When this rule is set to N, traditional communication for pipes processing is used with
SFRPINI (pipe initialization process) and SFRPIPE (pipe listener process). When the
listeners (SFRPIPE) are not running, you can run the SFRPINI process.

Use the following SQL command to stop the pipes (SFRPIPE):

exec sfkpipe.kill_all_servers;
• When this rule is set to Y, communication for advanced queue processing is used with
SFRQINI (queue initialization process) and SFRADVQ (queue listener process). When
the listeners (SFRADVQ) are not running, you can run the SFRQINI process.

Use the following SQL command to stop the queues (SFRADVQ):

exec sokadvq.p_kill_all_servers;

Use the PIPETIME rule to manage the timeout period for a response from compliance
processing. The default timeout period is 300 seconds or five minutes. The SFKPREL
and SFKPIP1 packages are used by this rule.

Use the PIPESIZE rule to change the size of the dbms_pipe used for the pipe process.
The default pipe size is the Oracle default of 4048.

Warning! This value should not be changed unless specified by a

technician.

Use the PREREGDEBG rule to perform testing and debugging for pipe processing.

Warning! It is strongly advised that this rule only be set to TRUE when
pipe process testing is taking place. Numerous calls to the dbms_output
item are performed, which could affect system performance in a
production environment.

Use the PIPESELECT rule as an alternative method of selecting a database pipe from
the SFBPIPE table. You can still use the method that applies load balancing
communications across the pipes. The PIPESELECT rule uses values of TRUE or
FALSE to toggle between the alternative pipe selection and the load balancing pipe
selection. When the rule is TRUE, the logic randomly selects a pipe from the SFBPIPE
table. When the rule is FALSE, load balancing is performed across the pipes as

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 499

 determined by SFBPIPE. The pipe naming convention in the SFBPIPE table must use the
format XXYYYYZZ: where XX is the node, YYYY is the name, and ZZ is the pipe number.

Internal Code Internal Code Group External Code Description

PIPETIME PIPETIMEOUT 300 SFRPIPE timeout in

seconds

PIPESIZE PREREQUISITES 4048 SFRPIPE pipe size

PREREGDEBG PREREQUISITES FALSE Debug Msg in PreReg

PIPESELECT PREREQUISITES FALSE Randomly select pipes

Pipe Initialization Process (SFRPINI)

This process is used to initialize the SFRPIPE process to run in the background, listening
for Oracle pipe calls to execute the compliance process for registration prerequisite
processing with CAPP. Run SFRPINI from the host. There are no job submission
parameters for this process.

Compliance Pipe Process (SFRPIPE)

This process is used as a listening agent for Oracle pipes, to initiate the compliance
process to perform registration prerequisite processing with CAPP. Run SFRPIPE from
the host. There are no job submission parameters for this process.

Use Advanced Queue Processing

Oracle advanced queuing is an optional alternative to using DBMS_PIPE (pipes)
processing for session communications for compliance processing and CAPP area
prerequisite checking in baseline and Self-Service. Advance queue processing is used for
session communication with Oracle Real Application Clusters (RAC) technology where
the database runs across multiple instances. Pipes and queues can co-exist, and you can
switch between the two options. However, you must choose to run one or the other. They
cannot be run together.

The following advanced queuing programs are used:

• The Queue Initialization Process (SFRQINI) initializes the SFRADVQ listener process to
be run in the background, where it listens for Oracle advanced queue calls to execute
the compliance process.

• The Compliance Advanced Queue Process (SFRADVQ) is a listening agent for Oracle
advanced queue processing. It tells advanced queuing to perform compliance
processing.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 500

 GTVSDAX Rules
Use the AQ4PIPES GTVSDAX rule for the internal code group of CAPP to toggle
between pipes processing and advanced queue processing.

Internal Code Internal Code Group External Code Description

AQ4PIPES CAPP Y All CAPP Processing

This rule is used as follows:

• When this rule is set to N, traditional communication for pipes processing is used with
SFRPINI (pipe initialization process) and SFRPIPE (pipe listener process). When the
listeners (SFRPIPE) are not running, you can run the SFRPINI process.

Use the following SQL command to stop the pipes (SFRPIPE):

exec sfkpipe.kill_all_servers;
• When this rule is set to Y, communication for advanced queue processing is used with
SFRQINI (queue initialization process) and SFRADVQ (queue listener process). When
the listeners (SFRADVQ) are not running, you can run the SFRQINI process.

Use the following SQL command to stop the queues (SFRADVQ):

exec sokadvq.p_kill_all_servers;

The QUEUETIME rule can also be used with advanced queue processing.

Internal Code Internal Code Group External Code Description

QUEUETIME QUEUETIMEOUT 300 SFRADVQ timeout in

seconds

The QUEUETIME rule allows you to change the timeout period for the advanced queue
process. The delivered default timeout period is 300 seconds (five minutes). You need to
set the rule to the timeout value you choose for the queue to work with the advanced
queuing. The SFKCOMM package uses the AQ4PIPES rule to determine the
transmission protocol, while the SOKADVQ package uses the QUEUETIME rule.

The QUEUETIME rule is equivalent to the PIPETIME GTVSDAX rule. The QUEUETIME
rule states the amount of time the user is willing to wait for a response for compliance
processing while using the advanced queuing option, while the PIPETIME rule denotes
the amount of time the user is willing to wait for a response for the compliance processing
while using pipes processing.

The advance queue processing is optional and can be used in place of pipes processing,
but using advance queuing is not required for communication protocol. The GTVSDAX
rules are delivered with a value of N, and you can continue to use pipes processing if you
choose.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 501

 SFKCOMM Package
The SFKCOMM package is a wrapper package that surrounds the SFKPIPE/SFRPIPE
and SOKADVQ/SFRADVQ communication processes. This package reads the GTVSDAX
setting for the CAPP AQ4PIPES rule and determines which communication protocol is
being used to submit the compliance process (DBMS_PIPES processing or advanced
queuing). It then sends the appropriate message to either the
sfkpipe.p_sfkcmpl_submit procedure (to communicate through the
DBMS_PIPE communication protocol) or to the sokadvq.p_sfkcmpl_submit
procedure (to communicate through the Oracle Advanced Queue's communication
protocol). The p_sfkcmpl_submit procedure is used to accept a request for running
compliance.

The following parameters are used with this package:

• sf_one_up_no

Job submission oneup number.

• sf_runmode

Run mode used to submit compliance. Values are I and P.

• sf_pidm

PIDM for which the request is generated.

• sf_new_request_no

Compliance request number.

• sf_status

Return parameter indicating the success or failure of the compliance request. Returns 0
for failure or 1 for success.

SOKADVQ Package
The SOKADVQ package contains functions and procedures that facilitate communication
through advanced queuing and support the SFRADVQ listener process.

SFKPREQ Package
The SFKPREQ package calls SFKPIPE for pipes processing and SFKCOMM for
advanced queue processing.

soo_sfkcmpl_payload Object Type

The soo_sfkcmpl_payload simple Oracle object type is used to carry the CAPP
request information as a payload on the Banner Student queues. This object type is used

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 502

 on the SFKCMPL_REQUEST_Q and SFKCMPL_RESPONSE_Q queues.

SF_COMMAND_TYPE VARCHAR2(7 CHAR)

SF_CORRELATION_ID VARCHAR2(128 CHAR)
SF_ONE_UP_NO NUMBER(9)
SF_RUNMODE VARCHAR2(1 CHAR)
SF_PIDM NUMBER(8)
SF_NEW_REQUEST_NO NUMBER(4)
SF_STATUS NUMBER(1)

Note: The squeqtabc_08040100_01.sql script establishes the

administrative queues and queue tables for advanced queuing.

Queue Initialization Process (SFRQINI)

This process initializes the SFRADVQ listener process to be run in the background, where
it listens for Oracle advanced queue calls to execute the compliance process. It can be run
from job submission. SFRQINI can be compared to the SFRPINI pipe initialization
process.

The Number of Listeners to Start parameter is required. Enter the number of advanced
queue listeners to be started from SFRADVQ. The default value is 10.

Compliance Advanced Queue Process (SFRADVQ)

This process is a listening agent for Oracle advanced queue processing. It tells advanced
queuing to perform compliance processing. Run the SFRQINI process to start the
SFRADVQ process. SFRADVQ can be compared to the SFRPIPE pipe listener process.

Process Flow
Here is a process flow that shows how pipes and queues are used with prerequisite
checking.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 503

 Set Up Graduation Application on the Web
This task is composed of the following procedures:

• “Set Up Overall Graduation Application Display Rules” on page 505

• “Set Up Graduation Date Availability” on page 506

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 504

 • “Set Up Graduation Applications on the Web” on page 506
• “Set Up Diploma Name Selection and Modification” on page 507
• “Set Up Diploma Mailing Address Selection and Modification” on page 508

Set Up Overall Graduation Application Display Rules

You can specify which curriculum elements and curriculum labels will be displayed to
users for selecting a curriculum for graduation. This includes specifying whether the
following are to be available for selection for the chosen curriculum:

• Graduation date
• Term
• Year
You can also specify whether a confirmation letter is displayed at the end of the
application process, and which application status code and graduation status code will be
used to populate the graduation application table. Finally, you can specify whether, when
the application is finally submitted, the academic history tables SHRDGRMR and
SHBDIPL will be updated with the information the student entered.
1. Access the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR).
2. Enter the graduation application display rule code in the Graduation Application
Display Rules field, then go to the next block.
3. Enter the transcript type code in the Curriculum Labels field in the Overall window.
The curriculum elements and labels that have been specified to be displayed for this
transcript type will be used when the curriculum is displayed.
4. Select one or more of the following Display Graduation checkboxes (at least one
must be selected):
• Date
• Term
• Year
5. Select the letter code of the confirmation letter to be displayed when the application is
successfully submitted.
The letter type must exist in the GTVLETR validation table, and the letter code must
have been defined using the HTML Letter Rules Form (SOAELTL) and the Format
HTML Letter Form (SOAELTR).
6. Enter the graduation application status code to be saved with the application when it is
submitted in the Graduation Application Status field.
It is recommended that you use an STVGAST code for which the Active Indicator
and the Web Indicator have been selected. These indicators are included on the list
of values for this field.
7. Select the Create/Update Degree checkbox if you want the academic history tables
SHRDGRMR and SHRDIPL to be updated in addition to data in the graduation

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 505

 application table SHBGAPP being created; and, if applicable, roll the learner
curriculum to outcome.

Note: If you want to charge for graduation applications submitted via self-
service, you must select this checkbox.

8. Enter the graduation status code to be used for the application when it is submitted in
the Graduation Status field.
9. Save your changes.

Set Up Graduation Date Availability

You can specify the date ranges in which specific graduation dates, terms, or years will be
available for selecting a curriculum and graduation. You may select a graduation date,
term and/or year for the student to view. You can also specify whether the system will
display a radio button group for the user to indicate his or her intention to attend a
ceremony that associated with the graduation.
1. Access the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR).
2. Enter the graduation application display rule code in the Graduation Application
Display Rules field, then go to the next block.
3. Go to the Graduation Date Availability window.
4. Enter the first date this graduation rule code is available on the web in the Start Date
field.
5. Enter the last date this graduation rule code is available on the web in the End Date
field.
6. Enter the relevant value for the graduation that is associated with this rule code in one
or more of the following fields:
• Graduation date
• Term
• Year
7. If you want to allow users to indicate whether the student intends to attend the
ceremony, select the Ceremony checkbox.
8. Save your changes.

Set Up Graduation Applications on the Web

1. Define your graduation application eligibility rules on the Graduation Application
Eligibility Rules (SHAGELR).
2. Define your application status codes on the Graduation Application Status Validation
Form (STVGAST), being sure to select the Web Indicator checkbox for each
application status code you want to be available on the Web.
3. Define the display rules codes for your graduation applications on the Graduation
Application Display Rules Code Validation Form (STVGADR).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 506

 4. Define the rules that assign display selection codes to students based on curricula
data on the Graduation Application Selection Display Rules Form (SHAGADS).
5. Define your graduation application display rules on the Self-Service Graduation
Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR).
6. Add diploma name and address information for the rule.
Refer to the following tasks for set-by-step procedures for setting up specific
functions:
• “Set Up Diploma Name Selection and Modification” on page 507
• “Set Up Diploma Mailing Address Selection and Modification” on page 508

Set Up Diploma Name Selection and Modification

You can allow students to specify the name to be printed on their diplomas. The following
procedure explains how to allow a student to select a name and, if desired, how to allow a
student to change the name to be printed to something other than what appears in system
records (for example, to spell out a middle name instead of using an initial).
1. Access the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR).
2. Enter the code of the graduation application display rule in the Key Block, then go to
the next block.
3. Go to the Diploma Name/Address Options window.
4. In the Diploma Name section, select the Display Page checkbox.
This causes the Diploma Name Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name) to be displayed to students.
5. If you want a student’s name to be displayed on the Diploma Name Selection page,
select the Diploma Name Display checkbox.
6. Specify which name is to be displayed as follows.
• If you want the current name on SPRIDEN to be displayed, select the Current radio
button.
• If you want the alternate name on SPRIDEN to be displayed, select the Alternate
radio button and specify the alternate name type in the Alternate Name field.
7. Specify the middle name to be displayed in the Middle pulldown list.
8. If you want a student’s suffix to be displayed, select the Suffix checkbox.
9. If you want a student to be allowed to change the name to be printed on the diploma,
take the following actions.
9.1. Select the Edit checkbox.
This causes the value New to be included in the pulldown list for the One of
Your Names field on the Diploma Name Selection page. If multiple names exist
in the SPRIDEN table for the student, all names will be displayed in the
pulldown list and be available for selection.
9.2. Select the checkboxes for the parts of the name that you want to allow students
to change.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 507

 This specifies which fields will be displayed on the Diploma Name Selection -
Name Change page (bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_name).
10. Save your changes.

Set Up Diploma Mailing Address Selection and Modification

You can allow students to specify the address to which their diplomas are to be sent. The
following procedure explains how to allow a student to select an address and, if desired,
how to allow a student to change the address to a new address.
1. Access the Self-Service Graduation Application Display Rules Form (SHAGADR).
2. Enter the code of the graduation application display rule in the Key Block, then go to
the next block.
3. Go to the Diploma Name/Address Options window.
4. In the Diploma Mailing Address section, select the Display Page checkbox.
This causes the Diploma Mailing Address Selection page
(bwskgrad.p_proc_diploma_addr) to be displayed to students.
5. If you want the address currently associated with the Diploma Record to be displayed,
select the Display checkbox.
6. If you want to allow students to change the address to which the diploma is to be
mailed, select the Edit checkbox.
This causes the value New to be included in the pulldown list for the One of Your
Addresses field on the Diploma Mailing Address Selection page. If multiple
addresses exist for the student, all addresses will be displayed in the pulldown list and
be available for selection.
7. Save your changes.

Use Student Records on the Web

This section includes the following procedures:

• “Request Transcripts” on page 508

• “Perform What-if Analyses for Degree Evaluations” on page 509
• “Set up test scores” on page 510
• “Access test scores” on page 510

Request Transcripts
To request an official transcript, the student completes the following steps.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 508

 1. From the Student Services & Financial Aid menu, the student selects the Student
Records link. From the Student Records menu, the user selects the Request Printed
Transcript link.
2. The Transcript Request Address page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_
Address) is displayed. The student uses this page to indicate where the transcript
should be sent, and then clicks the Continue button.
3. The Select Transcript Type
(bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Request_Type) page is displayed. The
student enters the type of transcript he or she is requesting and for which course
levels it should be printed. The user also verifies the address information that defaults
onto the page, and then clicks the Continue button.
4. The Transcript Request Options (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Transcript_Request_
Data) page is displayed. The student enters the number of copies he or she wants,
selects when the transcript should be printed and how it will be delivered, and then
clicks the Continue button.
5. The Payment Options (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Trans_Request_Charges) page
is displayed. This page includes the total amount due. The student indicates how
payment will be made, and then clicks the Continue button.
• If the student chooses to pay by credit card and clicks the Continue button, the
Transcript Request Summary page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type) is
displayed.
• On this page the student clicks the Submit Request button to access the external
vendor payment page for payment by payment card.
• If the student chooses either Charge to your student account or Pay
cash in person, when the Continue button is clicked, the Transcript Request
Summary page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type) is displayed.

6. The Transcript Request Summary Page (bwskwtrr.P_Disp_Payment_Type)

is displayed showing a summary of the transcript request. The student clicks the
Submit Request button.
7. The Signature Page (bwskwtrr.P_DispSigPage) is displayed. This page
contains a message verifying that the transcript request has been logged.

Perform What-if Analyses for Degree Evaluations

Students can perform a what-if analysis via the Web, comparing his or her coursework to
any program/curriculum. The resulting output is itemized, showing requirements
completed and the courses required to fulfill the program requirements.

To generate a What-if Analysis, the student performs the following steps.

1. The student selects the What-if Analysis link from one of the following pages:
• Degree Evaluation Record (bwckcapp.P_DispCurrent)

• Generate New Evaluation page (bwckcapp.P_DispEvalTerm)

• View Previous Evaluation page (bwcksmmt.P_DispPrevEval)

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 509

 The What-if Analysis Step 1 page (bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_one) is
displayed.
2. The student selects a term from the Entry Term pulldown list, then selects the
Continue button. The What-if Analysis Step 2 page
(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_two) is displayed.
3. The student selects the program to be evaluated from the Program pulldown list, then
selects the Continue button. The What-if Analysis Step 3 page
(bwcksmds.p_whatif_step_three) is displayed.
4. The student selects a major from the Major 1 pulldown list. The user can also select a
campus from the Campus pulldown list. The user can select the Add More button to
add more options or select the Submit button to proceed with the evaluation.
If the user chooses to add more options, more pages are displayed, depending on
your institution’s setup, until no more options are available to be added. The user then
selects the Submit button.
After the student the Submit button, the What-if Analysis (Evaluation Term) page
(bwcksmds.P_WhatIf_Next_Step) is displayed.
5. The user selects a term from the Evaluation Term pulldown list, then selects the
Generate Request button.
The Degree Evaluation Display Options page (bwcksmds.p_whatif_submit) is
displayed.
6. The student selects the type of display he or she wants to view, then selects the
Submit button.

Set up test scores

Use the following steps to set test scores in Banner baseline for use in Self-Service.
1. Enter test codes on the Test Code Validation Form (STVTESC).
2. Assign test codes to a student on the Test Score Information Form (SOATEST).
3. Enter the test scores and test dates on SOATEST.
4. On the Web Display List Customization Form (SOAWDSP), add test codes for display
on the Web for the Validation Table Name of STVTESC.

Access test scores

Use the following steps to access test scores for a student in Self-Service.
1. Log in to Banner Student Self-Service.
2. On the Main Menu (bmenu.P_MainMnu), select Student.

3. On the Student Main Menu (bmenu.P_StuMainMnu), select Student Records.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 510

 4. On the Student Records Menu (bmenu.P_AdminMnu), select the View Test Scores
option.
5. Review the test score information for the student on the Test Scores page
(bwsktesc.p_view_tests).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Records 511

 Student Account

The Student Account portion of Banner Student Self-Service allows a student to do the
following:

• View his or her account summary either in summary or on a term-by-term basis

• View his or her billing statements, payment history, and unbilled account activity
This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Student Account Web Pages” on page 512, which provides details about each Web
page accessed from the Student Records Web pages

• “Set Up Student Account on the Web” on page 543, which provides detailed steps for
setting up Student Records on the Web

• “Set up and Use Payment and Deposit Processing” on page 546, which provides
detailed steps for setting up payment and deposit processing on the Web

Student Account Web Pages

The following Web pages compose Banner Student Self-Service Student Account:

• “Account Summary (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal)” on page 513

• “Account Summary By Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct)” on page 514
• “Account Detail for Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm)” on page 517
• “Account Summary by Period (bwskeacc.P_AcctSummary)” on page 522
• “Account Summary for Period Terms (bwskeacc.P_PeriodAcctSummary)” on page 525
• “Statement and Payment History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement)” on page 527
• “Select a Tax Year (bwtktxys.p_get_tax_year)” on page 529
• “Tax Notification for Tax Year (bwtktxns.p_disp_tax_notification)” on page 531
• “View Holds (bwskoacc.P_ViewHold)” on page 368 of “Student Records” on page 366
• “Payment Processing (bwskpayg.P_DispList)” on page 534
• “Payment Processing Transaction (bwskpayg.P_ProcList,
bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction)” on page 537

• “Payment Processing Summary (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction)” on page 540

• “Payment Processing Successful Payment (bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess)” on page 542
• “Account Information (bwskoacc.P_DisplayTabs)” on page 542

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 512

 Account Summary (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal)
This page displays student account balance information summarized by detail code. Items
are displayed in detail code order. Entries are summarized by detail code (for example,
two unapplied cash payments of $50 and $200 net to one entry of $250). A summary of
charges, credits, payments, and account balance is displayed at the end of the list.

Only account detail items are included in the Account Summary. Contracts, memos, and
anticipated financial aid are not displayed. If the student has no account detail, the page is
not available.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Account Balance Student’s account balance. A negative value indicates that

financial aid awards and other sources of aid are greater than
current charges.

Description Description of the detail code.

Charge Amount of the charge associated with the source.

Payment Amount of the payment associated with the source.

Balance For charges, this is the remaining balance of the charge after
application of payments. For payments, this is the remaining
balance of the payment that has not yet been applied.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want detail codes to be displayed, enter Y in the External
(GTVSDAX) Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group
WEBACCTSUM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 513

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Credit Card Payment Goes to the Registration Term page

(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) for the user to select a term.
When a term has been selected, processing can continue.

Use the Submit button on the Registration Term page to access

the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Use the Submit button on the Tuition and Fees Payment page to
access the external vendor payment page for payment by credit
card.

View Installment Plan If a term has not been selected during the current Web session,
goes to the Select Term page (bwskoacc.P_SelectTerm).

If a term has been selected during the current Web session, goes
to the Calculated Repayment Plan Summary page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewInstallments).

Statement and Payment Goes to the Statement and Payment History page
History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu as a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Account Summary By Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct)

This page displays student account balance information grouped by term, in descending
order by term (most recent term first). If there are non-term items on an account (using the

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 514

 term code ARTERM), they are displayed at the beginning and can be identified by the
heading “Items not related to a term”.

Within each term section, items are displayed in detail-code order, with charges listed first
and the payments. Entries are summarized by detail code (for example, two unapplied
cash payments of 50.00 and 200.00 net to one entry of 250.00). Only the unapplied
balance, not the original amount of the transactions, is displayed. A summary of total
charges, total payments, and term balance is displayed at the end of each term, and the
total account balance is displayed at both the beginning and the end of the list of account
entries. Memos and authorizations are not displayed on this page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Account Balance Student’s account balance.

A negative value indicates a credit balance.

Account Balance Student’s account balance.

A negative value indicates a credit balance.

Term Description of the term, displayed as a hyperlink to the Account

Detail for Term page (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm).

Detail Code Detail code associated with the item.

Description Description of the charge or payment.

Charge Amount of the charge associated with the source.

Payment Amount of the payment associated with the source.

Balance For charges, this is the remaining balance of the charge after
application of payments. For payments, this is the remaining
balance of the payment that has not yet been applied.

The value is calculated using the Amount column minus

applied transactions.

Term Charges Total charges for the term.

Term Credits and Payments Total credits and payments for the term.

Term Balance Outstanding balance for the term.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 515

 Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want detail codes to be displayed, enter Y in the External
(GTVSDAX) Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group
WEBACCTSUM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Overall Financial Aid Goes to the Financial Aid Status for Award Year page
Status (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).

Financial Aid Award Goes to the Award menu (bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu).

Information Menu

Credit Card Payment Goes to the Registration Term page

(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) for the user to select a term.
When a term has been selected, processing can continue.

Use the Submit button on the Registration Term page to access

the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Use the Submit button on the Tuition and Fees Payment page to
access the external vendor payment page for payment by credit
card.

View Installment Plan Goes to the Calculated Repayment Plan Summary page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewInstallments).

Statement and Payment Goes to the Statement and Payment History page
History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 516

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
The following menu as a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Award menu bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Account Detail for Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm)

This page displays detailed account information for the selected term on one page, which
makes it easy for a student to review their account detail and see at a glance how much
money they owe the institution.

When assessments are enabled on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) and the Housing
Term Control Form (SLATERM), and a student who has not been assessed or has
charges pending accesses the page, then fee assessment will run automatically. This
applies to tuition and fees, as well as housing (including room, meals, and phone). Other
information can also be display, such as memoed and authorized financial aid, other
Accounts Receivable memos (contracts, exemptions, deposits), and installments as
enabled via the Accounts Receivable Term Control Form (TSATERM). New assessments
and installment plan assignments are saved to the database, but calculated memo
transactions are not retained.

The values that are displayed on this page depend on the choices made on TSATERM for
memos and authorized financial aid, and on the Student Billing Control Form (TSACTRL)
for installment plan information.

Your institution can choose to display a Pay Now button on the page, thereby letting
students access the external vendor payment page to make a credit card payment on their
account.

Note: Display of detail codes in the Account Summary and the Account
Detail pages can be suppressed by setting the External Code to N on the
Crosswalk Validation Form (GTVSDAX) for internal code WEBDETCODE
in internal group WEBACCTSUM.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 517

 Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are in the Term Detail section of the page. This section includes information
about charges and payments made on the student’s account as of the Current Due Effective
Date, which is the greater of the system date or the date entered in the Current Due Effective
Date field on TSATERM. Fields are displayed based on the selections made on TSATERM.

Detail Code Detail code associated with the transaction.

Description Description associated with the detail code.

Item Date Effective date of the transaction. In summary mode, this field is
not displayed.

Charge Charge posted to the account.

Payment Payment posted to the account.

Net Term Balance Balance (charges less payments) for the specified term.
Balance may be comprised of both current- and future-dated
transactions.

Current Balance for Term Balance of current activity for the term selected. This field is
displayed only if current- and future-dated activity exists for the
term. If all activity is current-dated, only the Net Balance for
Term field is displayed.

Future Balance for Term Balance of future-dated activity for the term selected. This field
is displayed only if future-dated activity exists for the term.

Net Balance for Other Terms Net account balance (charges less payments) for terms other
than the one selected. The balance can be composed of
current- and future-dated transactions.

Current Balance for Other Balance of current activity for terms other than the one
Terms selected. This field is displayed only if current- and future-dated
activity exists for other terms. If all activity is current-dated, only
the Net Balance for Other Terms field is displayed.

Future Balance for Other Balance of future activity for terms other than the one selected.
Terms This field is displayed only if future-dated activity exists for other
terms.

Account Balance Charges less payments for all transactions on a student's

account, without regard to term or effective date of transactions.

Current Amount Due as of Current amount due as of the Current Due Effective Date.

The value is calculated from the Amount column for current

activity from all terms.

The following fields are in the Authorized Financial Aid section of the page. This section
includes authorized financial aid transactions that have been created by the Financial Aid
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) and will be applied to the student’s account. This section
and its totals are displayed based on the selections you made on TSATERM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 518

 Item Description/Source Information

Detail Code Detail code for the item.

Description Description of the item.

Expected Payment Authorized financial aid payment expected to be posted to the

student's account.

Authorized Financial Aid Total of all authorized financial aid expected to be posted to the
Balance student's account.

Account Balance net of Student net account balance less financial aid authorized, but
Authorized Financial Aid not yet disbursed on the student’s account.

Current Due net of Current amount due from the student less financial aid
Authorized Financial Aid authorized, but not yet disbursed on the student’s account. If
the amount due is less than zero, zero displays here.

The following fields are in the Memos section of the page. This section includes memos for
pending transactions. Memos may include Financial Aid memos, third party contract credits,
exemptions, deposits eligible for release, and other manually created memos with the Billing
Indicator of Y. Memos are excluded if the expiration date is less than the Current Due Effective
Date. This section and its totals are displayed based on the selections you made on TSATERM.

Detail Code Detail code associated with the transaction.

Description Description of the detail code.

Expected Charge Pending charge expected to be posted to the student's account.

Expected Payment Pending payment expected to be posted to the student's

account.

Account Balance net of Student account balance, less authorized financial aid (if
[Authorized Financial Aid] enabled) and other memos not yet posted to the student's
and Memos account.

Current Due net of Current amount due from the student less authorized financial
[Authorized Financial Aid] aid (if enabled) and memos not yet posted to the student’s
and Memos account. If the amount due is less than zero, zero is displayed
in this field.

The following fields are in the Installment Plan section of the page. This section displays
installment plan information (both manual and automated) when students are assigned or
eligible for an installment plan. For automated installment plans to be assigned or calculated for
display on the Account Detail for Term page, the applicable checkboxes must be selected on
TSACTRL.

Existing installment plans (both automated and manual) already posted to the student's account
will always be displayed in the Account Detail section of the Account Detail for Term page.

Detail Code Detail code for the item.

Description Description of the item.

Due Date Date the installment payment becomes due.

Amount Amount of the installment payment.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 519

 Item Description/Source Information

Total Total of the installment plan payments, including any service

fee or interest charges.

Current Amount Due as of Amount due, which includes the installment payment, and any
current charges not eligible for the installment plan.

Information Text
The following table contains the info text that can be displayed within each section of the
Account Detail for Term page, as enabled.

Message Text

DETAIL Review detail transactions on your account, including

current and future balance totals for the selected term and
other terms.

AUTHAID Review Authorized Financial Aid on your account and the

expected payment for the selected term.

AUTHAID_NONE No Authorized Financial Aid exists on your record for the

selected term.

MEMO Review pending transactions on your account and the

expected charge or credit for the selected term.

MEMO_NONE No pending transactions exist on your record for the

selected term.

INSTALL Payment for selected term may be made according to the

schedule below.

INSTALL_NONE No Installment Plans exist on your record for the selected

term.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form If you want detail codes to be displayed, enter Y in the External
(GTVSDAX) Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group
WEBACCTSUM.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 520

 Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Tuition assessment Updates the SFBETRM table.

Room assessment Updates the SLRRASG table.

Meal assessment Updates the SLRMASG table.

Phone assessment Updates the SLRPASG table.

Installment plan Updates the TBRISTL table.

assignment

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Select Another Term Goes to the Select Term page

(bwskoacc.P_SelectTermAcct).

Statement and Payment Goes to the Statement and Payment History page
History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement).

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Pay Now Goes to the Tuition and Fees Payment page

(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

You can use the Submit button on the Tuition and Fees
Payment page to access the external vendor payment page for
payment by credit card.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 521

 Web Menus With Links to This Page
The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Account Summary by Period

(bwskeacc.P_AcctSummary)
This page is used with Banner Financial Aid enrollment period processing, which enables
you to combine multiple terms to create a single enrollment and payment period. Please
see the Banner Accounts Receivable User Guide for more information on enrollment
period processing.

This page displays student account balance information grouped by enrollment period.
Student account balances are displayed in descending order by period with the most
recent period first. If there are non-period items on an account, such as using the term
code ARTERM, the items are displayed at the beginning and are identified by the heading
“Items not related to a period”. Within each period section, items are displayed in detail
code order with charges listed first followed by payments. Entries are summarized by a
detail code. For example, two unapplied cash payments of $50.00 and $200.00 net one
entry of $250.00. Only the unapplied balance, not the original amount of the transactions,
is displayed.

A summary of total charges, total payments, and period balance is displayed at the end of
each period. The total account balance is displayed at both the beginning and the end of
the list of account entries. Memos and authorizations are not displayed on this page.

To view the terms associated with an enrollment period, click on the Enrollment Period
Description link (for example, Spring 2011 - 2012 or Fall 2010). When the
Enrollment Period Description link is selected, the Account Summary for Period Terms
page (bwskeacc.P_PeriodAcctSummary) is displayed. This page displays
summary information for all terms in the selected enrollment period.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 522

 Item Description/Source Information

Account Balance Student's account balance. A negative value indicates a credit

balance.

This field appears at the beginning and end of the enrollment

period information.

Detail Code Detail code associated with the transaction.

Description Description associated with the detail code.

Charge Charge posted to the account.

Payment Payment posted to the account.

Balance For charges, this amount is the remaining balance of the charge
after application of payments. For payments, this amount is the
remaining balance of a payment that has not been applied. The
value is calculated using the amount from the Payment or Charge
column minus applied transactions.

Period Charges Total charges for the period.

Period Credits and Total credits and payments for the period.
Payment

Period Balance Outstanding balance for the enrollment period.

Information Text
The following table contains the information text that can be displayed within each section
of the Account Summary by Period page, as enabled.

Message Text

MEMO Review summarized charges and payments to your

account by Financial Aid Enrollment Period. Anticipated
third party contract payments, financial aid payments, and
memo items are not included in this summary.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 523

 Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form To display detail codes, enter Y in the External Code field for the
(GTVSDAX) WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group WEBACCTSUM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Overall Financial Aid Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).

Status
Select a value from the Select Aid Year field, and click the
Submit button to access the Financial Aid Status for 20XX - 20XX
aid year page (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).

Financial Aid Award Goes to the Award menu (bmenu.PFAAwdMnu).

Information Menu

Credit Card Payment Goes to the Registration Term page

(bwckcpmt.P_CCPayment).

Select a term from the Select a Term field, and click the Submit
button to access the Credit Card Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 524

 Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Account Summary for Period Terms

(bwskeacc.P_PeriodAcctSummary)
This page is used to view summary information for terms in the selected enrollment
period. To access this page, click on the Enrollment Period Description link on the
Account Summary by Period page (bwskeacc.P_AcctSummary). The link is the
name of the enrollment period.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Period Balance Account balance for the enrollment period. A negative value
indicates a credit balance.

This field appears at the beginning and end of the Enrollment

Period Terms information.

Detail Code Detail code associated with the transaction.

Description Description associated with the detail code.

Charge Charge posted to the account.

Payment Payment posted to the account.

Balance For charges, this amount is the remaining balance of the charge
after application of payments. For payments, this amount is the
remaining balance of a payment that has not been applied. The
value is calculated using the amount from the Payment or Charge
column minus applied transactions.

Term Charges Total charges for the enrollment period term.

Term Credits and Payment Total credits and payments for the enrollment period term.

Term Balance Outstanding balance for the enrollment period term.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 525

 Information Text
The following table contains the information text that can be displayed within each section
of the Account Summary for Period Terms page, as enabled.

Message Text

MEMO Review summarized charges and payments to your

account for terms in the selected period.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form To display detail codes, enter Y in the External Code field for the
(GTVSDAX) WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group WEBACCTSUM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Account Summary by Goes to the Account Summary by Period page

Period (bwskeacc.P_AcctSummary).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 526

 Statement and Payment History
(bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement)
This page enables students to view and print stored statements, payment history, and
unbilled activity for an account.

Students can view stored statements and payment history as defined by the institution on
the Accounts Receivable Billing Control Form (TGACTRL).

When you choose the Statement and Payment History link from the Student Account
menu, the system displays a page with tabs at the top, that can be used to access
statement and payment history information, as shown in the following table.

Tab Label Type of Information

Statement Current statement. This section displays information about

the most recent statement.

Payment History Recorded payments for the account. This section displays
payment history for the account. Transactions that display
in payment history are detail codes marked as Payment
History on the Detail Code Control forms (TSADETC or
TFADETC).

Unbilled Account activity that has not been billed yet. This section
displays information about activity posted to the account
since the last statement was generated, as well as
transactions that had a future effective date at the time of
billing.

All Cumulative display of all the information on the other tabs.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed on the Statement tab.

Account Balance Monetary amount of the account balance as of the current date.

Select Statement Bill Date Date for which a statement is to be viewed.

View Statement Hypertext link to the statement for the selected date.

Amount Due Total amount due at the time of billing.

Due Date Date payment is due.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 527

 Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed on the Payment History tab.

Payments since Identifies beginning date for which payments are listed.

Account Balance Monetary amount of the account balance as of the current date.

Post Date Date the payment was posted to the account.

Term Term associated with the payment.

Description Description of the transaction.

Amount Amount of the transaction.

Bill Date Date transaction was billed on a statement. A blank in this field
indicates that the transaction has not yet appeared on a
statement.

The following fields are displayed on the Unbilled tab.

Account Balance Monetary amount of the account balance as of the current date.

Effective Date Effective date of the transaction.

Term Term associated with the transaction.

Description Description of the transaction.

Charge Charge amount of the transaction.

Payment Payment amount of the transaction.

Post Date Date the charge or payment was posted to the account.

All of the fields described above are displayed on the All tab.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form To display detail codes, enter Y in the External Code field for the
(GTVSDAX) WEBDETCODE internal code in internal group WEBACCTSUM.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 528

 Links to Other Web Pages
This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

View Statement Displays the statement for the specified date.

Account Summary Goes to the Account Summary page

(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal).

Account Summary by Goes to the Account Summary by Term page

Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).

Account Detail for Term Goes to the Account Detail for Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm).

Credit Card Payment Goes to the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected).

Use the Submit button on the Tuition and Fees Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CCPaymentTermSelected) to access the
external vendor payment page for payment by credit card.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Select a Tax Year (bwtktxys.p_get_tax_year)

This page is used to select the tax year for which a user wants to view 1098-T tax
notification information. If the user selects the Tax Notification link on the Student
Records menu before selecting a tax year, this page is automatically displayed.

Because the requirements for reporting under the Tax Relief Act of 1997 begin with the
1998 tax year, entries must be equal to or greater than 1998 to be valid. If the user enters

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 529

 a tax year earlier than 1998, the message Tax year must be numeric and be between
1998 and 2098 is displayed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Enter a Tax Year Tax year for which the user wants to view 1098 tax notification
information.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to other Web pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Submit If this page was accessed from the Student Account menu,
returns to the Student Account menu.

If this page was displayed because the user selected the Tax
Notification link on the Student Account menu before selecting
a tax year, goes to the Tax Notification for Tax Year page
(bwtktxys.p_store_tax_year).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 530

 Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Tax Notification for Tax Year

(bwtktxns.p_disp_tax_notification)
This page displays a representation of the student’s 1098-T form. The 1098-T
representation appears at the top of the page, with supplemental and detail information
beneath it. This page is display-only.

The Form 1098-T section contains a representation of the 1098-T form. The student can
select the links in the form to review the detail for a reported amount.

You have the option to mask the student’s SSN on the 1098-T form.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are displayed in the Supplemental Information section, which provides
additional tax report information. Numbered amounts that are underscored indicate that the
student can access additional detail for that amount.

Hard Copy Mailed Student notification date if the form has been sent, or No if it has
not been sent.

Tax Report Description Description of a supplemental rule if the student has matching
transactions and access is authorized.

Total Total amount associated with this tax report item.

The following fields are displayed in the Detail of Reported Amounts section, where data
displayed to support the amount in box 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the 1098-T is summarized by term and
detail code.

Term Term of the transaction.

Terms beginning in the following year are designated in the

description.

Code Detail code of the transaction.

Description Description of the transaction.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 531

 Item Description/Source Information

Amount Monetary amount associated with the detail code for the specified
term.

Pro-rata A value of Yes indicates that this amount has been pro-rated.

Return to Form 1098-T This link returns the student to the representation of the1098-T
form at the top of the page.

The following fields are displayed in the Supplemental Detail section.

Reported In Tax year and box number in which the amount was reported. If
this amount was not reported, this field is blank.

Term Term of the transaction.

Description Description of the category code, detail code, or transaction.

Amount Monetary amount associated with the specified detail and

category codes.

Date Date this amount was reported.

Future Tax Year A value of Yes indicates that this amount is associated with a
term beginning in the first three months (January - March) of the
next tax year.

Pro-rata A value of Yes indicates that this amount has been pro-rated.

Total Total.

Return to Supplemental This link returns you to the Supplemental Summary section.
Summary

Information Text
One of the first seven messages in the following table is displayed as Info Text at the top
of the Tax Notification page. The specific information displayed is determined by the
Remove Notification, Tax Notification, and IRS Report statuses.

The SUPPLEMENTAL text is displayed between the 1098-T representation and the
Supplemental Summary section.

The HELP text is displayed from the HELP link on the Tax Notification page.

Message Text

NOT_READY A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

shown below. We will not be able to furnish this important
tax information to you or the Internal Revenue Service, as
required information is missing. Please contact the Student
Accounts office immediately.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 532

 Message Text

REMOVED Form 1098-T is not scheduled to be sent to you for this Tax
Year. Please contact Student Accounts if there is any
question.

READY (Student= R) A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

shown below. This important tax information will be sent to
you and furnished to the Internal Revenue Service. Select
links on the reported amounts to review the associated
detail.

SENT_STUDENT A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

(Student=’S’, IRS not ‘F’ or shown below as sent to you. This important tax information
‘S’) will be furnished to the Internal Revenue Service. Select
links on the reported amounts to review the associated
detail.

SENT_IRS A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

shown below as sent to you. This important tax information
has been furnished to the Internal Revenue Service. Select
links on the reported amounts to review the associated
detail.

EXCLUDED A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

shown below. This will not be sent to you or to the Internal
Revenue Service as the amounts do not require reporting.
Select links on the reported amounts to review the
associated detail.

SENT_FILE A representation of the Tuition Statement form 1098-T is

shown below. This important tax information has been
forwarded for processing. Select links on the reported
amounts to review the associated detail.

SUPPLEMENTAL Select links on the Tax Report Descriptions below to see

additional detail which may be helpful in determining the
amount to claim for Hope Scholarship or Lifetime Learning
Credit.

HELP This is important tax information to be furnished to the

Internal Revenue Service. If any information is incorrect
please contact Student Accounts immediately.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 533

 Item Description

Tax Reporting Rules Form If you want supplemental information totals to be displayed on the
(TSATAXR) Web, select the Total Access checkbox.

If you want supplemental information details to be displayed on

the Web, select the Detail Access checkbox.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Select Another Tax Year Goes to the Select a Tax Year page
(bwtktxys.p_get_tax_year).

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Payment Processing (bwskpayg.P_DispList)

This page is used to display the items that are ready for payment by the student or
applicant. Application payments are listed by admission term and transaction. Other
payments, such as required deposits, are listed by transaction with the associated term.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 534

 Each transaction is a link to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcList).

If no payments exist for the applicant or student, or if the applicant or student does not
meet the rule criteria on TSAWPAY, the message No payments or deposits are available
at this time is displayed.

This page lists as many transactions as are needed. The rule on TSAWPAY determines
the number and order of the transactions. Deposits are displayed when an outstanding
balance exists for the transaction.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Available Transactions List of transactions ready for payment, such as Deposit for
(untitled) Fall 2013-2014.

Setup Requirements
The following setup is required for this page to work as expected.

Item Description

Crosswalk Validation Form Set the Internal Code value for the ADDRESS rule where the
(GTVSDAX) Internal Code is WPAYADDR.

Crosswalk Validation Form Set the External Code for the WEBPAYGCCID rule to the
(GTVSDAX) external merchant ID.

Credit Card Type Create entries for the payment type codes in use and the external
Validation Form merchant ID as used by the payment vendor.
(GTVCCRD)

Credit Card Merchant ID Create entries for the WEBCCARGATEWAY process name code
Form (GOAMERC) for credit card types being used with the merchant ID.

Admissions Web Calendar Activate the term by checking the View Application indicator for
Rules Form (SAAWAAD) a date range.

Payment Code Validation Create payment codes for payment or transaction types with the
Form (TTVPTYP) Type indicator set to Payment for the payment types or
Transaction for the transaction types.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 535

 Item Description

Deposit Crosswalk Form Create deposit crosswalk rules to map the payment detail code
(TGADEPX) used with credit card processing, as defined on GOAMERC, and
the deposit and payment detail codes used to create a deposit.

Web Payment Rules Form Set up display, payment, matching, and transaction rules.
(TSAWPAY)

Updates to Banner
This page updates Banner as follows.

Item Description

Charge Payment Updates TSADETL form and TBRACCD table.

Deposit Payment Updates TSADETL form and TBRDEPO table.

Links to Other Web Pages

This page contains the following links to other Web pages.

Link Action

Transaction item ready for Goes to the Payment Processing Transaction page
payment, such as Deposit (bwskpayg.P_ProcList).
for Fall 2013-2014

Buttons/Icons on This Page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 536

 Payment Processing Transaction (bwskpayg.P_ProcList,
bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction)
The Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList) displays the
payment information, such as the amount of the required housing deposit. Info Text can
be added above and below the payment information for additional information or
instructions. This page contains three views.

• The first view of the page is displayed on entry to the page.

• Select the Continue button from the first view of the page to go to the second view of
Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

• Select the Continue button from the second view of the page to go to the third view of
the Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

First View of the Page

Here is the first view of the page.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Transaction item to be Item selected for payment from the Payment Processing page
paid (untitled) (bwskpayg.P_DispList), such as The portion of your
Housing Deposit is $500.00.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to other Web pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 537

 Buttons/Icons on this page
This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the second view of the Payment Processing

Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Second View of the Page

The second view of the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction) allows you to select the checkbox for the
transaction you wish to pay when the transaction is for a single fee. You can then select
the Continue button to go to the third view of Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Select if you choose to Checkbox used to indicate payment, such as Select if you
pay... choose to pay Orientation Fee at $25.00.

This checkbox is displayed when the payment is optional. You

can check it and continue with payment, or you can leave it
unchecked, bypass the payment, and continue with other
payments.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 538

 Links to other Web pages
This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the third view of the Payment Processing Transaction

page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Third View of the Page

The third view of the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction) allows you to enter the number of transactions or
fees when the transaction is for multiple fees. You can then select the Continue button to
access the Payment Processing Summary page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

Enter number requested Number of transactions to be paid, such as Enter number

for... requested for Orientation Guest Fee at $20.00 each.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 539

 Links to other Web pages
This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Continue Goes to the views of the Payment Processing Transaction page

(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Payment Processing Summary

(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction)
The Payment Processing Summary page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction)
displays the transaction descriptions, amounts, and the total payment. You can review the
information and then select the Proceed to Payment Page button or the Start Over
button.

The Proceed to Payment Page button goes to the Payment Gateway, where you can
select buttons for Submit, Fail, or Cancel. If you select the Fail or Cancel buttons from
the Payment Gateway, you are returned to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure), where you receive a message that your payment has
not been processed, and you are prompted to try again or start over.

• The Try Again button returns you to the Payment Gateway.

• The Start Over button returns you to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure) where the original transactions are listed.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 540

 Item Description/Source Information

Description Description of deposit or payment item.

Amount Amount of deposit or payment item.

Total Total amount of deposits and/or payments.

Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to other Web pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page contains the following buttons/icons.

Button/Icon Action

Proceed to Payment Page Goes to the Payment Gateway.

Start Over Goes to the Payment Processing Transaction page

(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure) where the original
transactions are listed.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

No menus have links to this page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 541

 Payment Processing Successful Payment
(bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess)
Once you have completed the payment using the Payment Gateway, the Payment
Processing Successful Payment page (bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess) is displayed with
a message that the transaction has been completed. This page does not contain any
fields, buttons, or links.

Account Information (bwskoacc.P_DisplayTabs)

This page is used to review details for account transactions and deposits. Information is
displayed for charges, credits, and deposits posted to a student’s account. Only deposits
with outstanding balances are displayed in the Deposits Information. Use the Account
Transactions tab to access the charges and credits. Use the Deposits tab to access the
deposits.

Web Page Fields

This page contains the following fields.

Item Description/Source Information

The following fields are in the Account Detail information.

Account Balance Student’s account balance.

Date Recorded Date of the transaction.

Description Description of fee or payment for the transaction.

Term Term in which the transaction took place.

Charge Amount of transaction charge.

Credit Amount of transaction credit.

The following fields are in the Deposits information.

Date Recorded Date of the deposit.

Description Description of the deposit.

Term Term in which the deposit was made.

Original Amount Original deposit amount received on the date recorded.

Balance Outstanding deposit amount to be paid.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 542

 Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.

Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.

Links to other Web pages

This page does not have links to other pages.

Buttons/Icons on this page

This page does not have buttons to other pages.

Web Menus With Links to This Page

The following menu has a link to this page.

Menu Name Menu URL

Student Account menu bmenu.P_ARMnu

Set Up Student Account on the Web

This section explains how to implement Student Accounts on the Web. Refer to the
Banner Student User Guide for more information about Banner forms.

For information about setting up credit card payment processing for the Web, see the
Payment Processor Connection Handbook.

This section includes the following procedures:

• “Set Up Account Summary Pages on the Web” on page 544

• “Set Up the Account Detail for Term Page on the Web” on page 544
• “Set Up the Statement and Payment History Page on the Web” on page 545
• “Set Up the Tax Notification Page on the Web” on page 545

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 543

 Set Up Account Summary Pages on the Web
Enter Y in the External Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code on the Crosswalk
Validation Form (GTVSDAX) if want detail codes to be displayed on the following pages:

• Account Summary (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTotal)

• Account Summary by Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct)
• Account Detail for Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm)
• Statement and Payment History (bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement)

Set Up the Account Detail for Term Page on the Web

1. Access the Account Receivable Term Control Form (TSATERM).
• Choose a term (required). The term you select on this form is the term for which you
want to create rules.
• Select Enable Term to include the term in the drop-down choices for terms on the
Account Detail for Term Self-Service page. Make your other selections based on
what you want to display on the page.
For detailed information about TSATERM, refer to the Banner Accounts Receivable
User Guide and the Banner Accounts Receivable Online Help.
2. Access the Student Billing Control Form (TSACTRL).
3. In the Installment Plans section, make the appropriate selection regarding assignment
and calculation of automated installment plans. The Automatically Calculate
Installments on TSAISTP, TSICSRV, Self Service and VR checkbox must be
selected for installment plans to be displayed on the Account Detail for Term page. If
the Automatically Assign Installment Plans on TSAISTP, TSICSRV, Self Service
and VR checkbox is also selected, eligible students will be added to an automated
plan.
For detailed information about automated installment plans, refer to the Banner
Accounts Receivable User Guide.
For detailed information about TSACTRL, refer to the Banner Accounts Receivable
User Guide and the Banner Accounts Receivable Online Help.
4. Access the Housing Term Control Form (SLATERM).
5. In the Housing Term Control section, select the Permit On-line Fee Assessments
checkbox to enable housing fee assessment.
6. Access the Term Control Form (SOATERM).
• In the Registration Fee Assessment section, select the On-line Assessment
checkbox to enable tuition and fee assessment.
• In the Web Self-Service, Voice Response, and Partner Systems section, select the
On-line Assessment radio button to enable housing, tuition and fee assessment on
the Account Detail for Term page.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 544

 For detailed information about fee assessment, refer to the "Registration" chapter in
the Banner Student User Guide.
7. Review the InfoText, and, if any changes are required, modify it using Web Tailor.

Set Up the Statement and Payment History Page on the

Web
1. Access the Accounts Receivable Billing Control Form (TGACTRL).
For detailed information about TGACTRL, refer to the Banner Accounts Receivable
User Guide and the Banner Accounts Receivable Online Help.
2. In the Statement History Months field, enter the number of months for which
students can view their statements. The default value for this field is 3.
Banner calculates a cut-off date based on the number of months entered in this field.
Students will have access to all statements with a bill date greater than or equal to the
calculated cut-off date.
3. In the Payment History Months field, enter the number of months that office staff and
students can view as history. The default value for this field is 3.
Banner calculates a cut-off date based on the number of months entered in this field.
Eligible payments with an entry date greater than or equal to the calculated cutoff date
are displayed.
4. Access the Detail Code Control Form (TSADETC).
For detailed information about TSADETC, refer to the Banner Accounts Receivable
User Guide and the Banner Accounts Receivable Online Help.
5. Select the Payment History checkbox for each detail code you want to be displayed
on the Statement and Payment History page.
6. Save your changes.

Set Up the Tax Notification Page on the Web

On the Tax Reporting Rules Form (TSATAXR), set up rules for tax notification on the Web
as follows.

• If you want supplemental information totals to be displayed on the Web, select the Total
Access checkbox.

• If you want supplemental information details to be displayed on the Web, select the
Detail Access checkbox.

For detailed information about TSATAXR, refer to the Banner Accounts Receivable User
Guide and the Banner Accounts Receivable Online Help.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 545

 Set up and Use Payment and Deposit Processing
Banner Student Self-Service payment and deposit processing is used with Banner
Accounts Receivable deposit and fee configuration processing. Payment and deposit
processing allows applicants or students to submit payments for deposits or other fees in
Banner Student Self-Service. The process allows authorization for users to create
deposits, charge fees, and pay fees, based the setup and rules used at your institution.
Payments can be made through the Admissions path or the Student Account path.

A Web payment rule can be set up in Banner Accounts Receivable for a single
transaction, which allows Banner to authorize and process one deposit or one paid fee.
When a Web payment rule is set up for multiple transactions, Banner authorizes the total
amount and processes the deposit/fee group.

Payment and transaction rules are defined on the Web Payment Rules Form (TSAWPAY).
Transactions are displayed in sequence number order and can be optional or required,
single or multiple. You can display as many transactions are you choose to for an
applicant or student. You can define the text used in Self-Service for a transaction link,
such as Deposit for Fall 2013-2014, and associate it with a Web page in Self-
Service, by package.procedure name such as bwskpayg.P_DispList, (Payment
Processing page).

This section contains the following topics:

• “Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Student Account” on page 546

• “Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Application Menu” on page 547
• “Account Information” on page 548
• “Setup Instructions” on page 548

Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Student

Account
Here is the flow for using the Payment and Deposit Processing option on the Student
Account Menu (bmenu.P_ARMnu).
1. Log in to Banner Student Self-Service.
2. On the Main Menu (bmenu.P_MainMnu) select the Student option.

3. On the Student Menu (bmenu.P_StuMainMnu) select the Student Account option.

4. On the Student Account Menu (bmenu.P_ARMnu), select the Payment and Deposit
Processing option to access the Payment Processing page
(bwskpayg.P_DispList).
This page displays the items that are ready for payment for the student or applicant.
5. Select an item, such as Deposit for Fall 2013 - 2014, to access the
Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 546

 The Payment Processing Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcList) displays
the payment information, such as Housing Deposit is $500.00.
6. Select the Continue button to go to the second view of Payment Processing
Transaction page (bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
7. Select the checkbox for the transaction you wish to pay, and then select the Continue
button to go to the third view of Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
8. Enter the number of transactions or fees, and then select the Continue button to
access the Payment Processing Summary page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcTransaction).
9. View the transaction descriptions, amounts, and the total.
10. Choose the Proceed to Payment Page button or the Start Over button.
• The Proceed to Payment Page button goes to the Payment Gateway.
• The Start Over button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure).
If you select Cancel from the Payment Gateway, you are prompted to select the Try
Again button or the Start Over button.
• The Try Again button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_DispFailure).
• The Start Over button goes back to the Payment Processing Transaction page
(bwskpayg.P_ProcFailure).
11. Once you have completed the payment using the Payment Gateway, the Payment
Processing Successful Payment page (bwskpayg.P_DispSuccess) page is
displayed.
12. View the Student Account Detail Page (TSADETL) to see processed payments.

Payment and Deposit Processing Flow - Application

Menu
When in Self-Service Admissions, information for payment processing is displayed on the
Application Menu page (bwskalog.P_DispChoicesStu). Under the Applications in
Progress and Submitted Applications sections, you can review a Payment Processing
section with available transactions for the admission term.

You can access this information with a non-secure login as an applicant or a secure login
as a student. When an applicant has submitted an application and the application has
been processed, he/she can view that application on the Application Menu page
(bwskalog.P_DispChoices), if payment and deposit processing has been set up in
Banner Accounts Receivable.

Refer to the "Admissions” chapter for more information on the path using the non-secure
or secure login.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 547

 Account Information
Use the Account Information option has been added to the Student Account Menu
(bmenu.P_ARMnu) to access the Account Information page
(bwskoacc.P_DisplayTabs). This page displays details for account transactions
and outstanding deposits. You cannot make updates on this page.

Setup Instructions
Use the following steps to set up Banner Accounts Receivable deposit and fee payment
configuration processing for use with payment and deposit processing in Banner Student
Self-Service.
1. Ensure that valid entries exist on the Credit Card Type Validation Form (GTVCCRD)
for the payment type codes in use and the external merchant ID as used by the
payment vendor.
2. Verify that the WEBPAYGCCID rule exists on the Crosswalk Validation Form
(GTVSDAX) for the description of Web Credit Card AR Payment Gateway
Process.
3. Set the External Code for the WEBPAYGCCID rule to the external merchant ID that is
expected by the payment vendor and is used as the Third Party Transaction value
on the Credit Card Merchant ID Form (GOAMERC). This rule is used to activate the
Accounts Receivable payment gateway

Internal
Code
Internal Sequence Internal Code Activity
External Code Code Number Group Description Date

<UPDATE_ME> DEFAULT 1 WEBPAYGCCID Merchant ID for AR Sysdate

Pay Gateway

4. Verify that the ADDRESS rule exists on GTVSDAX for the Internal Code of
WPAYADDR.
This rule is used with the address hierarchy for the BWSKPAYG package, to populate
fields in the Credit Card Audit Table (GORCCAU). This is delivered as a marker row
with an External Code value of <UPDATE_ME> to establish the address hierarchy.

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 548

 Internal
Code
Internal Sequence Internal Code Activity
External Code Code Number Group Description Date

<UPDATE_ME> WPAYADDR 1 ADDRESS AR Pay Gateway Sysdate

Address

5. Verify that the WEBCCARGATEWAY process name code exists on the Process Name
Validation Form (GTVPROC).
Entries are needed in GOAMERC for this process name code with definitions for all
the credit card types from GTVCCRD where the Third Party Transaction code value
is set to the value on GOAMERC.
The third party transaction code is also passed to the
gokpven.f_collect_payment_info object, to go to the payment vendor
when the redirect is made. Appropriate coordination with the specific payment
vendors is the responsibility of the institution.
6. Activate the term in the Admissions Web Calendar Rules Form (SAAWAAD) by
checking the View Application indicator for a date range.
This allows non-student applicants who do not have PIDMs or logins to view
information in Self-Service Admissions.
This step is not required when applicants have been assigned PIDMs and can log in
through the secure login.
7. Update Banner Web Tailor for menu items, roles, and parameters.
• Enable the bwskpayg.P_DispList package.procedure on an appropriate
menu. (As delivered, it is on the Student Account Menu.)
• Release scripts for Banner Accounts Receivable Release 8.4.5 enable the
individual pages for the STUDENT role. Additional roles may be added as desired.
• Customize the PAYVEND_URL and PAYVEND_TRANS_TIMEOUT parameters in
Web Tailor, if that has not previously been done.
8. Create payment codes for payment or transaction types on the Payment Code
Validation Form (TTVPTYP) with the Type indicator set to Payment for the payment
types or Transaction for the transaction types.
These codes are used on the Web Payment Rules Form (TSAWPAY).
9. Create deposit crosswalk rules on the Deposit Crosswalk Form (TGADEPX).
These rules establish the crosswalk between the payment detail code used with credit
card processing, as defined on GOAMERC, and the deposit type and deposit detail
codes used to create a deposit. Each rule uses a base code, deposit type, deposit
code, and payment code.
10. Set up Web payment display, matching, and transactions rules on the Web Payment
Rules Form (TSAWPAY).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 549

 Rules are set up by term and payment type, for applicants, students, or both. Rules
can be active or inactive. You can copy transaction rules for students and applicants
between terms using the Copy item in the Options Menu.
Rules use links to deposit and fee groups for applicants and students in Banner Self-
Service who match the rule criteria. The matching criteria determines whether the
deposit and fee group is displayed in Self-Service, as well as the specific deposit and
fee transactions to be collected from the applicant or student.
Matching is performed for applicants and/or students on admission decision, attribute,
campus, class, cohort, degree objective, level, major, program, rate code, residency,
student type, and visa. (Some Web payment matching types are for applicants, some
are for students, and some are for both.) Matching on applicants uses the first major
of the primary or secondary curriculum. Curriculum types, when defined, are matched
as a group.
Transactions are defined by type, sequence number, amount, if required, if multiple or
single, process and procedure, release deposits, and code (deposits use deposit
types from TTVDTYP, fees use detail codes from TSADETC).

Banner Student Self-Service User Guide | Student Account 550